volume 1 of 2 for velma-alma public chools science … final project manual... · 2015-06-25 ·...

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 OF 2 FOR

Boynton Wil l iams & Associates 900 36 t h Ave NW l Su ite 100

Norman, OK 73072

P 405.329.0423 F 405.364.1439

bwaarchitects .com

Member: American Institute of Architects

VELMA-ALMA PUBLIC SCHOOLS

SCIENCE BUILDING 401 MAIN STREET VELMA, OKLAHOMA 73491

General Conditions Bidding Requirements Contract Forms Conditions of Contract Architectural Specifications Civil Engineering Specifications Mechanical Engineering Specifications Electrical Engineering Specifications Room Finish Schedule Door Schedule Door Hardware Schedule Equipment Schedule Geotechnical Report

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

Fenix Constructors, Inc. 215 Drew S.W.

Ardmore, OK 73401 Phone: 580-223-4313

Fax: 580-223-4315

MEP ENGINEER

HP Engineering Inc. 205 NW 63rd St. Suite 100

Oklahoma City, OK 73113

Phone: 479-957-4986

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER

Burgess Engineering 2603 N. Shields Blvd.

Moore, OK 73160 Phone: 405-790-0788

Fax: 405-798-0788

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

NSE Engineering Consultants 1609 Hazelwood Dr.

Norman, OK 73071

Phone: 405-364-2900 Fax: 714-364-8396

Issue Date

06.05.2015 Project Number

N14041 Set Number

1

Place Seal 06.05.2015

PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 OF 2 FOR

Boynton Wi l l iams & Associates 900 36 t h Ave NW l Su ite 100

Norman, OK 73072

P 405.329.0423 F 405.364.1439

bwaarchitects .com

Member: American Institute of Architects

VELMA-ALMA PUBLIC SCHOOLS SCIENCE BUILDING 401 MAIN STREET VELMA, OKLAHOMA 73491 © Copyright 2015 by Boynton Williams & Associates. All Rights Reserved. Drawings and Project Manual are the Property of Boynton Williams & Associates. No part of these Drawings and Project Manual or information depicted may be copied or used without the express written permission of Boynton Williams & Associates. Possession of a copy of these Drawings and Project Manual does not confer any rights in the copyrights or other rights contained in these Drawings and Project Manual.

Issue Date

06.05.2015 Project Number

N14041

00 0110 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DOCUMENT 00 0110

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION Document 00 0101 Project Title Page Document 00 0103 Project Information Document 00 0110 Table of Contents Document 00 0115 List of Drawings

PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS Document 00 2113 Instructions to Bidders AIA Document A701 - Instructions to Bidders with modifications

thereto Document 00 2218 Additional Instructions to Bidders Document 00 3143 Permit Application

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document 00 6100 Bonds

Defect Bond AIA Document A312 “Performance Bond” and “Payment Bond”

Document 00 7316 Insurance Requirements Document 00 7390 Sales Tax Exemption/Designation of Purchasing Agent - Oklahoma

Sales Tax Agency Agreement

CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS AND ACTIVITIES

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 1100 Summary Section 01 2100 Allowances Section 01 2300 Alternates Section 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures

CSI Form 13.6A “Change Order Request” CSI Form 13.6D “Proposal Worksheet Summary” CSI Form 13.6C “Proposal Worksheet Detail”

Section 01 2613 Requests for Interpretation CSI Form 13.2A “Request For Interpretation” CSI Form 13.2B “Request for interpretation log”

Section 01 2900 Payment Procedures Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims and Release Of Liens Non-Kickback Statement AIA Document G702 - Application and Certification for Payment form. AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet form for AIA Document

G702. CSI Form 2.5A - Stored Material Summary.


Section 01 2973 Schedule of Values AIA Document G703 - Schedule of Values Sample Form Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures AIA Document G810 - Transmittal Letter. CSI Form 12.1B - Submittal Log. CSI Form 12.2A - Submittal Checklist. Section 01 3516 Alteration Project Procedures Section 01 4500 Quality Control Section 01 4523 Testing and Inspection Services Section 01 4525 Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services Section 01 5800 Project Identification Drawing Section 01 6200 Product Options CSI Form 1.5A - - Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers List Section 01 6211 Asbestos Prohibition for Public Works Projects - Schools & Public work

Federal Asbestos "Statement" Alternative to Inspection Federal Subcontractors or Material Suppliers Certification of

Compliance With Asbestos Restrictions Federal General Contractors Certification of Compliance with

Asbestos Restrictions Section 01 6213 Product Substitution Procedures

CSI Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase). CSI Form 13.1A - Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase).

Section 01 7123 Field Engineering Section 01 7300 Execution Section 01 7329 Cutting and Patching Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures

AIA Document G706 “Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims”

AIA Document G706A “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens” AIA Document G707 “Consent of Surety to Final Payment”

Section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 4113 Site Demolition

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03 0586 Vapor Barrier Product Detail ASTM E 1643 Section 03 1100 Concrete Forming Section 03 1513 Waterstops Section 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcement Section 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03 3500 Concrete Finishing Section 03 3900 Concrete Curing Section 03 4816 Pre-cast Concrete Splash Blocks


DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04 2111 Brick Veneer Section 04 2200 Concrete Masonry Units

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05 1200 Structural Steel Section 05 3100 Steel Deck Section 05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 05 5135 Fixed Ships Ladder

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTIC AND COMPOSITES Section 06 1000 Rough Carpentry - Metal Section 06 4102 Custom Architectural Wood Casework Section 06 6116 Solid Surfacing Fabrications

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 2106 Foundation Perimeter Insulation Section 07 2113 Board Insulation Section 07 2115 Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System Section 07 2116 Blanket Insulation Section 07 2216 Roof Board Insulation Section 07 3076 Ice and Water Shield Underlayment Section 07 6113 Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Section 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07 9000 Joint Sealers

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS Section 08 1213 Hollow Metal Frames Section 08 1313 Hollow Metal Doors Section 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors Section 08 4413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall Section 08 5108 Fixed Aluminum Section 08 7100 Door Hardware Section 08 8800 Glazing

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Cover Page – UL Assemblies UL Design #U450 UL Design #V419 Section 09 2226 Suspension Systems Section 09 3013 Ceramic Tiling Section 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings


Section 09 6506 Rubber Cove Base Section 09 6519 Resilient Tile Flooring Section 09 9000 Paints and Coating

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10 1100 Visual Display Surfaces Section 10 1416 Plaque Section 10 1419 Dimensional Letters Signage Section 10 1422 Interior Signage Section 10 2813 Toilet Accessories Section 10 4415 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Section 11 6000 Laboratory Equipment

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12 3555 Wood Laboratory Casework

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13 3421 Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 1000 Site Clearing Section 31 2200 Grading Section 31 2314 Building Area Sub-grade Pad Preparation Section 31 2316 Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings


Section 31 2324 Fill and Backfill Section 31 2333 Trenching and Backfilling Section 31 2500 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Section 31 3116 Termite Control Section 31 3216 Excavation

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 1314 Concrete Walks and Pads Section 32 3113 Chain Link Fences and Gates Section 32 9223 Sodding

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 33 1115 Site Water Distribution Section 33 1305 Disinfection of Water Distribution Section 33 3115 Sanitary Sewerage Section 33 5100 Natural Gas Distribution

ATTACHMENTS Room Finish Schedule Door Hardware Schedule Geotechnical Report

END OF DOCUMENT

00 0115 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 LIST OF DRAWINGS

DOCUMENT 00 0115

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS The following is a list of graphic documents bound separately from the Project Manual. Drawing Cover Sheet

CIVIL Drawing C1 Topographic Map Drawing C2 Site Demolition Plan Drawing C3 Site Plan Drawing C3.1 Site Construction Details Drawing C4 Grading Plan Drawing C5 Site Utility Plan Drawing C6 Erosion Control Plan

ARCHITECTURAL Drawing LS1 Life Safety Plan Drawing 1A1 Architectural Site Plan Drawing 2A1 Floor Plan Drawing 3A1 Roof Plan, Reflected Ceiling Plans & Finish Floor Plans Drawing 4A1 Interior Elevation Drawing 4A2 Millwork Sections Drawing 5A1 Elevations & Sections Drawing 6A1 Wall Sections Drawing 6A2 Wall Sections Drawing 6A3 Wall Sections Drawing 7A1 Window Elevations Drawing 7A2 Window Details

STRUCTURAL Drawing 1S1 General Structural Notes & Specifications Drawing 2S1 Typical Foundation Details Drawing 2S2 Foundation Plan & Plan Notes Drawing 3S1 Building Roof, Mezzanine Framing Plan & Mezzanine Section Details

MECHANICAL Drawing 0M1 Mechanical Notes & Legends Drawing 1M1 HVAC Plans Drawing 2M1 Mechanical Details Drawing 2M2 Mechanical Details

00 0115 - 2 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 LIST OF DRAWINGS

ELECTRICAL Drawing 0E1 Electrical Notes & Legend Drawing 1E0 Electrical Site Plan Drawing 1E1 Power Plans Drawing 2E1 Lighting Plans Drawing 3E1 Lighting Schedule & Details Drawing 3E2 Electrical Schedules & Riser Diagram

PLUMBING Drawing 0P1 Plumbing Notes & Legend Drawing 1P1 Plumbing Plans Drawing 2P1 Plumbing Details

END OF DOCUMENT

00 2113 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

DOCUMENT 00 2113

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

A. American Institute of Architects, AIA Document A701 “Instructions to Bidders” and modifications thereto shall be Instructions to Bidders for this Project.

B. Copy of AIA Document A701 follows.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used.

END OF DOCUMENT

Document A701TM – 1997 Instructions to Bidders

AIA Document A701™ – 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:28:03 on 02/22/2011 under Order No.5406207157_1 which expires on 06/29/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (825190200)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address): [Insert Project Name] [Address] [City, ST Zip] [Phone Number] [Fax Number] THE OWNER: (Name and address): [Insert Owner Name] [Address] [City, ST Zip] [Phone Number] [Fax Number] THE ARCHITECT: (Name and address): [Insert Architect’s Name] [Address] [City, ST Zip] [Phone Number] [Fax Number] TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR


2

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Bid Solicitation, Instructions to Bidders, and modifications thereto, Additional Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form and other sample Bidding and Contract Forms and Documents. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. § 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. § 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.3.1 On the day established as the Bid Date in the Bid Solicitation, Addenda may be issued by facsimile. Such Addenda shall be defined as a Fax (Facsimile) Addendum. § 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. § 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. § 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. § 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. § 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. § 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: § 2.1.1 The Bidder and each of his Sub-bidders has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. § 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. § 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder’s personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents and has notified each Sub-bidder of the observations and correlations which will effect their portion of the Work. § 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception and each Sub-bid upon which the Bid is in part based. 2.2 The Bidder and each Sub-bidder, by making a Bid or a Sub-bid, also represents that the Bidder or Sub-bidder has read and understands the additional representations contained in the proposed Contract Documents and makes representations in accordance therewith.


3

ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 COPIES § 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Bid Solicitation in the number and for the deposit sum stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid at the time and place designated in the Bid Solicitation and return the Bidding Documents to the office of the Architect, including all Drawings, Specifications and Addenda, in good condition within ten (10) days from the Bid Date. Replacement costs for damaged or missing Drawings or pages for Specifications and Addenda will be deducted from the Bidders as outlined in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. Deposits will be forfeited by Bidders who do not submit a bona fide Bid or who do not return the Bidding Documents to the office of the Architect in good condition within five (5) days from the date they are received or no later than seven (7) days prior to the bid date. Bidding Documents shall be returned to the Architect’s Office postage paid. The Architect will not accept delivery of Bidding Documents returned C.O.D., freight collect or other similar methods. 3.1.1.1 A Bidder receiving a Contract Award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder’s deposit will be refunded. § 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. § 3.1.3 Bidders and Sub-bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. § 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. 3.1.5 Prior to acceptance of a Sub-bid, the Bidder shall insure that the Sub-bidder has read and understands all of the Bidding Documents and has made his Sub-bid in full accordance therewith. § 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. § 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. The Bidder and each Sub-bidder accepts a duty, obligation and responsibility to seek clarification of any open, obvious or patent error or ambiguity in the proposed Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. § 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS § 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. § 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least five (5) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden


4

of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. § 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. § 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. § 3.4 ADDENDA § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.1.1 A copy of all Fax Addenda will be available to all Bidders at the Place of Bid prior to the Time of Bid as established in the Bid Solicitation. § 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. (Paragraph deleted) § 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. 3.4.5 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to accepting a bid from a Sub-bidder that the Sub-bidder has reviewed all Addenda and that the Sub-bidder’s bid has been made in accordance with all Addenda. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. § 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. § 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall govern. § 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. § 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." (Paragraph deleted) § 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the Bidder. 4.1.8 The Bidder shall make no stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. § 4.2 BID SECURITY § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the


5

amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2. § 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. § 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected. 4.2.4 As a prerequisite for submitting a Bid, General Contractor shall submit sample copy of his Bid Bond seven (7) days prior to Bid Opening for review. Sample Bond shall identify bonding company as well as any conditions stipulated. § 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS § 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder’s name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. § 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. § 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. The Bidder shall assume full and sole responsibility for communications between the Bidder’s office and a representative of the Bidder who hand delivers the Bid to the Place of Bid. § 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. § 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID § 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. § 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time-stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. § 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. § 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. § 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection.


6

§ 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in the Owner’s own best interests. § 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor’s Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. § 6.2 OWNER’S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 6.3 SUBMITTALS § 6.3.1 Prior to the award of the Contract the Bidder shall, within ten (10) calendar days or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing:

.1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder’s own forces;

.2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and

.3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work.

§ 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. § 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder shall, submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. § 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE , LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT (STATUTORY) AND DEFECT BONDS § 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder’s usual sources. § 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum.


7

§ 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder’s usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. § 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. 7.2.1.1 Seven (7) days prior to scheduled Bid Opening, General Contractor shall submit sample copy of each required Bond for review. Sample Bond(s) shall identify bonding company as well as any conditions stipulated. § 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. The Defect Bond shall be written on the form included in the Contract Documents and shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. § 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. § 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum.

Additions and Deletions Report for AIA

®

Document A701TM – 1997 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text.

Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 08:28:03 on 02/22/2011.

Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A701™ – 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:28:03 on 02/22/2011 under Order No.5406207157_1 which expires on 06/29/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (825190200)

1

PAGE 1 (Name and location or address)address): [Insert Project Name] [Address] [City, ST Zip] [Phone Number] [Fax Number] … (Name, legal status and address)(Name and address): [Insert Owner Name] [Address] [City, ST Zip] [Phone Number] [Fax Number] … (Name, legal status and address)(Name and address): [Insert Architect’s Name] [Address] [City, ST Zip] [Phone Number] [Fax Number] … TABLE OF ARTICLESTABLE OF ARTICLES PAGE 2 § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. Bid Solicitation, Instructions to Bidders, and modifications thereto, Additional Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form and other sample Bidding and Contract Forms and Documents. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. …


2

1.3.1 On the day established as the Bid Date in the Bid Solicitation, Addenda may be issued by facsimile. Such Addenda shall be defined as a Fax (Facsimile) Addendum. … § 2.1.1 The Bidder and each of his Sub-bidders has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. … § 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder’s personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.Documents and has notified each Sub-bidder of the observations and correlations which will effect their portion of the Work. § 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception.exception and each Sub-bid upon which the Bid is in part based. 2.2 The Bidder and each Sub-bidder, by making a Bid or a Sub-bid, also represents that the Bidder or Sub-bidder has read and understands the additional representations contained in the proposed Contract Documents and makes representations in accordance therewith. PAGE 3 § 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Bid Solicitation in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, sum stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award Bid at the time and place designated in the Bid Solicitation and return the Bidding Documents to the office of the Architect, including all Drawings, Specifications and Addenda, in good condition within ten (10) days from the Bid Date. Replacement costs for damaged or missing Drawings or pages for Specifications and Addenda will be deducted from the Bidders as outlined in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. Deposits will be forfeited by Bidders who do not submit a bona fide Bid or who do not return the Bidding Documents to the office of the Architect in good condition within five (5) days from the date they are received or no later than seven (7) days prior to the bid date. Bidding Documents shall be returned to the Architect’s Office postage paid. The Architect will not accept delivery of Bidding Documents returned C.O.D., freight collect or other similar methods. 3.1.1.1 A Bidder receiving a Contract Award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder’s deposit will be refunded. … § 3.1.3 Bidders and Sub-bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. … 3.1.5 Prior to acceptance of a Sub-bid, the Bidder shall insure that the Sub-bidder has read and understands all of the Bidding Documents and has made his Sub-bid in full accordance therewith. …


3

§ 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. The Bidder and each Sub-bidder accepts a duty, obligation and responsibility to seek clarification of any open, obvious or patent error or ambiguity in the proposed Contract Documents. … § 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten five (5) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. PAGE 4 3.4.1.1 A copy of all Fax Addenda will be available to all Bidders at the Place of Bid prior to the Time of Bid as established in the Bid Solicitation. § 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3.4.5 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to accepting a bid from a Sub-bidder that the Sub-bidder has reviewed all Addenda and that the Sub-bidder’s bid has been made in accordance with all Addenda. … § 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder’s refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. 4.1.8 The Bidder shall make no stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. PAGE 5 4.2.4 As a prerequisite for submitting a Bid, General Contractor shall submit sample copy of his Bid Bond seven (7) days prior to Bid Opening for review. Sample Bond shall identify bonding company as well as any conditions stipulated. … § 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. The Bidder shall assume full and sole responsibility for communications between the Bidder’s office and a representative of the Bidder who hand delivers the Bid to the Place of Bid. PAGE 6


4

§ 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable Prior to the award of the Contract the Bidder shall, within ten (10) calendar days or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: … § 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder’s option, (1) withdraw the Bid or (2) shall, submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. … ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE , LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT (STATUTORY) AND DEFECT BONDS PAGE 7 7.2.1.1 Seven (7) days prior to scheduled Bid Opening, General Contractor shall submit sample copy of each required Bond for review. Sample Bond(s) shall identify bonding company as well as any conditions stipulated. § 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. The Defect Bond shall be written on the form included in the Contract Documents and shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum.

AIA Document D401™ – 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:28:03 on 02/22/2011 under Order No.5406207157_1 which expires on 06/29/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: (825190200)

1

Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ – 2003 I, Jay W. Boynton, Director, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 08:28:03 on 02/22/2011 under Order No. 5406207157_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A701™ – 1997, Instructions to Bidders, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. _____________________________________________________________ (Signed) _____________________________________________________________ (Title) _____________________________________________________________ (Dated)

00 2218 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0311 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

DOCUMENT 00 2218

ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions. 2. Qualifications of bidders. 3. Number of contracts. 4. Time for completion. 5. Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents. 6. Substitutions. 7. Bid forms. 8. Beginning the Work. 9. Compliance with Public Competitive Bidding Act.

B. Related Documents:

1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents. a. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders and modifications thereto:

Requirements and procedures for bidding. b. Document 00 7213 - General Conditions: Substitution requirements. c. The Project Bid Manual is part of the Contract Documents.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4200 - References: Definitions. 2. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Substitution requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders, 00 7213 - General Conditions, and Section 01 4200 - References for definitions.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

A. Bidders must be regularly engaged in the business of General Contracting for Commercial Construction as defined for building construction under Title 40, Oklahoma Statutes, Section 196.6, Paragraph A.1.

B. Sub-bidders must be regularly engaged in the business or trade for that portion of the Work

proposed in their Sub-bid to a Bidder.

1.4 NUMBER OF CONTRACTS

A. One (1) contract will be awarded for all Work as defined in the proposed Contract Documents to include, but not be limited to, general construction, mechanical Work and electrical Work.


B. Where the Contract Documents show various particular items of the Work to be Not

Included in the Contract (noted N.I.C.), that Work will be accomplished by the Owner after the Contractor achieves the status of Substantial Completion.

C. Where the Contract Documents require Owner furnished and installed items, those items

will be installed after the Contractor achieves the status of Substantial Completion.

D. Bidders must submit a Bid which covers all of the Work proposed in the Contract Documents.

1.5 TIME FOR COMPLETION

A. Each Bidder shall state in the Bid Form the number of calendar days within which he will agree to perform the Work to a Substantially Complete stage.

B. The number of calendar days for completion proposed by the Bidder will be considered in

making an award of the Contract for the construction of this Project and the Owner reserves the right to make an award to other than the low Bidder if such Bidder can adequately guarantee a substantially more advantageous completion date than that offered by the low Bidder.

1.6 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Paragraph 3.2 of Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders for additional requirements.

B. Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which

they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents. Request for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be made in writing on Contractor’s Letterhead to the Architect.

C. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by

Addendum ONLY. Information transmitted in any other manner will not be binding and Bidders shall not rely upon its accuracy.

D. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect before the execution of

the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deletion, clarification or correction. Addenda will be issued to each Bidder receiving complete set of Bidding Documents. Each Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of addenda on the Proposal.

E. The Architect and Owner will not be responsible for any explanations or verbal

interpretations of the Bidding Documents.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Paragraph 3.3 of Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders for additional

requirements.

B. Refer to Subparagraph 3.4.2 of Document 00 7213 – General Conditions for additional requirements.


C. The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.

D. Provide data on a Contractor’s Substitution Request Form in compliance with the

requirements specified in Section 01 6200 - Product Options.

E. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final.

1.8 BID FORMS

A. Bid Form Proposal Packet: Submit Proposal Packet sealed in envelope labeled as follows.

BID DOCUMENTS Project: Attention: Bidder's Name:

B. Contents of Bid Form Proposal packet shall include the following fully executed documents:

Bid Form - Document 00 4113 - Bid Form-Stipulated Sum. Non-Collusion Affidavit - Document 00 4519 - Non-Collusion Affidavit. Business Relationship Affidavit - Document 00 4521 - Business Relationship Affidavit.

1.9 BEGINNING THE WORK

A. If awarded the Contract, the Bidder agrees that Work will be in progress on the Project Site within ten (10) days from date of Notice to Proceed.

1.10 COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC COMPETITIVE BID ACT

A. All Bidders and Sub-bidders must comply fully with all of the provisions of the Public Competitive Bidding Act of 1974 of the State of Oklahoma, as most recently amended.

B. The Non-Collusion and Business Relationships Affidavits required to be included with all

proposals are included in the Contract Documents. These Affidavits must be executed and submitted with the bid.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF DOCUMENT

00 3143 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 PERMIT APPLICATION

DOCUMENT 00 3143

PERMIT APPLICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Authority having jurisdiction. 2. Permits.


1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 2600 - Contract Modification Procedures: Contract adjustments.

1.2 AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION A. Applicable Building Codes: Refer to Cover Sheet of Drawings for code listings.

B. Oklahoma State Fire Marshal: Performs plan review and site inspections.

Office of the Oklahoma State Fire Marshal 2401 N.W. 23rd Street, Suite 4 Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73107 Telephone: 405-522-5005 ]

1.3 PERMITS

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions, Paragraph 3.7.

B. Contractor shall determine if Building Permits are required for Project, and if required, secure and pay for all required Building Permits. 1. Architect has made submittal of Drawings and Specifications to Authority Having

Jurisdiction.

C. Maintain copy of Building Permit and Approved Permit Set of Contract Documents on site.

Return to Owner at Project Closeout.

D. Architect has made submittal of Drawings and Specifications to Office of Oklahoma State Fire Marshal. Architect will forward OSFM Approved Drawings and Specifications to Contractor upon receipt back from OSFM. 1. Comply with all Fire Marshal requirements stamped or affixed to Drawings and

Specifications. 2. If Fire Marshal review requirements cause Contractor to perform more or less Work,

Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted as specified herein. 3. Make arrangements and schedule with Office of Oklahoma State Fire Marshal for

required 50 percent and 100 percent inspections.

00 3143 - 2 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 PERMIT APPLICATION

E. Maintain copy of Approved Drawings and Specifications by Office of Oklahoma State Fire Marshal on site. Return to Owner at Project Closeout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

00 6100 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 09/08 BONDS

DOCUMENT 00 6100

BONDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Document Includes: 1. Performance Bond. 2. Labor and material payment bond (statutory bond). 3. Defect bond. 4. Irrevocable letter of credit. 5. Defect Bond Form.



2. Document 00 7213 - General Conditions: Article 11, Paragraph 11.4, Performance Bond and Payment Bond.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Non-Specified Forms: If Surety Company proposes to use a bond form other than form specified, Surety shall submit proposed form to Owner, through Contractor, for Owner review and approval before preparation of bonds for this Project. Proposed form shall contain the same requirements and responsibilities as specified forms.

B. Submittals: Submit the following as part of the Agreement Package.

1. Bonds: Submit fully executed original copies of each bond attached to each copy of Agreement between Owner and Contractor.

2. Power of Attorney. Attach an original copy of Power of Attorney to each copy of each bond.

3. Bond Rate Schedule: Attach surety’s bond rate schedule applicable for Subcontractor indicating the percentage fee used to compute Project bond amounts and for computing of bond amounts for increases in Contract Sum for Change Orders.

1.3 BOND REQUIREMENTS

A. Bonds are required for Projects with contract amount exceeding $50,000. B. Attorney-In-Fact who executes required bonds on behalf of surety shall affix a certified and

current Power of Attorney to each bond.

1.4 PERFORMANCE BOND

A. Amount: Equal to 100 percent of Contract Sum.


B. Form: AIA Document A312 “Performance Bond,” 1984 Edition or other forms acceptable to Owner.

1.5 LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND (Statutory Bond)


B. Form: AIA Document A312 “Payment Bond,” 1984 Edition or other forms acceptable to Owner.

1.6 DEFECT BOND


B. Form: Form of this bond is attached to this Section.

1.7 IRREVOCABLE LETTER OF CREDIT

A. An Irrevocable Letter of Credit may be used if construction cost of the Project is under $100,000 in lieu of specified bonds indicated above.



END OF DOCUMENT


DEFECT BOND

KNOW BY ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That __________________________________________________________ as Principal, and

_____________________________________________ a corporation organized under the laws of the

State of _______, and authorized to transact business in the State in which the Work (Project) is to be

performed, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto The Owner in the sum of

____________________________________ Dollars ($________________________) in lawful money of

the United States of America, said sum being equal to One Hundred Percent (100%) of the Contract Sum,

for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and each of us, our heirs,

executors, administrators, trustees, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these

presents.

This condition of this obligation is such that:

WHEREAS, said Principal entered into a written Contract with the Owner, dated

_______________________________________________________________, 20_____, for

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

all in compliance with the Contract Documents therefore, made a part of said Contract and on file in the

office of the Owner.

NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal shall pay or cause to be paid to the Owner all damage, loss and expense which may result by reason of defective materials and/or workmanship in connection with said Work, occurring within a period of one (1) year from and after the date of Substantial Completion of said project; then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. It is further expressly agreed and understood by the parties hereto that no changes or alterations in said Contract and no deviations from the plan or mode of procedure herein fixed shall have the effect or releasing the sureties, or any of them from the obligations of this Bond.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed by its duly authorized officers, and the said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed by its attorney-in-fact, duly authorized so to do, the day and year set forth below.

DATED this ___________________ day of _________________________, 20 ___


PRINCIPAL: _____________________________________ By: __________________________________ Title

ATTEST: ____________________________________

SURETY: ______________________________________ By:____________________________________ Attorney-In-Fact (Type) Name:____________________________ Address:________________________________ City: _____________________ State: _______ Telephone: _________________

END OF DEFECT BOND

Document A312TM

– 1984

Performance Bond

AIA Document A312™ – 1984. Copyright © 1984 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA

® Document is

protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®

Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:41:33 on 04/24/2009 under Order No.1000386475_1 which expires on 2/3/2010, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1050594933)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:

The author of this document has

added information needed for its

completion. The author may also

have revised the text of the original

AIA standard form. An Additions and

Deletions Report that notes added

information as well as revisions to

the standard form text is available

from the author and should be

reviewed. A vertical line in the left

margin of this document indicates

where the author has added

necessary information and where

the author has added to or deleted

from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal

consequences. Consultation with an

attorney is encouraged with respect

to its completion or modification.

Any singular reference to Contract,

Surety, Owner or other party shall

be considered plural where

applicable.

CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of

Business):

[Insert Contractor’s Name]

Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

[Insert Surety’s Name]

[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

OWNER (Name and Address):

[Insert Owner’s Name]

[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date:

Amount:

Description (Name and Location):

BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date):

Amount:

Modifications to this Bond: X None See Last Page

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)

Signature: Signature:

Name and

Title:

, Name and

Title:

,

(Any additional signatures appear on the last page)

(FOR INFORMATION ONLY - Name, Address and Telephone)

AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party):


[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]


[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]


® Document is



2

§ 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein

by reference.

§ 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation

under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Section 3.1.

§ 3 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

§ 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Section 10 below that the

Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with

the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of

performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be

allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s

right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and

§ 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the

contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety

have received notice as provided in Section 3.1; and

§ 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of

the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the

terms of the contract with the Owner.

§ 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense

take one of the following actions:

§ 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or

§ 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent

contractors; or

§ 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for

performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the

Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment

bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the

Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by

the Owner resulting from the Contractor’s default; or

§ 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with

reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as

practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or

.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor.

§ 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed

to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety

demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any

remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 4.4, and the Owner refuses the

payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be

entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

§ 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety

elects to act under Section 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be

greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the

Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of

this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and

damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for:


® Document is



3

§ 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction

Contract;

§ 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting

from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 4; and

§ 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages

caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

§ 7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the

Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such

unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or

its heirs, executors, administrators or successors.

§ 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to

related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

§ 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in

the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor

Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails

to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or

prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit

shall be applicable.

§ 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the

signature page.

§ 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where

the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement

shall be deemed deleted here from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be

deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common

law bond.

§ 12 DEFINITIONS § 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the

Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any

amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which

the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the

Construction Contract.

§ 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page,

including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

§ 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or

otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract.

§ 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as

required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof.


® Document is



4

§ 13 MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS:

(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)



Name and Title: Name and Title:

Address: Address:


® Document is



5

Payment Bond

CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of

Business):

[Insert Contractor’s Name]

Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]


[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

OWNER (Name and Address):


[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date:

Amount:

Description (Name and Location):

BOND

Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date):

Amount:

Modifications to this Bond: X None See Last Page




(Any additional signatures appear on the last page)

(FOR INFORMATION ONLY - Name, Address and Telephone)

AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect,

Engineer or other party):


® Document is



6

§ 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance

of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

§ 2 With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor:

§ 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and

§ 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or

entity whose claim, demand, lien or suit is for the payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the

performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety

(at the address described in Section 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims,

demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default.

§ 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment,

directly or indirectly, for all sums due.

§ 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until:

§ 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety

(at the address described in Section 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being

made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim.

§ 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor:

.1 Have furnished written notice to the Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner,

within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in

the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to

whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and

.2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30

days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor

has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and

.3 Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the

address described in Section 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim

is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the

Contractor.

§ 5 If a notice required by Section 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient

compliance.

§ 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Section 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s

expense take the following actions:

§ 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the

amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed.

§ 6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

§ 7 The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be

credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

§ 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the

performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond.

By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor

in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety

under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.

§ 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are

unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any

Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on

behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond.


® Document is



7

§ 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to

related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

§ 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent

jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from

the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Section 4.1 or Section 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last

labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the

Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited

by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be

applicable.

§ 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the

signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be

sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page.

§ 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where

the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement

shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be

deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common

law bond.

§ 14 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall

promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

§ 15 DEFINITIONS § 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the

Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this

Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas,

power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract,

architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s

subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor,

materials or equipment were furnished.

§ 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page,

including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

§ 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as

required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof.

§ 16 MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS:

(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)




Address: Address:

Additions and Deletions Report for

AIA®

Document A312TM

– 1984

This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has

added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from

the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text.

Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any

part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated

simultaneously by AIA software at 16:41:33 on 04/24/2009.

Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A312™ – 1984. Copyright © 1984 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA

® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA

®


1

PAGE 1 [Insert Contractor’s Name]

Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

[Insert Surety’s Name]

[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

… [Insert Owner’s Name]

[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

…

Modifications to this Bond: X None See Section 13Last

Page

… Name and

Title:

, Name and

Title:

,

… [Insert Owner’s Name]

[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]


[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

PAGE 5 [Insert Contractor’s Name]

Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]


[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

…

Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A312™ – 1984. Copyright © 1984 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA

® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA

®


2


[Address]

[City, ST Zip]

[Phone Number]

[Fax Number]

…

Modifications to this Bond: X None See Section 16Last

Page

AIA Document D401™ – 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®

Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA

® Document, or any portion of it,

may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:41:33 on 04/24/2009 under Order No.1000386475_1 which expires on 2/3/2010, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1050594933)

1

Certification of Document’s Authenticity AIA® Document D401™ – 2003

I, Jay W. Boynton, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached

final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 16:41:33

on 04/24/2009 under Order No. 1000386475_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the

attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A312™ – 1984 - Performance

Bond, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated

Additions and Deletions Report.

_____________________________________________________________

(Signed)

_____________________________________________________________

(Title)

_____________________________________________________________

(Dated)

00 7316 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

DOCUMENT 00 7316

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Document Includes: 1. Workers compensation insurance. 2. Preparation of Certificates of Insurance. 3. Contractor’s general liability insurance. 4. Owner’s liability insurance. 5. Property insurance. 6. Notice of cancellation. 7. Certificate of Insurance issued by Insurer or Insurer’s Agency approved by the State

of Oklahoma Insurance Department.

B. Related Documents and Sections: 1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions and

modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

2. Document 00 5213 - Agreement-Stipulated Sum: Certificates of insurance as part of Agreement Package.

3. Section 0 1 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Contract Closeout Package.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Broad Form Property Damage: An endorsement to a General Liability policy that deletes the exclusion referring to property in the care, custody, or control of the insured and replaces it with a less restrictive exclusion.

B. Builder's All-Risk (Builder's Risk) Property Insurance: Indemnifies for loss of or damage to

a building under construction. Insurance is normally written for a specified amount on the building and applies only in the course of construction.

C. Independent Contractor's Protective (Owners and Contractors Protective Liability

Insurance): Protects an insured against losses caused by the negligence of a contractor or subcontractor that Contractor hires.

D. Premises and Operations Liability Insurance: Liability coverage for exposures arising out of

an insured's premises and business operations.

E. Products and Completed Operations Insurance: Liability coverage for an insured against claims arising out of products sold, manufactured, handled, or distributed, or operations which are complete. Claims are covered only after a product has been sold and possession relinquished, or operations have been completed or abandoned by the named insured.

F. Waivers of Subrogation: Named insured's intentional relinquishing of any right to recover

damages from another party who may be responsible.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor Review of Certificates: Contractor shall review each Certificate of Insurance to verify that Contractor Insurance Provider has correctly provided all specified insurance coverage and the correct coverage amounts before submitting with the Agreement Package. If Contractor finds that Insurance Provider has submitted incomplete or incorrect Certificates of Insurance, Contractor shall immediately contact Insurance Provider, advise what items are incomplete or incorrect, and have Insurance Provider immediately issue corrected Certificates of Insurance.

B. Certificate Submittal: Submit three (3) fully executed Certificates of Insurance ACORD form

25-S, State Workers Compensation Insurance Certificate and Certificate of Insurance attached to the Agreement between Owner and Contractor as part of the Agreement Package as specified in Document 00 5213 - Agreement-Stipulated Sum. 1. If Contractor Worker's Compensation Insurance is not included on ACORD 25-S

Certificate of Insurance, Contractor shall provide a separate State Workers Compensation Insurance Certificate from a Workers Compensation Insurance company lawfully authorized to provide Workers Compensation Insurance in the State of Oklahoma.

2. Worker's Compensation Insurance Certificate shall indicate that minimum of 30 days written Notification of Cancellation shall be provided to Owner. Ten (10) days written Notification of Cancellation not acceptable.

C. Certificate Form: Submit on form indicated in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions,

Subparagraph 11.1.3. 1. Attach Certificate of Insurance to each certificate.

D. Filing of Certified Policy Copies: Contractor shall file with the Owner, through the Architect,

a certified copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by Document 00 7213 - General Conditions, Article 11.4 no later than the Date of Notice to Proceed.

E. Final Completion Submittal: Submit three (3) fully executed Certificates of Insurance on

ACORD 25-S form with attached Certificate of Insurance to each certificate. Indicate Products and Completed Operations Insurance coverage for one (1) year from Date of Final Completion as part of the Contract Closeout Package specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

1.4 INCOMPLETE OR INCORRECT CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE

A. Incomplete Submittals: Processing will stop for Certificates of Insurance received by Architect that do not include all required items. Architect will contact Contractor and advise Contractor of missing items. Contractor is responsible for sending Architect items missing from the Certificates of Insurance. Processing on Certificates of Insurance related items will not start until Certificates of Insurance are complete.

B. Incorrect Submittals: Certificates of Insurance that are incorrectly submitted or have

incorrect coverage will be returned to Contractor for correction.

C. Contractor is responsible for Certificates of Insurance related items being stopped due to submittal of incomplete or incorrect Certificates of Insurance.


1.5 PREPARATION OF CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE

A. Upon receipt of Notice of Award of Contract, Contractor shall contact insurance provider to provide coverage as specified in this Document. Contractor shall send copies of the following to insurance provider so that insurance provider will know exactly what coverage is required. 1. General Conditions Article 11 - Insurance and Bond 2. Document 00 7316- Insurance Requirements. 3. Three (3) copies of Certificate of Insurance issued by Insurer or Insurer’s Agency

approved by the State of Oklahoma Insurance Department.

B. Certificate Holder Box: 1. List the Owner as the Certificate Holder on ACORD 25-S form. 2. List the Owner as the Certificate Holder on separate Worker Compensation

Insurance certificate form. 3. Architect is not the Certificate Holder.

C. Description of Operations Box: Include the following in this box on ACORD 25-S form.

1. List the Project Title and Project Address. 2. Include Waiver of Subrogation text as follows "Waiver of Subrogation is provided in

favor of the Architect, its consultants, separate contractors and the Owner, its sub-subcontractors, agents and employees."

3. Any other descriptions or endorsements.

D. Coverages Box: Clearly indicate specified coverages on ACORD 25-S form by separately listing each coverage specified to allow Owner and Architect to quickly verify that all coverages and coverage amounts are included. 1. General Liability Box: List the following as a line item indicating coverage is included.

a. Premises-Operations b. Independent Contractor's Protective. c. Products and Completed Operations coverage for one (1) year from date of

Final Payment. d. Broad Form Property Damage. e. Indicate coverage amounts in corresponding limits box for each item exactly as

indicated in this Section: 1) Bodily Injury. 2) Property Damage. 3) Property Damage Liability. 4) Contractual Liability. 5) Personal Injury. 6) General Liability.

2. Automobile Liability Box: List the following as a line item indicating coverage is included and coverage amounts in corresponding limits box for each item exactly as indicated in this Section. a. Bodily Injury Each Person. b. Bodily Injury Each Occurrence. c. Property Damage Each Occurrence.

3. Workers Compensation and Employee Liability Box: List the following as a line item indicating coverage is included and coverage amounts in corresponding limits box for each item exactly as indicated in this Section or a separate certificate from a separate company providing Workers Compensation Insurance. a. Applicable Federal. b. Applicable State. c. Employer's Liability.


4. Other Box: List the following as a line item indicating coverage is included and coverage amounts in corresponding limits box. a. Builders All-Risk Insurance.

E. Certificate of Insurance issued by Insurer or Insurer’s Agency approved by the State of

Oklahoma Insurance Department defining and defining the following: 1. Certification shall include the following under General Liability:

a. Include General Aggregate for Project. b. Coverages:

1) Premises Operations. 2) Explosion, Collapse, and Underground Hazards 3) Personal Injury Coverage 4) Products Coverage 5) Completed Operations 6) Contractual Coverage for the Insured’s obligations

c. Claims-Made Basis is not applicable. 2. Worker's Compensation is not applicable. 3. Final Payment Information:

a. This Certificate shall not be furnished in connection with Contractor’s request for final payment.

b. Completed Operations coverage for Project shall continue for the balance of the policy period.

4. Termination Provisions: Each policy listed on Certification shall be endorsed to provide holder with 30 day notice of cancellation or termination.

5. Other Provisions: Insurance Provider may list any other insurance provisions applicable to Project. Coverages not listed in the General Liability heading can be listed under this heading.

1.6 WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions: Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company lawfully authorized to do business in jurisdiction in which the Project is located Workers Compensation Insurance with specified coverage amounts.

B. Coverage Amounts:

1. Applicable Federal: Statutory. 2. Applicable State: Statutory. 3. Employer’s Liability: $500,000.

1.7 CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions:. Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company lawfully authorized to do business in jurisdiction in which the Project is located General Liability Insurance with specified coverages and coverage amounts.

B. Coverage Includes:

1. Premises-Operations. 2. Independent Contractor’s Protective. 3. Products and Completed Operations.

a. Maintain coverage for one (1) year after final payment (extends beyond Contractor warranty period).

4. Broad Form Property Damage. a. Blasting or explosion.


b. Collapse of structural injury to any building or structure due to excavating, drilling, pile driving, coffer-dam or caisson work.

c. Moving, shoring, underpinning, razing, or demolition of any building or structure. d. Removal or rebuilding of structural support of items indicated above while such

operations are being performed by the Contractor.

C. Coverage Amounts: 1. Bodily Injury:

a. Each Occurrence: $500,000. b. Aggregate: $1,000,000.

2. Property Damage: a. Each Occurrence: $500,000. b. Aggregate: $1,000,000.

3. Property Damage Liability, include for the following hazards: a. X – Explosion. b. C – Collapse. c. U – Underground.

4. Contractual Liability (Hold Harmless Coverage): a. Bodily Injury:

1) Each Occurrence: $1,000,000. b. Property Damage:

1) Each Occurrence: $500,000. 2) Aggregate: $1,000,000.

5. Personal Injury (with Employment Exclusion deleted, if applicable): a. Aggregate: $1,000,000.

6. General Liability: a. If policy includes a General Aggregate:

1) Such General Aggregate shall be not less than $1,000,000. 2) Policy shall be endorsed to have General Aggregate apply to this project

only. 7. Automobile Liability:

a. Bodily Injury Each Person: $1,000,000. b. Bodily Injury Each Occurrence: (CSL) or its equivalent c. Property Damage Each Occurrence: $500,000

1.8 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions: Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining Owner's usual liability insurance.

1.9 PROPERTY INSURANCE - BUILDERS RISK

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions: Contractor shall purchase Property Insurance from and maintain in a company lawfully authorized to do business in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B. The Contractor shall purchase with the following modifications:

1. Upon all new Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire, water and extended coverage and "ALL RISK" per General Conditions. a. Coverage includes physical loss or damage including, without duplication of

coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, false work, testing and startup, temporary buildings, and debris


removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.

b. Insurance shall cover portions of Work stored off-site and also portions of Work in transit.

2. Insurance carried shall be in the amount of 100 percent of the contract cost plus 3 percent to cover additional cost (fees) incurred by the Architect.

C. Waivers of Subrogation: Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

1.10 NOTICE OF CANCELLATION

A. All Certificates of Insurance, which are required by this Section shall be furnished by Contractor, shall include a minimum of 30 days Notice of Cancellation to be provided to the Owner clause.



END OF DOCUMENT

00 7390 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 SALES TAX EXEMPTION/DESIGNATION OF PURCHASING AGENT

DOCUMENT 00 7390

SALES TAX EXEMPTION / DESIGNATION OF PURCHASING AGENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sales tax exemption notification. 2. Contractor procedure for obtaining sales tax exemption. 3. Procedure for purchases. 4. Sales Tax Agency Agreement located at end of Document.



1.2 SALES TAX EXEMPTION NOTIFICATION (68 OS 1356)

A. State and Municipal sales tax shall not be included in Bids submitted for tangible personal property required for this Project in accordance with 68 OS 1356 of the Oklahoma Statutes that reads in summary as follows: 1. In order to qualify for any exemption authorized by Section 1356 of Title 60 of the

Oklahoma Statutes, at the time of sale, the person to whom the sale is made may be required to furnish the vendor proof of eligibility for such exemption.

2. All vendors shall honor the proof of eligibility for sales tax exemption as authorized by this section and sales to a person providing such proof shall be exempt from the tax levied.

3. There are hereby specifically exempted from the tax levied: a. Sale of tangible personal property to any public school district or to any person

with whom the public school district has duly entered into a public contract. Any person making purchases on behalf of such subdivision or agency of this state shall certify, in writing, on the copy of the invoice or sales ticket to be retained by the vendor that the purchases are made for and on behalf of such public school district and set out the name of such public school district.

b. Sales of tangible personal property to a public school district pursuant to a lease-purchase agreement executed between the vendor and public school district.

B. All contracts with Subcontractors shall include the following provision:

“All tangible personal property and materials are being purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor for and on behalf of the School District and title to the materials and property shall pass directly from the vendor to the School District.”

C. All tangible personal property sold or leased direct to School District by vendor is exempt

from State and Municipal sales tax.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for care and safekeeping of all tangible personal property delivered to Project Site, even though title to property has passed to School District. This shall include responsibility to properly secure tangible personal property, to replace any tangible personal property lost or stolen or which, through any means disappears from the


Project Site, and further the obligation to pay any deductible required to be paid under any insurance policy that may cover the loss if such insurance is in effect, and the responsibility to meet any requirements imposed by insurance company carrying insurance on property insofar as the care, safekeeping and protection of the property is concerned.

E. The Contractor, upon award of Contract, shall prepare the attached Sales Tax Agency

Agreement form, or other agreement form for this purpose provided by the School District, and contact the School District to obtain signatures and execute the Agreement. The attached Sales Tax Agency Agreement authorizes Contractor to be Purchasing Agent for the School District on the Project.

1.3 CONTRACTOR PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING SALES TAX EXEMPTION

A. Obtaining execution of the Sales Tax Agency Agreement at the start of Project is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall make all arrangements with School District for executing the Sales Tax Agency Agreement.

B. Contractor shall obtain original signed copies of the executed Sales Tax Agency Agreement

in the number necessary for identifying Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor that will be eligible for Sales Tax Exemption for this Project.

C. Contractor may bring Sales Tax Agency Agreement to the Pre-Construction Meeting to

obtain School District Signature and execute Agreement. Contractor shall contact School District and make prior arrangements with School District. Architect does not prepare forms or obtain signatures for Contractor.

D. After execution of the Sales Tax Agency Agreement, Contractor forwards executed

Agreement along with cover letter on Contractor Letterhead, indicating that Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor are authorized by Contractor to purchase material and equipment for the Project as a part of their subcontract, to the appropriate Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors, as necessary, for their use.

1.5 PROCEDURE FOR PURCHASES

A. Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor identifies themselves to vendor Contractor, Subcontractor, or Sub-Subcontractor is making purchase of tangible personal property from as a Designated Purchasing Agent pursuant to a contract for construction of this Project with the School District.

B. Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor provides a copy of an original signed and

executed Sales Tax Agency Agreement to vendor upon request.

C. Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor certifies, in writing, on copy of invoice or sales ticket retained by vendor that purchases are made for and on behalf of School District as specified in the executed Sales Tax Agency Agreement.

D. In order for any individual invoice from vendor to qualify for tax exemption, it shall reflect

upon it's face, the following: 1. The purchase order was submitted by Contractor as agent for School District, not by

Contractor individually. 2. The Project Site where material and equipment was delivered and that material and

equipment was, in fact, delivered to Project Site belonging to School District.


3. That from a description of building material or equipment same as appears on purchase order, it is clearly evident that such material and equipment became a part of the construction of the Project.

4. Title to such material and equipment passed from vendor directly to School District.

1.6 PREPARATION, MAINTENANCE AND SUBMITTAL OF RECORD OF PURCHASE ORDERS

A. Contractor, each Subcontractor and each Sub-subcontractor shall maintain a record for all purchase orders issued under this tax exemption and be prepared to provide a current accurate copy of record to School District upon request at any time.

B. The purpose of maintaining and submitting a Purchase Order Record is for School District

records to monitor Contractor tax exempt expenditures and to assure expenditures were in accordance with Oklahoma Statute 68 OS 1356 should a question arise.

C. Each Subcontractor and each Sub-subcontractor shall submit a complete accurate record

for each purchase orders issued under this tax exemption by Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor to Contractor at a date designated by Contractor before Substantial Completion. Sub-subcontractors shall submit their purchase order record to Contractor through their respective Sub-subcontractor.

D. Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor shall maintain copies of all purchase

orders and their corresponding vendor invoices for the Project and be prepared to provide copies of the purchase orders and vendor invoices upon request of the Owner.

E. Contractor shall submit complete accurate Purchase Order Record as a Closeout

Submittal. Refer to Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures and Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

1.7 DESIGNATION OF PURCHASING AGENT FOR OWNER

A. Sales Tax Agency Agreement form follows. Contractor and Owner shall execute this Agreement at the start of the Project.

B. Text of Sales Tax Agency Agreement is suggested by Oklahoma State Department of

Education in their 2004 publication "The ABC's of Building a School." Individual School Districts may choose to use different agreement text or a different agreement form altogether. Verify with School District.

C. All signatures on Sales Tax Agency Agreement shall be in Blue Ink to clearly identify

Agreement as an original signed document.

END OF DOCUMENT


SALES TAX AGENCY AGREEMENT This is an Agency Agreement made and entered into as of the __________ day of _________, 20__ ,

between __________________________ SCHOOL DISTRICT NUMBER _____ of

___________________ COUNTY, OKLAHOMA, a political subdivision of the State of Oklahoma

(hereinafter referred to as "Owner"), and ____________________________ (hereinafter referred to as

"Contractor").

RECITALS: 1. Owner has solicited bids for the construction of a

___________________________________________________ (the "Project") in ____________________ , ____________________ County, Oklahoma; and such facilities as are necessary and appropriate for the operation thereof; which Project, on or before completion shall be owned by the Owner.

2. Contractor has been awarded the contract for construction of the Project.

3. Owner desires to purchase all materials, supplies, and equipment for the Project in

its own name and to take immediate title to all materials, supplies, and equipment, and to have Contractor, as General Contractor for the Project, perform portions of such purchasing duties.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and in order to constitute and appoint Contractor as agent of Owner for the purchase of equipment and materials for the Project,

IT IS AGREED AS FOLLOWS:

1. Owner, as Principal, hereby constitutes and appoints Contractor as Owner's Agent, for it and in its name, to acquire materials and equipment for use in constructing the Project.

2. Title to all materials and equipment purchased by Contractor, Subcontractors or Sub-

subcontractors as agent for Owner will pass directly from the seller thereof to Owner.

3. Contractor acknowledges that it is an agent for Owner and agrees to act as agent for Owner in connection with the acquisition of materials and equipment for the Project in the manner above described.

4. The relationship of principal and agent created by this Agreement shall continue until

terminated by either party by notice in writing to the other. The parties hereto agree that all sellers or vendors of materials and equipment for the Project shall be entitled to rely upon the existence of the Agreement until they have received written notice of revocation.

5. Contractor agrees that it will not purchase any material or equipment pursuant ot this

Agreement except that authorized and intended for inclusion in the Project.

6. In executing purchase orders for equipment and materials for the Project, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors shall include in each purchase order a statement, to be approved as to form by Owner, that Contractor is acting as Owner's Agent, individually and without power of redesignation, for the purchase of the equipment and materials covered by the purchase order.


7. All equipment and materials purchased by Contractor under this Agreement shall be delivered to Owner at the Project job-site.

8. Only equipment and materials to be incorporated in the Project shall be purchased by

Contractor as Owner's agent under this Agreement and not equipment and materials will be purchased except the items required by the Contract Documents for the Project. Contractor will not purchase, as agent hereunder, any equipment or materials to be used only incidentally in connection with the Project. Nothing contained herein shall alter the obligation and responsibility of Contractor under the contract between Owner and Contractor for the construction of the Project.

9. All reimbursement by Owner to Contractor for materials and equipment purchased by

Contractor as Owner's agent hereunder shall be deemed to be a part payment on the Project Contract Sum.

10. Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation for its services as Owner's agent

hereunder.

11. Contractor will maintain a complete accurate current register or record of each purchase order issued by Contractor, each Subcontractor and each Sub-subcontractor for materials and equipment purchased by Contractor as Owner's agent hereunder for the Project and shall submit a copy of the complete accurate register and record for Contractor, each Subcontractor, and each Sub-subcontractor as a Closeout Submittal as specified in the Contract Documents.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agency Agreement as of the date first above written. ____________________________ SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. ___ OF ______________________________ COUNTY, OKLAHOMA

ATTEST: _________________ By __________________________________________________ Clerk School Superintendent or School Board President (SEAL)

ATTEST: ____________________________________________________ Contractor Full Corporate Name ________________ By _________________________________________________ Secretary President

01 1100 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 SUMMARY

SECTION 01 1100

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions. 2. Contract description. 3. Work covered by Contract Documents. 4. Review of Contract Documents and field conditions by Contractor. 5. Post Bid and Post Notice-to-Proceed Contractor Submittals and Actions. 6. Construction documents issued to Contractor. 7. Work by Owner. 8. Contractor use of site and premises. 9. Future Work. 10. Work sequence. 11. Owner occupancy. 12. Codes and standards. 13. Permits and Inspections by Oklahoma State Fire Marshal. 14. Permits and inspections by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 15. Safety. 16. Project management and project coordination. 17. Contractor quality control and Contractor test and inspection reports. 18. Color samples for selection. 19. Submittal to Oklahoma State Fire Marshal. 20. Independent Inspection and Testing Agencies paid for by Contractor. 21. Specification format and content. 22. Drawing format and content. 23. Availability of and obtaining standard forms.




1. Section 01 2600 - Contract Modification Procedures: Contract adjustments. 2. Section 01 2973 - Schedule of Values: Requirements for preparation and submittal of

Schedule of Values. 3. Section 01 4200 - References: Definitions. 4. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Safety and security

requirements. 5. Section 01 5800 - Project Identification: Project identification Sign. 6. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: CSI Form 1.5A.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions and Section 01 4200 - References for definitions.

1.3 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION


A. Contract Type: Multiple Work Packages based on a Stipulated Price per Bid Package as

described in Construction Managers work packages.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract Documents are directed to the Contractor. The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. Refer to Article 2 of Document 00 5213 - Agreement-Stipulated Sum.

B. Provide and pay for all materials, labor, services, equipment, licenses, permits, taxes and

other items necessary for the execution, installation and completion of Work indicated in Contract Documents.

C. Description of Work: Construction of New Science Building including earthwork and site

grading, site utilities, paving, curbs and gutters, landscaping, concrete foundation system, concrete floor slab, pre-engineered metal building structure, pre-finished wall and roof panels, masonry veneer, concrete block walls, HVAC, plumbing, electrical and lighting systems, complete and ready for use.

D. Work Location: 401 Main Street

Velma, Oklahoma 73491

1.5 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY

CONTRACTOR

A. Contractor shall thoroughly and completely field investigate, measure, and verify all existing site and building conditions and compare with Contract Documents.

B. All existing conditions and measurements shall be indicated on Contractor’s Shop Drawings

and Submittals to Architect for review.

C. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders:

D. Document 00 7213 – General Conditions:

1.6 POST BID AND POST NOTICE-TO-PROCEED CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS AND

ACTIONS

A. Post Bid Submittals: Contractor shall submit the following to Architect, in writing, within five (5) calendar days from date of Notice-of-Award of Contract as specified in Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders. 1. Work to Be Performed by Contractor:

a. Provide designation of Work to be performed by Contractor's own forces. b. Submit on Contractor letterhead, signed by Contractor.

2. Subcontractors and Major Suppliers List: Provide names of manufacturers, products, and suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for Work. a. Submit on Major Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers List CSI Form

1.5A located at end of Section 01 6200 - Product Options. b. Architect and Owner will review Subcontractor List to determine if Architect or

Owner have objection to a Subcontractor.


c. Before execution of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Architect will notify Bidder in writing if either Owner or Architect have objection to a Subcontractor. 1) If Owner and Architect object to a Subcontractor, Bidder may either (1)

withdraw Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute Subcontractor with an adjustment in Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover difference in cost of Subcontractor substitution.

2) Owner may accept adjusted Base Bid or disqualify Bidder. 3) In these cases Bid Security will not be forfeited.

d. If Contractor fails to submit Major Subcontractors and Major Suppliers List before execution of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor and subsequently submits list after execution of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor and Owner or Architect have objection to a Subcontractor, Contractor shall submit a substitute Subcontractor acceptable to Owner and Architect with no adjustment in Contract Sum. The responsibility for results of Contractor failure to comply with Bidding Document requirements and the subsequent results rest entirely with Contractor.

3. Names of Persons or Entities proposed for the principal portions of Work. a. Submit on Contractor Letterhead, signed by Contractor.

B. Post Notice-To-Proceed Submittals: Contractor shall submit the following to Architect within

10 days from date of Notice-to-Proceed. 1. Schedule of Values: Submit a Schedule of Values as specified in Section 01 2973 -

Schedule of Values. a. Submit three (3) copies on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for

Payment Continuation Sheet itemizing all Contract costs. b. Schedule of Values shall be broken down by Document and Specification

Section utilizing Table of Contents of Project Manual. 1) For Projects that have multiple buildings, provide Schedule of Values

separating costs for Sitework and costs for each Building. 2) For Projects that have multiple sites with one (1) building on each site,

provide Schedule of Values for each Project Site. 3) For Projects that have multiple Project Sites with multiple buildings on

each site, provide Schedule of Values separating costs for each Project Site with costs for Sitework for each Project Site and costs for each Building on each Project Site.

c. Provide Material and Labor individual Section Breakdown for Sections listed in Section 01 2973 - Schedule of Values

2. Construction Schedule: Submit a Construction Schedule as specified in Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule.

3. Schedule of Submittals: Submit a Schedule of Submittals as specified in Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures. a. Review entire Project Manual to determine what each Document or Section

requires to be submitted. b. List all items that require submittal for review by Architect and date Contractor

anticipates submittal being transmitted to Architect. c. Indicate type of submittal; product data, shop drawing, sample, certificate, or

other submittal.

C. Requests for Substitutions: Submit requests for substitutions as specified in Section 01 6213 - Product Substitution Procedures. 1. Submit proposed substitutions to Architect maximum 60 days after date of Notice to

Proceed.


2. Requests received after 60 days after date of Notice to Proceed may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and as indicated on Drawings.

B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow:

1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by others. 3. Public use of site and premises.

C. Coordinate use of site and premises with Owner or Owner's Representative. Provide

temporary construction facilities, parking, barriers, fences, and enclosures as specified in Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

D. Limited construction vehicle access and construction parking during Owner’s hours of

operation. Construction vehicle access and contractor parking will be as directed by Owner.

E. Provide temporary construction fence around each building construction area, storage and staging areas. Exact location of fence will be as directed by Owner.

F. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of Products under this Contract,

stored on site.

G. Move any stored Products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with operations of Owner or separate contractor.

H. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.

I. Enforce requirements of Contract Documents regarding signs, advertisements and fires for Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, Material Suppliers and other entities involved in Work. No signs permitted other than project identification sign specified in Section 01 5800 - Project Identification.

J. If Project Site has existing Owner facilities, or Owner has existing facilities on an adjacent

site, the following requirements apply. 1. Use of existing facilities by Contractor, all Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,

Material Suppliers and all other entities and workers involved in Work, are not permitted to use existing facilities on site including, but shall not be limited to, restroom facilities, parking lots, telephones, snack bars and dining facilities, recreation facilities, television facilities and all utilities unless specifically allowed by written agreement with Owner.

2. Entry into existing facilities not permitted unless such entry is necessary for completion of Work.

3. If Work requires that certain operations be performed in Owner existing facilities, all operations shall be scheduled to minimize interruptions in operations of Owner. Notify Owner in advance of dates and times when work is scheduled in Owner’s existing facilities.

4. If Work requires interruption of utilities servicing existing facilities or operations of Owner, the following requirements apply.


a. Notify Owner, or Owner’s Representative, minimum seven (7) days before the planned date for utility interruption.

b. Obtain approval for utility interruption from Owner, or Owner’s Representative, 24 hours before scheduled utility interruption. If scheduled utility interruption is delayed, postponed or rescheduled, immediately notify Owner, or Owner’s Representative.

c. During the utility interruption, maintain communications with Owner, or Owner’s Representative, and report progress of Work. If delay in completing utility interruption occurs during utility interruption, immediately notify Owner, or Owner’s Representative, and notify of revised schedule for completion of utility interruption.

d. Notify Owner, or Owner’s Representative, immediately when utility is returned to full operation.

e. Schedule utility interruptions to minimize inconvenience to Owner or Owner’s operations. Owner may require that interruption occur after business hours, in the evening, at night, or on weekends or holidays.

K. Keep Project Site free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish. At periodic

intervals determined by progress of Work, remove waste and rubbish from Project Site. At completion of Project, remove all waste, rubbish, temporary facilities, project signs, tools, equipment, machinery, materials and all other Contractor items. Refer to Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

L. DO NOT INTERRUPT OWNER FACILITY OPERATIONS. Work under this Contract that

will interrupt or impede the daily operation of Owner Facilities must be scheduled outside of Owner Facility operation hours. Discuss and obtain Owner Representative approval for work that may interrupt Owner Facility operations in advance at Contractor and Owner Progress Meeting.

M. PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEATING OR COOLING WHERE WORK PREVENTS EXISTING

SYSTEM FROM OPERATING. Contractor shall provide temporary heating or cooling devices of sufficient quantity and type necessary to keep all areas of existing building occupied by Students, Teachers or School Staff at a comfortable temperature between 70 degrees F to 80 degrees F. School Principal will determine what temperature will be “comfortable.”

N. Periodically, as determined by time of year, mow Project Site and maintain growth of weeds

to maximum height of 6 inches.

1.8 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Construct Work continuously from Notice to Proceed until Substantial Completion.

B. Construct Work and have Work Substantially Complete and ready for Substantial Completion Inspection on or before the Date of Substantial Completion established in the Notice to Proceed. 1. Submit all Contract Closeout Package items within two (2) weeks of Substantial

Completion Inspection.

C. Complete all Substantial Completion Inspection punchlist items ready for Final Completion Inspection no later than 30 days after date of Substantial Completion Inspection.

1.9 OWNER OCCUPANCY


A. Owner will occupy the buildings and areas adjacent to Project Site during the entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations.

B. Cooperate with Owner’s Representative to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner’s

operations.

C. Schedule Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.10 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All products, materials and construction quality shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations. In no case shall work, products, or materials of a lower quality to those specified be provided in this Project, even if permitted by code.

B. In cases of difference between building codes, specifications, state laws, local ordinances,

industry standards, and utility company regulations and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern.

C. Non-Compliance: If Contractor performs work that does not comply with requirements of

applicable building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, and utility regulations, Contractor shall bear all costs arising in correcting deficiencies.

1.11 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS BY OKLAHOMA STATE FIRE MARSHAL

A. Refer to Document 00 3143 - Permit Application.

B. Oklahoma State Fire Marshal will make 50 percent and 100 percent inspections.

C. Contractor is responsible for scheduling 50 percent and 100 percent inspections with Oklahoma State Fire Marshal. Any delay in Project caused by Contractor failing to schedule or pass inspections is Contractor's responsibility.

1.12 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS BY LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION

A. Refer to Document 00 3143 - Permit Application for permitting requirements.

B. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections. Any delay in Project caused by Contractor failing to schedule or pass inspections is Contractor's responsibility.

C. Inspections by Local Authority Having Jurisdiction:

1. Do not enclose or cover any items required to be inspected by Authority Having Jurisdiction until they are inspected and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2. If Project does not have an Authority Having Jurisdiction, contact Architect and Engineer (if applicable) minimum three (3) days before Work is ready for inspection or tests.

3. Notify Authority Having Jurisdiction minimum number of days in advance of inspection as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction to schedule inspection. Verify with Authority Having Jurisdiction representative.

4. Reinspections: Whenever inspection finds that inspected item does not pass, make required corrections and schedule a reinspection.


5. Reports: Prepare and submit inspection reports indicating results of inspections made as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

D. Inspections Required by Building Code: The following list includes, but does not limit,

required inspections by Authority Having Jurisdiction per the Building Code: 1. Footing or foundation. 2. Concrete slab. 3. Lowest floor elevation (if project is located in a Flood Hazard Area). 4. Framing. 5. Gypsum board fire-rated assemblies. 6. Fire-resistant penetrations. 7. Energy efficiency. 8. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Systems:

a. Underground. b. Rough-in. c. Testing. d. Final.

9. Fire Sprinklers and Fire Alarm Systems: a. Rough-in. b. Testing. c. Final.

10. Other inspections as determined by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Verify with Authority Having Jurisdiction at time of Building Permit Issuance.

1.13 SAFETY

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 – General Conditions.

B. Conduct all operations and all aspects of Work in safest possible manner. Comply with all Federal, State and Local Law and Regulations and accepted safe practices for use and storage of flammable, hazardous, toxic and dangerous materials, products or techniques and the health and safety of all Workers. 1. Take extra precautions to insure safety of all occupants when Work requires entry

into existing facilities of Owner. 2. All fines levied for non-compliance shall be paid by Contractor.

C. Perform all work in conformance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration

regulations contained in U.S. Department of Labor, Standard 29 CFR, Part 1926 “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction”

D. Contractor shall develop, implement and enforce a Contractor Site Safety Program in

conformance with requirements of "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" published by Associated General Contractors of America.

E. Subcontractor Superintendents or Foremen: Each Subcontractor shall have a

Superintendent or Foreman at Project site that is proficient in speaking the American English Language at all times when that Subcontractor’s workers are working at Project Site. This is a site safety issue and requires clear communication between all persons at Project Site. 1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor’s Project Field Superintendent to check for

compliance by each Subcontractor on-site periodically each workday. 2. Contractor Project Field Superintendent shall note in Project Field Superintendent’s

Daily Log each Subcontractor’s compliance or non-compliance with this requirement


and corrective measure instructions given by Contractor Project Field Superintendent to Subcontractor.

F. Refer to Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for additional site safety and

security requirements.

1.14 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Refer to Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination.

B. Contractor shall provide the following for this Project in accordance with specified requirements: 1. Project Manager and Project Field Superintendent. 2. Maintain Contract Documents, Project Record Documents, Project Record Submittals

and Project Superintendent's Daily Log. Document adverse weather days. 3. Submit detailed Contractor Site Safety Program. 4. Coordinate all Work including Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical, Fire Sprinkler and

Fire Alarm systems. Prepare coordination drawings as necessary. a. Any rerouting of piping, conduit, ductwork or any other portion of Work due to

Contractor failure to coordinate locations of all Work will be at Contractor expense.

5. Attend, document and prepare Meeting Minutes for Pre-Construction Meeting. 6. Attend, document and prepare Meeting Minutes for Contractor, Architect and Owner

Progress Meetings. 7. Schedule, conduct, document and prepare Meeting Minutes for each Preinstallation

Meeting required by each individual technical Specification Section. 8. Attend, document and prepare Meeting Minutes for Contract Closeout Meeting.

1.15 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTRACTOR TEST AND INSPECTION

REPORTS

A. Refer to Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

B. Contractor shall maintain quality control over Contractor personnel, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce Work of specified quality.

C. Contractor shall inspect all Work and perform all Tests and Inspections specified in each

individual Specification Section and prepare Contractor Test and Inspection Reports for each test and inspection made and forward to Architect.

D. Contractor shall continuously inspect Work performed by Contractor personnel,

subcontractors and sub-sub-contractors and maintain a Non-Compliance Check-Off List for Work that does not comply with Contract Documents.

1.16 COLOR SAMPLES FOR SELECTION

A. If color selections are required, those color selections for finish materials will be made by Architect from the range of manufacturer’s standard color samples submitted to Architect by material manufacturers through Contractor as specified in Specification Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Failure of Contractor to submit samples within specified time will delay payment application

processing until all samples are received.


C. Submit all color samples for selection of finish colors within 60 days after date of Notice to

Proceed. Approved samples may be returned in the form of a Color Board or Material Selection Notebook. Maintain approved finish color selections at Project Site.

1.17 SUBMITTAL TO OKLAHOMA STATE FIRE MARSHAL

A. Pre-Engineered Metal Building: 1. At start of Project Contractor shall submit complete Pre-Engineered Metal Building

Shop Drawings and Structural Calculations to Architect for Architect review and Architect submittal to Oklahoma State Fire Marshal. Contractor shall see that Pre-Engineered Metal Building manufacturer prepares complete Shop Drawings and Calculations in an EXPEDITED manner. Contractor shall pay for any fees for expedited Shop Drawing and Structural Calculation preparation. a. Shop Drawings and Structural Calculations shall be signed and sealed by an

Oklahoma Licensed Structural Engineer. b. Upon receipt of “Approved” Shop Drawings back from OSFM, Architect will

transmit OSFM “Approved Set” of Shop Drawings to Contractor along with OSFM Building Permit.

c. Attach OSFM "Approved Set" of Shop Drawings to OSFM approved Permit Set of Contract Documents and keep on-site in Contractor's Project Field Office. Keep OSFM “Approved Set” of Shop Drawings and OSFM approved Permit Set of Contract Documents SEPARATE and away from Contractor Construction Sets and Record Drawing Set.

2. BUILDING PERMIT WILL NOT BE ISSUED by Oklahoma State Fire Marshal to begin work on this Project until the Pre-Engineered Metal Building Shop Drawings and Structural Calculations have been reviewed and approved by Oklahoma State Fire Marshal.

3. Oklahoma State Fire Marshal may issue a Partial Building Permit for sitework construction to take place at the discretion of the Oklahoma State Fire Marshal.

4. Contractor shall allow for the review time required by Oklahoma State Fire Marshal before issuance of building permit in the Contract Time number of calendar days on the Bid Form.

5. Any costs associated with delays to Project due to Contractor failure to expedite submittal of complete Shop Drawings and Structural Calculations to Oklahoma State Fire Marshal will be Contractor's responsibility at Contractor's expense.

B. Fire Alarm System:

1. Fire Alarm Contractor shall submit 2 sets of Fire Alarm System Shop Drawings and Fire Alarm Component Product Data to Oklahoma State Fire Marshal. a. Shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by an Oklahoma Licensed Fire

Alarm Contractor. b. Submit copy of OSFM approval to Architect upon receipt along with specified

number of Fire Alarm System Shop Drawings and Fire Alarm Component Product Data for Architect transmittal to Engineer for review.

c. Attach OSFM "Approved Set" to OSFM approved Permit Set of Contract Documents and keep on-site in Contractor's Project Field Office.

2. Contractor shall receive Oklahoma State Fire Marshal Approval of Fire Alarm Shop Drawings before start of installation.

3. Any costs associated with delays to Project due to Contractor failure to submit complete shop drawings and calculations to Oklahoma State Fire Marshal will be Contractor's responsibility at Contractor's expense.


1.18 INDEPENDENT TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES PAID FOR BY

CONTRACTOR

A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory to perform inspections and tests listed in Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services and specified in each technical Specification Section referenced.

B. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of Geotechnical Engineer of Record to

perform inspections listed in Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services and specified in each technical Specification Section referenced.

C. Geotechnical Engineer of Record is engineer that prepared the Geotechnical Report for this

specific Project.

1.23 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT


B. Specification Format: Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) MasterFormat numbering system. 1. Specifications may be written in an abbreviated, or streamline outline, format and may

include incomplete sentences. The omission of modifying words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "in conformity therewith", "shall be", "as noted on the Drawings", "a", "the", "an", and "all" are intentional. Any such omitted word or phrase shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as they are in Drawing notes. The fact that any such word or phrase is present in one statement but is absent from another shall be interpreted to have no meaning and shall be without effect on interpretations of the Contract Documents.

2. Titles to Divisions, Sections and Paragraphs in the Specifications are intended for convenience only and shall not be deemed to be a complete and correct list, or complete segregation, of the various portions of the Work. Neither Owner nor Architect assume responsibility, either direct or implied, for omissions or duplications by the Contractor, or by any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or Material Supplier, or any other entity, based upon the arrangement of the Specifications.

C. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions in use of language and

intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated type. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated shall be interpolated as the sense required. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and context of Contract Documents so indicates.

2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in Specifications. Requirements expressed in imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. At certain locations in text, for clarity, subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor, or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall be" shall be included by inference wherever a colon (:) is used

within a sentence or phrase.

1.24 DRAWING FORMAT AND CONTENT


A. Division of Drawings into numbered or lettered groupings is intended for convenience only and shall not be deemed to be a complete and correct list, or complete segregation, of the various portions of Work. Owner and Architect do not assume responsibility, either direct or implied, for omissions or duplications by Contractor, or by any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or Material Supplier, or any other entity, based upon arrangement of Drawings. 1. Drawings have been divided into groupings based upon the general class of the

various portions of the Work. 2. Through submission of bid, Contractor attests and warrants that Contractor and

Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, Material Suppliers and other entities proposed to perform portions of Work have diligently and carefully studied Drawings and other Contract Documents and have fully compared requirements of the Contract Documents taken as a whole with requirements of a specific Drawing or grouping of Drawings.

B. The following subparagraph shall be included by reference as a note on each and every

Drawing and shall have the same effect as if it had actually been written thereon. 1. Other Drawings, to include Drawings in different groupings, may contain requirements

which may seriously impact that portion of the Work described hereon. Examine and carefully study all of the Contract Documents.



END OF SECTION

01 2100 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 ALLOWANCES

SECTION 01 2100

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cash allowance.

B. Related Documents: 1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions and



1. Section 04 2111 - Brick Veneer: Cash allowance for brick material. 2. Section 04 2106 - Masonry Screen Walls - Brick: Cash allowance for brick material.

1.2 CASH ALLOWANCE

A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of Product to Contractor or Subcontractor, less

applicable trade discounts.

B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances But Included in the Contract Sum/Price: Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of Products from elements and from damage and labor for installation and finishing.

C. Architect:

1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of product suppliers. 2. Select Products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor.

D. Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Assist Architect in selection of product suppliers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of selection by Architect, execute purchase agreement with designated

supplier. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for

delivery. 5. Promptly inspect Products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects.

Submit claims for transportation damage. 6. Submit invoice cost from supplier for brick material including quantity of brick to

Architect for review upon delivery to Project Site. 7. Submit invoice cost from supplier for $525.00 including quantity of (1000) thousand to

Architect for review upon delivery to Project Site.

E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.

01 2100 - 2 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 ALLOWANCES

F. Allowance Schedule:

1. Section 04 2111 - Brick Veneer: Include the stipulated sum of $525 per thousand

bricks for purchase and delivery of brick.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

ALLOWANCE

AUTHORIZATION

Project:

To:

Re:

Authorization Number:

From:

Date:

A/E Project Number:

Contract For:

You are authorized to perform the following item(s) of work and to adjust the Allowance Sum accordingly:

THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER AND DOES NOT INCREASE OR DECREASE THE CONTRACT AMOUNT

Original Allowance ............... .............. ............... ............... ............... .............................. $

Allowance Expenditures prior to this Authorization ............ ............... .............................. $

Allowance Balance prior to this Authorization ..... ............... ............... .............................. $

Allowance will be [increased] [decreased] by this Authorization ........ .............................. $

New Allowance Balance ........ .............. ............... ............... ............... .............................. $

APPROVAL RECOMMENDED

A/E

By Date

CONTRACTOR ACCEPTANCE

Contractor

By Date

OWNER APPROVAL

Owner

By Date

Attachments

Copies: Owner Contractor Consultants File

Copyright 1994, Construction Specifications Institute,

99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300, Alexandria, VA 22314 Page of July 1994

CSI Form 2.4A

01 2300 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 ALTERNATES

SECTION 01 2300

ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Alternate submission procedures. 2. Schedule of Alternates.



2. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Bidding requirements for alternates. 3. Document 00 5213 - Agreement-Stipulated Sum: Alternates.


1. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Work schedule affected by Alternates.

2. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on Bid Form for

certain work defined in Bidding Documents that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either amount of construction to be completed, or in products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in Contract Documents. 1. Contract Sum to incorporate Alternate into Work. No other adjustments are made to

Contract Sum.

1.3 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Each bidder shall submit bid on all alternates.

B. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in Document 00 5213 - Agreement-Stipulated Sum.

C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate Work of each alternate.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of Alternate.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1 – Curtain Wall: 1. Base Bid Item: In lieu of curtain wall assemblies shown on 7A1 and 7A2, provide

hollow metal doors and fixed aluminum windows per Specification Section 08 5108 –

01 2300 - 2 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 ALTERNATES

Fixed Aluminum Windows, 08 1213 – Hollow Metal Frames and 08 1313 – Hollow Metal Doors.

2. Alternate Item: Use curtain wall as shown on drawings 7A1 and 7A2 and per Specification Section 08 4413 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.

B. Alternate No. 2 – Masonry Screen Wall:

1. Base Bid Item: In lieu of masonry screen wall shown in J, K, and L/5A1, provide chain link fence.

2. Alternate Item: Use masonry screen wall shown in J, K, and L/5A1.

C. Alternate No. 3 – Covered Walkway:

1. Base Bid Item: No covered walkway provided as shown in all architectural drawings with the exception of E/5A1 and A/6A3.

2. Alternate Item: Provide and install metal covered walkway as shown in D/5A1 and A/6A3.



END OF SECTION

01 2600 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 2600

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Documentation of change in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time. 2. Architect’s Supplementary Instructions. 3. Proposal Request. 4. Construction Change Directive. 5. Contractor Change Order Request. 6. Stipulated sum Change Order. 7. Time and material Change Order. 8. Permitted costs used for Change Orders. 9. Contractor overhead, profit, bonds and insurance used for Change Orders. 10. Execution of Change Orders. 11. Correlation of Contractor submittals. 12. CSI Form 13.6A - Change Order Request (Proposal). 13. CSI Form 13.6D - Proposal Worksheet Summary. 14. CSI Form 13.6C - Proposal Worksheet Detail.




1. Section 01 6213 - Product Substitution Procedures: Requirements for Contractor requests for substitution.

2. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to Work.

B. Transmit each Contractor Proposal Package to Architect with AIA Document G810 -

Transmittal Letter or other Architect approved transmittal form or letter containing the same information as AIA Document G810. 1. Deliver submittal in person or by courier, overnight delivery service or U.S. Mail

postpaid. 2. Do not Fax formal submittal. Contractor may fax a copy of package to Architect

indicating that formal Contractor Proposal Package is being sent and when it should arrive.

1.3 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM/PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME


A. Maintain detailed records of work completed on a time and material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in Work.

B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow

evaluation of quotation. Clearly and legibly type all items included on the following forms: 1. Submit Contractor Change Order Request Proposal on CSI Form 13.6A. 2. Submit Contractor Change Order Proposal Worksheet Summary on CSI Form 13.6D. 3. Submit Contractor Change Order Proposal Worksheet Detail on CSI Form 13.6C.

C. Provide additional data to support computations:

1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit. 4. Justification for change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.

D. Support each claim for additional costs or Change Order Request (Proposal), with

additional information: 1. Origin and date of claim. 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 3. Time records and wage rates paid. 4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly

documented.

1.4 ARCHITECT’S SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS

A. Architect will advise of minor changes in Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Document G710 - Architect’s Supplementary Instructions.

B. Upon receipt of Architect issued AIA Document G710, Contractor shall carry out Work in

accordance with instructions in accordance with Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.5 PROPOSAL REQUEST

A. Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing change and period of time during which requested price will be considered valid by issuing request on AIA Document G709 - Proposal Request.

B. Upon receipt of Architect issued AIA Document G709, Contractor shall prepare and submit

an itemized proposal for changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time for proposed modifications to Contract Documents accordance with description within number of days indicated on document. 1. If Contractor cannot complete itemized proposal within time requested by Architect,

notify Architect in writing of date Contractor will be able to submit proposal along with reason for additional time required.

2. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation.


C. Contents of Contractor Proposal Package shall include 3 executed copies fo the following: 1. Transmittal - AIA Document G810. 2. Change Order Request (Proposal) Form - CSI Form 13.6A. 3. Proposal Worksheet Summary - CSI Form 13.6D. 4. Proposal Worksheet Detail - CSI Form 13.6C. 5. Attached additional support data.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Architect may issue a document, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order by issuing a directive on AIA Document G714 - Construction Change Directive.

B. Construction Change Directive will describe changes in Work, and will designate method of

determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.

C. Upon receipt of Architect and Owner issued Construction Change Directive, Contractor shall promptly execute change in Work in accordance with directive in accordance with Contract Documents. 1. Contractor shall sign all copies of Construction Change Directive forms, keep one

copy for Contractor and return remaining copies to Architect.

D. Upon completion of the Work, document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation in a Contrator Proposal Package.

E. Contents of Contractor Proposal Package shall include 3 executed copies fo the following:

1. Transmittal - AIA Document G810. 2. Change Order Request (Proposal) Form - CSI Form 13.6A. 3. Proposal Worksheet Summary - CSI Form 13.6D. 4. Proposal Worksheet Detail - CSI Form 13.6C. 5. Attached additional support data.

1.7 CONTRACTOR CHANGE ORDER REQUEST

A. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a Change Order Request (Proposal) to Architect, describing proposed change and its full effect on Work, with a statement describing reason for change, and effect on Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing effect on Work by separate or other contractors.

B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow

evaluation of quotation.

C. Contents of Contractor Proposal Package shall include three (3) executed copies of the following: 1. Transmittal - AIA Document G810. 2. Change Order Request (Proposal) Form - CSI Form 13.6A. 3. Proposal Worksheet Summary - CSI Form 13.6C. 4. Proposal Worksheet Detail - CSI Form 13.6D. 5. Attached additional support data.

1.8 STIPULATED SUM CHANGE ORDER


A. Architect may issue a document, signed by the Owner and Architect, instructing Contractor to make a change in Work based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order with Contractor’s fixed price quotation as approved by Owner by issuing a Change Order on AIA Document G701 - Change Order.

B. Change Order will describe changes in Work, and will designate any change to the original

contract sum, net change by previously authorized Change Orders, any change of contract sum due to Change Order, any change to contract time and any change to Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Change Order may include attached Change Order Narrative, Drawings, Sketches and

Specification Sections as necessary.

D. Change Order will include documentation from Contractor for change in cost or time with necessary supporting data.

1.9 TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER

A. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Architect will determine change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as

provided in Contract Documents.

C. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis.

D. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in Work.

1.10 PERMITTED COSTS USED FOR CHANGE ORDERS

A. Method for adjustment in Contract Sum shall be determined by Architect on basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing Work attributable to the change.

B. Permitted Costs for Change Orders are limited to the following. No other costs are

permitted. 1. Costs of labor, including social security, unemployment insurance, fringe benefits

required by agreement or custom and workers compensation insurance. 2. Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether

incorporated or consumed. 3. Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive hand tools, whether rented from

Contractor or others. Machinery must be directly attributable to the change. Cost for equipment already on site shall not be included.

4. Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to Work.

5. Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

C. Itemization of Change Costs:

1. In order to facilitate checking quotations for change costs, all proposals shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and subcontracts. No exception.


2. All labor and materials shall be itemized. 3. Where major cost items are subcontracts, subcontracts shall be itemized.

1.11 CONTRACTOR OVERHEAD, PROFIT, BONDS AND INSURANCE USED FOR

CHANGE ORDERS

A. Combined Overhead and Profit: Combined overhead and profit included in total cost to Owner of a change in Work shall be based on the following schedule. Contractor shall use the following percentages when preparing a Change Order Request. 1. Contractor:

a. Work Performed Entirely by Contractor’s Own Forces: Combined overhead and profit of 10 percent of cost.

b. Work Performed by Contractor’s Subcontractors: Combined overhead and profit of 5 percent of amount due Subcontractors.

2. Subcontractors: a. For Each Subcontractor Involved, Work Performed Entirely by Subcontractor's

Own Forces: Combined overhead and profit of 10 percent of cost. b. For Each Subcontractor Involved , Work Performed by Subcontractor's Sub-

Subcontractors: Combined overhead and profit of 5 percent of amount due Sub-Subcontractor.

3. Sub-Subcontractors: Do not include overhead and profit for Sub-Subcontractors.

B. Bonds, Insurance and Taxes 1. Contractor: Cost of bonds, insurance and taxes are separate from overhead and

profit. Provide separate line items for bonds, insurance and taxes in Contractor Itemization following line item for Contractor overhead and profit as indicated on CSI Form 13.6D - Proposal Worksheet Summary.

2. Subcontractor: Do not include bonds or insurance for Subcontractors. 3. Sub-Subcontractors: Do not include bonds or insurance for Sub-Subcontractors.

C. Bonds and Insurance Rates for this Project: Provide documentation from Contractor’s

Insurance Provider and Bonding Company of bond and insurance rates Contractor is being charged for Bonds and Insurance for this Project as part of the Contractor Proposal Package.

1.12 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS

A. Architect will issue three (3) copies of Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Upon receipt of Architect and Owner issued Change Order; Contractor shall promptly

execute Change Order. 1. Contractor shall sign all copies of Change Order forms, keep one copy for Contractor

and return remaining copies to Architect.

1.13 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Contract Modification as a separate line item and adjust Contract Sum/Price.

B. Promptly revise Construction Schedule to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-

schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by change, and resubmit.


C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents as specified in Section 01 7800 -

Closeout Submittals.



END OF SECTION

CHANGE ORDER

REQUEST (PROPOSAL)

Project:

To:

Re:

Change Order Request Number:

From (Contractor):

Date:

A/E Project Number:

Contract For:

This Change Order Request (C.O.R.) contains an itemized quotation for changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time in response to

proposed modifications to the Contract Documents based on Proposal Request No. .

Description of Proposed Change:

Attached supporting information from: Subcontractor Supplier

Reason For Change:

Does Proposed Change involve a change in Contract Sum? No Yes [Increase] [Decrease] $

Does Proposed Change involve a change in Contract Time? No Yes [Increase] [Decrease] days.

Attached pages: Proposal Worksheet Summary:

Proposal Worksheet Detail(s):

Signed by: Date:

Copies: Owner Consultants File


99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314

Page of July 1994

CSI Form 13.6A

PROPOSAL

WORKSHEET SUMMARY

Project: Change Order Request Number:

To: From:

Re: Date:

Proposal Request Number: A/E Project Number:

Complete and attach Proposal Worksheet Detail for each element of Work. Enter Worksheet Information below.

ADDITIONS:

Sheet Description Material Labor Subtotal

1 -$

2 -$

3 -$

4 -$

5 -$

6 -$

7 -$

Subtotal -$ -$ -$

DEDUCTIONS:

Sheet Description Material Labor Subtotal

1 -$

2 -$

3 -$

4 -$

5 -$

6 -$

7 -$

Subtotal -$ -$ -$

Subcontractor's Net:

Subcontractor's OH&P:

Subcontractor's Bond:

Subcontractor's Total: -$

Subcontractor's Net:

Contractor's OH&P:

Contractor's Bond:

Insurance:

Tax:

WORKSHEET TOTAL: -$

Copyright 1994, Construction Specifications Institute, Page __ of __ July 1994

99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314 CSI Form 13.6D

PR

OP

OS

AL

WO

RK

SH

EE

T D

ET

AIL

Pro

ject

:C

han

ge

Ord

er R

equ

est

Nu

mb

er:

To

:F

rom

:

Re:

Dat

e:

Pro

po

sal

Req

ues

t N

um

ber

:A

/E P

roje

ct N

um

ber

:

SH

AD

ED

AR

EA

S F

OR

A/E

US

E

AD

DIT

ION

SU

NIT

PR

ICE

SS

UB

TO

TA

LS

TO

TA

L

Ref

. N

o.

Item

Des

crip

tion

Qu

an

tity

Mate

rials

Lab

or

Mate

rials

Lab

or

1-

$

-$

-

$

2-

$

-$

-

$

3-

$

-$

-

$

4-

$

-$

-

$

Su

bto

tal

(En

ter

this

nu

mb

er o

n W

ork

shee

t S

um

mar

y.)

-$

-

$

-$

-

$

-$

DE

DU

CT

ION

SU

NIT

PR

ICE

SS

UB

TO

TA

LS

TO

TA

L

Ref

. N

o.

Item

Des

crip

tion

Qu

an

tity

Mate

rials

Lab

or

Mate

rials

Lab

or

1-

$

-$

-

$

2-

$

-$

-

$

3-

$

-$

-

$

4-

$

-$

-

$

Su

bto

tal

(En

ter

this

nu

mb

er o

n W

ork

shee

t S

um

mar

y.)

-$

-

$

-$

-

$

-$

Cop

yri

gh

t 1

99

4,

Con

stru

ctio

n S

pec

ific

atio

ns

Inst

itu

te,

Pag

e _

_ o

f _

_Ju

ly 1

99

4

99

Can

al C

ente

r P

laza

, S

uit

e 3

00

Ale

xan

dri

a, V

A 2

23

14

CS

I F

orm

13

.6C

01 2613 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION

SECTION 01 2613

REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements and procedures for Contractor requests to Architect for interpretation

and clarification of Contract Documents. 2. CSI Form 13.2A - Request for Interpretation. 3. CSI Form 13.2B - Request for Interpretation Log.




1. Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures: Payment Request Package requirements. 2. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Requirements for

Contractor/Architect correspondence. 3. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor quality control requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Requests for Interpretation (RFI), is a formal process used during construction to facilitate communication between Contractor and Architect with regard to requests for interpretation and clarification of the intent of Contract Documents.

1.3 PROCEDURE DURING BIDDING

A. DO NOT use Requests for Interpretation form for questions during bidding. Submit questions during bidding, in writing on bidder's letterhead, to the Architect. TELEPHONE CALLS ARE DISCOURAGED.

B. Identify each question by referencing a Specification Section, Drawing Number and Detail

Number.

C. Submit questions NO LATER than five (5) working days before date bids are received.

D. Refer to Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders and Document 00 2213 -Supplementary Instructions to Bidders for additional requirements.


1.4 PROCEDURE AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT


B. Conditions Requiring Interpretation and Clarification of Contract Documents: Submit a Request for Interpretation to Architect. E-MAIL RFI FORM TO ARCHITECT. (If Contractor does not have E-Mail capability, RFI Form may be Faxed, upon approval of Architect, as discussed at the Pre-Construction Meeting). 1. Submit Requests for Interpretation from Contractor's office or field office only.

Requests for Interpretation submitted directly from subcontractors or suppliers will not be accepted.

2. Generate Requests for Interpretation by one source per project and number accordingly.

3. Submit one request for interpretation per form. 4. Maintain current RFI Log as specified in this Section.

C. Architect will review formal requests from Contractor within 24 to 48 hours (depending on

complexity of request) and Contractor will be notified in writing of decisions made, via the RFI Form, within a maximum of 15 days after receipt of request. 1. If necessary, Architect may contact Contractor by telephone for clarification of RFI. 2. Architect response shall not be considered as a Change Order or Construction

Change Directive, nor does it authorize changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.5 RFI FORM

A. Submit requests for interpretation on attached Request for Interpretation form, or Architect approved equivalent, attached at end of this Section. Architect will not respond to requests for interpretation unless this format is utilized. (RFI Form is available to Contractor as a live Microsoft Word Document. Make request to Architect at Pre-Construction Meeting to receive a live electronic copy of form). 1. Upon receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit Contractor proposed alternate RFI Form to

Architect for review and approval. 2. Alternate RFI form shall contain the same information and text as the attached RFI

form.

B. Where submittal form does not provide space needed for complete information, additional sheets may be attached.

1.6 RFI LOG

A. Maintain a request for interpretation log on attached Request for Interpretation Log form, or Architect approved equivalent, attached at end of this Section. (RFI Log Form is available to Contractor as a live Microsoft Word Document. Make request to Architect at Pre-Construction Meeting to receive a live electronic copy of form).

B. Provide current RFI Log at Monthly Progress Meetings held at Project Site for review.

C. Include current RFI Log as part of each Payment Request Package as specified in Section

01 2900 - Payment Procedures.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

REQUEST FOR

INTERPRETATION

Project:

To:

Re:

R.F.I. Number:

From:

Date:

A/E Project Number:

Contract For:

Specification Section: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Detail:

Request:

Signed by: Date:

Response:

Attachments

Response From: To: Date Rec’d: Date Retd:

Signed by: Date:

Copies: Owner Consultants File



Page of July 1994

CSI Form 13.2A

REQUEST FOR

INTERPRETATION LOG

Project:

Owner:

A/E Project Number:

Contractor:

R.F.I.

NO.

DATE

RECD

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF INFORMATION REQUESTED

DATE OF

RESPONSE

R.F.P.

NO.



Page of July 1994

CSI Log Form 13.2B

01 2900 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 2900

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Schedule of values. 2. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for payment. 3. Payments at Substantial Completion. 4. Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims and Release of Liens form. 5. Non-Kickback Statement. 6. BWA Document 702 - Application for Payment Form. 7. BWA Document 703 - Application for Payment - Continuation Sheet Form. 8. CSI Form 2.5A - Stored Material Summary.



2. Document 00 5213 - Agreement-Stipulated Sum: Document executed between Owner and Contractor.


1. Section 01 2600 - Contract Modification Procedures: Procedures for changes to the Work.

2. Section 01 2973 - Schedule of Values: Procedures for schedule of values. 3. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Documentation: Submittal of updated

Construction Schedule. 4. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 5. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Final payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Refer to Section 01 2973 - Schedule of Values.

1.3 FORMAT

A. Forms: 1. Application for Payment: BWA Document 702 - Application for Payment at end of

Section. 2. Application for Payment - Continuation Form: BWA Document 703 - Continuation

Sheet. 3. An electronic copy of the Application for Payment and Application for Payment –

Continuation Sheet forms will be provided to the contractor. a. Contractor shall only use electronic forms provided. b. Only Application for Payment Form provided shall be used. c. Application for Payment Forms not provided shall not be used.

4. Submit only typewritten forms. Handwritten forms will not be permitted.

B. Application for Payment - Continuation Form: Header titles for each column shown as follows shall be used. See attached Application for Payment - Continuation Form.


1. (A) - Item Number. 2. (B) - Description of Work. 3. (C) - Scheduled Values. 4. (D) – Work Completed: (F) from Previous Applications. 5. (E) – Work Completed: Work in Place this Application. 6. (F) – Work Completed: Total Work in Place to Date (D + E) 7. (G) – Stored Materials: (I) from Previous Applications Less Materials Used this

Period. 8. (H) – Stored Materials: New This Application. 9. (I) – Stored Materials Total Stored Materials (G + H). 10. (J) – Total Completed and Stored to Date. 11. (K) – Percent Completed and Stored to Date (J / C) 12. (L) – Balance to Finish (C – G) 13. (M) – Retainage

1.4 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS

A. All signatures shall be in Blue Ink to clearly identify each document as an original signed document.

B. Prepare as specified in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

C. Include statement on application as specified in Document 00 7213 – General Conditions for materials stored on the Project Site but not yet incorporated into Work.

D. Do not include request for payment for materials stored off Project Site. Architect will not

approve and Owner will not pay for any materials stored off Project Site.

E. Execute certification by signature of Contractor or Contractor authorized officer.

F. Prepare application on same form and in same format as approved Schedule of Values. 1. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. 2. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed. 3. Provide an overall project summary percentage complete and payment amount for

each Application for Payment as specified in Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures.

G. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on BWA Document 703 - Application for Payment - Continuation Sheet, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.

H. Starting with second Application for Payment, include an executed and notarized Affidavit of

Payment of Debts and Claims and Release of Liens with each Application for Payment. 1. Submittal of Affidavit required by Contractor and each Subcontractor, Sub-

subcontractor and material supplier who performed work covered by the Application of the payment period immediately preceeding the Application being submitted.

2. Contractor is responsible to secure and submit proper Affidavits. 3. Required Affidavit is attached at end of this Section. 4. Non-Kickback Statement form attached at end of this Section.

I. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Document 00 5223 - Agreement-

Construction Management, Document 00 7213 - General Conditions, and Section 01 7300 - Execution.


1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit Application for Payment to Architect on or before date stipulated in Document 00

5213, Subparagraph 5.1.3 . Regardless of Contractor standard billing process, Contractor shall organize and setup billing process for THIS PROJECT as required to allow time to obtain subcontractor invoices, prepare required documents, prepare Application for Payment forms, and mail Payment Application Package to Architect for receipt by Architect on or before the 10th of the month. 1. Submit Application on or before the 10th of the month. No exception permitted. 2. Provided Application for Payment is received by Architect as specified, Owner will

make payment to Contractor on or before the 15th of the following month. If Application for Payment is received by Architect after specified date, payment will be made by Owner no later than 60 days after Architect receives Application for Payment.

3. Contractor submittal on or before stipulated date is critical for receiving required approvals, processing and payment by Owner.

4. Contractor submittal after stipulated date may delay approvals and processing and delay Owner payment as indicated in Document 00 5214 , Subparagraph 4.1.2.

5. By failing to submit on or before stipulated date, Contractor expressly assumes risk of all delays to payment and waives all claims for damages or additional payment for any such delays to payment.

B. Submit three (3) executed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment

with original seals and signatures.

C. Submit updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment.

D. Submit Applications at intervals stipulated in Document 00 5213 - Agreement-Stipulated Sum.

E. Transmit each Payment Request Package to Architect with AIA Form G810 - Transmittal

Letter or other Architect approved transmittal form or letter containing the same information as AIA Document G810. 1. Deliver official submittal of original documents in person or by courier, overnight

delivery service or U.S. Mail postpaid. 2. Do not fax official submittal. Contractor may fax a notification to Architect, on

Contractor’s letterhead, that a Payment Request Package is being sent and when it should arrive. Notification may include a copy of AIA Document G702 and G703 for Architect information.

F. Contents of first Payment Request Package shall include the following:

1. Transmittal - AIA Document G810. 2. Application and Certification for Payment - AIA Document G702. 3. Continuation Sheet - AIA Document G703. 4. Updated Construction Progress Schedule. 5. Non-Kickback Statement.

G. Contents of first Payment Request Package shall include the following:

1. Transmittal - AIA Document G810. 2. Application for Payment Form - BWA Document 702. 4. Application for Payment - Continuation Sheet Form – BWA Document 703. 4. Updated Construction Progress Schedule. 5. Non-Kickback Statement.

H. Contents of subsequent Payment Request Package shall include the following:


1. Transmittal - AIA Document G810. 2. Application for Payment Form - BWA Document 702. 3. Application for Payment - Continuation Sheet Form – BWA Document 703. 4. Stored Material Summary - CSI Form 2.5A as applicable. 5. Updated Construction Progress Schedule. 6. Contractor Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims and Release of Liens. 7. Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims and Release of Liens for each

Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material supplier as applicable. 8. Request for Contract Time Extension as defined within Document 00 7385 -

Determination and Extension of Contract Time. 9. Non-Kickback Statement.

1.6 INCOMPLETE OR INCORRECT SUBMITTALS

A. Incomplete Submittals: Processing will stop for Payment Request Packages received by Architect that do not include all required items. Architect will contact Contractor and advise Contractor of missing items. Contractor is responsible for sending Architect items missing from Payment Request Package. Payment processing will not start until Payment Request Package is complete.

B. Incorrect Submittals: Payment Request Packages that are incorrectly submitted, incorrectly

assembled or have incorrect data will be returned to Contractor for correction. 1. Packages submitted on photocopies of AIA forms rather than original AIA forms will

be returned to Contractor to prepare on original AIA forms. 2. Handwritten forms will be returned to Contractor to prepare in typewritten form. 3. Payment Request Packages with Continuation Sheets containing major incorrect

percentage complete numbers may be marked-up and returned to Contractor for correction.

4. Minor percentage complete numbers may be corrected by Architect and processed with corrected percentages and payment amount.

5. Determination of whether to return Payment Request Package or to process an Architect mark-up of Payment Request Package is at the discretion of the Architect.

C. Contractor is responsible for Payment Request Package processing being stopped due to

submittal of incomplete or incorrect Payment Request Package.

1.7 SUBSTANTIATING DATA

A. If Contractor is making application for payment on account of materials and equipment delivered, suitably stored at site for subsequent incorporation in Work and properly invoiced, Contractor shall provide substantiating data showing flow of materials and equipment in and out of storage on CSI Form 2.5A - Stored Material Summary.

B. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in

question.

C. Provide one (1) copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description.

D. Include the following with application:

1. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors. 2. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules; Revised and current

construction schedule as specified.


1.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. It is the duty, responsibility and obligation of Contractor to achieve Substantial Completion within Contract Time stipulated in Document 00 5213 - Agreement-Stipulated Sum, and the Notice to Proceed.

B. If Contractor does not achieve Substantial Completion within Contract Time, Owner may

suspend further Progress Payments until Work is Substantially Complete as determined by Architect.

C. If Contractor does not achieve Substantial Completion within 30 calendar days after

expiration of Contract Time, Contract Sum will be adjusted as provided in Document 00 7213 – General Conditions in direct relation to true and accurate additional direct costs incurred by Owner, including Architect’s additional fees.

D. Contractor expressly assumes risk of all delays to Work and waives all claims for damages

or additional payment for any such delays to Work.

E. Nothing in Contract Documents limit Owner’s full rights and remedies as allowed by law should delays in Work exceed 30 calendar days beyond Contract Time as established in the Agreement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS

AND RELEASE OF LIENS TO: ________________________________________________ (Project Owner name & address)

________________________________________________

________________________________________________

________________________________________________ (Project name & address)

________________________________________________

________________________________________________ By this instrument the undersigned who performs the _____________ work hereby certifies that on this date, or anytime prior thereto, except as listed below, he has paid in full or has otherwise satisfied all obligations for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services performed and for all known indebtedness and claims against the undersigned for damages arising in any manner on or against the PROJECT, its land, improvements and equipment of every kind. The undersigned hereby certifies that he has received all payments currently due under his contract for work on the Project (except retainage). Therefore, the undersigned does hereby waive and/or release any and all liens against the PROPERTY PROJECT and as of the _______ day of ______________, 20_____.

( ) Partial

( ) Final (including retainage) _______________________________ (Name of Contractor/Subcontractor) By: ___________________________ Title: ________________________


STATE OF ___________________( ) COUNTY OF__________________( )

BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared ____________________; ________________________________ of ________________________ known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and, being first duly sworn, acknowledged to me that he executed the same for the purposes and consideration therein expressed and declared to me that the statements contained therein are true. SWORN AND SUBSCRIBED to before me this _______ day of _________, 20___ My commission expires: _____________________ _____________________________

NOTARY PUBLIC in and for said County and State. This affidavit and Release shall be executed by the CONTRACTOR, all of his sub-contractors, material suppliers and lessors of equipment; or an independent contractor, who expects payment of funds from the current Progress Payment from the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR, or a Payment directly from the OWNER. Execution hereof is conditioned upon the bank's clearance of any check given in payment of the current Progress Payment.

END OF AFFIDAVIT


NON-KICKBACK STATEMENT (Affidavit for Payment of Claim)

STATE OF ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ) The undersigned ___________________________________________, of lawful age, being first duly sworn, on oath states: that this invoice or claim is true and correct; the work, services, or materials as shown by this invoice or claim have been completed or supplied in accordance with the plans, specifications, orders or requests furnished the claimant: that claimant has made no payment directly or indirectly to any elected official, officer, or employee of Independent School District Number 69I015 of Velma, Stephens County, Oklahoma (Velma-Alma Public Schools), of money or other thing of value to obtain payment of the invoice or procure the contract or purchase order pursuant to which an invoice is required. Affiant NOTARY PUBLIC Subscribed and sworn to before me this ___ day of ______________, 20___. Notary My Commission Expires:

ACCORDING TO OKLAHOMA STATE LAW, ALL INVOICES OF $2,000 OR MORE FROM AN

ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER OR SUPPLIER OF MATERIAL MUST HAVE THE ABOVE

AFFIDAVIT SIGNED, NOTARIZED AND RETURNED BEFORE PAYMENT CAN BE PROCESSED

END OF STATEMENT

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT BWA Form - 702 PAGE ONE OF PAGES

TO OWNER: PROJECT: APPLICATION NO: Distribution to:OWNERARCHITECT

PERIOD TO: CONTRACTORFROM CONTRACTOR: VIA ARCHITECT:

PROJECT NOS:

CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACT DATE:

CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, Application is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract. information and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has beenContinuation Sheet, is attached. completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for which previous Application for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due.

1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM $2. Net change by Change Orders $ CONTRACTOR:3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 ± 2) $4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO $ DATE (Column G on G703) By: Date:5. RETAINAGE:

a. % of Completed Work $ State of: County of:(Column D + E on G703) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of

b. % of Stored Material $ Notary Public:(Column F on G703) My Commission expires:

Total Retainage (Lines 5a + 5b or

Total in Column I of G703) $ 0.00 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW FOR PAYMENT6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE $ 0.00 The Architect hereby confirms that based on site observations and to the best of the

(Line 4 Less Line 5 Total) Architect's knowledge, this payment application accurately reflects the progress of the 7. LESS PREVIOUS APPLICATIONS FOR work and that the quality of the Work, subject to subsequent evaluation, is sufficient to PAYMENT (Line 6 from prior Certificate) $ justify payment in the amount certified by the Contractor and recommended below:8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE $ 0.009. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE $ 0.00

(Line 3 less Line 6) AMOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . $

CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS (Attach explanation if amount differs from the amount applied. Initial all figures on this Total changes approved Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to conform with the adjusted amount.) in previous months by Owner ARCHITECT:

Total approved this Month By: Date:

TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT is payable only to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without

NET CHANGES by Change Order $0.00 prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract.

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT - CONTINUATION SHEET BWA Form - 703 PAGE OF PAGES

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT, containing APPLICATION NO:Contractor's signed certification is attached. APPLICATION DATE:In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. PERIOD TO:

ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO:

A B C D E F G H I J K L MITEM DESCRIPTION OF WORK SCHEDULED TOTAL % COMPLETED BALANCE RETAINAGENO. VALUE (F) FROM WORK IN TOTAL WORK (I) FROM PREV. NEW THIS TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO FINISH

PREVIOUS PLACE THIS IN PLACE APPLICATIONS APPLICATION STORED AND STORED TO DATE (C - G) (J x 0.10)APPLICATIONS APPLICATION TO DATE LESS GOODS USED MATERIAL TO DATE (J / C)

(D + E) THIS PERIOD (G + H)

GRAND TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 0.00% $0.00 $0.00Line 1 on Pay Line 4 on Pay Line 9 on Pay Line 5 on PayApplication Application Application Application

WORK COMPLETED STORED MATERIALS

STORED

MATERIAL SUMMARY

Project: Application Period:

Owner: Application Number:

A/E Project Number: Application Date:

STORED PREVIOUS STORED THIS MONTH INCORPORATED IN WORK

INVOICE

NO.

SUBMITTAL

TRANSMITTAL

NO. MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

DATE

(MO/YR)

AMOUNT

($)

AMOUNT

($)

SUBTOTAL

($)

DATE

(MO/YR)

AMOUNT

($)

MATERIALS

REMAINING

IN STORAGE

($)

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$

-$ -$ -$ -$ -$

Copyright 1994, Construction Specifications Institute, Page __ of __ July 1994

99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314 CSI Form 2.5A

01 2973 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

SECTION 01 2973

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Submittals. 2. Schedule of values. 3. General Conditions breakdown. 4. Individual Section breakdown. 5. Individual Section breakdown - material and labor. 6. Schedule of values breakdown example form, located at end of Section.



2. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Requirements and procedures for bidding.

3. Document 00 2213 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures: Applications for payment. 2. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Substitution requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet itemizing all contract costs with breakdown as specified herein.

C. Submit three copies of Schedule of Values within 10 days of Notice to Proceed.

D. Failure of Contractor to submit complete and accurate Schedule of Values within specified

time and as specified in this Section will cause processing of Contractor Payment Request Packages to stop. Payment processing will not start until Schedule of Values has been submitted, reviewed and accepted by Architect.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Contractor is responsible for and shall provide a complete and detailed accounting to Owner

of all Contractor costs for this Project. Owner requires that Contractor indicate where each dollar of Contract Sum is allocated.

B. The Schedule of Values will be used by Architect as a basis for reviewing Contractor's

Applications for Payment. C. Schedule of Values shall be broken down by Document and Specification utilizing Table of

Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of Document or Specification Section.

01 2973 - 2 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this section. For unit cost

Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item.

E. Revise schedule as necessary to reflect approved Change Orders with each Application for

Payment.

F. Refer to attached Sample Form for Schedule of Values. 1. Sample Form is not an exact breakdown for this Project, but an example of how the

Schedule of Values for this Project should appear. Section numbers and titles in the Sample Form are not specifically prepared for this Project.

2. Sample Form is not an eact copy of AIA Document G703, only a representation of AIA Document G703.

1.4 GENERAL CONDITIONS BREAKDOWN

A. Contracting Requirements: Provide breakdown for the following: 1. Document 00 3143 - Permit Application: Cost of all permits and fees for Project. 2. Document 00 6100 - Bonds: Cost of bonding Project. 3. Document 00 7213 - General Conditions: Cost of miscellaneous Contractor

expenses applicable to Project. 4. Document 00 7316 - Insurance Requirements: Cost of Insurance for Project.

B. General Requirements: Provide breakdown for the following: 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary: Cost of Contractor mobilization. 2. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Cost for Contractor Project 3. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Cost for Testing Laboratory tests

and site inspections. 4. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Cost for Geotechnical

Engineer site inspections. 5. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Cost for temporary construction

fencing. 6. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: Cost for temporary construction utility service. 7. Section 01 5213 - Field Offices and Sheds: 8. Section 01 5800 - Project Identification: Cost for jobsite sign. 9. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Cost for Project cleaning during construction. 10. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Cost for Final Cleaning.

C. Contractor Overhead and Profit: Cost for Contractor overhead and Contractor Profit.

1.5 INDIVIDUAL SECTION BREAKDOWN

A. Provide cost for Work for both material and labor as 1 line item for all Specification Sections not specified for further breakdown.



END OF SECTION

CONTINUATION SHEET - BWA DOCUMENT 703 SAMPLE FORM PAGE 1 OF 3

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

ITEM DESCRIPTION OF WORK SCHEDULE TOTAL % BALANC RETAINAGNO. VALUE (F) FROM WORK IN TOTAL (I) FROM PREV. NEW THIS TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO

PREVIOUS PLACE THIS IN PLACE APPLCATIONS APPLICATION STORED AND STORED TO DATE (C - G) (J x 0.10)APPLICATIONS APPLICATION TO DATE LESS GOODS MATERIAL TO DATE

(D + E) THIS PERIOD (G + H)Contracting Requirements00 6100 Bonds00 7213 General Conditions Superintendence/Contractor Quality Control Mobilization Permits & Fees Misc. GC Expenses00 7316 Insurance Requirements

Division 1 General Requirements01 4523 Testing and Inspection Services

Division 3 Concrete03 0586 Vapor Barrier03 1100 Concrete Forming03 2000 Concrete Reinforcement03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete Building Concrete03 3500 Concrete Finishing03 3900 Concrete Curing

Division 4 Masonry04 2111 Brick Veneer04 2200 Concrete Masonry Units04 2206 Masonry Screen Walls - Concrete

Division 5 Metals05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing05 5000 Metal Fabrications

Division 6 Wood and Plastic06 2000 Finish Carpentry

06 4102 Custom Architectural Wood Casework

Division 12 Furnishings12 3624 Plastic Laminate Countertop

STORED MATERIALS

BWA Document 703. APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE OF PAYMENT. Containing Contractor's signed Certificate is Attached in tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar.

APPLICATION NUMBER:APPLICATION DATE:PERIOD FROM: TO:

Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. ARCHITECT'S PROJECT No:

WORK COMPLETED

Continuation Sheet BWA Document 703 Page 1 of 3 Section 01 2974






STORED MATERIALS




WORK COMPLETED

Division 13 Special Construction13 3421 Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings Material Erection

Division 21 Fire Suppression

21 1300 Fire-Suppression Sprinklers System

Division 22Plumbing22 0000 General Plumbing22 1000 Piping and Pumps

Division 23HVAC

23 0500 Mechanical Systems, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing23 0700 HVAC Insulation23 3200 Air Outlets and Inlets23 3300 Air Duct Accessories23 3313 Fire and Smoke Dampers23 3400 HVAC Fans23 6200 Single Packaged HVAC Units

Division 25 Integrated Automation25 3700 Integrated Intercommunication System

Division 26 Electrical26 0500 Electrical Identification26 0513 Conduit26 0515 Building Wire and Cable26 0518 Boxes26 0521 Wiring Devices26 0526 Electrical Grounding







STORED MATERIALS




WORK COMPLETED

26 0529 Hangers and Supports26 1800 Motor and Circuit Disconnects26 1805 Fuses26 2400 Panelboards26 5000 Lamps26 5100 Ballasts and Accessories26 5105 Interior Building Lighting

Division 27 Communications27 3200 Telephone Service, Pathway and Wiring

Division 28Electronic Safety & Security28 0513 Fire Alarm and Detection System

Division 31 Earthwork31 1000 Site Clearing31 2200 Grading31 2316 Spread and Continuous Footings31 2324 Fill and Backfill31 2333 Trenching for Site Utilities

31 2500 Erosion and Sedimentation Control31 3116 Soil Treatment for Termite Control31 3216 Excavation31 3200 Soil Stabilization

Division 32 Exterior Improvements32 1314 Concrete Walks and Pads32 1541 Gravel Surfacing32 9223 Sodding

Division 33 Utilities33 4915 Storm Drainage

Categories and subcategories to be added or deleted for each project as required. G.C. profit and overhead shall be prorated to each item/ category as applicable. Subcontractors cost, profit and overhead shall be included in their respective item/category. After each line item, under Description of Work, G.C. shall indicate in parenthesis, as a percentage, each item/categories material/subcontractors cost.

End of Document


01 3300 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 3300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A Section Includes: 1. Procedures. 2. Re-submittals. 3. Schedule of Submittals. 4. Schedule of Values. 5. Shop Drawings. 6. Product Data. 7. Samples. 8. Field Samples/Mock-Ups. 9. Manufacturer's Instructions. 10. Certificates. 11. Closeout Submittals. 12. Contractor Action. 13. Architect Action. 14. Architect’s Consultant Action. 15. AIA Document G810 - Transmittal Letter. 16. CSI Form 12.2A - Submittal Checklist. 17. CSI Form 12.1B - Submittal Log.




1. Section 01 2973 - Schedule of Values: Submittal requirements. 2. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Schedule submittal

requirements. 3. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Field samples/mock-ups. 4. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Requirements for closeout and Project

Record Submittals. 5. Divisions 21 through 28: Additional submittal requirements and procedures for

Mechanical and Electrical.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions; Article 3.12 for definitions of the following:

1. Product Data 2. Samples 3. Shop Drawings 4. Submittal Package 5. Submittals

1.3 PROCEDURES


A. Submit complete Submittal Packages. Coordinate each Submittal with Submittal

requirements defined within Technical Section. Submittals covering the same Broad Grouping of the Work shall be submitted at the same time. 1. Broad Groupings of Work may be defined by Contractor provided that Submittals

within Broad Groupings are identified separately by Section number with separate transmittal.

2. Using the Table of Contents from Project Manual, prepare Submittals, and Submittal Packages to identify contents of each Submittal.

3. Submit Mechanical and Electrical Submittal Packages concurrent with one another in quantities required. a. Data within Mechanical and Electrical Submittal Packages shall be coordinated

prior to submitting to Architect for action. B. Each Submittal Package shall contain a Cover Sheet followed by an Index reflecting

contents of Package. Each item of Submittal Package shall be tabbed and labeled. 1. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or Submittal Packages not prepared as

defined herein will be subject to rejection and returned to the Contractor with no action taken.

C. Architect will not accept partial Submittals.

1. Any partial submittal received will be returned to Contractor without action.

D. Architect will not accept Submittals which obviously have not been reviewed by the Contractor before submittal to Architect. Any such submittal received will be returned to Contractor without action.

E. Make Submittals promptly in accordance with Submittal Schedule. Failure of Contractor to

transmit Submittals to Architect in sufficient time for review shall not constitute adequate cause for extension of Contract Time.

F. Submittals shall be fastened in binders or folders, or otherwise assembled and organized

into an easily manageable format and accompanied by separate transmittal form for each Submittal. 1. Submittals covering the same Broad Grouping of the Work shall be submitted at the

same time. 2. Loose or fragmented submittals will be returned to Contractor without action.

G. Each Submittal shall contain the following information:

1. Date of Submittal and dates of previous Submittals. 2. Project title and Architect’s project number. 3. Names of Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier and Manufacturer, as applicable. 4. Field dimensions, clearly identified as field dimensions. 5. Location where material and/or equipment will be installed; relation of product to

adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials. 6. Contractor’s stamp, initialed and signed, certifying Contractor review of Submittals,

verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, as well as coordination of information within Submittal with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents as a whole.

H. Transmit each Submittal to Architect with AIA Form G810 “Transmittal Letter” or other

Architect approved transmittal form or letter containing the same information as AIA Form G810.


1. Submittal Packages and Submittals shall be delivered in person or by courier, overnight delivery service or U.S. Mail postpaid.

2. Do not fax submittals.

I. Sequentially number the transmittal form for each Submittal. Revise Submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.

J. Transmit each Submittal within Submittal Package identifying the Project, Contractor,

subcontractor, and major supplier. 1. Prominently identify Submittal by Specification Section and pertinent Drawing or

Detail number, as appropriate. 2. Identify deviations from Contract Documents.

a. Identify deviations from specified products or procedures. b. Identify deviations from specified standards.

3. Failure of Contractor to identify deviations will result in Submittal being returned to Contractor marked “Incomplete-Rejected.” a. Upon receipt of returned item, revise Submittal to identify deviations and

resubmit to Architect for review. 4. Provide space for Contractor and Architect or Architect’s Consultant review stamps.

K. Submittals that will be forwarded to Architect’s Consultants shall be prepared in

conformance with this Section and in conformance with requirements contained in other Sections outlining Architect’s Consultants procedures.

L. Submit initial Construction Schedule and Schedule of Values, as specified after Award of

Contract. After review by Architect revise and resubmit as required. Submit revised schedules as specified reflecting changes since previous submittal.

M. Comply with Construction Schedule for Submittals related to Work progress. Coordinate

Submittals of related items.

N. Submittal to Architect for review is for the limited purpose of checking for conformance information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 1. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color or finish selection.

O. After Architect review of Submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes

made since previous submittal. 1. Failure of Contractor to identify changes will result in item being returned to

Contractor marked “Incomplete-Rejected.” a. Upon receipt of returned item, revise item to identify changes and resubmit.

P. Distribute copies of reviewed Submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to

promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

Q. Maintain copies of Submittals at site as specified in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

R. Maintain Project Record Submittals for Owner's Record submitted at Project Closeout as

specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

1.4 RESUBMITTALS

A. Resubmit Submittals received back from Architect marked “Revise and Resubmit,” “Incomplete-Rejected," or “Provide Contract Specified Item.”


B. Re-submittal shall include entire original submittal with corrected items clearly identified by

circling, highlighting or other Architect approved method. Provide clear, concise and complete written description of what revisions to original submittal have been made and where.

C. Re-submittal of only revised data without entire original submittal not permitted. Any re-

submittals without the entire original submittal, revised data, identification of revised data, and written description of revisions will result in re-submittal being returned to Contractor marked “Incomplete-Rejected.”

D. If Architect or Architect’s Consultants are required to perform a second, or more, re-

submittal review because the re-submittal is incomplete or incorrect and must be returned to Contractor marked "Incomplete-Rejected:" 1. Architect will invoice Owner for additional services by the Architect or Architect’s

Consultants. 2. Contractor shall pay for Architect’s or Architect’s Consultant additional services by

deductive change order. 3. Change order will be issued deducting the additional service amount from the

Contract Sum.

1.5 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS

A. Submit three (3) copies of proposed Schedule of Submittals to Architect, within (10) days after Date of Notice to Proceed. List all items that require submittal for review by Architect in accordance with Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

B. Submit three (3) copies of final Schedule of Submittals to Architect within five (5) days after

receipt of proposed Schedule of Submittals review from Architect.

C. Schedule of Submittals: Include the following. 1. Indicate type of Submittal; Product Data, Shop Drawing, Sample, Certificate, or other

Submittal. 2. Identify by Specification Section number, Specification paragraph number where item

is specified, and description of item being submitted. 3. Indicate scheduled date for initial submittal, date for approval, and date for possible

re-submittal for each submittal. 4. Indicate number of submittal copies required for each submittal.

D. Coordinate Schedule of Submittals with Construction Schedule. Revise and update

Schedule of Submittals when required by changes in the Construction Schedule. Provide Architect with updated schedules within five (5) days of date schedule is revised.

E. Prepare Schedule of Submittals on CSI Form 12.2A - Submittal Checklist, CSI Form 12.1B -

Submittal Log or other Architect approved form or document Contractor prefers to use.

1.6 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Refer to Section 01 2973 - Schedule of Values.

1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.


B. It is the sole responsibility of Contractor, Subcontractors or Material Suppliers to prepare their own drawings or offer materials as required by their submittals.

C. Shop Drawings shall be presented in clear and thorough manner. Plan drawings shall be

identified by reference to sheet numbers and room numbers indicated on Contract Documents. Detail drawings shall be identified by reference mark to sheet and plan drawing indicated on Contract Documents. 1. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements

and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Submit five (5) copies for Submittals reviewed only by Architect:

1. Three (3) copies will be returned to Contractor. 2. One (1) copy will be returned to Contractor for Contractor to keep, assemble and

furnish to Owner as a Record Submittal as specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

3. One (1) copy will be kept by Architect.

E. Submit six (6) copies for Submittals reviewed by Architect’s Civil and Structural Consultant: 1. Three (3) copies will be returned to Contractor. 2. One (1) copy will be returned to Contractor for Contractor to keep, assemble and


3. One (1) copy will be kept by Architect. 4. One (1) copy will be kept by Architect’s Civil or Structural Consultant (as appropriate).

F. Submit seven (7) copies for Submittals reviewed by Architect’s Mechanical and Electrical

Consultant: 1. Three (3) copies will be returned to Contractor. 2. One (1) copy will be returned to Contractor for Contractor to keep, assemble and


3. One (1) copy will be kept by Architect. 4. Two (2) copies will be kept by Architect’s Mechanical and Electrical Consultant. (as

appropriate).

G. Contractor is allowed to submit one (1) electronic set of required Submittals to Architect for action instead of required number(s) of Submittals outlined above. 1. Electronic Submittals shall be submitted on single writable compact disk in latest PDF

format.

H. Reproductions of Contract Documents not permitted. 1. Submittals received containing reproductions of Contract Documents will be returned,

without review, for revision and re-submittal.

1.8 PRODUCT DATA A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data;

supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to Work. Indicate performance characteristics and capacities. Indicate dimensions and clearance required. Indicate connections to building systems and adjacent materials. Include manufacturers' installation instructions when required by individual Specification Section.


C. Manufacturer’s standard schematic drawings and diagrams shall be modified to delete information which is not applicable to Work.

D. Submit five (5) copies for Submittals reviewed only by Architect:

1. Three (3) copies will be returned to Contractor. 2. One (1) copy will be returned to Contractor for Contractor to keep, assemble and


3. One (1) copy will be kept by Architect.

E. Submit six (6) copies for Submittals reviewed by Architect’s Civil and Structural Consultant: 1. Three (3) copies will be returned to Contractor. 2. One (1) copy will be returned to Contractor for Contractor to keep, assemble and


3. One (1) copy will be kept by Architect. 4. One (1) copy will be kept by Architect’s Civil or Structural Consultant (as appropriate).

F. Submit seven (7) copies for Submittals reviewed by Architect’s Mechanical and Electrical

Consultant: 1. Three (3) copies will be returned to Contractor. 2. One (1) copy will be returned to Contractor for Contractor to keep, assemble and


3. One (1) copy will be kept by Architect. 4. Two (2) copies will be kept by Architect’s Mechanical and Electrical Consultant. (as

appropriate).

G. Contractor is allowed to submit one (1) electronic set of required Product Data to Architect for action instead of required number(s) of Product Data outlined above. 1. Electronic Product Data shall be submitted on single writable compact disk in latest

PDF format.

1.9 SAMPLES

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

B. Submit samples for selection of finishes maximum 60 days after date of Notice to Proceed. Color samples shall be submitted before date for Payment Request No. 2 submittal. Payment Request No. 2 will not be processed until all color samples are submitted.

C. Submit all samples together as one (1) Color Sample Submittal Package.

D. Submit full range of manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect

selection.

E. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work.

F. Include identification on each sample, giving full information.

G. Submit number of samples specified in respective Specification section; two (2) will be

retained by Architect. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in the Specification Section.


H. Approved samples may be returned in the form of a Color Board. Maintain Color Board and

other returned samples at Project Site for comparison of functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Work. 1. One (1) copy of each approved sample shall be used for Project Record Submittals.

1.10 FIELD SAMPLES/MOCK-UPS

A. Specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submittal of manufacturer's installation instructions is for information only and will not be reviewed by Architect.

B. When required in individual Specification Section, submit manufacturer's printed

instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation (start-up) adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

C. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special

environmental criteria required for application or installation.

D. Clearly identify conflicts between requirements of Contract Documents and Manufacturer’s Instructions.

1.12 CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit certification by manufacturer to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 1. Certification shall contain the following statement:

“(NAME OF MANUFACTURER) hereby certifies that the requirements of the Contract Documents for (NAME, NUMBER AND ADDRESS OF PROJECT) have been carefully studied and that (NAME OF PRODUCT OR MATERIAL) conforms to, or exceeds these requirements.”

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be

acceptable to Architect.

D. Contractor Installation Certification: When specified in individual Specification Section, submit notarized Contractor Installation Certification form as a Record Document Closeout Submittal.

1.13 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

B. Project Record Submittals: Maintain one (1) set of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Manufacturer’s Instructions as specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

1.14 CONTRACTOR ACTION


A. Preparation of overall Submittal Package is the responsibility of Contractor.

1. Preparation of trade specific Submittals is the responsibility of specific trade subcontractor.

2. Preparation of product specific Submittals is the responsibility of the product manufacturer representative.

B. Prepare Submittals and submit to Architect, after Contractor review and approval in

accordance with the approved Submittal Schedule. 1. Refer to Document 00 7213 – General Conditions.

C. Receive Submittals from subcontractors, material suppliers and others.

D. Review Submittals and re-Submittals from subcontractors, material suppliers and others for

conformance with the Contract Documents before submitting to Architect. Review shall be thorough, complete and detailed. 1. Return incomplete or incorrect Submittals for correction and re-submittal to

Contractor. 2. Receive corrected re-Submittals form subcontractors, material suppliers and others;

review for required corrections and conformance with Contract Documents.

E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

1.15 ARCHITECT ACTION

A. For Submittals where action and return is required or requested, Architect will review each Submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return to Contractor. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. 2. Submittals for Information, Closeout Documents, Record Documents and other

Submittals for similar purposes, no action will be taken.

B. Action Stamp: Architect will stamp each Submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken. 1. "Reviewed": Final Unrestricted Release. Where Submittals are marked "Reviewed",

that part of the Work covered by the Submittal may precede provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

2. "Make Corrections Noted": Final-But-Restricted Release. When Submittals are marked "Make Corrections Noted", that part of the Work covered by the Submittals may precede provided it complies with notations or corrections on the Submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

3. "Revise and Resubmit": Returned for Re-submittal. When Submittal is marked "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the Submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new Submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit Submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit," to be used at the

Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. "Incomplete-Rejected": When Submittal is marked "Incomplete-Rejected," do not

proceed with that part of the Work covered by the Submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Product Shall Not Be Used.


a. Do not permit Submittals marked "Incomplete-Rejected," to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

5. Provide Contract Specified Item: When Submittal is marked “Provide Contract Specified Item,” provide item as specified in the Contract Documents. No deviations permitted.

1.16 ARCHITECT’S CONSULTANT ACTION

A. Architect will forward appropriate Submittals to Consultant.

B. Consultant will review Submittals and take action as indicated on Consultant’s Review Stamp.

C. Architect will return Submittals to Contractor with attached Architect’s Submittal Transmittal

indicating Architect Action.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

SUBMITTAL

LOG

Project:

Owner:

A/E Project Number:

Contractor:

SPEC.

SECTION

NO.

N

E

W

S

U

B

R

E

S

U

B

M

I

T

ITEM DESCRIPTION

SUBMITTAL

NO.

DATE

RECD

CONSULTANT

DATE

RETD

A C T I O N

TO

DATE

SENT

DATE

RETD

APPD

APPD

AS

NOTED

NOT

SUBJT

TO

REVIEW

NO

ACTION

REQ.

REVISE/

RESUB.

REJECT/

RESUB.

APPD

AS

NOTED/

RESUB.

Copyright 1996, Construction Specification Institute,


Page of September 1996

CSI Log Form 12.1B

SUBMITTAL

CHECKLIST

Project:

Owner:

A/E Project Number:

Contractor:

PRECONSTRUCTION

POST-CONSTRUCTION

SPECIFICATION SECTION

(Number and Title)

PROD.

DATA

SHOP

DWG.

SAMP.

CALC.

DGN.

DATA

TEST

RPT.

CERT.

QUALF.

MFG.

INST.

CONF.

MFG.

FLD.

RPT.

REC.

DOC.

O / M

DATA

WRTY.

O = Required X = Received R = Rejected / Resubmit A = Approved




CSI Form 12.2A

01 3516 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 3516

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Products and installation for patching and extending Work. 2. Transition and adjustments. 3. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning.




1. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures, protection of installed work, and cleaning during construction.

2. Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching: Requirements for cutting and patching.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing Products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing Products where

necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as indicated, and ready for alteration work. 1. Examine elements subject to damage or movement during alterations. 2. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. 3. Verify that demolition is complete and areas are ready for installation of new Work.

C. Report in writing to Architect and Owner’s Representative prevailing conditions that will

adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.


D. By starting Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to Owner.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion.

B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals,

and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work.

C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.

D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes.

E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather

and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion to accommodate Owner occupancy.

B. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of

restoring Products and finishes to specified condition in accordance with Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching.

C. Re-cover and refinish Work that exposes mechanical and electrical work exposed

accidentally during the work.

D. Install Products as specified in individual Sections and on Drawings.

3.4 TRANSITIONS

A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patch Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance.

B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible,

terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect.

3.5 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

B. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing

a smooth transition for Architect review.

C. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.


3.6 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES

A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections.

B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product sections.

B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

END OF SECTION

01 4500 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 01 4500

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Quality Control. 2. Workmanship. 3. References and Standards. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions. 5. Manufacturer's Certificates. 6. Manufacturer's Field Services. 7. Contractor's Quality Control.




1. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Project Field Superintendent.

2. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 3. Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing and inspections. 4. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Inspections. 5. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product

quality. 6. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Requirements for project closeout. 7. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Refer to Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services.

B. Testing Laboratory Test Reports: Refer to Section 01 4523 - Testing Laboratory Services.

C. Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Reports: Refer to Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services.

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship to produce work of specified quality.

B. Quality control monitored and documented by Contractor Quality Control Representative.

1.4 WORKMANSHIP


A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.

B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand

stresses, vibration, and racking.

1.5 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents,

except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.

E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Architect before proceeding.

F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.6 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

1.7 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES

A. When required by individual Specifications Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.8 MOCKUPS

A. When required by individual Specification Sections, erect complete, full-scale mockup of assembly at Project site. Remove mockup at completion, when approved by Architect.

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. When required by individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to make appropriate recommendations.

1.10 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES


A. Refer to Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services.

B. Refer to Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor is responsible for overall quality of Work performed by Contractor or subcontractors working under this Contract.

B. Quality of any part of Work must not be less than that required by Contract Documents.

B. If Architect or Owner's Representative determines that quality of work does not conform to

Contract Documents, Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, areas of non-conformance.

C. Contractor must correct identified deficiencies and advise Architect of corrective action taken within seven (7) days of date of notification.

3.2 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Architect before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.


B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with

Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. See individual specification sections for testing required.

B. Refer to Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services.

3.5 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

3.6 CONTRACTOR FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTING

A. Contractor: Test and Inspect Work provided under this Contract to ensure Work is in compliance with Contract requirements.

B. Preparatory Inspection: Performed prior to beginning Work and prior to beginning each

segment of Work and includes: 1. Review of Contract requirements. 2. Review of shop drawings and other submittal data after return and approval. 3. Examination to assure materials and equipment conform to Contract requirements. 4. Examination to assure required preliminary or preparatory Work is complete.

C. Initial Inspection: Performed when representative portion of each segment of Work is

completed and includes: 1. Performance of required tests. 2. Quality of workmanship. 3. Review for omissions or dimensional errors. 4. Examination of products used, connections and supports. 5. Approval or rejection of inspected segment of Work.

D. Follow-Up Inspections: Performed daily, and more frequently as necessary, to assure non-complying Work has been corrected.

3.7 CONTRACTOR'S TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS

A. Contractor Quality Control Representative shall prepare and submit, to Architect and Owner, a written report of each test or inspection signed by Project Field Superintendent, person or entity performing inspection within two (2) days following day inspection was made.

B. Include the following on written reports of inspection:

1. Cover sheet prominently identifying that inspection "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to Contract Documents.


2. Date of inspection and date of report. 3. Project name, location, solicitation number, and Contractor. 4. Names and titles of individuals making inspection, if not Contractor's Project Field

Superintendent. 5. Description of Contract requirements for inspection by referencing Specification

Section. 6. Description of inspection made, interpretation of inspection results, and notification of

significant conditions at time of inspection. 7. Requirements for follow-up inspections.

C. Be prepared to discuss Contractor’s Contractor Test and Inspection Report contents with

Architect at the weekly Jobsite Progress Meeting.

3.8 NON-COMPLIANCE CHECK-OFF LIST

A. Maintain check-off list of Work that does not comply with Contract Documents, stating specifically what is non-complying, date faulty Work was originally discovered, and date Work was corrected.

B. No requirement to report deficiencies corrected same day it was discovered.

C. Submit copy of Non-Compliance Check-Off List of non-complying work items to Architect

and Owner's Contract Coordinator on a weekly basis.

D. Be prepared to discuss Contractor’s Non-Compliance Check-Off List contents with Architect at the weekly Jobsite Progress Meeting.

3.9 COMPLETION AND INSPECTION OF WORK

A. Substantial Completion: Refer to Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

B. Prior to final acceptance by Architect and Owner's Representative, submit a certification, on Contractor's Letterhead, signed by Contractor to Architect and Owner stating that all Work has been inspected and all Work, except as specifically noted, is complete and in compliance with Contract Documents.

C. Record Documents:

1. By Project Field Superintendent. 2. Ensure that "Record Documents" required by Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals

are marked to show any deviations which have been made during the course of construction and are kept current on a daily basis.

3. Upon completion of the Work, certify the accuracy of the Record Documents and submit to Architect as specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

END OF SECTION

01 4523 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

SECTION 01 4523

TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Selection and payment. 2. Agency responsibilities. 3. Agency reports. 4. Limits on testing authority. 5. Contractor responsibilities. 6. Schedule of Tests and Inspections.




1. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Schedule for testing and inspections.

2. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Manufacturer's certificates. 3. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor inspections. 4. Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services: Engineer inspections. 5. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 802 - Practice for Conducting an Inter-laboratory Test Program to Determine

the Precision of Test Methods for Construction. 2. ASTM C 1077 - Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates

for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 3. ASTM C 1093 - Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. 4. ASTM D 3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or

Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. 5. ASTM E 329 - Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Inspection and Testing Agencies

as Used in Construction. 6. ASTM E 543 - Practice for Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing

Agencies. 7. ASTM E 548 - Practice for Preparation of Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of Testing

Laboratories and Inspection Bodies. 8. ASTM E 699 - Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing,

Quality Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E6.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

NOT USED


1.4 SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Employment and payment for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory to perform specified testing, by Contractor.

B. Employment of testing agency or laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to

perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Laboratory shall be an Approved Agency conforming to the requirements of International Building Code, as adopted by the jurisdiction of record, Section 1703.

B. Comply with requirements of ASTM C802, ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, ASTM D3740,

ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM E548, and ASTM E699.

C. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located.

D. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time Registered Professional Engineer on staff to review services.

E. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy

traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

1.6 AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Perform tests and inspections listed in "Schedule of Tests and Inspections." B. Testing Laboratory Engineer or Technician shall be thoroughly familiar with testing

requirements specified for this Project. Upon arrival at Project Site, Engineer or Technician shall meet with Project Field Superintendent and go over specified testing and inspection requirements for that day's work, including review of pertinent drawings, specification sections, mix designs, etc..

C. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

D. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance

of services.

E. Perform specified sampling, testing and inspection of Products in accordance with specified standards.

F. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of

Work or Products.

1.7 AGENCY REPORTS

A. After each test, promptly submit copies of laboratory reports for indicated tests as required by Document 00 7213 – General Conditions, within 48 hours as follows:


1. Owner: Two (2) copies. 2. Architect: One (1) copy. 3. Structural Engineer: One (1) copy. 4. Civil Engineer One (1) copy. 5. Geotechnical Engineer One (1) copy. 6. Contractor: Two (2) copies. 7. Subcontractor: One (1) copy.

B. Include the following in each report:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Identification of product and specification section. 6. Location in Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of tests. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 11. Conformance with Contract Documents.

C. Report unsatisfactory conditions or failure to comply with requirements of Contract

Documents as required by Document 00 7213 – General Conditions.

D. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results.

1.8 LIMITS ON TESTING AUTHORITY

A. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

C. Agency or laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

D. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

1.9 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Deliver to agency or laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.

C. Furnish copies of products test and mill test reports or steel reports as required.

D. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested. 3. To facilitate tests. 4. To provide storage and curing of test samples.


E. Notify Architect 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing services so

that Architect may be present. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Architect

and Owner for personnel travel and expenses incurred due to Contractor’s negligence.

F. Notify Geotechnical Engineer 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring

inspection so that Geotechnical Engineer may be present. 1. When inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Geotechnical

Engineer for personnel travel and expenses incurred due to Contractor’s negligence.

G. Arrange with Testing Laboratory and pay for additional tests and inspections as follows: 1. Perform additional tests and inspections due to unsatisfactory conditions or failure to

comply with requirements of Contract Documents as required by Document 00 7213 – General Conditions.

2. Perform additional tests and inspections requested by Architect and required by Document 00 7213 – General Conditions.

1.10 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Specified in Section 01 4525 - Geotechnical Engineer Inspection Services.

1.11 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Perform tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents and by authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with General Conditions Document 00 7213 – General Conditions.

B. Perform tests and inspections required by Building Code and by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Specific requirements and standards for tests and inspections are specified in the following individual Specification Sections: 1. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill:

a. Inspection and approval of Structural fill material. b. Documentation of unsuitable fill material removal. c. Inspection and approval of Limestone Screening fill material. d. Determine actual groundwater levels at start of earthwork operations. e. Compaction density for each lift of structural fill with frequency specified in

Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill. f. Compaction density for each lift of Limestone Screening fill with frequency

specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill. g. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing

uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698. 2. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling:

a. Compaction density for backfill with frequency specified in Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

3. Section 31 2316 – Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings: a. Inspection of footing excavation to determine proper bearing stratum,

excavations clean, dry and meeting required tolerances.


b. Prepare and submit footing log. 4. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement.

a. Inspection of reinforcing materials. b. Inspection of reinforcing placement. c. Tests of reinforcing material if steel is from an undetermined origin or mill

certificates unavailable. 5. Section 03 3000- Cast-In-Place Concrete.

a. Compressive strength tests. b. Slump tests. c. Air content tests. d. Unit weight tests. e. Temperature tests.

6. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Masonry Units: a. Inspect CMU for size, grade and type. b. Inspection of mortar and grout proportions. c. Inspection of mortar joints. d. Inspection of reinforcing and connections. e. Inspection of grout placement.

7. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel: a. Verification of welder AWS certification. b. Shop welded and bolted inspections. c. Field inspections. d. High-strength bolt inspections. e. Field welding inspections. f. Headed stud connector welding.

8. Section 05 3100 - Steel Deck: a. Deck installation inspection. b. Field welding inspection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

01 4525 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1111 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER INSPECTION SERVICES

SECTION 01 4525 BWA MSTR 1111

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER INSPECTION SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions. 2. Selection and payment. 3. Geotechnical Engineer responsibilities. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Limits on authority. 6. Contractor responsibilities. 7. Special inspections. 8. Schedule of inspections. 9. Special Inspections.




1. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor quality control inspections. 2. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Testing and inspection services. 3. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling: Testing and inspection services.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Geotechnical Engineer-of-Record: Professional geotechnical engineer who prepared the Geotechnical Report for this specific Project.

B. Geotechnical Inspection Engineer: Professional geotechnical engineer, licensed in the

State where Project is located, who will perform geotechnical inspections for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and recommendations of Geotechnical Report for subsurface soil preparation for paving, building foundation and building slab.

C. Special Inspector: Qualified person who has demonstrated competence, to the satisfaction

of the Building Official, for inspection of the particular type of construction or operation requiring special inspection.

1.3 SELECTION AND PAYMENT - OWNER

A. Employment and payment for services of Geotechnical Inspection Engineer to perform specified geotechnical inspections, by Owner.

B. Employment of Geotechnical Engineer in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to


1.4 GEOTECHNICAL INSPECTION ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES


A. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services.

B. Perform inspections of grading, excavating, trenching, backfilling, compacting and

earthwork operations specified in the individual specification sections and in the Geotechnical Report.

C. Employment of Geotechnical Engineer in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to


D. Submit reports to Architect, with copy to Contractor, giving results of observations and inspections, indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified standards and with Contract Documents.

E. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of

Work or Products.

F. Building Area Sub-grade Pad Completion Inspection: At completion of building area sub-grade pad work, Geotechnical Inspection Engineer shall inspect the completed building area sub-grade pad and issue a report indicating that the building area sub-grade pad was constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents and Geotechnical Report.

1.5 INSPECTION REPORTS

A. After each test, promptly submit copies of laboratory reports for indicated tests as required by Document 00 7213 - General Conditions within 48 hours as follows: 1. Owner: Two (2) copies. 2. Architect: One (1) copy. 3. Civil Engineer: One (1) copy. 4. Contractor: Two (2) copies. 5. Subcontractor: One (1) copy.

B. Include the following in each report:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Geotechnical Engineer name, address and telephone number. 4. Date and time of inspection. 5. Location in Project. 6. Type of inspection and inspection observations and conclusions. 7. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 8. Conformance with Contract Documents.

C. Report unsatisfactory conditions or failure to comply with requirements of Contract

Documents as required by Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with Geotechnical Engineer personnel, and provide access to the Work.

B. Furnish copies of soil test and test reports as required.

C. Provide access to Work to be inspected.


D. Notify Geotechnical Engineer 48 hours prior to expected time for operations and inspections requiring observation so that Geotechnical Engineer may be present. 1. When observations and inspections cannot be performed after such notice,

reimburse Geotechnical Engineer and Owner for personnel travel and expenses incurred due to Contractor’s negligence.

E. Arrange with Geotechnical Engineer and pay for additional inspections as follows:

1. Perform additional inspections due to unsatisfactory conditions or failure to comply with requirements of Contract Documents as required by Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

2. Perform additional inspections requested by Architect and required by Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

1.8 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS

A. Perform inspections required by the Contract Documents and by authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with General Conditions Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

B. Specific requirements for inspections are specified in the following individual Specification

Sections and the Geotechnical Report: 1. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill:

a. Building Area Sub-grade Pad excavation and preparation before start of fill placement.

b. Areas exposed by excavation to receive structural fill. c. Structural fill placement. d. Limestone screenings fill placement. f. Granular fill mat placement.

2. Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization: a. Inspect pavement sub-grade stabilization operations. b. Determine exact amount of soil mix after final grades are developed. c. Approve contractor proposed soil mix before placement begins. d. Make determinations if large rocks or unexpected subsurface conditions are

encountered. 3. Section 31 2316 - Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings:

a. Footing inspection and approval before installation of reinforcing and concrete. 4. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling:

a. Provide compaction density testing on compacted fill. 5. Section 31 6331 - Drilled Concrete Piers and Grade Beams:

a. Pier shaft approval before installation of reinforcing and concrete. b. Grade beam inspection and approval before installation of reinforcing and

concrete.

1.9 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

A. Building Official will determine if Special Inspections are required at time of Building Permit issuance. Building Official may waive Special Inspection requirements as permitted by International Building Code, Currently Adopted Edition applicable to Project location, Section 1704.

B. Owner shall provide special inspections during construction for Work listed in Special

Inspections Schedule.

C. Special inspections are in addition to inspections made by Geotechnical Inspection Engineer in Schedule of Inspections and inspections made by Building Official.


D. Special Inspectors shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official and to Architect as

required by International Building Code, Currently Adopted Edition applicable to Project location, Section 1704.1.2.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

01 5800 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 01 5800

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Project identification sign. 2. Architect's logo plaque. 3. Project identification sign elevation drawing, located at end of Section.




1. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary site facilities.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITY

A. Project identification signs and their maintenance throughout overall project duration by Contractor.


A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr wind velocity.

B. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years.

C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show construction, content, layout, lettering, color and locations on site of each project informational sign.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.

B. Posts: Cedar, pressure treated pine or redwood.


C. Sign Surfaces: Marine grade plywood with medium density overlay (MDO), minimum 3/4 inch thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints.

D. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.

E. Paint: Exterior quality latex enamel, two coats, sign background of Color “A” before

applying other colors.

F. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors as indicated.

2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN

A. One painted sign of construction, design, and content indicated on attached Sign Elevation Drawing, location as indicated on Drawings or as directed by Owner’s Representative.

B. Content: Double faced with identical copy on both sides, unless otherwise noted.

1. Project Name. 2. Owner’s name and address. 3. Mechanical, Electrical, Structural and Civil Engineer’s, name and address. 4. General Contractor, name and address. 5. Others as directed by Architect.

C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: Indicated on Sign Elevation Drawing.

D. Architect’s Logo Plaque:

1. Attach aluminum logo plaque to each side of sign as indicated on Sign Elevation Drawing.

2. Obtain logos from Architect by making request to Cheryl Hardcastle at Boynton Williams & Associates, Norman Office. a. Phone: 405-329-0423. b. Fax: 405-364-1439. c. E-Mail: [email protected].

3. When contacting Architect, provide BWA Project Number and Title, Contractor name, address, telephone number and contact person requesting logos.

4. Cost for Logos: $50.00 for each logo plus cost of shipping. a. Obtain cost of shipping from Architect. b. Send a check for $100.00 plus cost of shipping made out to Boynton Williams &

Associates along with written request for Architect's logos on Contractor letterhead. Include name of person and address where logos should be shipped.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install project identification sign within 10 days from date of Notice to Proceed.

B. Erect at location as directed by Owner Representative.

C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings.

mailto:[email protected]


D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. Provide concrete post footings as required.

E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.

F. Additional Signs: No additional signs permitted on Project Site.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.

B. Remove any signs by subcontractors, suppliers and product manufacturers.

3.3 REMOVAL

A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area.

3.4 SIGN COLOR SCHEDULE

A. Color A: Kelly-Moore Paints KM 3945-1 "Wild Oaks,“ flat finish.

B. Color B: Kelly-Moore Paints AC 219-R "Christmas Red,” semi-gloss finish.

C. Color C: Kelly-Moore Paints AC 259-5 "Dungeon,” semi-gloss finish.

D. Alternate Manufacturer Colors: Submit alternate manufacturer color samples matching specified colors to Architect for review and approval.

3.5 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN ELEVATION DRAWING

A. Drawing follows this Section.

END OF SECTION

01 6200 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 PRODUCT OPTIONS

SECTION 01 6200

PRODUCT OPTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions. 2. Preconstruction submittals. 3. Construction submittals. 4. Products. 5. Product options. 6. Manufacturer’s instructions. 7. Product substitution procedures. 8. Product delivery requirements. 9. Product storage and handling requirements. 10. CSI Form 1.5A - Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers List.


1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents. a. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Substitutions before bid date,

Preconstruction Submittals.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Construction submittals, procedures, shop

drawings, product data and samples. 2. Section 01 4200 - References: Reference standards, abbreviations and definitions. 3. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring. 4. Section 01 6211 - Asbestos Prohibition for Public Works Projects: Oklahoma State

requirements. 5. Section 01 6213 - Product Substitutions Procedures: Substitution procedures during

bidding and after bidding.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide: Furnish and install. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, items, transportation, temporary facilities, services and related items required for a complete installation.

B. Products: Items purchased for incorporation in Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. Term includes the terms material, equipment, system, and terms of similar intent.

C. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's name, including make or model

number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature.

D. Materials: Products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, process, or installed to form a part of Work.


E. Equipment: Product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.

F. Furnish: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, assembly, erection,

placement of similar requirements.

G. Install: Unload, unpack, assemble, erect, place, finish, protect, adjust, and clean, or similar requirements.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS


B. Submit to Architect within 10 calendar days after date of notification of Award of Contract as specified in Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders.

C. Identify work to be performed by Contractor’s own forces.

D. List names of manufacturers, products and suppliers of principal items or systems of

materials and equipment proposed for Work. 1. Submit on CSI Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers List Form 1.5A.

E. Architect and Owner will review submitted data and advice Contractor as specified in

Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS


B. Proposed Products List: Update, modify and expand CSI Form 1.5A, submitted as part of Preconstruction Submittals, to provide list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference

standards. 2. Submit within 10 calendar days after date of Notice to Proceed.

C. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy

to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

D. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project.

E. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with

integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.

F. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

1.5 PRODUCTS


A. Provide Products that comply with Contract Documents, are undamaged, and new at time of installation.

B. Provide Products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices

and details needed for complete installation and intended use and effect.

C. Provide Products of the same kind from a single source. When specified Products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce a quantity adequate to complete Project requirements in compliance with project schedule, contact Architect, in writing, to determine most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When Architect makes determination, select Products from sources producing Products that possess those qualities to fullest extent possible.

D. Nameplates:

1. Except for testing laboratory approval labels, and operating data, do not permanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces or products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on exterior of Work.

2. Locate required labels and stamps on concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surface which, in occupied areas, is not conspicuous.

E. Product Nameplates:

1. Provide permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power operated equipment.

2. Indicate manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, speed, ratings and similar essential operating data.

3. Locate nameplates on an easily accessed surface which, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous.

F. Monitor product quality as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Throughout Contract Documents, types of Products may be specified by manufacturer's name and catalog number to establish standards of quality and performance, not for the purpose of limiting competition. Substitute methods and Products may be submitted to Architect for consideration. Substitutions may not be permitted where Owner requires a particular product for a specific purpose.

B. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product meeting

those standards or description.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications. Substitutions permitted if no Substitutions Not Permitted provision specified.

D. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for

Substitutions: Submit a “Contractor’s Substitution Request” for any manufacturer not named.


E. Products Specified by Naming One Manufacturer and Product with Provision for Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Use product specified or equivalent product from listed Acceptable Manufacturers. This option is used for common equivalent products manufactured by many Acceptable Manufacturers. Product specified establishes standard. Submit data indicating product selected from Other Acceptable Manufacturer meets established standard of specified product.

F. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer with Substitutions Not Permitted

Provision: Use product specified. No options, no substitutions permitted.

1.7 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of Work shall comply with Manufacturer's Published Instructions, obtain and distribute copies of instructions to parties involved in installation, including copies to Architect, prior to starting Work.

B. Maintain one set of complete instructions at Project site during installation and until

completion.

C. Maintain copies for Project Record Documents.

D. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with specified requirements.

E. Inspect substrate to receive Work and conditions Work will be performed for conditions

detrimental to construction. Correct unacceptable conditions to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions,

notify Architect in writing for further instructions. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

G. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit preparatory

steps or installation procedures unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

H. Install Work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and

status of project completion which will ensure best possible results for each item of material or equipment.

I. Isolate non-compatible materials to prevent deterioration.

J. Mount individual units of Work at industry recognized standard mounting heights for

applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to Architect for final decision.

1.8 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Refer to the following Documents for substitution requirements and procedures. 1. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders 2. Document 00 2218 - Additional Instructions to Bidders 3. Section 01 6213 - Product Substitution Procedures


B. Decision of Architect is final.

1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

A. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.

B. Schedule Product delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

C. Coordinate Product delivery with installation schedule to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

D. Deliver Products to Project site in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed

container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

E. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with project requirements,

quantities are correct, Products are undamaged, and properly protected.

F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.10 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers' published instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

B. Store Products subject to damage by elements above ground, under cover in weathertight

enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's published instructions.

C. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

D. Off-site storage not permitted.

E. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation

to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product.

F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.

H. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Not Used.


END OF SECTION

SU

BC

ON

TR

AC

TO

RS

AN

D

MA

JO

R M

AT

ER

IAL

SU

PP

LIE

RS

LIS

T

Pro

ject

:

To

(A

/E):

Fro

m (

Co

ntr

acto

r):

Dat

e:

A/E

Pro

ject

Nu

mb

er:

Co

ntr

act

Fo

r:

L

ist

Su

bco

ntr

acto

rs a

nd

Maj

or

Mat

eria

l S

up

pli

ers

pro

po

sed

fo

r u

se o

n t

his

Pro

ject

as

req

uir

ed b

y t

he

Co

nst

ruct

ion

Do

cum

ents

. A

ttac

h s

up

ple

men

tal

shee

ts i

f n

eces

sary

.

Sec

tio

n

Sec

tio

n

Ph

on

e N

um

ber

Nu

mb

er

Tit

le

Fir

m

Ad

dre

ss

(Fax

Nu

mb

er)

Co

nta

ct

Att

ach

men

ts

Sig

ned

by:

Dat

e:

Co

pie

s:

Ow

ner

C

on

sult

ants

F

ile

C

op

yri

gh

t 1

99

4,

Con

stru

ctio

n S

pec

ific

atio

nsI

nst

itu

te,

99

Can

al C

ente

r P

laza

, S

uit

e 3

00

Ale

xan

dri

a, V

A 2

23

14

Pag

e

o

f

July

19

94

C

SI

Form

1.5

A

01 6211 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 ASBESTOS PROHIBITION

SECTION 01 6211

ASBESTOS PROHIBITION FOR PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Compliance with applicable law. 2. Intent. 3. Statement. 4. Certification forms, located at end of Section.




1. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Product options and procedures.

1.2 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW

A. Contractor shall fully comply with the requirements of Public Law 99-519 the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act of 1986 and the United States Environmental Protection Agency Regulations promulgated October 30, 1987, Federal Register Volume 52, No. 210.

B. Contractor shall enforce compliance with this law and these regulations to all

Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material suppliers on this Project. Each Subcontract, Sub-subcontract and purchase order applicable to this Project shall contain Paragraph A. directly above.

1.3 INTENT

A. It is the specific intent of this Section of the Specification to prohibit the use or installation of any product, material, component of any product or material assembled from two or more separate products or materials, or any other item into the Work which contains more than one (1) percent asbestos by weight, and, thus, would be classified by Law as an Asbestos Containing Building Material.

1.4 STATEMENT

A. The Contractor shall execute, and shall cause each and every Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor and material supplier on this Project to execute the Federal General Contractors Certification of Compliance with Asbestos Restrictions or the Federal Subcontractors or Material Suppliers Certification of Compliance with Asbestos Restrictions.

B. Contractor shall deliver certification as defined above to Owner as part of Closeout

Documents Package.

C. Copies of applicable certifications are attached to this Section.




END OF SECTION


FEDERAL ASBESTOS "STATEMENT" ALTERNATIVE TO INSPECTION

TO:

RE: Sirs, As the Architect of Record for the above referenced project and having prepared the Contract Documents, Construction Drawings and Specifications, Boynton Williams and Associates issued a Certificate of Substantial Completion . In the performance of our professional services for the preparation of Contract Documents, Construction Drawings and Specifications for the above referenced Project, no materials or products were knowingly specified, or called for, in any Construction Document that contained more than one percent (1%) asbestos by weight, within the meaning of Public Law 99-519 together with the United States Environmental Protection Agency Regulations, Section 763.83 promulgated October 30, 1987, Federal Register, Volume 52, No. 210 defining Asbestos Containing Building Material (ACBM). We are enclosing a Federal General Contractors Certificate of Compliance with Asbestos Restrictions which completes the requirements for the Exclusion as allowed in Section 763.99 (a)(7) of the United States Environmental Protection Agency Regulations, promulgated October 30, 1987, Federal Register, Volume 52, No. 210.

Boynton Williams & Associates

BY: _____________________________________ President

DATE:

Subscribed and Sworn to Before Me This day of , 20 .

Notary Public My Commission Expires ____________.


FEDERAL SUBCONTRACTORS OR MATERIAL SUPPLIERS CERTIFICATION OF

COMPLIANCE WITH ASBESTOS RESTRICTIONS

TO: _________________________________ (Name of General Contractor)

RE: Sirs: As a Subcontractor or Material Supplier for the above referenced project we do certify and attest that no building materials or products were knowingly incorporated or installed in this project that contained more than one percent (1%) asbestos by weight, within the meaning of Public Law 99-519 together with the United States Environmental Protection Agency Regulations, Section 763.83 promulgated October 30, 1987, Federal Register, Volume 52, No. 210 defining Asbestos Containing Building Material (ACBM). We also certify and attest that this Certification of Compliance with Asbestos Restrictions was included in each and every Sub-Subcontract and purchase order connected with the performance of Work for this Project, with a copy signed by the Sub-Subcontractor or Material Supplier remaining in our Project File for inspection. Respectfully, (Name of Subcontractor) (Address of Subcontractor)

BY: (Title)

DATE: Attest and Seal: Subscribed and Sworn to Before Me This day of , 20 ____. __________________________________________

Notary Public My Commission Expires .


FEDERAL GENERAL CONTRACTORS CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH

ASBESTOS RESTRICTIONS

TO:

RE: Sirs: As a General Contractor for the above referenced project we do certify and attest that no building materials or products were knowingly incorporated or installed in this Project that contained more than one percent (1%) asbestos by weight, within the meaning of Public Law 99-519 together with the United States Environmental Protection Agency Regulations, Section 763.83 promulgated October 30, 1987, Federal Register, Volume 52, No. 210 defining Asbestos Containing Building Material (ACBM). We also certify and attest that this Certification of Compliance with Asbestos Restrictions was included in each and every Sub-contract and purchase order connected with the performance of Work for this Project, with a copy signed by the Subcontractor or Material Supplier remaining in our Project File for inspection. Respectfully, (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor)

BY: ________________________________ (Title)

DATE:

Attest and Seal: Subscribed and Sworn to Before Me This day of , 20 __.

Notary Public

My Commission Expires .

01 6213 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 6213

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Product substitutions. 2. Substitution request package. 3. Product substitution procedures during bidding. 4. Product substitution procedures after Award of Contract. 5. Architect’s review. 6. CSI Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase). 7. CSI Form 13.1A - Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase).


1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents. a. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders. b. Document 00 2218 - Additional Instructions to Bidders.


1. Section 01 2600 - Contract Modification Procedures: Change order procedures. 2. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitution: Changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.3 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. During the Bidding Phase: Submit proposed substitutions to Architect minimum five (5) days before Bid Date. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. 1. Refer to Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders and Document 00 2218 -

Additional Instructions to Bidders. 2. Requests may be received by a contractor, subcontractor, manufacturer or material

supplier.

B. After the Bidding Phase: Submit proposed substitutions to Architect maximum 60 days after date of Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. 1. Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions. 2. Submit requests only through Contractor.

C. Architect will consider Contractor request for substitutions when the following conditions are

satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action.


1. Proposed substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage or savings in cost, time, energy conservation or other consideration.

2. Specified Product becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor. 3. Proposed substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents. 4. Proposed substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 5. Proposed substitution is fully documented and properly submitted. 6. Proposed substitution will not adversely affect Contractor Construction Schedule. 7. Proposed substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 8. Proposed substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 9. Proposed substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 10. Proposed substitution provides specified warranty. 11. If proposed substitution involves more than one contractor, proposed substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

D. Architect will not consider Contractor request for substitutions if the following conditions

occur. Architect will return requests without action. 1. Proposed substitution is not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this

Section. 2. Acceptance of proposed substitution will require substantial revision of Contract

Documents or building spaces. 3. Proposed substitution does not indicate specific item request is for. 4. Proposed substitution does not offer Owner a substantial advantage or savings in

cost, time, energy conservation or other consideration. 5. Proposed substitution requires extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 6. Proposed substitution is not consistent with the Contract Documents and will not

produce indicated results. 7. Proposed substitution is not fully documented and properly submitted. 8. Proposed substitution will adversely affect Contractor Construction Schedule. 9. Proposed substitution has not received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 10. Proposed substitution is not compatible with other portions of the Work. 11. Proposed substitution has not been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 12. Proposed substitution does not provide specified warranty. 13. If proposed substitution involves more than one contractor, proposed substitution has

not been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is not uniform and consistent, is not compatible with other products, and is not acceptable to all contractors involved.

E. Architect may not consider Contractor request for substitutions if proposed substitution does

not provide a cost savings to Owner and is solely for the convenience of Contractor, subcontractor or material supplier. 1. Requests received not accompanied by a cost savings to Owner may be considered

or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.

F. Materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any product substitution.

G. Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution is final.


1.4 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST PACKAGE

A. Prepare a separate Substitution Request Package for each proposed substitution. Package shall be fastened in binders or folders or otherwise assembled and organized into an easily manageable format and accompanied by transmittal form.

B. Transmit each Substitution Request Package to Architect with AIA Form G810 “Transmittal

Letter” or other Architect approved transmittal form or letter containing the same information as AIA Document G810. 1. Deliver submittal in person or by courier, overnight delivery service or U.S. Mail

postpaid. 2. Do not Fax submittal. Proposer may fax a notification to Architect on proposer’s

letterhead, that a Substitution Request Package is being sent and when it should arrive.

C. Clearly and legibly type all items included on Substitution Request Form.

D. Provide a Point-by-Point Comparison sheet listing manufacturer, model number, specific

features, accessories, function, fabrication method, power and utility requirements, warranty, referenced standards such as ASTM, ANSI, materials, physical properties when tested in conformance with a nationally recognized testing agency and cost. 1. Prepare comparison data side by side in descending columns with specified product

data on left side of page and proposed substitute product data on right side. 2. Where products do not compare, indicate that information in the appropriate column.

E. Provide complete documentation indicating compliance with requirements for substitutions,

and the following information as appropriate: 1. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other

parts of Work and to construction performed by Owner and Separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

2. Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures.

3. Samples, where applicable or requested. 4. A statement indicting the effect of substitution on Contractor Construction Schedule

compared to schedule without approval of substitution. Indicate effect of proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

5. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change in the Contract Sum. 6. Contractor certification that proposed substitution conforms to requirements of

Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated. 7. Contractor waiver of right to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of the failure of substitution to perform adequately.

1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING BIDDING

A. Substitutions proposed with bid not permitted.

B. Refer to Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders, and 00 7213 – General Conditions for additional substitution requirements.

C. Provide data on a Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase) Form, CSI Form 1.5C,

in compliance with the requirements specified in this Section.


D. Contents of Substitution Request Package shall include three (3) copies of the following:

1. Transmittal - AIA Document G810. 2. Substitution Request Form - CSI Form 1.5C. 3. Point-by-Point Comparison. 4. Product Substantiating Data.

1.06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.

B. Refer to Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders, Document 00 2218 - Additional

Instructions to Bidders, and 00 7213 – General Conditions for additional substitution requirements.

C. Provide data on a Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase) Form, CSI Form 13.1A, in

compliance with the requirements specified in this Section.

D. Contents of Substitution Request Package shall include three (3) copies of the following: 1. Transmittal - AIA Document G810. 2. Substitution Request Form - CSI Form 13.1A. 3. Point-by-Point Comparison. 4. Product Substantiating Data.

1.07 ARCHITECT’S REVIEW

A. During the Bidding Phase: Architect will review Substitution Request Package upon receipt to determine if Package is complete and conforms to specified requirements. 1. If Package Does Not conform to specified substitution requirements, submittal will be

returned to proposer as indicated below. 2. If Package conforms to specified substitution requirements, Architect will continue

review and notify proposer as indicated below. 3. During the bidding phase, approved substitutions will be indicated in Addenda for

information of all Bidders.

B. After the Bidding Phase: 1. Architect will review Substitution Request Package within five (5) working days of

receipt of Package. a. If Package Does Not conform to specified substitution requirements, submittal

will be returned to proposer as indicated below. 2. Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation of the

request. 3. Within 10 working days of receipt of Package or five (5) working days of receipt of the

additional information or documentation, whichever is later, Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed substitution.

C. If substitution is Not Approved, submittal form will be returned to proposer marked with one

of the following actions: 1. Substitution Rejected - Use specified materials. 2. Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.


D. If substitution is Approved, submittal for will be returned to proposer marked with one of the

following actions: 1. Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01

3300 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification

Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures. F. After the bidding phase, approved substitution will be issued as a Change Order as

specified in Section 01 2600 - Contract Modification Procedures.



END OF SECTION

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST

(During the Bidding Phase)

Project:

To:

Re:

Substitution Request Number:

From:

Date:

A/E Project Number:

Contract For:

Specification Title: Description:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer: Address: Phone:

Trade Name: Model No.: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, and performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The Undersigned certifies:

Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.

Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.

Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.

Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.

Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the

substitution. Submitted by:

Signed by:

Firm:

Address:

Telephone: A/Es REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date:

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports

Copyright 1996, Construction SpecificationsInstitute,



CSI Form 1.5C

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST

(After the Bidding Phase) Project:

To:

Re:

Substitution Request Number:

From:

Date:

A/E Project Number:

Contract For:

Specification Title: Description:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone:

History: New product 2-5 years old 5-10 yrs old More than 10 years old

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

Point-by-point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation:

Project: Architect:

Address: Owner:

Date Installed:

Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: No Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports


99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA

22314


CSI Form 13.1A

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST (Continued)

The Undersigned certifies:

Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.

Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.

Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.

Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become

apparent are to be waived.

Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.

Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the

substitution.

Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address:

Telephone: Attachments:

A/Es REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330.

Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330.

Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.

Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer A/E


99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA

22314


CSI Form 13.1A

01 7132 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 FIELD ENGINEERING

SECTION 01 7123

FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Survey and field engineering.




1. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project Record Documents.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Land Title Association/American Congress on Surveying and Mapping (ALTA/ACSM): 1. ALTA/ACSM - Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTA/ACSM Land Title

Surveys.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ a Land Surveyor licensed in the State where the project is located and acceptable

to Architect, to perform survey work of this section.

B. Comply with ALTA/ACSM Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Requirements: Requirements for Submittals. 1. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Submit documentation certifying accuracy of survey work.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Requirements for Closeout Submittals. 1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following.

a. Complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. b. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by Licensed Land Surveyor, that

elevations and locations of Work are in conformance with Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

01 7132 - 2 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.

B. Immediately Notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.

3.2 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

A. Locate and protect survey control and reference points.

B Control datum for survey indicated on Drawings.

C. Protect survey control points before starting site work; protect permanent reference points during construction.

D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation

required because of changes in grades or other reasons.

E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect.

3.3 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide field engineering services. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

B. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil

placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations and ground floor elevations.

C. Periodically verify layouts by same means.

END OF SECTION

01 7300 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 EXECUTION

SECTION 01 7300

EXECUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Examination. 2. Preparation. 3. Execution. 4. Cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Demonstration and training; video recording of training. 7. Testing, adjusting and balancing.




1. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Preparation of reports for system start-up and demonstration/instruction.

2. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Cleaning during construction. 3. Section 01 7123 - Field Engineering: Surveying for construction site layout. 4. Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and

patching. 5. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Final cleaning. 6. Divisions 21 through 23 - Mechanical: Requirements for system start-up,

demonstration and training.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for Submittals. 1. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Start-Up Test Procedure Recording Forms: Submit for Architect approval. b. Operational Test Reports: Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01

4500 - Quality Control. 1) Final Acceptance Tests.

c. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Reports: Submit reports from Independent Testing and Balancing Firm.

2. Demonstration and Training Instruction Program: Submit two (2) copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time and instructor’s names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Final acceptance tests for equipment and systems. 2. Demonstration and training agendas. 3. Demonstration and training attendance records.


1.3 EXAMINATION

A. Visit Project Site to Determine Existing Conditions. 1. Take field measurements and verify field conditions, compare field measurements,

conditions, locations of survey benchmarks, and other information known to Contractor, with Contract Documents before starting Work.

2. Be responsible for determining conditions of Project Site, including all existing improvements, paving, above and below ground utilities, and existing construction.

3. Contact local utility companies and make arrangements to obtain utility company location and marking service before start of Work.

B. Review Bidding and Contract Documents.

1. Carefully study and compare Contract Documents with each other. 2. Be responsible for thorough knowledge of Contract Documents and their relationship

to each other, Owner Furnished Products, and Project Site conditions. 3. Report errors, inconsistencies, or omissions discovered to Architect. Architect will

investigate and advise Contractor of any measures to be taken relating to reported errors, inconsistencies, or omissions.

4. If Contractor performs Work knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency, or omission in Contract Documents without notice to Architect, Contractor assumes responsibility for such performance of Work and is responsible for costs of correction of Work.

C. Verify that existing conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable and meet

manufacturer's requirements for application or installation of Work.

D. Verify that substrate is capable of structural attachment of Work being applied or installed.

E. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification Sections.

F. Verify that utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct location for installation of Work.

1.4 PREPARATION

A. Construction Layout: 1. Contractor is responsibility for accuracy of measurements, elevations, lines, and

grades of Work. 2. Do not scale Drawings. Use dimensions indicated on Drawings for laying out Work.

a. Errors in construction caused by Contractor scaling Drawings to obtain measurements for laying out Work are responsibility of Contractor.

b. Scaling Drawings: Contractor assumes responsibility for such performance of Work and is responsible for costs of correction of Work.

3. Perform field work necessary to lay out and maintain Work to dimensions indicated on Contract Documents.

B. Field Engineering: Specified in Section 01 7123 - Field Engineering.

C. Preparation for Product Installation:

1. Conduct a Pre-Installation Meeting when specified in individual specification Sections. 2. Obtain, read, and understand applicable reference standard and manufacturer's

published instructions regarding erection, application, or installation of Product.


3. Clean substrate surfaces before applying Product. 4. Seal cracks or openings of substrate before applying Product. 5. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner

before applying Product in contact or bond.

1.5 EXECUTION A. Cutting and Patching:

1. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. 2. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affect:

a. Structural integrity of element. b. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. c. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. d. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. e. Work of Owner or separate contractor.

3. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete Work, and to: a. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. b. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. c. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. d. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. e. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and

electrical Work. 4. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and will provide proper

surfaces to receive patching and finishing. 5. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill. 6. Restore Work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract

Documents. 7. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through

surfaces. 8. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. 9. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to

nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. 10. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during Work to Owner

Representative and Architect for decision or remedy.

B. Installation: 1. Refer to installation requirements included in each individual Specification Section. 2. For each Product, inspect substrate and conditions that Work will be performed. Do

not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3. By starting Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for

correcting unsuitable or unsatisfactory conditions encountered at Contractor’s expense.

4. Comply with manufacturer's published installation instructions and recommendations, to extent that instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements in Contract Documents.

5. Inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site ready for installation. a. Inspect Products immediately before start of application, installation, or

erection. b. Reject damaged and defective Products.

6. Verify and check dimensions and measurements before start of installation or erection.

7. Coordinate closing-in of Work with required inspections and tests.


a. Do not cover Work until inspected and approved by appropriate person, entity or Authority Having Jurisdiction.

b. Uncover Work that has not been inspected as directed by Owner Representative, Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction. Contractor shall recover Work after inspection and approval of Work in conformance with Contract Documents at Contractor’s expense.

8. Seismic Requirements: Provide fasteners, attachments, connection devices, mechanical and electrical equipment supports, partitions, ceiling supports, masonry veneer anchorage and methods for structural and non-structural building elements as indicated on Drawings, as specified or conforming to Seismic Requirements of the International Building Code to provide a complete secure installation. a. Where not indicated or specified provide appropriate methods necessary for

securing Work. b. Secure Work plumb, true to line and level. c. Provide for expansion and building movement.

1.6 CLEANING

A. Cleaning During Construction: 1. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean

and orderly condition to the satisfaction of the Owner Representative. 2. Remove debris and rubbish from closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the

space. 3. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and

dispose off-site and as directed by Owner Representative. 4. Coordinate with Owner Representative regarding cleanliness of Project Site. 5. Refer to Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for additional cleaning

requirements.

B. Final Cleaning: Specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

1.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Starting and Adjusting Procedures: Subcontractor is responsible for coordinating start-up procedures for systems and equipment with Contractor Project Field Superintendent and Owner Representative as follows: 1. Subcontractor personnel complete system. 2. Subcontractor field-verifies compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Subcontractor notifies Contractor Project Field Superintendent that system is ready

for start-up. 4. Subcontractor coordinates related work necessary for start-up. 5. Subcontractor arranges a time and date with Contractor Project Field Superintendent

and Owner Representative to observe starting procedures. 6. Subcontractor starts systems and equipment according to manufacturer’s published

instructions. 7. Subcontractor performs testing according to Contract Documents and manufacturer’s

published instructions. 8. Subcontractor submits start-up reports to Contractor and to Architect through

Contractor for review.

B. Starting Systems:


1. Subcontractor notifies Contractor Project Field Superintendent seven (7) calendar days before to start-up of each system.

2. Subcontractor verifies that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.

3. Subcontractor verifies tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer.

4. Subcontractor verifies wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

5. Subcontractor executes start-up under supervision of applicable Subcontractors' personnel, Contractor Project Field Superintendent and Owner Representative in accordance with manufacturers' published instructions.

6. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative be present at Project Site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

7. Contractor Project Field Superintendent shall submit a written report to Architect in accordance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

C. Test Requirements: Perform tests to verify proper functioning of systems and assemblies

on components that need to be tested as in interrelated whole. 1. Factory Tests: Perform tests at factory to verify proper manufacture. Test results will

be used in Final Acceptance Test to verify no shipping damage and proper installation.

2. Functional Tests: Subcontractor shall perform a functional test to verify that the system and components have been properly installed and are functioning properly. Test shall be performed in the presence of Contractor Project Field Superintendent and Owner Representative. Test shall be completed and found acceptable when system has performed as specified and per referenced industry standards.

3. Final Acceptance Tests: Subcontractor shall perform a formal test with full documentation using an Architect approved recording form. Contractor Project Field Superintendent shalll witness test and issue written final acceptance. Test shall be performed in the presence of Owner Representative. Final test data shall be provided to Architect and Contractor. Data shall have a cover letter clearly marked with system name, date and the words “Final Test Data.” Submit Data in accordance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

4. Test Procedures: Test procedure and recording forms that document test steps shall be submitted for approval to Architect twenty-one (21) calendar days before proposed test date. Procedure shall consist of step by step instruction to verify system parameters, components and functions.

1.8 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner Representative and Owner operations.

Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner operations. 2. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of

instruction time, and course content. 3. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.


B. Instruction Program:

1. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system as required by each individual Specification Section as follows. a. HVAC systems, including air handling equipment and air distribution systems. b. HVAC instrumentation and controls. c. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers and switchboards. d. Lighting equipment and controls. e. Fire protection systems, including fire alarm. f. Communication systems, including clocks and programming equipment.

2. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. Include specified instruction for modules indicated.

C. Documentation: Review the following items in detail.

1. Emergency manuals. 2. Operations manuals. 3. Maintenance manuals. 4. Project Record Documents. 5. Identification systems. 6. Warranties. 7. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

D. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable.

1. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications and error messages. 2. Instructions on stopping. 3. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 4. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. 5. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. 6. Special operating instructions and procedures.

E. Operations: Include the following, as applicable.

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Control sequences. 6. Safety procedures. 7. Instruction on stopping. 8. Normal shutdown instructions. 9. Operating procedures for emergencies. 10. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. 11. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 12. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 13. Special operating instructions and procedures.

F. Adjustments: Include the following.

1. Alignments. 2. Checking adjustments. 3. Noise and vibration adjustments. 4. Economy and efficiency adjustments.


G. Troubleshooting: Include the following.

1. Diagnostic instructions. 2. Test and inspection procedures.

H. Maintenance: Include the following.

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Procedures for routine cleaning. 5. Procedures for preventative maintenance. 6. Procedures for routine maintenance. 7. Instruction on use of special tools.

I. Repairs: Include the following.

1. Diagnosis instructions. 2. Repair instructions. 3. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement, and reassembly

instructions. 4. Instructions for identifying parts and components. 5. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

J. Demonstration and Instruction:

1. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner personnel as scheduled with Contractor and Owner Representative and as specified herein.

2. Demonstrate Project equipment and provide operation instruction by qualified installer representative who is knowledgeable about Project.

3. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six (6) months.

4. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

5. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment.

6. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

7. Prepare report identifying attendees, instructors, instruction agenda and instruction given. Submit report as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

K. Demonstration and Training Video Recording: Contractor shall provide video recording of

demonstration and training of operational and maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 1. Video Recorder: Engage a qualified person experienced in video camera operation

video recording of construction demonstration and training to record Contractor or Subcontractor demonstration and training modules.

2. Demonstration and Training Recording: Record each demonstration and training module separately. Include instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams and other visual aids, but not student practice.

3. Video Recording Format: Provide on a high quality Digital Video Disk. 4. Video Recording Equipment: Record demonstration and training modules using a

commercial high quality video and sound camera of a type capable of providing a professional quality video and sound recording. Mount video camera on tripod before


starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. Video and sound recording shall be of a professional quality with no quick movements, in focus and high quality sound with all instruction audible.

1.9 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. Independent Testing and Balance firm shall perform services specified in Divisions 21 through 23 in compliance with requirements specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

B. Reports shall be submitted by Independent Testing and Balance firm to Architect and

Mechanical Engineer, with copy to Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Test and Balance report shall be submitted to Architect and Mechanical Engineer before

Architect and Mechanical Engineer will perform Substantial Completion Inspection.

D. Accepted copies of Test and Balance Report shall be included in Closeout Documents Manual as specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

01 7329 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 01/05 CUTTING AND PATCHING

SECTION 01 7329

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.




1. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 2. Section 01 3516 - Alteration Project Procedures: Cutting and patching for alterations

work. 3. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. 4. Individual Product Specification Sections:

a. Cutting and patching incidental to Work of the section. b. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those

sections. c. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.

C. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed Work and Products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS


A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution

to Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as indicated, and ready for cutting and patching. 1. Examine elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. 2. After uncovering existing Work, assess conditions affecting performance of work.

C. Report in writing to Architect and Owner’s Representative prevailing conditions that will


D. By starting Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting

unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to Owner.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.

C. Maintain excavations free of water.

3.3 CUTTING

A. Execute cutting and fitting to complete the Work.

B. Uncover work to install improperly sequenced work.

C. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.

D. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.

E. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core

C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide

appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.


D. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform patching for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces. Pneumatic tools not permitted without prior approval.

3.4 PATCHING

A. Execute patching to complement adjacent Work.

B. Fit Products together to integrate with other Work.

C. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

D. Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

E. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END OF SECTION

01 7700 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 7700

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Contract Closeout Meeting.

2. Contract Closeout Timeline. 3. Closseout Document Submittals. 4. Closeout Procedures – Substantial Completion.

5. Closeout Procedures – Final Completion 6. Partial Occupancy or Use. 7. Substantial Completion Cleaning and Final Cleaning. 8. Contents of Contract Closeout Package. 9. Preparation and Organization of Closeout Documents Manual 10. Final Payment

a. AIA Document G706 - Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. b. AIA Document G706A - Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens. c. AIA Document G707 - Consent of Surety to Final Payment.




1. Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures: Applications for payment. 2. Section 01 3119 - Project Meetings: Contract closeout meeting. 3. Section 01 4200 - References: Definitions. 4. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor quality control inspections. 5. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Starting and adjusting, demonstration

and training. 6. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Requirements and procedures for closeout

submittals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substantial Completion: Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

B. Final Completion: Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

1.3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT MEETING

A. Schedule a Contract Closeout Meeting (14) days minimum before Substantial Completion Inspection to cover Contract Closeout Procedures as specified in this Section and how the Contract Closeout Package shall be assembled and submitted for Architect review as specified in Section 01 3119 - Project Meetings.

B. Meeting may occur after a scheduled Contractor, Architect, Owner progress meeting or may

be a separate meeting.


C. Contractor, Project Field Superintendent, Owner's Representative and Architect shall attend

this meeting. Subcontractor representatives are welcome to attend this meeting.

D. Following completion of Contract Closeout Meeting, Contractor shall contact each subcontractor to instruct them in proper preparation of their portion of closing out Contract and Contract Closeout Package.

1. 4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT TIMELINE

A. The following list identifies the order that this Contract shall be closed out. Contractor failure to follow the specified order or failure to properly complete each item will suspend any processing of Application for Payments until Contractor complies with specified contract closeout timeline, submittals and procedure. 1. Contractor schedules Contract Closeout Meeting. 2. Contract Closeout Meeting is held. 3. Contractor instructs subcontractors on proper contract closeout procedures. 4. Contractor begins preparation of Contract Closeout Package. 5. Contractor starts and adjusts equipment and systems. 6. Contractor submits written certification to Archtect the Project is ready for Substantial

Completion Inspection. 7. Architect and Owner schedule a date and time for Substantial Completion Inspection. 8. Contractor schedules dates and times for Demonstration and Instruction of Owner

personnel. 9. Contractor and manufacturer representatives conduct Demonstration and Instruction

of equipment and systems to Owner personnel. 10. Contractor conducts Substantial Completion Cleaning. 11. Contractor turns over Extra Products to Owner and obtains Owner signature of

receipt within two (2) weeks of Substantial Completion Inspection. 12. Contractor submits Preliminary Closeout Documents to Architect within two (2) weeks

of Substantial Completion Inspection. a. Preliminary Closeout Documents at Substantial Completion Inspection require

the following: 1) Closeout Documents Manual Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2) Project Record Documents. 3) Project Record Submittals.

b. Preliminary submittal consists of one (1) copy of completed Manual at Substantial Completion Inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned, with Architect and Consulting Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required before final submittal.

13. Architect and Owner conduct Substantial Completion Inspection. 14. Architect issues Substantial Completion Punchlist. 15. Contractor begins work on Substantial Completion Punchlist items. 16. Architect issues Certificate of Substantial Completion. 17. Architect returns reviewed Preliminary Closeout Documents to Contractor with list of

items to be corrected. 18. Contractor completes all Punchlist items no later than 30 days from Date of

Substantial Completion. 19. Contractor submits written certification to Architect that all Punchlist items are

completed and Project is ready for Final Inspection. 20. Architect and Owner schedule a date and time for Final Completion Inspection. 21. Contractor conducts Final Completion Cleaning. 22. Contractor submits completed and corrected Final Closeout Documents and Project

Record Submittals to Architect within two (2) weeks of Final Completion Inspection.


a. Mandatory Requirement: Submit Final Closeout Documents at one time to Architect at Final Inspection. Failure to submit all Final Closeout Documents will result in delay of Final Payment to Contractor until all documents are received.

c. Final Submittal consists of three (3) sets of corrected Closeout Documents in final form at Final Inspection including (3) sets of Closeout Documents in PDF format on CD. Architect will distribute copies as follows: 1) Two (2) copies to Owner Maintenance Director for Maintenance

Personnel use. 2) One (1) copy for Architect's records.

23. Architect and Owner conduct Final Completion Inspection. 24. Architect notifies Contractor that Closeout Items are complete and advises Contractor

to submit Application for Final Payment.

B. If Contractor does not achieve Substantial Completion within Contract Time, Owner may suspend further Progress Payments until Work is Substantially Complete as determined by the Architect as specified in Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures.

C. If Contractor is not Substantially Complete after two (2) Substantial Completion Inspections

or Final Complete after two (2) at Final Completion Inspection, Contractor shall pay for all additional services and inspections by Architect or Architect's Consultants as specified in this Section

1.5 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Documents as specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals. 1. Record Drawings and Specifications. 2. Record Installation Certifications. 3. Additional Record Submittals. 4. Copy of Record Site Drawing signed by Surveyor. 5. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 6. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically.

B. Project Record Submittals: Boxed and labeled complete set of reviewed and accepted

Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples as specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

C. Closeout Documents Manual: Includes all closeout data including Operations and

Maintenance Data for Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical systems and equipment prepared and organized as specified in this Section. 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Data for Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical

systems and equipment as specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

D. Closeout Documents in Digital Format: Upon receipt of Architect acceptance of Contract

Closeout Documents, Contractor shall have Closeout Documents professionally converted or scanned into digital PDF format, organized and stored on Digital Video Disk. 1. Submit Three (3) copies. Architect will distribute copies as follows:

a. Two (2) copies to Owner. b. One (1) copy for Architect's records.

E. Demonstration and Training Video Recording: Upon completion of all demonstration of

Owner personnel, Contractor shall submit Three (3) copies of Demonstration and Training Video Recording on Digital Video Disks. Architect will distribute copies as follows: 1. Two (2) copies to Owner.


2. One (1) copy for Architect's records.

1.6 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. At completion of Work of each subcontract or designated division of Work, conduct an initial

inspection to verify completion of Work; prepare list of Work to be completed or corrected, and conduct follow-up inspection to verify that corrections have been made as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

B. Inspect mechanical and electrical equipment start-up operations, observe testing and

balancing, and record start-up results including time and date of start-up.

C. Comply with procedures stated in Document 00 7213 – General Conditions for Substantial Completion, which is used as a reference for the procedure for issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1. Substantial Completion definition. 2. Comprehensive Contractor list of items to be corrected. 3. Architect Substantial Completion inspection. 4. Establishment of Date of Substantial Completion. 5. Certificate of Substantial Completion.

D. When Contractor considers Work, or a portion of Work which Owner agrees to accept

separately, is Substantially Complete, submit written certification, on Contractor letterhead, to Architect indicating Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected by Project Field Superintendent and Contractor Project Manager, and Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Substantial Completion inspection. 1. Submit list of items to be completed or corrected. 2. Complete and correct items on list. 3. Failure to include an item on list does not change Contractor responsibility to

complete Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

E. Architect and Owner Representative will review list and make inspection to determine if Work, or designated portion of Work, is substantially complete. 1. Contractor will be notified by Architect of items identified during inspection as not in

accordance with Contract Documents in a Substantial Completion Punchlist. 2. Complete and correct items on Punchlist. 3. Notify Architect that items have been corrected and request a Final Inspection. 3. Architect will make inspection to determine if Work, or designated portion of Work, is

substantially complete.

F. When Work, or designated portion of Work, is substantially complete, Architect will notify Contractor and document Date of Substantial Completion.

G. Contractor shall submit Preliminary Closeout Documents to Architect as defined herein

within Article entitled “Contractor Closeout Timeline” with respect to Substantial Completion Inspection.

H. If Architect or Architect’s Consultants are required to perform a third, or more, re-

inspections because of required follow-up inspection by regulatory authorities or because the Work was not Substantially Complete as certified by the Contractor: 1. Architect will invoice Owner for additional services by the Architect or Architect’s

Consultants. 2. Contractor will pay for Architect’s or Architect’s Consultant additional services by

deductive change order.


3. Change order will be issued deducting the additional service amont form the Contract Sum.

1.7 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES - FINAL COMPLETION

A. Contractor shall complete punch-list items no later than 30 days from date of Substantial Completion Inspection.

B. Submit written certification, on Contractor’s Letterhead, that items on the Substantial

Completion Punch-list are completed, Work has been re-inspected, and Work is Final Complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect final inspection.

C. Architect will make inspection to determine if Work of this Contract is complete.

1. Contractor will be notified by Architect of items identified during inspection as not in accordance with contract documents and not ready for final acceptance.

2. Contractor shall complete and correct items on list. 3. Contractor shall notify Architect that items have been corrected and request re-

inspection. D. When Work is complete, as determined by Architect, Architect will notify Contractor and

document Date of Final Acceptance.

E. Contractor shall submit Final Closeout Documents to Architect as defined herein within Article entitled “Contractor Closeout Timeline” with respect to Substantial Completion Inspection. 1. Project Record Documents. 2. Closeout Documents Manual including Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Project Record Submittals.

F. If Architect or Architect’s Consultants are required to perform a third, or more, re-inspections because of required follow-up inspection by regulatory authorities or because the Work was not Final Complete as certified by the Contractor: 1. Architect will invoice Owner for additional services by the Architect or Architect’s


deductive change order. 3. Change order will be issued deducting the additional service amont from the Contract

Sum.

1.8 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE

A. Refer to Document 00 7213 – General Conditions, Partial Occupancy or use.

1.9 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION CLEANING AND FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute project cleaning before Substantial Completion inspection and Final Completion inspection.

B. General:

1. Clean interior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment.


2. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the Project and from the site.

3. Cleaning for areas occupied by Owner after date of Substantial Completion are the responsibility of the Owner as specified in Document 00 7213 – General Conditions.

C. Cleaning During Construction: Specified in Section 01 7300 - Execution.

D. Substantial Completion Cleaning:

1. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of surface to be cleaned. a. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property,

or that might damage finished surfaces. 2. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit of Work to condition expected from facility cleaning and maintenance program. a. Comply with manufacturer's published cleaning instructions.

3. Complete following cleaning operations before requesting Architect inspection for Substantial Completion. a. Clean Project Site, yard and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste materials, litter and foreign substances. 1) Sweep paved areas broom clean. 2) Remove petro-chemical spills, stains and other foreign deposits. 3) Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth even-

textured surface. b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material from

Project Site. c. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free

condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. 1) Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. 2) Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces.

f. Broom clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces. g. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

1) Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials.

2) Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.

3) Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. h. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. i. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes and

surfaces. 1) Replace finishes and surfaces that can not be satisfactorily repaired or

restored, or that show evidence of repair or restoration. 2) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and

electrical name plates. j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and other similar

equipment. 1) Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings and other foreign

substances.


k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

l. Replace air disposable filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 1) Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters

during construction. m. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

2) Replace burned out bulbs, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures.

n. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 4. Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to protect

previously completed installations during remainder of construction. 5. Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations.

a. Remove waste materials from Project Site and dispose of in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Final Completion Cleaning:

1. Clean any items or areas affected by Contractor work on Substantial Completion Inspection Punchlist items to satisfaction of Owner.

1.10 CONTENTS OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PACKAGE

A. Contract Closeout Package shall consist of the following items.

B. Contact Names and Subcontractor List: 1. Contractor name, address, telephone number, fax number and telephone number to

call after hours for emergency warranty work notification. Include a list of each Subcontractor with listing of Work installed. Include Subcontractor address, telephone number, fax number and person to contact who is familiar with Work.

C. Contractor Warranty:

1. Contractor Warranty Letter written on Contractor letterhead and signed by Contractor stating that Contractor warrants Work and that Contractor will correct Work for one (1) year after the Date of Substantial Completion as specified in Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

D. Warranties:

1. Original executed copies of Warranties required in each technical Specification Section for each material and product requiring warranty as specified in Section 01 7800- Closeout Submittals.

2. Provide duplicate original signed and executed copies of each warranty in each Closeout Documents Manual. a. Photocopies not permitted.

E. Project Record Documents:

1. Provide data as specified in Section 01 7800- Closeout Submittals: a. Record Drawings. b. Additional Record Submittals.

F. Project Record Submittals:

1. Boxed and labeled complete set of reviewed and accepted Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples as specified in Section 01 7800- Closeout Submittals.

G. Operations and Maintenance Data:


1. Provide data as specified in Section 01 7800- Closeout Submittals.

H. Building Inspection Reports: 1. Copies of inspection reports by governmental Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 2. Originals of inspection reports should be transmitted to Owner for Owner’s files upon

initial receipt from Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Local Building Officials having jurisdiction. b. Oklahoma State Fire Marshal 50 percent and 100 percent inspections.

I. Copy of Certificate of Occupancy:

1. Originals of Certificates of Occupancy should be transmitted to Owner for Owner’s files upon initial receipt for authority having jurisdiction. a. Local Building Official having jurisdiction. b. Oklahoma State Fire Marshal.

J. AIA Document G706:

1. Copies of executed and notarized Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims on original copy of AIA Document G706 (Example copy attached). Original copies attached to Final Payment Applications.

K. AIA Document G706A:

1. Copies of executed and notarized Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens on original copy of AIA Document G706A (Example copy attached). Original copies attached to Final Payment Applications.

L. AIA Document G707:

1. Executed and notarized Consent of Surety to Final Payment on original copy of AIA Document G707 (Example copy attached). Original copies attached to Final Payment Applications.

M. Lien Releases:

1. Executed and notarized separate releases of waivers of liens for entities with lien rights against property Owner as required by Document 00 7213 – General Conditions; forms located at end of Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures. Include list of each entity: a. General Contractor. b. Each Subcontractor.

N. Purchase Order Record:

1. Copies of purchase orders and corresponding vendor invoices for the Project as required by Oklahoma Statute 68 OS 1356 and as specified in Document 00 7390 - Sales Tax/Designation of Purchasing Agent. Submit Purchase Order Record for each of the following. Include list of each entity: a. General Contractor. b. Subcontractor. c. Sub-subcontractor.

O. Products and Completed Operations Insurance:

1. Certificate of Insurance from Contractor’s insurance provider evidencing insurance required by Contract Documents to remain in force after Final Payment is in effect as required by Document 00 7213 – General Conditions. a. Provide certificate for Contractor’s General Liablity for Products and Completed

Operations maintained for one (1) year after date of Final Payment as specified in Document 00 7316 - Insurance Requirements.


P. Contractor Statement for Products and Completed Operations Insurance:

1. Contractor’s written statement that insurance will be renewable as required by Document 00 7213 – General Conditions. a. Submit statement on Contractor’s Letterhead for Contractor’s General Liablility

insurance coverage for Products and Completed Operations for one (1) year after date of Final Payment attached to Certificate of Insurance specified in previous paragraph.

Q. Asbestos Certification Forms:

1. Executed and notarized Federal Certification of Compliance with Asbestos Restrictions form specified in Section 01 6211 - Asbestos Prohibition for Public Works Projects for each of the following: a. Each subcontractor and material supplier. b. General Contractor. c. Architect will insert Architect’s certification form into Closeout Documents

Manual.

R. Final Statement of Accounting: 1. Provide a final statement or accounting to Owner through Architect, including but not

limited to the following, attached to Final Application for Payment: a. Original Contract Sum and adjustments, including:

1) Change Orders or other modifications. 2) Allowances, if any. 3) Other adjustments, if any. 4) Deductions for Work not corrected, if any. 5) Deductions for additional services incurred by Owner due to Contractor, if

any. b. Statement of outstanding Claim amounts, if any.

S. Extra Materials:

1. Extra Materials delivered to Owner at Substantial Completion Inspection. a. Deliver all required extra materials at one time to a storage room or location

within building as directed by Owner. b. Prepare transmittal letter identifying type and quantity of extra materials

provided with a place for Owner to sign for receipt of materials. Contractor to insert a signed copy in the Closeout Documents Manual.

1.11 PREPARATION AND ORGANIZATION OF CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS MANUAL

A. Prepare and organize the Closeout Documents Manual as follows. All items shall be typewritten, computer word processed/printed or photocopies. No handwritten or hand printing permitted. 1. ELECTRONIC COPY OF CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS MANUAL REQUIRED:

a. Refer to Paragraph entitled “Closeout Documents in Digital Format” in this Section above.

B. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT SUBMIT CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS AS RECEIVED

DIRECTLY FROM SUBCONTRACTORS. Do not just collect varying binders, booklets and loosed data submitted by Subcontractors, place them in a box and submit to Architect. This is Not Permitted. 1. Contractor shall review and Contract Closeout items received from Subcontractors

and determine if the items received fully comply with specified Contract Closeout requirements for each trade and each individual Specification Section.


2. Contractor shall go through the Project Manual and review each individual Specificatin Section for the specified Contract Closeout requirements during the review of each Subcontractor Contract Closeout data.

3. If Subcontractor Contract Closeout data does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor shall contract Subcontractor, discuss what is missing or does not comply with specified requirements, and obtain data from Subcontractor that does comply with specified Contract Closeout requirements.

4. When complete and correct Contract Cloeout data is receved from a Subcontractor, Contractor shall organize and assemble that data in the Contract Documents Manual as specified herein.

5. Contractor shall obtain and execute warranties for each Product that has a warranty specified. Obtain ORIGINAL Warranty Forms from manufacturer’s and suppliers, not photocopies of fax. a. Obtain ORIGINAL signatures, in blue ink, and fill-in all data on the blank spaces

of each Warranty Form. b. Each Warranty shall clearly indicate specific specification section number,

product or material warranted. c. Where a blank space is provided for Owner signature, obtain signatures on

Warranty copies from Owner. d. Substantial Completion Date: Contractor shall make sure correct Substantial

Completion Date (as indicated on Certificate of Substantial Completion Form issued by Architect) is noted on each Warranty Form submitted.

C. Binders: Provide commercial heavy duty quality, locking D-side, 3-inch ring or larger size,

white color, with durable plastic covers with clear plastic sleeves for insertion of identification cover sheet. Provide clear plastic sleeve on binder spine to hold insertion of identification spine sheet. Provide pockets in the covers to receive folded sheets. 1. Multiple Closeout Documents Manuals: Manuals comprising the complete Closeout

Documents Package set shall be the same size and have the same appearance.

D. Identification Cover and Spine Sheet: Provide insertion sheet that fully covers the entire sleeve area. Identify binder on front and spine with printed title CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS MANUAL at top and the following information. 1. School Information: Affix Color School Logo and identify title of Project by School

Name and Location, School District, Independent School District Number, School District address, telephone number, fax number and School Superintendent Name under the logo. a. For Projects With Multiple Binders:

1) Sequentially number each binder. 2) Identify the general contents of each binder.

2. Architect Information: Affix Color Boynton Williams & Associates Logo and identify office address, telephone number, fax number, project architect name and project manager name.

3. Contractor Information: Affix contractor Color Contractor Logo and identify Contractor name, address, telephone number, fax number, Project Manager and Project Field Superintendent.

E. Index Sheet: Provide a printed index identifying the items in each tabbed section and the

Tab Number where each item is located. Tabbed sections shall be assembled in the following order with tabbed section titles as follows. 1. Contractor Information: General Contractor, Subcontractor, material and equipment

supplier information list. 2. Building Permit, Inspections and Certificate of Occupancy: Copies of all permits and

inspection reports from Authorities Having Jurisdiction.


3. Warranties: General Contractor Warranty and Contractor and/or Manufacturer Warranties required in individual Specification Sections. a. Assemble warranties in this section with General Contractor Warranty 1st

followed by other warranties organized by the Specification Section number where the Product is specified.

b. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional information. 4. Lien Releases. Copies of lien releases. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout

Submittals for additional information. 5. Extra Materials Documentation: Copy of Extra Material Transmittal Letter signed by

Owner acknowledging receipt. a. Indicate the type and quanitiy of each Extra Material provided to Owner on

Transmittal Letter. 6. Asbestos Certification Forms: Copies of asbestos certification forms. Certification

forms are located in Section 01 6211 - Asbestos Prohibition for Public Works Projects.

7. Purchase Order Record: Copies of Purchase Order Records from Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor for Tax Exempt Purchases. a. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional information. b. Refer to Document 00 7390 - Sales Tax Exemption/Designation of Purchasing

Agent for specific requirements. 8. Testing and Inspection Reports: Copies of all test and inspection reports from

Geotechnical Engineer and Independent Testing Laboratory. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional information.

F. Provide separate Closeout Documents Manuals for the following:

1. HVAC Operation and Maintenance Data: Copy of Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning System Operation and Maintenance Data. a. Include and original copy of HVAC Test and Balance Report from Independent

Test and Balance Agency. b. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional information.

2. Plumbing Operation and Maintenance Data: Copy of Plumbing System and Fixture Operation and Maintenance Data. a. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional information.

3. Electrical Operation and Maintenance Data: Copy of Electrical System Operation and Maintenance Data. a. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional information.

G. Record Document Items: Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional information. 1. Record Installation Certifications. 2. Final acceptance tests for equipment and systems. 3. Demonstration and training agendas and attendance records. 4. Demonstration and training digital video disks.

1.12 FINAL PAYMENT

A. After Architect determines that Work is final complete and Project Closeout Package is accepted, Contractor may submit Final Application for Payment in conformance with requirements specified in Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures.

B. Architect will certify Final Application for Payment and forward to Owner. C. Waiver of Claims:

1. Owner: Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.


2. Contractor, Subcontractor’s and Material Suppliers: Refer to Document 00 7213 - General Conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

01 7800 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1111 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 7800

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Closeout Submittal Responsibilities 2. Product Warranties. 3. Project Record Documents. 4. Closeout Documents Manual Operation and Maintenance data. 5. Project Record Submittals. 6. Extra products.



C. Related Documents:

1. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Record keeping, documentation and reporting, including maintenance of Project Record Documents.

2. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples.

3. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Instruction of Owner personnel. 4. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Contract closeout procedures.

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor: Reference Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures for content of Contract Closeout Package. 1. Responsible for collection, preparation, and assembly of Closeout Submittals, with

specified content, in the specified quantity, and format specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

2. Shall collect Closeout Submittal data and items as available throughout construction of the Project so that as the Date of Substantial Completion approaches and the Contract Closeout Meeting is held, a majority of the Closeout Submittals have already been received and are ready for insertion into the Closeout Documents Manual specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

3. Responsible for review of Closeout Submittals received from Subcontractors and Suppliers for conformance with specified content and format. a. Contractor shall return items that do not conform to specified content and

format to the submitter for correction and re-submittal to Contractor. b. Including submittal items from Subcontractors and Suppliers without Contractor

review is not permitted. 4. Responsible for submittal of completed Closeout Submittals to Architect at the start of

Substantial Completion Inspection as specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

5. Responsible for making corrections to items identified by Architect’s review and resubmitting complete and correct Closeout Documents to Architect within 14 calendar days of receipt of Architect’s list of correction items.


B. Architect: 1. Will review Closeout Submittals for compliance with specified content, format and

presentation after receipt from Contractor within two (2) weeks of Substantial Completion Inspection.

2. Will return Closeout Submittals to Contractor after review with a written list of correction items.

3. Will review corrected Closeout Submittals submitted by Contractor for compliance with specified content, format and presentation.

C. Re-submittals of Closeout Submittals: If Architect or Architect’s Consultants are required to

perform a third, or more, re-submittal review because the re-submittal is incomplete or incorrect and must be returned to Contractor for additional corrections: 1. Architect will invoice Owner for additional services by the Architect or Architect’s


deductive change order. 3. Change order will be issued deducting the additional service amount from the

Contract Sum.

D. Owner: Will receive Closeout Submittals as a part of the Closeout Documents Package specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

1.3 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Submittal: Provide Warranties as a part of the Warranty part of the Closeout Documents Manual specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 1. Warranty Start Date: As indicated in Document 00 7213 – General Conditions, the

warranty start date is the Date of Substantial Completion indicated on the Certificate of Substantial Completion issued by the Architect. a. All warranty forms shall have the actual Month, Day and Year of the Date of

Substantial Completion or “Date of Substantial Completion” listed for the Warranty Start Date.

b. No other date permitted. c. Dates such as Date of Installation, Date of Delivery, Date of Sale, etc. not

permitted. 2. Notarization: Provide notarized original copies for products requiring warranties as

specified in individual Specification Sections. 3. Subcontractor, Supplier and Manufacturers: Execute and assemble transferable

warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers. Identify specification section number, product or material on each warranty.

4. Warranty Table of Contents: Provide neatly word processed and printed Warranty Module table of contents with each item identified with number and title of Specification Section in which specified, and name of Product or Work item.

5. Index Tab Sheets: Separate each warranty with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate word processed and printed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

B. Definitions:

1. Standard Product Warranties: Preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.


2. Special Warranties: Written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.

C. Warranty Requirements:

1. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.

2. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate warranty by written endorsement. Reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

3. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether Owner has benefited from use of Work through a portion of its anticipated useful services life.

4. Owner’s Recourse: Expressed warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies. a. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to

limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents.

5. Special Warranties: Where Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment of Work or part of Work, Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work, until Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

D. Preparation of Submittals:

1. Obtaining Warranties: Obtain warranties executed by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers upon establishment of the Date of Substantial Completion as indicated on the Certificate of Substantial Completion issued by the Architect.

2. Contractor Verification of Warranty Forms: Upon receipt of warranty forms, Contractor shall verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, contain correct warranty time duration as specified in Contract Documents, are signed and notarized.

3. Obtaining Owner Signature: Where warranties require a signature of Owner, Contractor shall make arrangements with Owner to obtain Owner signature.

4. Contractor Warranty Cover Letter: Where Product Manufacturer data offers a warranty but Product Manufacturer does not have a specific warranty form, Contractor shall prepare a cover letter indicating all warranty information, Warranty Start Date and warranty duration, on Contractor letterhead, signed by Contractor with Product Manufacturer Data indicating warranty specifics attached to Contractor letter.

5. Special Warranty: When the Contract Documents require Contractor, or Contractor and a Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by required parties. Submit a draft of special warranty to Architect for review before final execution.

E. Schedule of Warranties: Review each technical section for requirements relating to material, product, and equipment warranties. Follow requirements outlined within technical


sections, submit information relating to material, product, and equipment warranties as a part of Closeout Documents Manual Operation and Maintenance Manual on materials, products, and equipment provided.

1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Project Record Documents shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Installation Certifications. 4. Record Purchase Order Record. 5. Record Final Acceptance Tests for Equipment and Systems Start-Up. 6. Record of Demonstration and Training. 7. Additional Record Submittals. 8. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 9. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically.

B. Record Drawings: Store record documents apart from Contract Documents used for

construction. Do not permit Project Record Documents to be used for construction purposes. Maintain and protect record documents from damage in a clean, dry, legible condition. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Owner Representative and Architect. 1. Responsibility for Markup and Supervision: Project Field Superintendent; as specified

in Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination. a. Where feasible, individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual

or entity is installer, Subcontractor, or similar entity, shall prepare mark-up on Record Drawings.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable Drawing technique. When

record data is in compliance with Design Documents, individual or entity shall

initial drawing sheet (adjacent to sheet number) indicating in compliance with Construction Documents.

c. Record data as soon as possible after it has been obtained. In case of concealed installations, record and check mark-up prior to concealment.

d. Project Field Superintendent shall affix their signature attesting to the accuracy of Record Drawings.

2. Record Drawing Maintenance: During construction, maintain a set of black-line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record Document purposes. Clearly mark in large letters “RECORD DRAWINGS.” a. Mark these Drawings to indicate actual installation where installation varies

from installation shown originally. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements which would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Items required to be marked include but are not limited to: 1) Dimensional changes to Drawings. 2) Revisions to details shown on Drawings. 3) Depths of foundations below first floor. 4) Locations and depths of underground utilities. 5) Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. 6) Revisions to electrical circuitry. 7) Actual equipment locations. 8) Duct size and routing. 9) Locations of concealed internal utilities. 10) Changes made by Contract Modification. 11) Details not on original Contract Drawings.


3. Documentation: Mark completely and accurately record prints of Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawing location. a. Mark record sets with red erasable colored pencil; use other colors to

distinguish between changes for different categories of Work at same location. Clearly identify what each different color represents and remain consistent throughout record set.

b. Mark important additional information which was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

c. Note alternate numbers, Architect’s Supplemental Instruction, Construction Change Directive, Change Order numbers and similar identification.

C. Record Specifications:

1. Responsibility for Markup and Supervision: Project Field Superintendent; as specified in Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination. a. Where feasible, individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual

or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, shall prepare mark-up on Record Specifications.

b. Project Field Superintendent shall affix their signature attesting to the accuracy of Record Drawings.

2. Record Specification Maintenance: During construction period, maintain one copy of Project Specifications, including addenda and modifications issued, for Project Record Document purposes. Clearly mark in large letters “RECORD SPECIFICATIONS.”

3. Mark Specifications to indicate actual installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications and modifications issued. Note related Project Record Drawing information, where applicable. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of product options, and information on concealed installations that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. a. In each Specification Section where products, materials or units of equipment

are specified or scheduled, mark copy with proprietary name and model number of product furnished.

b. Record name of manufacturer, supplier and installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made and to document coordination with Record Product Data submittals and maintenance manuals.

c. Note related Record Product Data, where applicable. For each principal product specified, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in maintenance manual instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

D. Record Installation Certifications:

1. Provide Installation Certifications applicable to each Subcontract upon completion of installation as specified in Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.

2. Provide notarized original copies for installations requiring Installation Certifications as specified in individual Specification Sections.

3. Include as part of the Installation Certification for EIFS the executed EIFS Contractor “Exhibit A” form and EIFS Sealant Contractor “Exhibit B” form.

4. Installation Certifications Schedule: Review each technical section for requirements relating to Certification of material, product or equipment installation. Follow requirements outlined within technical sections, provide executed certifications as a part of Closeout Documents Manual Operation and Maintenance Manual.

H. Record Purchase Order Record:


1. Purchase Orders: General Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors shall provide copies of purchase orders and corresponding vendor invoices for the Project as required by Oklahoma Statute 68 OS 1356 and as specified in Document 00 7390 - Sales Tax/Designation of Purchasing Agent.

2. Responsibility: General Contractor Project Manager is responsible to ensure that General Contractor, each Subcontractor and each Sub-Subcontractor maintains a record for all purchase orders issued under the tax exemption applicable to this Project and General Contractor Project Manager is responsible for obtaining a Purchase Order Record from General Contractor, each Subcontractor and each Sub-Subcontractor and submitting the combined purchase order record to Owner as a Closeout Document as specified Article 1.06 of Document 00 7390 - Sales Tax/Designation of Purchasing Agent.

I. Final Acceptance Tests for Equipment and Systems Start-Up: Provide copies of Reports for Final Acceptance Tests for each equipment item and each system.

J. Record of Demonstration and Training: Provide copies of each agenda for each

demonstration and training module presented along with copies of attendance records for each training module. 1. Provide copies of Demonstration and Training Video Disks.

K. Additional Record Submittals:

1. Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, complete additional records and place in order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for use and reference. a. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are

not limited to the following: 1) Field records on excavations and foundations. 2) Field records on underground construction and similar Work. 3) Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines. 4) Invert elevations of drainage piping. 5) Surveys establishing building lines and levels. 6) Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances. 7) Records of plant treatment. 8) Ambient and substrate condition tests. 9) Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products. 10) Testing and qualification of tradesmen. 11) Documented qualification of installation firms. 12) Load and performance testing. 13) Leakage and water-penetration tests. 14) Fire resistance and flame spread test results.

1.5 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS MANUAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Preparation: 1. Refer to each individual technical Specification Section for additional requirements. 2. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and

operation of specified Products, equipment and systems. Operation and maintenance data shall be prepared specifically for this Project. Include only data applicable for the specific equipment and systems installed in this Project.

B. Format:


1. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. Supplement manufacturer’s printed Operation and Maintenance Manual with typewritten specific maintenance schedule and instructions specifically for the system and equipment installed for this Project.

2. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

3. Text: Manufacturer's published data, or word processed data printed on 20 pound white paper.

4. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

5. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents with each Product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: a. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Sub-subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

b. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by Specification Section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1) Significant design criteria. 2) List of equipment. 3) Parts list for each component. 4) Operating instructions. 5) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6) Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended

cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

c. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1) Shop drawings and product data. 2) Air and water balance reports. 3) Certificates. 4) Copies of warranties.

C. Contents:

1. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Engineers, Sub-consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the module.

2. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Sub-subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

3. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

4. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

5. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

6. Warranties: Bind in copy of each.

D. Equipment and Systems: 1. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and

component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting


conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

2. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; word processed and printed.

3. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. 4. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating

instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

5. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

6. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 7. Include manufacturer's published operation and maintenance instructions. 8. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 9 Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and

diagrams required for maintenance. 10. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. 11. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as

installed. 12. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed

to flow and control diagrams. 13. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended

quantities to be maintained in storage. 14. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Divisions 21 through 23. 15. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specification Sections. 16. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space

for insertion of data. 17. Operation and Maintenance Manual Schedule: Review each technical section for

requirements relating to Operation and Maintenance Manual. Follow requirements outlined within technical sections, submit necessary information relating to Equipment and Systems as a part of Closeout Documents Manual Operation and Maintenance Manual on products provided.

E. Manual for Materials and Finishes:

1. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured Products.

2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

3. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

4. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specification Sections. 5. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space

for insertion of data. 6. Maintenance (Finish) Data Schedule: Review each technical section for requirements

relating to Maintenance Data of Finishes provide. Follow requirements outlined within technical sections, submit information relating to Maintenance of Finish surfaces as a part of Closeout Documents Manual Operation and Maintenance Manual on products and materials provided.


F. Demonstration and Training for Owner Personnel: Specified in Section 01 7 300 - Execution.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal: Submit Project Record Submittals as specified within Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures; Article entitled “Contractor Closeout Timeline” with respect to Substantial Completion Inspection.

B. Contractor shall submit a complete set of reviewed and accepted Shop Drawings, Product

Data and Samples that were submitted to and received back from Architect that will be a Record Set of Submittals for Owner’s use.

C. Preparation: As shop drawings, product data and samples are submitted to and received

back from architect during construction, keep one set of each separate in a specified box or container and clearly identify as “Project Record Submittals.” Keep a submittal log and maintain submittals in numerical sequence by Submittal Number as assigned in the Schedule of Submittals or as items are submitted.

D. Maintenance of Documents: Store record submittals in Contractor’s Office, not at project

site. Do not permit Project Record Submittals to be used for construction purposes. Maintain and protect record submittals from damage in a clean, dry location.

E. Format for Submittal:

1. Box: Assemble Project Record Submittals in a new, unused, undamaged legal sized cardboard “Bankers Box” with cardboard lid. Use multiple boxes as required for quantity of submittals. Use of any other cardboard box not permitted.

2. Identification: Identify each box with printed title RECORD SUBMITTALS; identify title of Project. Identify box number when multiple boxes are required.

3. Contents: Neatly assemble product data, neatly fold shop drawings, and neatly package samples and place them in “Bankers Box” in numerical sequence. Provide a typewritten submittal log identifying each submittal item by submittal number, specification section and subject.

1.7 EXTRA PRODUCTS A. Submittal: Submit Products, spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities

specified in individual Specification Sections as specified within Section 01 7 700 – Closeout Procedures; Article entitled “Contractor Closeout Timeline” with respect to Substantial Completion Inspection.

B. Delivery: Deliver to Project Site and place in location as directed by Owner Representative.

Include a Contractor transmittal form indicating the type and quantity of each extra product delivered and obtain Owner Representative signature on transmittal form acknowledging receipt of Extra Products.

C. Extra Products Schedule: Review each technical section in (Maintenance Article) for

requirements relating to Extra Product requirement to be delivered to the Owner. Follow requirements outlined within technical sections, provide Extra Products in quantities defined.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Not Used.


END OF SECTION

02 4113 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 05/08 SITE DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 4113

SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition of designated site structures, retaining walls, fences, and foundations. 2. Demolition and removal of pavements, curbs and gutters, drainage structures,

drainage pipe, utilities, site signs, and landscaping. 3. Disconnecting and capping or removal of identified utilities. 4. Filling voids in sub-grade created as a result of removals or demolition. 5. Disposal of demolished materials.




1. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary protection and barriers. Removal and disposal of demolished materials. Coordination of temporary utilities.

2. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Clearing outside periphery of structures. 3. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: Fill material. 4. Section 31 2500 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Protection for site runoff.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable local code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent

buildings and structures, dust control and runoff control. 2. Obtain required permits and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction. Pay

associated fees including disposal charges. 3. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with utility company

requirements. 4. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks or fire hydrants without permits. 5. Barricade and mark hazards as necessary. 6. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or

contaminated materials. 7. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: 1. Structures indicated for demolition will be discontinued in use and vacated prior to

start of Work. 2. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of structures to be demolished. 3. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by

Owner.


4. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or specified by the Owner, remove items of salvageable value to Contractor from project site and structure. Storage or sale of removed items on project site not permitted.

5. Burning or fires of any nature not permitted. 6. Do not bring explosives on site without written approval of authorities having

jurisdiction. Such written approval will not relieve Contractor of total responsibility for injury to persons or for damage to property due to blasting operations. Comply with governing regulations for use of explosives.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory

execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting

unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide erosion and sedimentation control as specified in Section 31 2500 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control.

B. Provide, erect, and maintain erosion control devices, dust control measures, temporary

barriers, and security devices at locations indicated on Drawings and as specified in Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

C. Protect appurtenances and structures which are not indicated to be demolished. Repair

damage caused by demolition operations at no additional cost to Owner.

D. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring.

E. Mark location of utilities. Protect and maintain, in safe and operable condition, utilities to remain. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities acceptable to governing authorities and Owner.


F. Clear areas around items and structures indicated to be demolished as specified in Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Demolition Requirements: 1. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures or pavements. 2. Stop operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify

Owner and Architect immediately. Do not resume operations until directed by Owner and Architect.

3. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private access. Maintain access and egress at all times.

4. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon, or limit access to their property.

5. Sprinkle soil and demolition work area with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose.

6. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 7. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work.

B. Demolition:

1. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas. 2. Notify inhabitants of on-site structures of intent to demolish two weeks prior to

demolition and verify property is vacated prior to starting demolition. 3. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Break up concrete slabs-on-grade

that are two (2) or more feet below proposed sub-grade. 4. Demolish and remove below grade construction and concrete slabs on grade to a

minimum depth of two feet below proposed subgrade.

C. Filling Voids: 1. Completely fill below grade areas and voids existing or resulting from demolition or

removal of structures (pits, wells, cisterns, etc.) using approved select fill materials consisting of stone, gravel, and sand free from debris, trash, frozen materials, roots, and other organic matter.

2. Remove standing water, frost, frozen, or unsuitable material, trash, and debris from areas to be filled before fill placement.

3. Place fill materials in horizontal layers and compact each layer at optimum moisture content of fill material to proposed density as specified in Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill.

4. Grade surface to match adjacent grades and to provide flow of surface drainage after fill placement and compaction.

D. Disposal of Demolished Materials:

1. Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations, from site.

2. No burning permitted. 3. Transport materials removed from demolished structures with appropriate vehicles

and dispose off-site to areas which are approved for disposal by governing authorities having jurisdiction and appropriate property owners.

4. Avoid spillage by covering and securing loads when hauling on or adjacent to public streets or highways.


a. Remove spillage and sweep, wash, or otherwise clean project site, streets, or highways.

b. Comply with local and national regulations.

END OF SECTION

03 0586 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 VAPOR BARRIER

SECTION 03 0586

VAPOR BARRIER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufacturers. 2. Vapor Barrier 3. Accessories 4. Finish Granular Mat Fill Materials 5. End of Section

a. ASTM E 1643 installation requirements at end of Section. b. Pipe penetration and Blockout installation details at end of Section.




1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for foundations and slab and installation of Vapor Barrier.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 302.2R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction: Vapor barrier component (plastic membrane) is not less than 10 mils thick.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D 1709 - Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method.

2. ASTM D 882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. 3. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 4. ASTM E 154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact

with Earth Under Concrete Slabs. 5. ASTM E 1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 6. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 7. ASTM F 1249 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through

Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and

performance characteristics, 2. Shop Drawings: Provide vapor barrier installation drawings indicating roll installation

direction, seaming and penetration seal details at plumbing, electrical and structural


penetrations, and method of installation at perimeter footing, interior footings, piers and grade beams.


1. Installation Certification: Submit written certification of installation on form located at end of Section.


A. Conform to the requirements of ACI 302.2R

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing under slab vapor barrier installations experienced in use of specified projects with minimum five (5) years documented experience in under slab vapor barrier installation.

C. Manufacturer Regional Representative: Manufacturer representative shall be on-site the

day of vapor barrier placement to instruct contractor in proper vapor barrier system installation, document installation and verify that proper procedures are followed.

D. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of vapor

barrier manufacturer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to installation instructions at all times during installation.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

B. Deliver vapor barrier in rolls in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Deliver Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each material to Project Field

Superintendent for Contractor Records.

D. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

E. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project

Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

F. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature

and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.


A. Environmental Requirements: Granular mat and building sub-grade pad area shall be thoroughly dry and free of moisture before installation of vapor barrier.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Vapor Barrier is based on the product named. 1. Stego Industries, LLC: www.stegoindustries.com.

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted. 1. Only Vapor Barrier products with a Water Vapor Transmission Rate of 0.012 perms

and lower when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, by an Independent Testing Laboratory, permitted to submit as a substitute.

C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a

comparable product by following manufacturer: 1. W. R. MEADOWS: www.wrmeadows.com

a. Perminator 15 mil

2.2 VAPOR BARRIER

A. Product: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier.

B. Description: 1. Material: 15 mil geo-membrane consisting of extruded, multi-layer plastic of prime,

virgin, polyolefin resins. 2. Size: 14 foot wide x 140 foot long rolls. 3. Color: Yellow.

C. Physical Properties:

Characteristic Property Test Method Classification Exceeds Class A ASTM E 1745 Tensile Strength 76.6 pounds/inch ASTM E 882 Puncture Resistance Minimum 2445 grams ASTM D 1709 Method B Permeance 0.01 U.S. Perms or lower ASTM E 96 or ASTM

1249 Conditioning Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms after mandatory

conditioning test in accordance with ASTM E 154

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Seam Tape: 1. Product: Stego Seam Tape/Stego Cold Weather Tape. 2. Description:

a. Heavy duty weather resistant polyethylene backing with non-staining, clean removal rubber adhesive.

b. 4 inch x 180 foot roll. c. Water vapor transmission rate of 0.3 perms or lower when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 96.

B. Vapor Proofing Mastic: 1. Product: Stego Mastic. 2. Description:

a. Waterproofing and vapor retardant mastic composed of medium-viscosity, water-based, polymer-modified anionic bituminous/asphalt emulsion with bonding, elongation and water-proofing characteristics.

http://www.wrmeadows.com/


b. Water vapor transmission rate of 0.3 perms or lower when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.

C. Pipe Boots: Constructed from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and/or mastic. D. Double-Sided Tape:

1. Product: Stego Tack Double-Sided Tape. 2. Description: Adhesive strip, 30 mils thick x 2 inch wide, used to bond Barrier to

substrate; concrete, masonry wood.

E. Perimeter and Edge Seals: 1. Product: Stego Crete Claw.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that all underground pipes, conduits, floor drains and other penetrations are in

place. 2. Verify that underslab pad preparation work is complete and pad is dry and free of

moisture.

C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Level, tamp or roll granular mat.

3.3 ADVANCE NOTIFICATION TO MANUFACTURER REGIONAL REPRESENTATIVE

A. Advance Notification: Contractor shall notify Manufacturer Regional Representative seven (7) days in advance of date scheduled for start of vapor barrier installation to coordinate schedule for arrival of Manufacturer Regional Representative at project site in sufficient time to instruct installation personnel in proper installation of vapor barrier and seals around penetrations.

B. Confirmation Notification: Contractor shall contact Manufacturer Regional Representative

minimum 48 hours before start of installation to confirm or reschedule the arrival date and time.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install vapor barrier when weather is dry. Vapor barrier installation not permitted during rain or when granular mat or building area sub-grade pad is wet. After rain, allow granular mat and building area subgrade pad to thoroughly dry before installing vapor barrier.


B. Install vapor barrier on top of granular mat in accordance with manufacturer’s published

instructions and ASTM E 1643.

C. Unroll vapor barrier with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour and pull out folds. Overlap vapor barrier joints minimum 6 inches and seal with joint seam tape.

D. Clean and dry vapor barrier before sealing.

E. Seal all penetrations with sealing tape.

F. Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to vertical foundation wall with two-sided tape Seal

around pipes, structural columns or any other penetration with an elastomeric sealant to create a monolithic membrane between surface of slab and moisture sources below and at slab perimeter.

G. Fabricate pipe boots and fasten with double sided tape and joint seam tape.

1. Cut piece of vapor retarder 2 foot x 2 foot for base. Cut an “X” to 75 percent of outside diameter of pipe.

2. Force base over pipe and tape perimeter with joint seam tape. 3. Seal vapor barrier to pipe using joint seam tape.

H. No penetration of vapor barrier permitted except for reinforcing steel (where applicable) and

permanent utilities.

I. All damaged areas shall be repaired by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged are 6 inches minimum and taping all four side with joint seam tape.

J. Aggregate Fill Under Slab-On-Grade:

K. Perimeter and Edge Seals:

1. Product: Stego Crete Claw. Follow manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. a. Clean surfaces of barrier to provide a moisture and debris free surfaces prior to

installation of tape. b. Overlap barrier seams a minimum of 6 inches. Seal each seam with tape. c. Install tape at perimeter of entire slab. d. Note: Prior to placement of concrete, inspect each seam to make sure tape has

been properly placed and remains clean and free of debris.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect installation of vapor barrier, pipe boots, penetration sealing and tear sealing. 2. Inspect under slab vapor barrier installation, verify that pipes, conduits, floor drains

and other penetrations have been sealed and lap seams taped in conformance with ASTM E 1643 and manufacturers published instructions.

3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and Inspection Reports.

4. Test and Inspection Reports shall be available to Architect upon request.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services:


1. Provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of under-slab vapor barrier system.

2. Inspect installation and certify that product has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. a. Prepare and submit inspection report for each inspection made.

C. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Use of screed pins penetrating installed vapor barrier not permitted. Use screed system that will not puncture vapor barrier.

B. Protect vapor barrier until placement of concrete. Punctures or tears of vapor barrier must

be repaired in compliance with manufacturer’s specifications.

C. Protect vapor barrier from any punctures or tears from the use of laser-screed concrete leveling machine or any other machinery. Do not permit laser-screed concrete leveling machine or any other machinery to maneuver or roll directly on vapor barrier where such use will puncture vapor barrier. 1. Driving machinery over vapor barrier not permitted.

D. Cover vapor barrier shortly after completion of installation. Keep vapor barrier exposure to

a minimum.

END OF SECTION


VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________

ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: ________________

OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________

Telephone Number: ________________________________________

UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION INSTALLER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Installer obtained a current copy of the manufacturer's published installation instructions for the

specific product being installed. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions and requirements

of ASTM E1643 with Project Field Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer furnished and installed specified 15 mil thick vapor barrier system in accordance with the

Contract Documents. Vapor barrier was installed on top of granular mat. 4. Installer has sealed around all penetrations and has inspected, repaired and sealed any and all

tears or punctures as per manufacturer's published instructions. 5. Installer installed vapor barrier system in conformance with vapor barrier manufacturer's published

installation instructions.

EXECUTED AND DELIVERED this _________________ day of ______________, 20___ . ________________________________________ (Company name) BY: ____________________________________ (Authorized signature) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ____________day of _____________, 20___. ________________________________________________ Notary Public _______________________________________________ Affix Seal My Commission expires:

END OF CERTIFICATION

FIG

UR

E TW

O

DA

MA

GED

AR

EA

BLO

CKO

UT

PIPE

PEN

ETR

ATI

ON

ALT

ERN

ATE

STEG

O® M

AST

ICPIPE

PEN

ETR

ATI

ON

All

patc

hes

mus

t co

ver

dam

aged

are

a by

6"

on a

ll si

des.

STEG

O® T

APE

Side

Vie

w

11/ 2

Tim

es P

ipe

Cir

cum

fere

nce

12"

Min

imum

Cut

1/ 2

of W

idth

PIPE

PEN

ETR

ATI

ON

CO

NST

RU

CTI

NG

A P

IPE

BO

OT

FRO

M S

TEG

O W

RA

P

1) C

ut a

pie

ce o

f Ste

go W

rap.

W

idth

: Min

imum

12"

Le

ngth

: 11 /

2 ti

mes

the

pipe

cir

cum

fere

nce

2) W

ith s

ciss

ors,

cut

slit

s ha

lf th

e w

idth

of t

he fi

lm.

3) W

rap

boot

aro

und

pipe

as

show

n; ta

pe o

nto

pipe

and

com

plet

ely

tapi

ng th

e ba

se to

Ste

go W

rap

barr

ier

u

sing

Ste

go T

ape.

Pg 4

1) C

ut a

pie

ce o

f Ste

go W

rap.

W

idth

: Min

imum

12"

Len

gth:

11 /

8 ti

mes

per

imet

er o

f blo

ckou

t

• (S

1 +

S2

+ S

3 +

S4 +

1/ 2 S

1)2)

With

sci

ssor

s, c

ut fl

aps

half

the

wid

th o

f the

film

at t

he c

orne

rs o

f eac

h si

de o

f the

blo

ckou

t.3)

Wra

p th

e bo

ot a

roun

d th

e bl

ocko

ut a

s sh

own;

ta

pe th

e ov

erla

p, ta

pe th

e fil

m o

nto

the

top

of

th

e bl

ocko

ut a

nd c

ompl

etel

y ta

pe th

e fla

ps to

Ste

go W

rap

barr

ier

usin

g St

ego

Tape

.

PIPE

PEN

ETR

ATI

ON

ALT

ERN

ATE

USI

NG

STE

GO

MA

STIC

TO

SEA

L PI

PES

1) C

ut o

ut a

sm

all a

rea

arou

nd p

ipes

.2)

Cut

a p

atch

of S

tego

Wra

p ex

tend

ing

at le

ast 6

" pa

st th

e cu

t out

in a

ll di

rect

ions

.3)

Cut

X's

or

smal

l cir

cles

in th

e pa

tch

and

inst

all o

ver

pipe

s.4)

Ove

rlap

at l

east

6"

and

tape

with

Ste

go T

ape.

5) B

uild

up

40-6

0 m

ils o

f mas

tic, o

r as

nee

ded

to c

ompl

etel

y

fill

all v

oids

bet

wee

n th

e pi

pe a

nd S

tego

Wra

p.6)

Allo

w 2

4 ho

urs

for

max

imum

cur

e be

fore

con

cret

e po

ur.

11/ 8

Tim

es

Blo

ckou

t Pe

rim

eter

12"

Min

imum

Cut

1/ 2

of W

idth

at c

orne

rs

S1S2

S3S4

1 /2S

1

Com

plet

ely

Tape

A

ll Sl

its

S2

S3

S4

1 /2S

1S1

Side

Vie

w

Side

Vie

w

Com

plet

ely

Fill

all V

oids

BLO

CKO

UT

CO

NST

RU

CTI

NG

A B

LOC

KOU

T B

OO

T FR

OM

STE

GO

WR

AP

10/0

3

Designation: E 1643 – 98

Standard Practice forInstallation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact withEarth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 1

This standard is issued under the fixed designation E 1643; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year oforiginal adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. Asuperscript epsilon (e) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope

1.1 This practice covers procedures for installing flexible,prefabricated sheet membranes in contact with earth or granu-lar fill used as vapor retarders under concrete slabs.

1.2 Conditions subject to frost, heave or hydrostatic pres-sure, or both, are beyond the scope of this practice.

1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of thesafety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is theresponsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.

1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regardedas the standard. The values given in parentheses are forinformation only.

2. Referenced Documents

2.1 ASTM Standards:C 33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates2

D 224 Specification for Smooth-Surfaced Asphalt RollRoofing (Organic Felt)3

E 631 Terminology of Building Constructions4

2.2 Other Standard:ACI 302.1R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construc-

tion5

3. Significance and Use

3.1 Vapor retarders provide a method of limiting watervapor transmission upward through concrete slabs on grade,which can adversely affect moisture-impermeable or moisture-sensitive floor finishes.

3.2 Adverse impacts include adhesion loss, warping, peel-ing, and unacceptable appearance of resilient flooring; deterio-ration of adhesives, ripping or separation of seams, air bubblesor efflorescence beneath seamed, continuous flooring; damageto flat electrical cable systems, buckling of carpet and carpet

tiles, offensive odors, and growth of fungi.

4. Manufacturer’s Recommendations

4.1 Where inconsistencies occur between this practice andthe manufacturer’s instructions, conform to the manufacturer’sinstructions for installation of vapor retarder.

5. Placement

5.1 Level and tamp or roll granular base.5.2 Place vapor retarder sheeting with the longest dimension

parallel with the direction of concrete pour.5.3 Lap vapor retarder over footings or seal to foundation

wall, or both, and seal around penetrations such as utilities andcolumns in order to create a monolithic membrane between thesurface of the slab and moisture sources below the slab and atthe slab perimeter (see Figs. 1-3).

5.4 Lap joints 6 in. (150 mm), or as instructed by themanufacturer, and seal with the manufacturer’s recommendedadhesive or pressure sensitive tape or both.

6. Protection

6.1 Take precautions to protect vapor retarder from damageduring installation of reinforcing steel and utilities and duringplacement of concrete.

6.2 Use only concrete brick type reinforcing bar supports, orprovide 6 by 6 in. (150 by 150 mm) protective pads of asphaltichardboard or other material recommended by the vapor re-tarder manufacturer to protect the vapor retarder from punc-ture.

6.3 Avoid use of stakes driven through vapor retarder.6.4 Refer to X2.2 and X2.3 for discussion of aggregate for

protection of vapor retarder.

7. Repair

7.1 Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement ofreinforcing or concrete with vapor barrier material or asinstructed by manufacturer.

7.2 Lap beyond damaged areas a minimum of 6 in. and sealas prescribed for sheet joints.

8. Suggested Field Check List

8.1 Moisture Entrapment Due to Rainfall or Ground WaterIntrusion—Moisture entrapment can occur with tilt-up con-struction or other construction methods where exterior walls

1 This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee E-6 on Performanceof Buildings and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee E06.21 on Service-ability.

Current edition approved Sept. 10, 1998. Published March 1999. Originallypublished as E 1643 – 94. Last previous edition E 1643 – 94.

2 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 04.02.3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 04.04.4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards,Vol 04.11.5 Available from American Concrete Institute, P.O. Box 19150, Detroit, MI

48219.

1

Copyright © ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.

are erected before the concrete slab and underlying subgrade,base, or sand/small aggregate layer or combination thereof, areprotected from precipitation. This can be avoided by appropri-ate construction scheduling and sealing of any entry points in

uncompleted slabs6 (see Fig. 4).8.2 Integrity of Vapor Retarder—Check seams and penetra-

tions at columns and utilities to look for discontinuities in thevapor retarder.

8.3 Damage and Repair—After installation of reinforce-ment (if used) but before pouring concrete, check for damage.Do not pour concrete until repairs are made, if required, invapor retarder. This is particularly difficult if covered with sandor granular fill.

8.4 Moisture Conditions of Slab—Following placement ofconcrete and climatization of building, check to see that anyspecified tests for moisture emission have been made and awritten report submitted prior to floor covering or coatinginstallation.

9. Keywords

9.1 concrete slabs; vapor; vapor retarder

6 Collins, F. Thomas,Manual of Tilt-Up Construction,Berkeley, Know-HowPublications, 1965, pp 78–81.

FIG. 1 Concrete Slab on Grade: Optimum Relationship of VaporRetarder Components

FIG. 2 Concrete Slab on Grade: Solution for Subgrade SlightlyBelow Exterior Grade

FIG. 3 Concrete Slab on Grade: Solution for Subgrade Up toOne Story below Grade with No Hydrostatic Pressure on Vapor

Retarder

FIG. 4 How Moisture Can Be Retained in Base or Cushion,Blotter, or Protection Course During Construction

E 1643

2

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. PRE-DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

X1.1 Architectural

X1.1.1 Planning and Organization of ConstructionDocuments—To avoid ambiguities, redundancies, conflicts,and omissions, plan the organization and coordination ofdrawings and specifications so that graphic, dimensional, anddescriptive information on subgrade, granular base, vaporretarder, and protection course, if any, appears in only oneplace. Since the relationship of the subgrade (pad) elevation(usually shown on grading plans) to the rest of the buildingfinish floor elevations and finished site grades is a function ofthe depth of the granular base and protection course, thesedimensions should be shown in only one place. For graphicdepictions and dimensions of the granular base and theprotection course, the architectural drawings are preferred, butstructural drawings are sometimes used. Specifications forsub-base conditions should be in the grading section. Specifi-cations for base, vapor retarder, and protection course shouldbe in the section on concrete, but there are advocates of aseparate section in Division 7 for the vapor retarder system.Examination and testing of surface conditions should be inappropriate finish sections.

X1.1.2 Scheduling—Determine if slab drying will be on thecritical path for schedule occupancy. If so, plan measures toreduce drying times, mitigate moisture, or select floor finishmaterials not subject to damage by moisture.

X1.1.3 Geotechnical—Ensure that the geotechnical surveyincludes comprehensive and reliable information on subsurface

water table levels and the hydrology of geological strata as wellas historical data on surface flooding and hydrology. Thegeotechnical study should consider not only the past but alsothe projected change from ongoing or anticipated developmentpatterns. Soils with comparably higher clay contents areparticularly troublesome because the relatively high capillaryaction within the clay allows moisture to rise under the slab.

X1.1.4 Civil—Ensure that site topographic surveys andgrading plans accurately and comprehensively establish sur-face drainage characteristics for the site and surrounding areas.

X1.1.5 Landscape and Irrigation—Most traditional geo-technical studies do not take into account the post-constructionchange in ground moisture conditions due to introducedplanting and irrigation which is a major problem. For example,in California coastal areas, the average annual rainfall is about18 in. (457 mm). Turf irrigation amounting to 1.3 in. (33 mm)of water per week over the normal 7-month dry season willincrease this to nearly 60 in. (1524 mm) with almost no runoff.It is not enough to assume that irrigation will simply duplicatenatural conditions encountered during the wet season. Thelandscape architect, geotechnical engineer, and civil engineershould closely coordinate design recommendations to avoidmoisture problems introduced or exacerbated by landscapeplanting and irrigation. Once a project is completed, effectiveirrigation management is instrumental not only in waterconservation but also in avoiding potential building-relatedmoisture problems.

X2. DESIGN PHASE CONSIDERATIONS

X2.1 Subgrade Design and Specification

X2.1.1 Specify preparation and configuration of sub-basematerial as directed by the geotechnical engineer. Designsub-grade topography and drainage to ensure positive relief ofhydrostatic pressure. Incorporate design of mechanical drain-age system if gravity outflow is not possible, or designsub-grade waterproofing to resist expected hydrostatic pres-sures.

X2.1.2 The grading specifications must require the contrac-tor to keep any below grade excavations free of water. It isimportant to avoid potential reservoirs of moisture that migrateupward through slabs, but it is also important to preventstructural degradation of soil bearing strength and to avoidswelling and subsequent shrinkage in soils containing exces-sive silt/clay with expansive characteristics. If any subgrademoisture-induced swelling is anticipated, the construction se-quence should be planned so that it occurs prior to slabconstruction rather than after.

X2.1.3 ACI 302.1R-89 warns that the subgrade must be

well drained and of adequate and uniform load-bearing nature.The “in-place density” of the subgrade soils should be at leastthe minimum required in the specifications. The bottom of anundrained granular base course must not be lower than theadjacent finished grade; otherwise, the base course becomes areservoir for water.

X2.1.4 Details of site preparation are given by ACI Com-mittee 330 and the Building Research Advisory Board. Whenexpansive soils are encountered, the recommendations of asoils engineer should be followed.

X2.1.5 The subgrade must be free of frost before concreteplacing begins. If the temperature inside a building in whichconcrete is to be placed is below freezing it must be raised andmaintained above 50°F (10°C) long enough to remove all frostfrom the subgrade. The subgrade should be moist at the time ofconcreting. If necessary it should be dampened with water inadvance of concreting, but there must be no free water standingon the subgrade, nor should there be any muddy or soft spotswhen the concrete is placed (see ACI 301.2 R89, 3.1).

E 1643

3

X2.2 Open Drain Rock Base/Capillary Break Design andSpecification:

X2.2.1 A base using a minimum of 3 in. (76 mm) of clean,compacted, crushed rock provides adequate bearing strengthwhile at the same time incorporates sufficient air pockets toreduce the potential of ground water migrating upward throughcapillary action. While a vapor retarder used in conjunctionwith the base may obviate the need for capillary break, thebreak provides a margin of safety in case of punctures and lapseam failures.

X2.2.2 To be an effective capillary break, the base should beopen (mostly single) graded, clean coarse rock of3⁄4 in. (19mm) maximum size.

X2.2.3 Both crushed and river run rock are used, but one orthe other may not be readily available in certain areas. Crushedrock is much more likely to cause puncture damage to thevapor retarder but is more easily compactable. If crushed rockis used, special attention must be given to selecting andprotecting the vapor retarder. A1⁄2-in. (13-mm) (approxi-mately) layer of fine grade, compactible fill may be rolled orcompacted over the base to protect against crushed rock base.

X2.3 Cushions, Blotters, and Protection Courses:

X2.3.1 Background—The use of a cushion, blotter, or pro-tection course has often been considered an integral part of thevapor retarder installation because one of its perceived func-tions is to protect the vapor retarder from damage. A consensusof vapor retarder product producers is that the protection roleis either unnecessary or overrated and should not be acomponent of an application standard practice for vaporretarders. The principal role of the cushion, blotter, or protec-tion course, according to its proponents, is its function in theplacement, finishing, and curing of concrete. Its use, if any,should be related to the concrete mix design and curingspecifications, not the use of a vapor retarder. Nevertheless, thefollowing considerations are provided to guide the specifier.

X2.3.2 Arguments in Favor of Cushions, Blotters, andProtection Courses:

X2.3.2.1 Blotter Theory—A common practice in many partsof the United States is to place a layer of sand or granular fillon top of the vapor retarder prior to the placement of concrete.The theory is that the fill serves as a blotter to help equalizemoisture content and reduce plastic shrinkage cracking. In the1980 version of ACI 302.1, the fill is described as “sand.” InACI 302.1R-96,Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construc-tion (4.1.4 and 4.1.5), and is no longer recommended. Insteada “fine graded” material is described as follows:

X2.3.2.2 Base Material—Use of the proper material isessential in order to achieve the tolerances suggested in Section4.1.3 of ACI 302.1R-96. The base material should be compact-ible, easy-to-trim, granular fill that will remain stable andsupport construction traffic. The tire of a loaded concrete truckmixer should not penetrate the surface more than1⁄2 in. (13mm) when driven across the base. The use of so-called cushionsand or clean sand with uniform particle size, such as concretesand meeting Specification C 33 will not be adequate. Thistype of sand will be difficult, if not impossible, to compact andmaintain until concrete placement is complete. A clean, fine-

graded material with at least 10 to 30 % of particles passing aNo. 100 (150 µm) sieve but not contaminated with clay, silt, ororganic material is recommended. Manufactured sand from arock-crushing operation works well; the jagged slivers tend tointerlock and stabilize the material when compacted. It isimportant that the material have a uniform distribution ofparticle sizes ranging from No. 4 (4.75 mm) through the No.200 (80 µm) sieve. See Specification C 33, Table 1, forlimitation of deleterious material finer than No. 200 (80 µm)sieve. Unwashed size No. 10 per Specification D 224 workswell.

X2.3.2.3 Vapor Barrier/Vapor Retarder—If a vapor barrieror vapor retarder is required due to local conditions, theseproducts should be placed under a minimum of 4 in. (100 mm)of trimable, compactible, granular fill (not sand). A so-called“crusher-run” material, usually graded from 1-1⁄2 to 2 in. (38 to50 mm) down to rock dust, is suitable. Following compaction,the surface can be choked off with a fine-grade material (seeSection 4.1.1 of ACI 302.1R-96) to reduce friction between thebase material and the slab. If it is not practical to install acrusher-run material, the vapor barrier/retarder should becovered with at least 3 in. (75 mm) of fine-graded material,such as crusher fines or manufactured sand (see Section 4.1.4of ACI 302.1R-96). The granular fill, as well as the fine-gradedmaterial, should have sufficient moisture content to be com-pactible, but still be dry enough at the time of concreteplacement to act as a “blotter” (see Section 4.1 of ACI302.1R-96). If a vapor barrier/retarder is to be placed over arough granular fill, a thin layer of approximately1⁄2 in. (13 mm)of fine-graded material should be rolled or compacted over thefill prior to installation of the vapor barrier/retarder to reducethe possibility of puncture (see Section 4.1.4 of ACI 302.1R-96).

X2.3.2.4 Protection Theory—Polyethylene films and rein-forced polyethylene films are seldom capable of survivingnormal jobsite traffic and abuse and must be protected with asand cushion.

X2.3.3 Arguments Against Cushions, Blotters, and Protec-tion Courses:

X2.3.3.1 Polyethylene and polyethylene reinforced prod-ucts are frequently damaged during installation. Even with acushion of sand or granular fill, these products can still beeasily damaged.7

X2.3.3.2 The concept of permitting excess moisture lossfrom the surface and draining water from the bottom ofconcrete slabs is to facilitate the early and effective finishingoperation of concrete mixes with a high ratio of water tocement. Contractors will frequently favor high slump (soupy)mixes, as they are easy to place and program over the site.However, they then have to get rid of this “water of conve-nience” before the mix will stiffen, and they can complete thefinishing operation.7

X2.3.3.3 Proper applications would be the use of a lowslump concrete with an effective cure or seal material or bothto treat the top surface.6

7 “Cast-in-Place Concrete-Division 3, San Scenario,”Tech Tips,Elgin IL: W.R.Meadows, Inc., 1993, p 2.

E 1643

4

X2.3.3.4 With a proper concrete mix, the specifier canobtain high performance concrete at no additional cost. Thecontractor’s desire for workability can be readily satisfied witha number of high-range water reducers (super plasticizers),currently recommended by ACI (see ACI 302.1-80).

X2.3.3.5 Sand is easily displaced by walking or by impactfrom pumped or chuted concrete mix (see ACI 302.1-80).

X2.3.3.6 Sand or granular fill as “blotters” is not used in

above grade slabs, but concrete is routinely installed andfinished successfully (see ACI 302.1-80).

X2.3.3.7 The large aggregate described in the draft of theproposed revision of ACI 302.1 would puncture a membranevapor retarder.

X2.3.3.8 Geotextile fabric can be used to provide protectionto vapor retarders without affecting the quality of the concrete.

The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connectionwith any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any suchpatent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years andif not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standardsand should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsibletechnical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make yourviews known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, United States.Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above address or at610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or [email protected] (e-mail); or through the ASTM website (www.astm.org).

E 1643

5

03 1100 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0215 CONCRETE FORMING

SECTION 03 1100

CONCRETE FORMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Wood Forms 2. Form accessories.




1. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing for concrete. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for foundations, floors and

walks. 3. Section 31 2316 - Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings: Spread footing

foundations. 4. Section 32 1314 - Concrete Walks and Pads: Sidewalks and equipment pads.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 3. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.


1. ASTM D 1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Data for form release agent, form sealer, construction joint form, void forms and foam board panels.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit diagram of proposed construction joints not indicated on Drawings

before or along with reinforcing shop drawings. 1. Shop drawings will be reviewed for proposed construction joint locations for aesthetic

criteria and general design conformance only.



A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Transport, handle, store and protect Products.

B. Store form materials and accessories on dunnage under cover with protective sheeting.

C. Store void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer’s packaging.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate and notify responsible trades of schedule for concrete placement to allow for adequate time for scheduling, installation and coordination of their work.

B. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over

reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD FORMS

A. Lumber: Southern pine species, No. 2 grade; with grade stamp clearly visible

B. Plywood: Douglas fir species; sheathing grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges.

C. Wood, metal and other approved material that will not adversely affect surface of concrete

and will provide or facilitate obtaining specified surface finish.

D. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be built of lumber or other material of equal qualifications, of sufficient thickness to be capable of sustaining the loads to be imposed thereon, dressed to uniformly smooth contact surfaces and so constructed as to be readily removable.

E. Wood forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed of moisture-resistant,

concrete form sheathing, not less than 5 ply, minimum 9/16 inch thick, with one smooth face.

2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS

A. Metal Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. Metal forms shall be clean, unpainted and in good condition. Forms shall at all times be straight to provide members of the widths and depths required. Damaged or indented forms will not be acceptable.

2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES


A. Form Sealer: High performance, transparent, penetrating polyurethane sealer for wood forms.

B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorb

moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.

C. Form Ties: Adjustable length, free of lugs, cones, washers or other features that can leave

a hole larger than 7/8 inch diameter, or depressions behind exposed surface of concrete. Ties constructed so that when forms are removed, there will be no metal remaining within 1 inch of the finished surface of the concrete. 1. Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Manufactured to allow positive break-back of minimum

one 1 inch inside concrete surface, equipped with plastic cone of minimum five-eighths 5/8 inch diameters and 1 inch long; cover hole and prevent leakage of mortar.

2. Non-Exposed Surfaces: Bolt rods or patented devices with minimum tensile strength of 3,000 pounds when fully assembled.

D. Corner Chamfer: 3/4 inch x 3/4 inch PVC form strip.

E. Compressible Filler: ASTM D 1752, Type 1; Pre-molded plastic strips, non-asphaltic.

F. Construction Joint Form: manufactured key-joint form that produces smooth, flush surface

joint.

G. Waterstops: Specified in Section 03 1513 - Waterstops.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that

dimensions agree with drawings.




3.2 ERECTION - FORMWORK

A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.

B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to

overstressing by construction loads.


C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.

D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.

E. Rustications and bevels in exposed concrete shown on the Drawings shall be neatly

formed. All rustication strips shall be milled so that the edges are smooth and free from sawmarks or other irregularities.

3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.

C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or

applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS

A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.

B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.

C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,

recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.

D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

3.5 FORM CLEANING

A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.

B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure

that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing

salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.

3.6 FORMWORK TOLERANCES

A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections.


1. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.



B. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract Documents.

3.8 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.

B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete

surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.

END OF SECTION

03 1513 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 WATERSTOPS

SECTION 03 1513

WATERSTOPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Hydrophillic strip waterstops. 2. Footing and foundation pipe penetration seal.




1. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Foundation forms. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete foundation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Product description, profiles, performance criteria, tests performed and installation details.



B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.








G. Store products off ground under cover and protect from oil, dirt, sunlight and exposure to water.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Greenstreak, Incorporated: www.greenstreak.com.

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 NON-MOVING JOINT WATERSTOPS

A. Product: Swellstop. B. Description: Hydrophillic strip waterstop comprised of bentonite clay and butyl rubber that

expands three times it's original volume when in contact with water, 3/4 inch x 1 inch profile rolls.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer Adhesive: Greenstreak Swellstop Primer Adhesive.

B. Contact Adhesive: Greenstreak High Performance Contact Adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 – Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Ensure steel reinforcing bars do not interfere with proper position of waterstop.





3.2 PREPARATION

A Clean and prepare surfaces where products will be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Remove all dust, oil and laitance from concrete surface before bonding waterstop to

concrete.

C. Provide support and protection of waterstops during progress of Work.


D. Provide suitable guards to protect exposed projecting edges and ends of partially embedded waterstops from damage when concrete placement has been stopped.

3.3 INSTALLATION - NON-MOVING JOINT WATERSTOPS

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions to form a continuous watertight diaphragm.

B. Install waterstop after first pour form is stripped and before second pour.

C. Primer Adhesive Application:

1. Remove loose particles and dirt and apply primer adhesive to 24-hour cured and dry concrete surface.

2. Brush apply 1 coat of primer adhesive 2 inches wide continuously along joint. 3. Allow primer adhesive to dry for 2 hours before application of waterstop. 4. Apply waterstop same day as primer adhesive application.

D. Waterstop Installation: 1. Position waterstop on joint as indicted on Drawings. 2. Press strip waterstop firmly and continuously in place over primed area on first

concrete pour. 3. Butt ends of strip coil. Press ends together to ensure no separation and no air

pockets. Place in maximum practical lengths to minimize splicing. Cut coil ends square with sharp blade to fit splices together without overlaps.

4. Immediately before placing 2nd pour, inspect waterstop for premature swell, discontinuity, and debris contamination. Replace swelled and damaged waterstop. Remove unacceptable waterstop from site and dispose of defective material in accordance with local regulations.

5. Remove the separation paper from the strip waterstop immediately before the 2nd pour.

6. Place concrete without displacing waterstop from position. 7. Thoroughly vibrate concrete around waterstop to obtain impervious, void free

concrete in vicinity of joint and to maximize contact between concrete and waterstop. Do not permit vibrator to contact waterstop.

E. Installation Locations:

1. Between top of footing or grade beam and concrete floor slab. 2. Horizontal joints between footings and concrete walls. 3. Vertical control or construction joints. 4. Pipe, conduit or other item penetrating subgrade concrete wall. Completely wrap

around penetrating item.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect waterstop and wall penetration installation, materials, profile style, splicing

and alignment. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and

Inspection Reports.



B. Correct deficiencies in products or installation found not to be in compliance with Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

03 2000 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

SECTION 03 2000

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. 2. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.




1. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Foundation and slab forms. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete foundation and slabs. 3. Section 31 2316 - Excavation - Spread and Continuous: Spread footing building

foundation. 4. Section 32 1314 - Concrete Walks and Pads: Site concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 3. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual.


1. ASTM A 185 - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

2. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ASTM A 706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

1. CRSI MSP - Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI DET - Reinforcing Bar Detailing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66 and CRSI DET. Include installation drawings including complete bending diagrams, assembly diagrams for splicing and laps of bars, shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcing and accessories. 1. Show diagrammatic elevations of walls at scale large enough to clearly show position

and erection marks of marginal bars, around openings, dowels, splices, etc., for these bars.


2. Show complete layout plan for each layer of reinforcing of slabs, beams and piers, showing number, arrangement, spacing, location, marking and orientations of reinforcement required for layer being described.


A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301, ACI SP-66, and ACI 318.

B. Reinforcing steel shall be new domestic steel. Use of foreign or steel of undetermined origin not permitted.

C. Steel supplier shall furnish mill certificate reports for all reinforcing.

1. Mill Test Reports shall be available for review by Architect and Engineer at time of delivery.



B. Deliver reinforcing to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size, length and mark.

C. Contractor shall receive reinforcing at site, inspect reinforcing for specified requirements

and verify contents of mill certificate. Contractor shall require tests as specified in Quality Assurance article if mill certificate is not provided with shipment.

D. Unload reinforcing carefully to prevent damage. Store above ground in dry, well drained

area and protect from mud, dirt, paint and corrosion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Reinforcement specifically noted as being welded shall be domestic steel conforming to ASTM A 706. 1. New deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Unfinished.

B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, Grade 65, new, domestic manufacturer, steel spot

welded at intersections; sizes indicated on Drawings. 1. Flat Sheets. Rolls not permitted. 2. Mesh Size: Indicated on Drawings. 3. Wire Gage: Indicated on Drawings.

C. Reinforcement Accessories: Include spacers, chairs, bolsters, ties and other devices

necessary for properly placing, spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place, conforming to the requirements of CRSI DET and ACI SP-66. Metal accessories shall be plastic protected where legs will be exposed in finished concrete surfaces. Plastic protection shall be color of concrete. 1. Tie Wire: Black annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

reinforcement during concrete placement.


a. Bar supports for concrete resting on earth or vapor barrier shall be pre-cast briquettes, having tie wires embedded therein, or Individual High Chairs with bottom plates.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI MSP and ACI SP-66.

B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at point of minimum stress in accordance with CRSI MSP and ACI SP-66.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning: Before placing in work thoroughly clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill, scale, dirt, oil, and other coating which might tend to reduce bonding. Re-inspect reinforcing left protruding for future bonding, or following delay in work, and re-clean if necessary.

B. In case of fabrication errors, do not straighten or re-bend reinforcement so as to weaken or

injure the material.

3.3 PLACEMENT - REINFORCING BARS

A. Bar Placement: In accordance with ACI 301, ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and CRSI MSP.

B. Bending: Bend bars cold; do not heat reinforcing or bend by makeshift methods. Discard bent, kinked or otherwise damaged bars.

C. Splices: In accordance with ACI SP-66 and the Contract Documents.

D. Placing: Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and securely saddle tied in accordance

with CRSI recommended practice with No. 16 gauge black annealed wire, and shall be rigidly held in place during the placing of the concrete by means of metal chairs or spacers. 1. Bars in concrete walls shall be held in position, and to proper clearances, by means of

concrete or metal spacers made especially for the locations where spacers are required.

2. Bars in footings, beams and slabs shall be held to exact location during placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or other necessary supports.


E. Supports: In accordance with ACI 301 and ACI SP-66 for number, type, spacing and

placing.

F. Protection: Conform to ACI 318, Chapter 7.

G. Concrete Cover: Refer to Structural Drawings.

3.4 PLACEMENT - WIRE FABRIC

A. Install in longest practicable lengths.

B. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams or continuous structures.

C. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous lap.

D. Keep wire in proper position during concrete placements.

E. Lap splices shall be in accordance with ACI 318.

3.5 WELDING

A. No welding of reinforcing steel permitted unless specifically indicated on Structural Drawings.

B. Welding of reinforcing steel shall conform to AWS D1.4.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect reinforcement installation, steel type and grade, supports, spacers and ties

before concrete placement. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and

Inspection Reports. 3. Test and Inspection Reports shall be available to Architect upon request.

B. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents.

END OF SECTION

03 3000 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cast in-place concrete foundations, floors and slabs on grade. 2. Concrete admixtures, accessories, joint devices and materials. 3. Concrete mixing and mix design. 4. Concrete topping over metal decking. 5. Contractor advance notification to Architect and Engineer before placing concrete.

B. Work Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:

1. Section 03 0586 - Vapor Barrier: Installation of Vapor Barrier over granular fill mat. 2. Section 31 2324 – Fill and Backfill: Installation of granular fill mat below building slab-

on-grade concrete. C. Related Documents:


D. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Preparation and submittal of field inspection and test reports.

2. Section 03 0586 - Vapor Barrier: Underslab vapor barrier. 3. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Forms and accessories for

formwork. 4. Section 03 1513 - Waterstops. 5. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing for foundations and slabs. 6. Section 03 3500 - Concrete Finishing: Concrete finishes and concrete sealer. 7 Section 03 3900 - Concrete Curing: Initial and final curing of concrete surfaces. 8. Section 05 3100 - Steel Deck: Floor decking for placement of concrete topping. 9. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at concrete joints. 10. Section 31 2316 - Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings: Spread footing

building foundation. 11. Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill: Granular fill mat under floor slab. 12. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Concrete paving. 13. Section 32 1314 - Concrete Walks and Pads: Sidewalks and equipment pads.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.

2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 3. ACI 302.2R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 4. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 5. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 7. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.


8. ACI 309 - Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete. 9. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary.


1. ASTM C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

2. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens. 4. ASTM C 42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and

Beams of Concrete. 5. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C 136 - Standard method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 7. ASTM C 138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air

(Galvimetric) of Concrete. 8. ASTM C 143 - Standard Specification for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 9. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 10. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 11. ASTM C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Volumetric Method. 12. ASTM C 192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in

the Laboratory. 13. ASTM C 231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Pressure Method. 14. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 15. ASTM C 330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural

Concrete. 16. ASTM C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 17. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural

Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 18. ASTM C 881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete. 19. ASTM C 1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to

Hardened Concrete. 20. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink). 21. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

22. ASTM E 1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Flat (per ASTM E 1155): Even, plane, homological, free of undulation. B. Flatness: Relative degree to which a surface conforms to a plane.

C. Level (per ASTM E 1155): Horizontal, normal to the direction of gravity.

D. Levelness: Relative degree to which a surface parallels horizontal.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products.

a. Air entrainment admixture. b. Water reducing admixture. c. Waterstop. d. Expansion and control joints. e. Sealants and waterproofing. f. Reinforcing bars and wire mesh. g. Vapor barrier. h. Actual break-out of concrete materials if requested, (sand/gravel/cement). I. Concrete accessories, complete. j. Epoxy and grout. k. Lumber. l. Steel forms. m. Anchors. n. Architect may require additional information and or product material during

construction. Provide when requested. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit a Control Joint and Construction Joint plan indicating

proposed locations of control joints and construction joints in concrete floor slabs. a. Control joint and construction joint plan shall be mechanically drawn to scale.

3. Samples: Provide actual sample piece of each Product used, minimum 12 inch length or as required by Architect. Provide as an integral part of Product Data submittal package. a. Waterstop. b. Expansion and control joints. c. Sealants and waterproofing. d. Reinforcing bars and wire mesh. e. Vapor barrier. f. Lumber. g. Steel forms. h. Anchors. i. Architect may require additional information and or product material during

construction. Provide when requested. 4. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Design Data: Submit design mixes for each type and strength of concrete including the following. 1) Proportions of cement, fine and course aggregates and water. 2) Combined aggregate gradation. 3) Aggregate specific gravity and gradations. 4) Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump and air content. 5) Type of cement and aggregates. 6) Type and proportion of admixtures. 7) Special requirements for pumping. 8) Range of ambient temperature and humidity of design. 9) Any special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing,

placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product. b. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect at completion of

each test. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01 4500 – Quality Control. 1) Compressive strength tests for each set of test cylinders. 2) Slump test for each set of test cylinders. 3) Air content test for each set of test cylinders. 4) Unit weight test for each set of test cylinders. 5) Temperature test for each set of test cylinders.


5. Special Inspection Reports: Submit the following inspection reports directly to Building Official and Architect from Independent Special Inspector with copy to Contractor in accordance with requirements of International Building Code, Section 1704 - Special Inspections, if required by the Building Official.


1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following. a. Actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed

from view upon completion of concrete work. 2. Concrete Test Reports: Provide copies of each concrete test report in Closeout

Documents Manual. 3. Installation Certification: Submit written certification of installation on form located at

end of Section.


A. Qualifications:

1. Installer: Company specializing in concrete work specified with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

2. Concrete Samples and Slump Tests: a. Testing Agency: Sample cylinders taken and slump test performed by

Independent Testing Laboratory personnel.

B. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

C. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project.

D. Plant Quality Control: 1. Concrete production facilities shall meet the requirement for certification by the

National Ready Mixed Concrete Association. 2. Concrete batchers shall be completely interlocked semi-automatic or automatic

batchers, as defined by the Concrete Plan Manufacturer’s Bureau. 3. Concrete batchers shall have graphic, digital, or photographic recorders, which shall

register both empty balance and total weight (or volume of water or admixture) of each batched material, time to the nearest minute, date, identification of batch, and numerical count of each batch.

E. Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of ACI Publications and

pertinent ASTM Publications in Project Field Office and refer to these publications at all times during concrete Work.

F. Concrete Floor Slab Moisture Emission and Acidity:

1. Do not place or permit placement of underslab granular mat if building area subgrade pad is wet. Place granular mat only when building area subgrade pad area is dry. Refer to Section 31 2314 - Building Area Subgrade Pad Preparation.

2. Do not place or permit placement of underslab vapor barrier over granular mat if granular mat is wet. Place underslab vapor barrier only when granular mat is dry. Refer to Section 03 0586 - Vapor Barrier.

3. Do not add water into transit-mixer at Project site before concrete placement unless instructed by Independent Testing Laboratory representative as specified in this Section.

4. Concrete Contractor is responsible for properly curing concrete floor slab to provide concrete floor slab with moisture emission and acidity test results conforming to each floor material manufacturer requirements for moisture emission and acidity as


specified in each floor material specification section when tested in accordance with ASTM F 1869. Refer to each floor material specification section for specific requirements.



B. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready-mixed in accordance with ASTM C 94.

C. Schedule delivery so that continuity of any pour will not be interrupted for over 15 minutes.

D. Place concrete on site within 90 minutes after proportioning materials at batch plant.


A. Hot Weather Concreting: 1. Follow ACI 301 and ACI 305R. 2. Provide retarding type admixture conforming to ASTM C 494, Type A or D in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Maximum concrete temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F at time of placement.

a. Obtain Architect approval for use of water reducer before using water reducer. b. With prior Architect approval, concrete with temperatures above 90 degrees F

shall be placed only if a high range water reducer (super plasticizer) is added to the mix as directed the Testing Laboratory to maintain the specified slump during placement.

B. Cold Weather Concreting: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength

which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. Follow ACI 301 and ACI 306R. 2. When ambient temperature at site is below 40 degrees F or is expected to fall to that

temperature within ensuing 24 hours, heat water and/or aggregate prior to adding to mix so that temperature of concrete will be between 55 degrees F and 85 degrees F at time of placement.

3. Maintain temperature of deposited concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for minimum of seven days after placing.

4. Temperature Changes: Maintain changes in concrete temperature as uniformly as possible, but in no case exceed change of 5 degrees F per hour or 25 degrees F in any 24 hour period.

5. Do not use combustion heaters during first 48 hours without precautions to prevent exposure of concrete and workers to exhaust gases containing carbon dioxide and/or carbon monoxide.

C. Select admixture type (normal, retarder, or high early) best suited for concrete at the time of

placing. The use of calcium chloride is specifically prohibited.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

A. Standard Formwork: Specified in Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT


A. Specified in Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618; Class C.

1. Maximum Percentage: 20 percent of cement content by weight. 2. Architectural Exposed Concrete: Fly ash not permitted.

C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33.

1. Fine: Clean, hard, durable, uncoated, natural sand, washed, free of silt, loam or clay. 2. Coarse: Hard, durable, uncoated gravel. Maximum size as follows:

a. Piers: 1-1/2 inches. b. All other Concrete: 1 inch.

3. Grading: ASTM C 136.

D. Water: Potable, clean and free from oil, acid and injurious amount of vegetable matter, alkalis and other impurities conforming to ASTM C 94.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260.

B. Water Reducing: ASTM C 494, Type A or D.

1. Use in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and as determined by Testing Laboratory.

2. Admixture shall not discolor concrete or affect appearance of concrete. 3. High-range Type F may be used.

C. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted.

2.5 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non-redispersable type.

B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic

aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 Days: 5000 psi. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7500 psi.

C. Vapor Barrier: Specified in Section 03 0586 - Vapor Barrier.

D. Waterstops: Specified in Section 03 1513 - Waterstops.

E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp

surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.

2.6 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS

A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with

ASTM D 1751, thickness as indicated on Drawings and width/depth as indicated.


B. Construction Joint Devices: Steel slab construction joints not permitted.

C. Sealant and Primer: Specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

2.7 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Design Criteria:

1. Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 318. 2. For each concrete mix type proposed.

B. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Proportions of cement, aggregate, and water to

attain required plasticity and compressive strength shall be in accordance with ACI 318. 1. Mix designs furnished by concrete supplier, and accompanied by test data showing

an acceptable strength history meeting requirements of Method 2 as specified in Section 3.8 of ACI 301. a. Temperature of concrete in test data shall be within 5 degrees F of maximum

temperature specified for this project. b. Strengths indicated in test data shall be in accordance with ACI 318, paragraph

4.3. c. Specified strength of concrete used in supporting test data shall vary no more

than 500 psi plus or minus from that specified for this Project. 2. Testing Laboratory: Keep strength history record of all concrete for duration of

Project.

C. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.

D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 at rates

recommended by manufacturer.

E. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39 at 28 days:

a. Foundation Walls, Footings and Building Slabs on Grade: 3000 psi. b. Floor Topping Slab: 3500 psi. c. Drilled Piers and Grade Beams: 3500 psi. e. Sidewalks and Exterior Slabs on Grade: 3500 psi, air-entrained. f. Paving, Curbs and Gutters: 4000 psi, air-entrained.

2. Slump:

a. Foundation Walls, Footings and Building Slabs: 3 to 4 inches. b. Floor Topping Slab: 3 to 4 inches. c. Grade Beams: 3 to 4. e. Sidewalks and Exterior Slabs on Grade: 4 to 6 inches.

2.8 MIXING

A. Use transit-mixed concrete conforming to requirements of ASTM C 94 and ACI 304. Do not

use concrete mixed at Project Site. Do not transport concrete or use concrete in any case after maximum of 90 minutes elapsed after introduction of water into mixer. 1. Temperatures Between 85 and 90 Degrees F: When air temperature is between 85

degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to maximum 75 minutes.


2. Temperatures Above 90 Degrees F: When air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to maximum 60 minutes.

B. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump of concrete not permitted.

1. Add water only at direction of Testing Laboratory and/or Architect. 2. Do not add water that increases water cement ratio of concrete in excess of water

cement ratio indicated on approved mix design. 3. At direction of Testing Laboratory addition of a high range water reducing admixture

may be used to retemper concrete with specific approval of Architect. Do not use without approval of Architect.

C. Agency supplying transit-mixed concrete shall have plant of sufficient capacity and

adequate transportation facilities, to assure continuous delivery at rate required. Frequency of deliveries to Project Site shall be sufficient to provide for placing concrete continuously throughout any one (1) pour.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and

conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 2. Verify that screeding equipment is calibrated to provide concrete slab to specified

flatness and levelness requirements.



unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. Costs for correcting unsuitable conditions will be at Contractor’s expense. 1. If Architect or Architect’s Consultants are required to perform additional services

caused by Contractor having to correct unsuitable conditions: a. Architect will invoice Owner for additional services by the Architect or

Architect’s Consultants. b. Contractor will pay for Architect’s or Architect’s Consultants additional services

by deductive change order. c. Change order will be issued deducting the additional services amount from the

Contract Sum.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.

B. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of

form accessories.

C. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


D. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,

insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.

E. Granular Fill Mat Placement: Place granular base over building area subgrade pad under building floor slab-on-grade. Refer to Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill for placement of granular mat fill material and installation requirements. 1. Vapor Barrier: Place vapor barrier over granular mat fill. 2. Refer to Section 31 2324 - Fill and Backfill for installation requirements of Vapor

Barrier over granular mat fill material.

F. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that prevent separation or loss of ingredients. 1. Concrete to be conveyed by pumping shall be submitted to Testing Laboratory for

evaluation for each class of concrete taken at discharge end of pumping equipment.

G. Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size and design to ensure practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end without separation of materials. 1. Use of gravity-flow or aluminum chutes or conveyors for transporting concrete

horizontally not permitted.

3.3 SPREAD AND CONTINUOUS FOOTING EXCAVATIONS

A. Excavate and prepare spread and continuous footings as specified in Section 31 2316 - Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings.

3.4 ADVANCE NOTIFICATION TO ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER

A. Architect shall observe excavations, reinforcing steel and preparations for placing concrete before start of concrete placement.

B. Contractor shall notify Architect and Engineer 36-hours, and no later than 24-hours, before

start of concrete placement operations to provide Architect sufficient time to travel to Project Site and observe Contractor preparations for concrete placement. 1. Leaving only a voicemail message or sending only an e-mail or fax without receipt of

confirmation from Architect not permitted. 2. Placing concrete without notification of Architect and Engineer will make Contractor

liable for any additional testing or removal and replacement as directed by Architect.

C. Contractor notification shall be to an actual person in Architect’s office with acknowledgement of notification receipt by Architect.

3.5 ADVANCE NOTIFICATION TO INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY

A. Contractor shall notify independent testing laboratory minimum 36-hours, and no later than 24 hours, before start of concrete placement operations.

3.6 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Independent testing laboratory ACI Concrete Laboratory Technician - Grade 1 shall be at

Project Site, ready for start of concrete placement, observations, taking samples and


performing specified tests before arrival of first concrete transit-mix truck and start of concrete placement.

B. Project Field Superintendent shall measure air temperature before ordering concrete to

determine if hot weather or cold weather concreting measures are required. Record air temperature in Superintendent's Daily Log.

C. Place concrete when weather is dry. Concrete placement not permitted during rain or when

footing excavation, vapor barrier, granular mat or subgrade are wet. After rain, allow footings, vapor barrier, granular mar or subgrade to dry thoroughly before placing concrete.

D. Footing excavation shall be dry. Concrete placement not permitted if footing excavation is

wet or has standing water.

E. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.

F. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.2R.

G. Ensure vapor barrier, reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.

H. Place concrete in uniform layer, approximately horizontal, and not more than 18 inches

deep, exercising care to avoid vertical joints or inclined planes. 1. Piling up of concrete in forms in a manner to cause separation or loss of any of its

ingredients not permitted. 2. Concrete which has partially set or hardened shall not, under any circumstances, be

deposited in Work.

I. Placing Concrete in Forms: Place concrete in forms as nearly in its final position as is practical to avoid rehandling. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers maximum 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Exercise special care to prevent splashing forms or reinforcement with concrete. 1. Remove any hardened or partially hardened concrete which has accumulated on the

forms or reinforcement before the work proceeds. 2. Do not place concrete on previously deposited concrete which has hardened

sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the respective member of section, except as hereinafter specified.

3. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment.

J. Placing Concrete Slabs: Place and consolidate concrete slabs in continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completion of panel or section placement. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly

worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or

derbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces before beginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.

K. Do not permit concrete to drop freely any distance greater than five (5) feet. Where longer drops are necessary, use a chute, tremie, or other acceptable conveyance to assist the concrete into place without separation. Do not pour directly into any excavations where water is standing.


L. Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate same by means of mechanical vibrators and suitable hand tools, so manipulated as to work the mixture well into all parts and corners of the forms, and entirely around the reinforcement and inserts. 1. Mechanical vibrators shall maintain frequencies in accordance with the

recommendations of ACI 309, Table 5.1.4, and shall be operated by competent workmen.

2. Over vibrating and use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed.

3. Keep spare vibrator on job site during concrete placing operations.

M. Bonding: Before depositing any new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete which has partially or entirely set, the surface of the latter shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all foreign matter, scum and laitance. Coat surface of previously deposited concrete with a bonding agent per manufacturer’s direction.

N. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler.

O. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations.

Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

P. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface.

Q. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

R. Locate construction joints in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Provide keyways minimum 1-1/2 inches deep in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. 1. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue

reinforcement across construction joints, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Except as otherwise specifically indicated on Structural Drawings, each concrete

member shall be considered as a single unit of operation, and all concrete for the same shall be placed continuously in order that such unit will be monolithic in construction.

3. Should construction joints prove to be absolutely unavoidable, same shall be located at or near the midpoints of spans.

4. Additional construction joints shall not be made under any circumstances without prior review by the Architect and Structural Engineer.

5. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces joined with fresh concrete.

S. Saw cut joints within 8 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness.

T. Screed floors level, maintaining specified surface Flatness and Levelness.

U. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of Work by other trades,

unless otherwise shown or directed, after Work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction.

V. Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is green and by

steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.


W. Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as indicated on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

X. Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings and associated items. Cast-in safety

inserts and accessories as indicated on Drawings. Screed, tamp and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.

Y. Protect all freshly placed concrete from washing by rain, flowing water etc. Do not allow the

concrete to dry out from the time it is deposited in the forms until expiration of curing period.

Z. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.

3.7 BUILDING SLAB-ON-GRADE FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS

A. Provide concrete slab flatness and levelness in conformance to requirements of ACI 302.2R and ASTM E 1155 for Random Traffic Floors: 1. Flatness: FF25 2. Levelness: FL17.

3.8 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING OVER METAL DECKING

A. Prior to placing floor topping, remove deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean.

B. Place required reinforcing and other items to be cast in.

C. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels. 1. Place topping in checkerboard panels not to exceed 20 feet in either direction.

D. Screed, tamp and trowel-finish topping level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum

1:1000.

3.9 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Specified in Section 03 3500 - Concrete Finishing.

3.10 CONCRETE CURING

A. Specified in Section 03 3900 - Concrete Curing.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform

contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect concrete placement, concrete pumping, leveling and screeding operations. 2. Check floor slab for compliance with specified Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services:

1. Tests: Perform the following tests.


a. Compressive Strength Tests: Perform minimum one (1) test for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any one (1) day. 1) Test Cylinders: Mold and curve 4 specimens from each set of samples in

accordance with ASTM C 31. 2) Tests: Each set of four (4) cylinders.

One (1) cylinder at seven (7) days for information. Two (2) cylinders at (28) days One (1) cylinder held in reserve for minimum 42 days tested as directed.

b. Slump Tests: Perform one (1) slump test for each set of samples in accordance with ASTM C 143 or as directed by Architect. 1) Additional slump tests may be required as directed by Architect.

c. Air Content Tests: Perform one (1) test for each set of samples in accordance with ASTM C 231 or ASTM C 173.

d. Unit Weight Tests: Perform one (1) test for each set of samples in accordance with ASTM C 138.

e. Temperature Tests: Measure temperature of concrete sample for each set of samples.

f. Test Results: Testing Laboratory shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within (24) hours of test.

2. Inspections: Perform the following inspections. a. Batch Inspection and Monitoring Water: Inspect each batch of concrete,

monitor addition of mixing water to assure uniform consistency from truck to truck. Check mixing from mixers before mix begins to set and within time limits set forth in ASTM C94. 1) Monitor addition of water to concrete at job site and length of time

concrete is allowed to remain in truck during placement. 2) Certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered, amount

of water added and time at which cement and aggregate was discharged into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from truck.

3. Test Procedures: a. Sample Technician: Test cylinders and slump tests performed only by person

holding a current ACI Concrete Laboratory Technician - Grade 1 Certification. b. Sampling: Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C 172. Each

sample shall be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding any selection of the test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement.

c. Pumped Concrete Samples: Specimens for pumped concrete shall be taken at the discharge end of pumping equipment.

d. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements.

4. Test Reports: a. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing

firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. b. Any deviations from the requirements of ASTM Specifications shall be recorded

in the test report. Test concrete specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39. c. Should strength of concrete fall below the minimum, then additional tests,

including load tests, may be required. These tests, if required, shall be made at Contractor’s expense and shall be in accordance with ASTM C42 and ACI 318. If tests do not meet applicable requirements, then structure, or any part of structure, shall be removed and replaced at Contractor’s expense.

d. Test reports shall include but not be limited to the following information: 1) Date of concrete placement. 2) Concrete mix identification number or proportions of ingredients.


3) Truck ticket number. 4) Time test was made. 5) Time of batching. 6) Location of each placement. 7) Slump. 8) Unit weight and air content of concrete sampled. 9) Date and results of strength test.

e. Report promptly to Architect all details of reasons for rejection of any and all quantities of concrete. Give all information concerning locations of the concrete pours, quantities, date of pours, and other pertinent facts concerning concrete represented by the specimens.

f. Any concrete testing requested by the Contractor for early formwork or shoring removal, etc., shall be at Contractor’s expense.

g. Furnish a statistical analysis for each class of concrete placed on the project in accordance with ACI 214 and ACI 318. Information shall be updated and distributed once a month as directed by Architect. Information shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1) Strength test at Seven (7) days. 2) Strength tests at (28) days of two (2) cylinder averages. 3) 28-day moving average strength tests of last three (3) test groups. 4) Standard deviation and coefficient of variation based on (28) day strength

tests. 5) Average strength and number of (28) day tests for most recent month.

h. Reports: Prepare and submit test and inspection reports indicating results of tests and inspections made as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

C. Inspections by Authority Having Jurisdiction:

1. Do not place concrete until footings, foundations and concrete under-slab work has been inspected and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2. Notify Building Official Having Jurisdiction minimum number of days in advance of inspection as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction to schedule Inspection. Verify with Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Footing and Foundation Inspection: Schedule inspection of footings and

foundations after excavations for footings are complete and reinforcing steel is in place. For concrete foundations, forms shall be in place before inspection.

b. Under-Slab Inspection: Schedule inspection of under-slab work after under-slab reinforcing steel is in place, but before any concrete is placed.

3. Re-inspections: Whenever inspections find that excavations, reinforcing or formwork does not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and schedule a re-inspection.

4. Reports: Prepare and submit inspection reports indicating results of tests and inspections made as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

D. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Special Inspections.

1. Perform Special Inspections as required by the International Building Code Section 1704 - Special Inspections as indicated in Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services, if required by the Building Official.

E. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents.

3.15 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE


A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.

B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost

of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.

C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area.

D. Failed Strength Tests: If compressive strength tests indicate results below specified

strength, Architect may require any or all of the following corrective measures be performed at Contractor's expense. Architect will determine extent of concrete removal if required. 1. Change concrete mix. 2. Core test in conformance with ASTM C 42. 3. Load test on portion or portions of structure where test cylinders indicate concrete is

below specified strength. Load testing performed in conformance with ACI 318. 4. Remove and replace concrete below specified strength.

END OF SECTION


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________


UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION INSTALLER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Installer obtained a current copy of the referenced ACI Publications and ASTM Publications

pertinent to this concrete installation. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed requirements of referenced ACI Publications and pertinent ASTM

Publications with Project Field Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer placed concrete in accordance with ACI 304R and placed floor slabs in accordance with

ACI 302.1R. 4. Concrete samples were taken by an ACI Certified Grade 1 Concrete Laboratory Technician. 5. Installer finished concrete slab-on-grade to the specified Floor Flatness and Levelness.



03 3500 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 CONCRETE FINISHING

SECTION 03 3500

CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Finishing slabs-on-grade and formed surfaces. 2. Finishing concrete topping floor slabs. 3. Sealed concrete finish.




1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete slab on grade and formed walls; minimum floor flatness and levelness.

2. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings: Paints and Coatings: Application of sealed concrete finish.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R.


A. Protection of New Concrete from Staining: 1. No satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum or rust stains from

concrete. PREVENTION IS ESSENTIAL. Take precautions to prevent staining of concrete prior to application and for three months after application.

2. Prohibit parking vehicles on concrete slab. 3. If vehicles must be temporarily parked on slab, place drop cloths under vehicles

during entire time parked. 4. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper all components that

might drip oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids. 5. Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab. 6. Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with concrete placement and concrete curing.

B. Prepare concrete finishing coordination drawings as specified in Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination.


1. Coordination drawings are for Project Field Superintendent and concrete subcontractor use in identifying locations and dimensions of areas receiving concrete finishes.

2. Project Field Superintendent shall conduct a pre-construction meeting to ensure that floor finish and concrete finish types and locations are clearly established.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALED CONCRETE FINISH

A. Specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







3.2 PREPARATION

A. Repair surface defects, immediately after removing formwork.

B. Protect concrete slab areas scheduled as the exposed floor finish for the completed project. Take necessary measures to prevent stains, grease, paint and other materials that could blemish appearance of exposed concrete floor finish.

C. Install joint sealants and fillers as required before application of concrete sealer.

D. Clean exposed concrete floor of oil, dirt, waxes and other foreign materials before

application of sealer.

3.3 FLOOR FINISHING

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R.

B. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated. 1. After placing slabs, finish surface to specified floor flatness. Slope surfaces uniformly

to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.


C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until

ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surface to specified floor flatness. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

D. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab

surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin

final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces specified floor flatness. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

E. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set

mortar, apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with a fine broom.

F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps,

and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.4 FORMED SURFACE FINISHING

A. Finish formed surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

C. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces

exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed

surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


3.5 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Minimum Flatness and Levelness for Concrete Floors: Specified in Section 03 3000 -

Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Correct defects in the defined traffic floor by grinding or removal and replacement of

the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect concrete finish installations, locations, types and textures. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. During curing period, protect concrete from damage by equipment, temperature change, stored materials, jobsite activities, rain and running water.

END OF SECTION

03 3900 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 CONCRETE CURING

SECTION 03 3900

CONCRETE CURING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Curing of building concrete slab-on-grade floor surfaces. 2. Curing of building vertical concrete surfaces. 3. Curing of building exterior concrete surfaces.




1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Foundations, floors and slabs on grade. 2. Section 03 3500 - Concrete Finishing: Finishing slabs on grade and formed surfaces,

sealed concrete finish. 3. Section 32 1313 – Concrete Paving: Concrete curing. 4. Section 32 1314 - Concrete Walks and Pads: Concrete curing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 302 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 3. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.


1. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, compatibilities and limitations for the following.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 302, 305R, 306R and 308.




B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.






F. Store materials in a dry protected area provided by others. Protect and handle materials in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent damage, soiling, or deterioration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE CURING AND VERTICAL SURFACE CURING

A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, clear, VOC compliant.

B. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that concrete surfaces are ready to be cured.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during

finishing operations with an evaporation-control material.


C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

3.3 EXECUTION - BUILDING SLAB FLOOR SURFACES

A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308 using moisture cure.

B. Moisture Cure: Moisture cure by spraying water over concrete areas and maintain wet for seven (7) days. .

3.4 EXECUTION - BUILDING EXTERIOR CONCRETE AND VERTICAL SURFACES

A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308 using moisture cure or curing compound at Contractor's option.

B. Moisture Cure:

1. Exterior Horizontal Concrete: Moisture cure by spraying water over concrete areas and maintain wet for 7 days.

2. Vertical Surfaces: Moisture cure formed surfaces with forms in place for full curing period. a. Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days.

C. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply membrane curing compound in accordance with

manufacturer's published instructions.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect concrete during curing procedures. Maintain surfaces in a moist condition. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.

END OF SECTION

03 4816 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1014 PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS

SECTION 03 4816

PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Splash blocks at building downspouts.




1. Section 13 3421 - Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings: Building downspouts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SPLASH BLOCKS

A. Pre-cast concrete type, size and profiles indicated on Drawings; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. 1. Fibermesh reinforcing: 5/8 inch fibrillated polypropylene fiber mesh added to concrete

at 1.5 pounds per cubic yard of concrete (or 1 ounce per cubic foot of concrete) complying with following standards: a. ASTM C-1116, Type III, Section 4.1.3, “Synthetic Fiber Reinforced Concrete or

Shotcrete”. b. Properties for polypropylene established in ACI 544.1 R-82, Table 1.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install splash block directly under downspout discharge outlet to direct water away from building. Steeply sloped splash blocks not permitted. 1. Slope block minimum 1/8 inch in one foot, but not to exceed 1/2 inch in one foot

(1/4:1) away from building.

END OF SECTION

04 2111 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0315 BRICK VENEER

SECTION 04 2111

BRICK VENEER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Brick Units

a. Face brick units. b. Face brick units to match existing.

2. Brick Wall Ties 3. Mortar 4. Cavity-Wall Drainage System 5. Cast Stone Accents




1. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Concrete block wall backing. 2. Section 04 7220 - Cast Stone Caps and Accents: Cast stone installed with brick

veneer. 3. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural wall backing. 4. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel angles and lintels. 5. Section 07 2113 - Board Insulation: Insulation installed in veneer air space. 6. Section 07 4100 – Roofing and Siding Panels: Metal roof panel profile. 7. Section 07 2115 – Thermal & Air Barrier Wall System: Requirements for preserving 8. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints. 9. Section 13 3421 - Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings: Wall panels and structural wall

backing.

D. Allowances:

1. Contract includes a cash allowance for purchase and delivery of brick material as specified in Section 01 2100 - Allowances.

1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)

2. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 3. ASTM C 652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made

From Clay or Shale). 4. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation

of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. B. Brick Industry Association (BIA):

1. BIA TN18A - Technical Notes; Design and Detailing of Movement Joints.

C. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAWC):


1. IMIWAC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

2. IMIWAC (HW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, mortar, wall ties, thru-wall flashing, termination bar, drainage mat and weep hole inserts.

C. Samples for Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturer’s color samples for brick

veneer and mortar to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range for Architect initial selection.

D. Samples for Verification: Submit set of face brick and mortar color samples to illustrate

color, texture and extremes of color range for comparison with and determination of match with existing face brick and mortar color.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.




C. Package brick units and protect from staining or damage during shipping and storage.

D. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return

damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

E. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.



G. Provide itemized list of product to support bill of lading.


A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with recommendations of IMIAWC (CW). 2. Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with recommendation of IMIAWC (HW).

1.7 COORDINATION


A: Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of Work with other

trades in advance and make provisions for the installation of their work to avoid cutting and patching.

B. Coordinate brick veneer work with wall mounted lighting fixtures, plumbing items, openings

and chases for heating ducts, plumbing pipes and electrical conduit. Build into Work as construction progresses.

C. Coordinate installation of wall ties in concrete unit masonry and installation of rigid insulation

in cavity between block and brick.

D. Provide for installation of bolts, toggles, flashing, beams, anchors, hangers, nailing strips, wall plugs and frames as required for support of structure and miscellaneous appliances.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BRICK UNITS

A. Face Brick: ASTM C 652, Solid Shell Hollow Brick, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Color Blend: Selected by Architect.

B. Face Brick: ASTM C 652, Solid Shell Hollow Brick, Type HBS, Grade SW; color blend to

match existing brick. Field verify.

C. Size and Shape: Nominal modular 2-1/4 x 3-5/8 x 7-5/8 inches.

D. Size and Shape: Match existing, field verify.

2.2 BRICK WALL TIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Brick Wall Ties is based on the product named. 1. Holman & Barnard: http://www.h-b.com/

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Heckman Building Products: http://www.heckmannbuildingprods.com/ 2. Wirebond: http://wirebond.com/

C. Wall Ties at Pre-Engineered Metal Building Metal Wall Panels:

1. Product: DW-10HS Anchor System with Seismiclip Interlock System - Adjustable. 2. Description:

a. Wall Tie: 12 gage wire, galvanized, length as required to extend 1-1/2 inches into masonry wythe of veneer face.

b. Steel Tie Section: 12 gage steel sheet, galvanized, 9 inches long with 5-1/2 inch vertical adjustability with two 9/32 inch holes.

c. Fasteners: 2 - #10 corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. d. Seismiclip: Impact-resistant, rigid PVC with continuous 3/16 inch diameter wire

reinforcing.

D. Wall Ties at Stud Wall Framing: 1. Product: DW-10HS Anchor System with Seismiclip Interlock System - Adjustable.

http://www.h-b.com/

http://www.heckmannbuildingprods.com/

http://wirebond.com/


2. Description: a. Wall Tie: 12 gage wire, galvanized, length as required to extend 1-1/2 inches

into masonry wythe of veneer face. b. Steel Tie Section: 12 gage steel sheet, galvanized, 9 inches long with 5-1/2

inch vertical adjustability with two 9/32 inch holes. c. Fasteners: 2 - #10 corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. d. Seismiclip: Impact-resistant, rigid PVC with continuous 3/16 inch diameter wire

reinforcing.

E. Wall Ties at Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Product: Adjusto-Flex-Mesh AF-H Truss with Seismiclip Interlock System. 2. Description: Formed steel wire, 9 gage, hot-dip galvanized, truss design consisting of

two deformed longitudinal wires welded minimum 16 inches on center to deformed cross wires. Cavity adjustable truss double hook and eye wall ties with double eyes welded at 16 inches on center. a. Eye lengths designed to span beyond concrete masonry unit for varying widths

of air space and rigid insulation. b. Hooks and eyes constructed of 3/16 inch diameter wire.

1) Wire Tie Length: As required to extend 1-1/2 inches into masonry wythe of veneer face.

c. Seismiclip: Impact-resistant, rigid PVC with continuous 3/16 inch diameter wire reinforcing.

2.3 MASONRY ANCHOR – Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Design for Masonry Anchor is based on the product named. 1. Heckmann Building Products Inc., http://www.heckmannbuildingprods.com/

a. Anchors to Concrete, Masonry, & Wood Stud Backup: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-I-Tie" Concrete/CMU Screw.

2. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. a. Substitutions: Permitted.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a. Holman & Barnard: http://www.h-b.com/ b. Wirebond: http://wirebond.com/

B. Pos-I-Tie Thermal Clip: One-Piece Snap On Proprietary plastic clip for barrel loop of

Original Pos-I-Tie to create a thermal break between the wire tie in veneer and the barrel in the backup.

C. Masonry Ties:

1. Masonry Veneer Ties: Provide minimum 2 inches embedment into mortar. a. Wire 3/16 inch diameter x 4 inch.

D. Material for Ties in Exterior Walls:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2; Wire: 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) diameter.

E. Fastener - Barrel Material:

1. Heckmann "No. 75 Pos-I-Tie": One-Piece Screw consisting of a 92% Zamac 2 Zinc barrel, washer, flanged head and eye to receive Pos-I-Tie wire tie; designed to seat barrel directly on structural portion of back-up, with flanged head covering fastener hole.

http://www.heckmannbuildingprods.com/

http://www.h-b.com/

http://wirebond.com/


a. Screw penetrates insulation back-up, secures into structure, and prevents moisture penetration by sealing hole in insulation with neoprene washer.

b. Barrel shall be sized to make contact with back-up wall transferring compression and tension loads to back-up wall and not to insulation board.

2.4 MORTAR

A. Mortar for Face Brick: During preconstruction and construction evaluations, use test methods defined by ASTM C 780 for established specific and overall performance characteristics of mortar system used following ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification method. 1. Exterior Non-Load Bearing Masonry: Type S, 1800 psi at 28 days. 2. Color: Selected by Architect.

B. Mixing: 1. Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards in quantities

needed for immediate use. 2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before mixing process. 3. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar. 4. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within 2 hours of mixing. 5. Use mortar within 2 hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F or 2-1/2

hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. 6. Use of mortar stiffened due to hydration hardening not permitted.

2.5 CAVITY-WALL DRAINAGE SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer: 1. Mortar Net: www.mortarnet.com 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Holman & Bernard, Incorporated: www.h-b.com. b. Sandell Manufacturing: www.sandellmfg.com.

3. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Mortar Net “TotalFlash” System: Drainage system consisting of flexible flashing with

termination bars, drainage mat and accessories necessary for installation including pre-formed internal and external corners. 1. Flexible Flashing Membrane: 40 mil polymeric, reinforced, UV stable membrane,

incorporating DuPont's Elvaloy® KEE polymer. 1) Pre-Cut Panel Size: 18 inch x 60 inches.

2. Drainage Mat: Recycled polyester material impregnated with UV protection, mold and flame retardant. Woven mesh attached to flexible flashing designed to allow moisture to migrate to the integrated weep tabs. 1) 3/8 inch x 10 inches x 60 inches long.

3. Adhesive: No slump, moisture cure, multi purpose, structural sealant provided with system for lapping flash sections.

4. Termination Bar: Pre-attached to flashing membrane, termination bar designed to fasten flashing system to the substrate or fit into mortar joint. High strength plastic, 60 inches long with pre-drilled holes at 6 inches on-center for attachment.

5 Screws: Provide #14 self-tapping hex head screws designed to allow attachment to substrate.

2.6 CAST STONE ACCENTS

http://www.mortarnet.com/

http://www.h-b.com/

http://www.sandellmfg.com/


A. Specified in Section 04 7200 - Cast Stone Caps and Accents.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. 2. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. 3. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry

work.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.3 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

C. Bond: Running.

D. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.

E. Mortar Joints: Concave.

3.4 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay face brick units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints not permitted.

C. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.

D. Interlock intersections and external corners.


E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment

must be made, remove mortar and replace.

F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

G. Isolate top joint of masonry walls from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or

decks with compressible joint filler.

H. Construct expansion joints at locations recommended by BIA TN18A or as indicated on Drawings. Keep joints free of mortar by inserting continuous wood or metal temporary strips. Install joint sealer as specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

I. Place masonry wall caps and accents at locations indicated on Drawings.

3.5 CAVITY-WALL DRAINAGE SYSTEM

A. Preparation: Clean surfaces to receive flashing of excess mortar, dirt, and moisture and other debris immediately before installation.

B. Installation: Install continuous flashing membrane system in accordance with

manufacturer's published instructions and the following. 1. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps.

Clean cavity space of mortar between each lift. a. Extend flashings horizontally at foundation walls, above ledge, shelf angles, and

lintels and bottom of walls, including window and door head lintels. 2. Apply two (2) continuous beads of adhesive on clean sill parallel to building lines

approximately 1 inch from exterior edge of sill and 2 inch on center. 3. Determine height of flashing; strike horizontal line. Apply full bead of adhesive to

substrate 1 inch below top of flashing. 4. Set flashing in sill adhesive and turn flashing up minimum 8 inches. Roll flashing and

termination bar assembly into sill adhesive and up wall; securing assembly with screws provided with System.

5. Apply full bead of adhesive to top of termination bar. 6. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight using adhesive provided.

a. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions. 7. Weep Vent Installation for cavity ventilation:

a. Install weep vents in head joints at bottom course of brick, 24 inches on center horizontally. Make sure mortar droppings do not block back edge of weep vent.

b. Install weep vents in head joints at on(1) e brick course below top of brick, 24 inches on center horizontally.

c. Set back weep vents 1/8 inch from exterior brick face. Align back edge of weep vent with back face of brick veneer.

C. Termination of System:

1. Terminate vertical membrane with continuous termination bar secured at 6 inches on-center.

2. Prepare lap joints as directed by manufacturer. Apply adhesive and lap flexible flashing a minimum of 6 inches.

D. Inspection:

1. Make sure flexible flashing is installed in continuous manner with no voids, or punches. Repair punches prior to starting masonry Work.


2. Edge dams at horizontal termination of flashing shall be well defined and secured to substrate.

3. Drainage mat weep tabs shall be laid flat.

3.6 BRICK WALL TIES

A. Wall Ties at Pre-Engineered Metal Building Wall Panels: 1. Secure wall ties to pre-engineered metal building wall panels and embed into

masonry veneer using one (1) tie for each 2.67 square feet of wall area as follows: a. Vertically: Maximum 16 inch on center b. Horizontally: Maximum 24 inch on center

2. Place at maximum 3 inches on center each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings

B. Wall Ties at Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Embed truss type wall ties in concrete unit masonry for bonding veneer using one (1) tie for each 2.67 square feet of wall area as follows: a. Vertically: Maximum 16 inch on center b. Horizontally: Maximum 24 inch on center


D. Wall Ties at Stud Wall Framing: 1. Secure Wall Ties to wall framing (not sheathing) with fasteners of sufficient length to

penetrate framing using one (1) tie for each 2.67 square feet of wall area as follows: a. Minimum of 3/4 inch.

2. Wall ties shall secured to wall framing as follows: a. Vertically: Maximum 16 inch on center b. Horizontally: Maximum 24 inch on center


3.7 INSTALLATION - Pos-I-Tie Screws:

A. Install anchor fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Secure

anchor through exterior face of board insulation with recommended screw length and washers. Seal each penetration of Wall System. 1. Concrete/CMU Screw: Use a standard hammer drill and a Pos-I-Tie Sleeve Tool with

a Pos-I-Tie Chuck Adapter on the end. Set Drill to Hammer, slide off the chuck adapter sleeve and drill a 2” deep hole into the backup with a 3/16” (4.76 mm) masonry drill bit. Replace the sleeve/chuck adapter, switch the hammer mode off, and place the barrel end of the screw in the chuck adapter. Drill the screw into the hole.

2. Pos-I-Tie Wires: Configure ties to prevent flow of water to anchor and to transfer lateral loads without excess mechanical play or deformation.

3. See Section 07 2115 – Thermal & Air Barrier Wall System.

3.8 LINTELS

A. Install loose steel lintels or shelf angles over openings as indicated on Drawings.

B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each of opening or as indicated on Drawings.


3.9 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for conduit, sleeves and inserts. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance

or strength of masonry work may be impaired.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect brick veneer installation, wall ties, brick type and blend, joints, weeps, inserts,

built-in items and seal around penetrations. 2. Inspect thru-wall flashing, laps, corners, intersections and terminations for watertight

installation. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean work.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.

C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.


A. Protect finished Work.

B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities.

END OF SECTION

04 2200 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

SECTION 04 2200

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior Wall Concrete Masonry Units. 2. Interior Partition Concrete Masonry Units. 3. Mortar and Grout Materials. 4. Reinforcement and Anchorage.




1. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor quality control, tests, inspections and reporting requirements.

2. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Testing and inspection requirements.

3. Section 04 2111 - Brick Veneer: Veneer Wall ties installed in CMU walls. 4. Section 07 2113 - Rigid Insulation: Rigid wall insulation at masonry walls. 5. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at masonry joints. 6. Section 08 1213 - Hollow Metal Frames: Frame anchors built into masonry work. 7. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board Systems: Framing installed at top of masonry

partitions.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 3. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 5. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 6. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 8. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 9. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 10. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 11. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation

of Mortars for Plan and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 12. ASTM C 1019 - standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Data for concrete masonry units, sizes, shapes and details. Include test data

indicating block conformance to specified ASTM specification. 2. Data for joint reinforcement.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate reinforcing bar sizes, spacings, reinforcement quantities, bending

and cutting schedules, reinforcement supporting and spacing devices, and accessories.

D. Samples for Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturers color samples for unit masonry and mortar to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range.

E. Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Test and Inspection Reports: Submit the following test and inspection reports in conformance with Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services. a. Masonry, reinforcing and grouting inspections. b. Mortar and grout testing.

2. Qualification Documentation: Upon request, submit documentation of experience and Regulatory Requirements indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

1.4 QULALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.



B. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

C. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project


D. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and

foreign matter.


A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with recommendations of IMIAWC (CW). 2. Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with IMIAWC (HW).


1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with other trades in advance and make provisions for the installation of

their work as masonry units are installed to avoid cutting and patching.

B. Coordinate masonry unit work with wall mounted lighting fixtures, plumbing items, openings and chases for heating ducts, plumbing pipes, electrical conduit and mechanical louvers or vents. Build into Work as construction progresses.

C. Provide for installation of bolts, toggles, flashing, beams, anchors, hangers, attachment

strips, wall plugs and frames as required for support of structure and miscellaneous appliances.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTERIOR WALL CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: ASTM C 90, Grade N, Type 1, normal weight, load bearing, hollow block.

B. Exposed Face Texture: Smooth face.

C. Color: Manufacturer’s standard grey.

D. Size and Shape: Locations indicated on Drawings. 1. 16 inches x 8 inches and nominal depth of 8 inches. 2. 16 inches x 8 inches and nominal depth of 6 inches.

E. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 INTERIOR PARTITION CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions indicated on Drawings.

a. 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths of 8 & 6 inches. b. Bullnose Units: Provide bullnose units at all exterior corners, except bottom

course, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N, Type 1, light weight.

a. Hollow block. b. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard grey color and texture.

2.3 GLAZED MASONRY UNITS

A. Product Name: Astra-Glaze-SW+® glazed concrete masonry units, or approved equal or

better.

B. Color: Submit various shades of red color samples for selection by architect

C. Size 16 inches x 8 inches and nominal depth of 8 inches.

D. Shape: Provide bullnose units at all exterior corners,


2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I; non-staining. Masonry cement not permitted. 1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 2. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144, free of clay or organic matter. 3. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.

B. Water: Clean and potable.

C. Exterior Exposed Wall Mortar Color: Selected by Architect.

1. Integral mortar admixture water repellent added during mixing.

D. Interior Wall Mortar: Manufacturer’s standard grey color.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615 Grade 60. 1. Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Unfinished.

B. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement - Truss type, ASTM A 82 steel wire, hot dipped

galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153, Class B. 1. 0.1483 inch side rods and cross rods. 2. Width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar

coverage on each exposure. 3. Manufacturer:

a. Holman & Barnard: www.h-b.com. b. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. c. Southern Construction Products: www.scponline.com. d. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions.

Substitutions: Permitted.

C. Brick Veneer Wall Ties: Specified in Section 04 2111 - Brick Veneer.

2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: During preconstruction and construction evaluations, use test methods defined by ASTM C 780 for established specific and overall performance characteristics of mortar system used following ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification method. 1. Type S, 1900 psi at 28 days, slump 9 inches plus or minus 1 inch.

B. Grout: ASTM C 476, Portland cement, sand, pea gravel and water, 3000 psi at 28 days,

slump 9 inches plus or minus 1 inch. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.

C. Mixing:

1. Mix mortar in accordance with ASTM C 270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C 476 in quantities needed for immediate use. 3. Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. 4. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or grout. 5. Mix integral water repellent admixture per manufacturer’s published instructions.


6. Control batching procedure to ensure proper proportions by measuring materials by volume. Measurement by shovel not permitted.

2.7 BLOCK AND MORTAR ADMIXTURE INTEGRAL WATER-REPELLENT

A. Manufacturer: BASF Master Builders www.basf-admixtures.com.

B. Integral Block Water-Repellent Admixture: 1. Product: RHEOPEL WR. 2. Description: Integral polymeric admixture, blended, high molecular weight, polymer

emulsion that provides resistance to water penetration, efflorescence control and improves and maintains color integrity.

C. Integral Mortar Water-Repellent Admixture:

1. Product: RHEOPEL Mortar Admixture. 2. Description: Specially-blended polymeric admixture for resistance of water

penetration and efflorescence control.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. 2. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. 3. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry

work.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until

building structure provides permanent bracing.

C. Clean glass units of substances that may impair bond with mortar.

D. Verify that panel anchors are provided at head and jambs.


3.3 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints

a. Where Brick Veneer is Installed: Flush for application of liquid applied air/vapor barrier and rigid insulation.

c. Building Interior and All Other Areas: Concave. 4. Saw Cut Joints: Saw cut Joints within masonry work shall be tuck pointed to match

appearance of adjacent bond joints.

3.4 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

C. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.

D. Interlock intersections and external corners.

E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,

unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

G. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, resilient base is scheduled or bituminous waterproofing is applied.

H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members.

I. Install joint sealant at masonry partition intersection joints where units do not interlock.

3.5 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Keep joints free of mortar by inserting continuous wood or metal temporary strips.

B. Construct joints where indicated on Drawings and at following intersections. 1. Changes in thickness, height and direction. 2. Within 8 foot 0 inches of corners of offsets. 3. At control and expansion joints in structure. 4. At each side of openings greater than 24 inches wide. 5. At foundation walls, shelf angles, setbacks and materials expanding at different

ratios.


C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Space joints maximum 30 feet 0 inches on center in uninterrupted walls. 2. Provide continuous vertical control joints through bond beams except at lintels above

openings. 3. Offset control joints to ends of lintels.

D. Install joint sealer as specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

3.6 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Reinforcement Bars: Secure at locations indicated and to avoid displacement during grouting. 1. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. 2. Minimum spacing between bars or to masonry surfaces shall be one bar diameter. 3. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. 4. Welding of splices not permitted.

B. Joint Reinforcement: Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.

1. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

2. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. 3. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 4. Bend or weld at offsets or special conditions.

C. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Keep vertical cores to be grouted clear of mortar,

including bed area of first course. 1. Bond Beams: At bond beams or other locations for horizontally reinforced masonry,

provide special masonry units or saw to accommodate reinforcement.

3.7 MORTAR AND GROUTING

A. Place mortar in accordance with ASTM C 270.

B. Place grout in accordance with ASTM C 476.

C. Provide protection for metal building frames and girts during placement of mortar and grout. Do not permit mortar or grout in contact with metal building frames and girts.

D. Low-Lift Grouting:

1. Limit height of pours to 16 inches. 2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour. 3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as

grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt

pours for more than 1-1/2 hours.

E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.

3.8 LINTELS

A. Provide steel lintels over openings as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications.


B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.

3.9 BOND BEAMS

A. Provide concrete masonry unit bond beams at top of concrete masonry unit walls and at lintels above openings.

B. Reinforce bond beams with minimum two (2) reinforcing bars. Support and secure

reinforcing bars from displacement.

C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

D. Discontinue bond beams at expansion and control joints.

E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for minimum 16 inches either side of opening.

3.10 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, window frames, fabricated metal frames, mechanical louvers, plates and anchor bolts, and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.

C. Where electric conduit, outlet, switch and other boxes occur, grind and cut units before

building-in services. Coordinate work with electrical installer.

D. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. 1. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 2. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches for framed openings.

E. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.

F. Where recessed fire extinguisher cabinets, recessed drinking fountains, electric conduit,

outlet, switch and other boxes occur, grind and cut units before building-in services. Coordinate with item installer.

3.11 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation for Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. 2. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet. 3. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 4. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. 5. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections.


1. Inspect concrete masonry unit erection, color, texture, coursing, joints, placement and type of reinforcing, reinforcing splicing, mortar and grout mixing, and grouting.



B. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Perform the following inspections. 1. Perform the following inspections for conformance compliance with Contract

Documents. 2. Perform the following tests:

a. Mortar: Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780. 1) Take 3 samples of mortar each day.

b. Grout: Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C 1019. 1) Take 3 samples of grout each day.

c. Prism: Test in accordance with ACI 530.1. 1) Perform 1 prism test for each 5,000 square feet of wall.

3. Reports: Prepare and submit test reports indicating results of tests made as specified in Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

C. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Special Inspections.

1. Perform Special Inspections as required by the International Building Code Section 1704 - Special Inspections as indicated in Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services and required by the Building Official.

D. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Clean work.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.


A. Protect finished Work.

B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at external corners which may be damaged by construction activities.

END OF SECTION

05 1200 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0513 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 05 1200

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel framing members and support members not a part of Pre-Engineered Metal Building structure.




1. Section 05 3100 - Steel Deck: Metal floor deck supported by structural steel and steel joists.

2. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting. 3. Section 13 3421 - Pre-Engineered Metal Building: Building structural framework for

attachment of structural steel.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. AISC M016 - ASD Manual of Steel Construction. 2. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.


1. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 4. ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,

Standard Quality. 5. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 6. ASTM A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing. 7. ASTM A 992/992M - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in

Building Framing. 8. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink). 9. ASTM E 164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination.

2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):


1. SSPC 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 2. SSPC 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 3. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Delegated Engineer: Professional engineer experienced in design of stairs, railings and handrails registered in State where project is located who undertakes final design of structural steel.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with

specifications and referenced standards. 1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of all mill reports covering

chemical and physical properties. 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washer. 3. Structural steel primer paint. 4. Non-shrink grout.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Framing Plans and Details: Show complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members. a. Detail shall conform to AISC “Structural Steel Detailing”. b. Clearly indicate profiles, sizes, spacing and locations of structural members,

connections, attachments, anchorages, framed openings, size and type of fasteners and cambers.

c. Show AWS weld types. 2. Erection Procedure: Include erections sequences, procedures, diagrams, schedules

and compete details. a. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor

bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 3. Framing plans, details and erection procedure drawings signed and sealed by

Delegated Engineer. 4. Any fabrication of material before review of shop drawings is at Contractor's risk and

corrections will be at no cost to Owner.

D. Erection Sequence: 1. Completely outline proposed method and sequence of erection to Architect for review

before delivering any material to Project Site. Prepare outline to avoid delay or any damage to Work of other trades.

E. Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Welders Certificates: Welders shall have passed AWS D1.1 Certification requirements and shall be in possession of documentation issued by AWS indicating current valid maintenance status of Certification.

2. Qualification Documentation: Upon request, submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.


A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC M016.


B. Qualifications:

1. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing structural steel fabrication work with minimum ten (10) years documented experience.

2. Erector: Company specializing in performing structural steel erection work with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

3. Welders: Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification

Procedures. Submit documentation that operators have maintained their AWS issued Certification.



B. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

C. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project


D. Storage of fabricated steel at Project Site is responsibility of Contractor. Material stored at

Project Site shall be placed so that design loads on existing or newly constructed structures are not exceeded and members will not be distorted or otherwise damaged.

E. Protect materials from corrosion or deterioration of any kind.

F. Architect/Engineer will reject any material that has become damaged because of improper

storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36.

B. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A 992.

C. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, 46 ksi.

D. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, or ASTM A 501.

E. Bolts: Anchor bolts and erection bolts not specified as high strength shall meet

requirements of ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A 325. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 and ANSI B18.2.2. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436. 4. Direct tension indicator bolts or load washers conforming to AISC Specifications for

Structural Joints.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. Series E70 electrodes.


G. Headed Stud Anchors: ASTM A 108, minimum tensile strength 60,000 psi.

H. Grout: Premixed non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107

and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,500 psi at 28 days when placed at a plastic consistency of 115 percent flow factor.

I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I - Red Oxide.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. All work shall be shop assembled to greatest extent possible and delivered to Project Site

complete and ready for erection. Material shall be properly marked and match-marked where field assembly is required. Sequence of shipments shall be scheduled to expedite erection and minimize field handling of material.

B. Steel Members shall be cambered, if so indicated on Drawings.

C. Steel members without specified camber shall be fabricated so that after erection, any

minor camber due to rolling or fabrication will be upward.

D. Connections: 1. Connections shall conform with standard specifications of AISC. 2. Connections not detailed on Drawings shall be selected from Part-4 of Manual of

Steel Construction of AISC. 3. Shop and field connections shall be bolted or welded as detailed. 4. No combination of bolts and welds shall be used for stress transmission in same fay

in face of any connection.

E. Shop Welding: 1. All welding shall be done in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2. Intermittent and continuous welding shall be done in a manner to minimize internal

stress. 3. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, sufficient to transmit required

forces, using minimum fillet as specified by AWS D1.1.

F. Openings for Other Work: Provide openings in structural members only as shown on structural drawings, or as directed by Architect.

2.3 FINISH

A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3. Remove oil,

grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP 1.

B. Shop paint structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar, or contact surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted. Paint embedded steel on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.

C. Immediately after surface preparation, apply one coat of structural steel primer paint

according to manufacturer’s instructions to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.5 mils. Provide full covering on joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces.


D. Field paint exposed portions of columns, beams, angles, plate and supports as specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that work may

properly proceed.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Templates shall be securely in place to preclude misplacement of anchor bolts, and bolts shall be installed at locations and with projections established on final structural steel shop drawings. Check correct positioning before concrete is placed.

B. Furnish items required to be cast into concrete or embed in masonry with setting diagrams

to appropriate Sections.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC S303.

B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in

safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.

D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect and Structural

Engineer.

E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

F. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's

instructions for non-shrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

3.4 FITTING OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS


A. Contractor is solely responsible for correct fitting of all structural members and for elevation and alignment of finished structure.

3.5 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Any adjustments necessary in steel frame because of fabrication, construction or erection

discrepancies in elevation and alignment shall be responsibility of Contractor. Any modification to approved manufactured material shall be approved by Architect and Structural Engineer.

3.6 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. 2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.



contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect structural steel member installation, sizes, configurations and connections. 2. Visually inspect field-welded connections. 3. Visually inspect bolted connections. 4. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Perform the following.

1. Contractor shall provide Testing Laboratory with names of welders to be employed on Work, during fabrication and erection, together with currently maintained Certification that each of these welders has passed Certification requirements in accordance with AWS Standards.

2. Inspect all structural steel during and after erection for conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings. Any cases of insufficient bracing or guying, or other unsafe conditions shall be immediately reported to Contractor and Architect. a. No burning or other field correction of steel members are permitted without

approval of Architect and Structural Engineer. Report violations immediately. b. Shop Inspection:

1) Review shop drawings and shop procedures with fabricator’s supervisory personnel.

2) Request and obtain necessary mill certification of steel and verify proper material throughout duration of Project, as required.

3) Review welding procedures and welder operator qualifications for conformance to technical requirements of Specifications.

4) Check layout and dimensions of jigs and fixtures for multiple fabrication, joint preparation, fit-up, and run-out plates.

5) Verify welding electrodes to be used and other welding consumables as Project progresses.

6) Check preheating procedure for uniformly and thoroughness through the full thickness of material.

7) Make visual inspection of welding in progress for size, length and quality. 8) Check bolted connections as required by technical requirements of

Specifications. 9) Perform random dimensional checks of completed members.


10) Provide inspection of surface preparation for coating and coating operations.

c. Field Inspection: 1) Obtain planned erection procedure, and review with erector’s supervisory

personnel. 2) Check installation of anchor bolts and base plates. 3) Verify field welding procedures and welder qualifications to assure

conformance with Specifications. 4) Check steel as it is received in field for possible shipping damage,

workmanship and piece marking. 5) Check plumbness, alignment and chamber as erection progresses

including proper bracing. 6) Check joint preparation, fit-up, backing strips and runout plates. 7) Check preheating to assure proper temperature, uniformity, and

thoroughness through full material thickness. 8) Review welding sequence. 9) Visually inspect field welding for size, length, and quality.

d. High-Strength Bolt Inspection: Inspection of high-strength bolted Construction shall be in accordance with latest edition of AISC Specification for Structural Joints, and as follows. 1) All high-strength bolted connections shall be visually inspected. 2) At least two bolts of every third connection between floor beams and

girders shall be checked with a calibrated torque wrench for proper torque.

3) At least two bolts of every third connection between girders and columns shall be checked as above.

4) All bolts in every connection in primary exterior framing and braced framing shall be checked as above.

5) All bolted connections that fail shall be corrected and all bolts in connection retested.

6) Check calibration of impact wrenches minimum twice per day. e. Welding Inspection: Inspection of all welds shall be in accordance with latest

edition of AWS Structural Welding Code. 1) Visually inspect all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2) All penetration column to base plate welds shall be inspected by

ultrasonic testing in accordance with ASTM E-164. 3) All full penetration welds in moment connections shall be inspected by

ultrasonic testing. f. Headed Stud Connector Welding: Inspection of headed stud connector welding

shall be in accordance with latest edition of AWS Structural Welding Code and as follows. 1) Visual inspection of all studs shall indicate complete fusion and weld flush

or fillet for 100 percent circumference. There shall be no indication of lack of infusion or undercut weld.

2) A minimum of two (2) shear studs shall be welded at start of each production period in order to determine proper generator, control unit and stud welder setting. These studs shall be capable of being bent 45 degrees from vertical without weld failure. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or a full 360 degree fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud, such stud shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15 degrees off perpendicular to nearest end of the beam. Studs failing under this test shall be replaced.


C. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

05 3100- 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0911 STEEL DECK

SECTION 05 3100

STEEL DECK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel roof deck and accessories. 2. Steel floor deck and accessories. 3. Supplementary framing for openings.




1. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel: Support framing for openings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 2. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

C. Steel Deck Institute (SDI):

1. SDI DM - Publication No. 29, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks and Cellular Floor Deck Systems with Electrical Distribution.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate decking plan, deck profile dimensions, anchorage requirements,

fastener type and spacings, projection, openings and reinforcement, finishes, pertinent details and accessories. 1. Any fabrication of material before review of shop drawings will be at Contractor's risk

and corrections will be at no cost to Owner.

D. Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Welders Certificates: Welders shall have passed AWS D1.1 Certification

requirements and shall be in possession of documentation issued by AWS indicating current valid maintenance status of Certification.




A. Fabricate decking in accordance with SDI DM. B. Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five (5) years of documented experience.

2. Welders: Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Submit documentation that operators have maintained their AWS issued Certification.

3. Powder or Air Actuated Fastener Installers: Tool operator licensed by pin manufacturer.



B. Protect decking from moisture and extrememe temparatures during delivery to project site.

C. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.




F. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. Provide

weatherproof covering.

G. Architect or Engineer may reject any material that has become damaged because of improper storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Steel Deck is based on the product named. 1. Consolidated Systems, Incorporated: www.csisteel.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. United Steel Deck, Incorporated: www.njb-united.com. 2. Vulcraft Steel Deck: www.vulcraft.com. 3. Wheeling Corrugating Company: www.wheeling.com.

2.2 STEEL ROOF DECK

A. Decking: Indicated on Drawings.


B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33, with G90 galvanized

coating.

C. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: Indicated on Drawings.

D. Nominal Height: Indicated on Drawings.

E. Profile: Fluted.

F. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch.

G. Attachment : Welded or mechanically fastened.

2.3 STEEL FLOOR DECK

A. Decking: Indicated on Drawings.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33, with G90 galvanized coating.

C. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: Indicated on Drawings.

D. Nominal Height: Indicated on Drawings.

E. Profile: Fluted.

F. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch.

G. Attachment: Welded or mechanically fastened.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: 1. Screw: Galvanized, self-drilling, self tapping 2. Air or Powder Actuated: Knurled hardened steel shank with steel washer, diameters

as required to meet project and SDI design requirements.

C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Manufacturer standard, complying with VOC limitations.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops and cover plates, 22 gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.

B. Provide all accessories necessary to complete entire installation, including cover plates to

cover all gaps where units abut or change direction, around columns, to cover access holes used for welding, and closures where required to prevent seepage of concrete.

C. Floor Drain Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches

below floor deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces of structural steel and steel deck support surfaces to be welded, free of paint, ice, water, oil, dirt, rust or any material detrimental to welding.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI DM and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level. Coordinate attachment sequence and procedure with placing of units indicated on shop drawings.

B. Place decking on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position before permanently

fastening. C. Provide minimum 2 inch bearing.

D. Deck fastenings specified herein are minimum requirements. Deck attachment shall be

sufficient to develop diaphragm capacity indicated on Drawings, and shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Welding: Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. Fasten deck to steel framework at

ends, side supports and intermediate supports by puddle welds minimum 3/4 inch diameter, spaced minimum 12 inches on center. 1. Where deck sections abut, weld along each section at specified spacing. 2. Where deck runs parallel to a beam, weld deck to beam with minimum 3/4 inch

diameter weld minimum 36 inches on center. 3. Provide welding washers when welding 22 gauge or lighter deck. 4. Tack weld or sheet metal screw all accessory cover plates adequately into place. 5. Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material and shall have good fusion to

the supporting members. F. Mechanical Fastening: Fasten deck to steel framework at ends, side supports and

intermediate supports, spaced minimum 12 inches on center. 1. Powder Actuated: Install in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

Installed pin height shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and verified with manufacturer approved inspection gage. Determine power level by jobsite testing.


2. Air Actuated: Install in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Pin head shall clamp deck tightly to supporting member without gaps between underside head and top side of deck. Pin shall not cause excessive dimpling of deck greater than 1/2 thickness of pin head.

G. End closures of the deck units shall be fastened by tack welding or sheet metal screws not

more than 48 inches apart.

H. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum.

I. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned

areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.

J. Position drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Weld at each deck flute.

3.4 OPENINGS

A. At deck openings provide steel angle reinforcement indicated on Drawings. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and weld to deck at each flute.

B. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures

and angle flashings to close openings.

3.5 HANGING LOADS

A. Mechanical equipment or other loads shall not be hung from metal deck unless specifically indicated and detailed on Drawings. Method of attachment subject to review by Architect and Engineer.

3.6 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work:

1. Meet with structural steel, steel joist and pre-engineered metal building erector to coordinate connection requirements and scheduling for erection interface.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect steel deck installation, layout, types, gage, finish and sizes of decking sheets,

connections and tolerances, and welding. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services:

1. Inspect steel deck installation, layout, types, gage, finish and sizes of decking sheets, connections and tolerances.

2. Visually inspect field welded connections. 3. Visually inspect all mechanically attached connections.


C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Powder or air actuated pin manufactuarer Quality Control Representative shall inspect fastener installation to verify proper installation requirements are met.

D. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents.

END OF SECTION

05 4000 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0215 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

SECTION 05 4000

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Load bearing formed steel stud framing, 20 gage and heavier.




1. Section 07 2116 - Blanket Insulation: Insulation within framing members. 2. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board and non-load bearing 3. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal stud partition framing, 20 gage

and lighter. 4. Section 09 2815 - Gypsum Sheathing: Wall sheathing. 5. Section 13 3421 - Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings: Building structural frame and

metal wall panels.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. AISI SG-971 - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.


1. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 2. ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-

Dip Galvanized Coatings. 3. ASTM A 1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and

Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. 4. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron

and Steel. 5. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel

Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases.

6. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

7. ASTM C 1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.


A. Metal framing for exterior and interior walls and ceilings, except non-load bearing wall partitions. Metal framing identified as “Lightgage Steel Framing” on Structural Drawings.


B. Design wall system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

C. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural

members, and clearances of intended openings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, and product criteria. 1. Provide data for sill plate sealer.

C. Assurance/Control Submittals:

1. Qualification Documentation: Upon request, submit documentation of installer experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.


A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI SG-971.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five (5) years of documented experience.




C. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return


D. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

E. Store materials protected from exposure to rain, snow or other harmful weather conditions,

at temperature and humidity conditions.


A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature, humidity, and ventilation within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Metal Framing as manufactured by one of the following: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems: www.clarkdietrich.com/apps/bim.php. 2. Dale/Incor: www.daleincor.com. 3. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com. 4. Unimast, Inc. www.unimast.com. 5. United Steel Systems: www.unitedsteelsystems.com.


Permitted.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Studs: ASTM A 1003, ASTM C 955; steel formed to channel shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and Depth: Indicated on Drawings. 2. Galvanized Coating: G60 minimum.

B. Track: ASTM A 1003, ASTM C 955, formed sheet steel; channel shaped; same with as

studs, tight fit, solid web. 1. Galvanized Coating: G60 minimum.

C. Headers: Cold formed galvanized one-piece load-bearing.

D. Bracing, Furring, and Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions

encountered; finish to match framing components.

E. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.

F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: ASTM A 780, zinc-rich primer.

G. Exterior Wall Sill Plate Sealer Strip:

1. Manufacturer: Protecto Wrap: www.protectowrap.com. 2. Product: Protecto Premium Energy Sill Sealer. 3. Description: 3/8 inch closed cell polyethylene foam with self adhesive waterproof

membrane, air, moisture and insect barrier sill sealer.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Screws: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; steel, complying with ASTM C 1002; galvanized coating, plated or oil-phosphate coated complying with ASTM B 633 as needed for required corrosion resistance

B. Anchor Bolts for Exterior Walls: ASTM A 307, Grade C.

C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.3.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements.

http://www.clarkdietrich.com/apps/bim.php

http://www.protectowrap.com/


B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.

C. Fabricate panels square, with components attached in a manner so as to prevent racking or

distortion.

D. Cut all framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened.

E. Provide insulation as specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs and double header

members, which will not be accessible to the insulation contractor.

F. Axially Loaded Studs: 1. Install studs to have full bearing against inside track web (1/16 inches maximum gap)

prior to stud and track attachment. 2. Splices in axially loaded studs are not permitted.

G. Fasteners: Fasten components using self-tapping screws or welding.

H. Anchorage to Slab: Anchor floor tracks and runners to concrete with powder actuated drive

pins.

I. Welding: Welding permitted on 18 gage or heavier material only. 1. Specify welding configuration and size on the Structural Calculation submittal. 2. Qualify welding operators in accordance with Section 6.0 of AWS D.1.3. 3. Touch up all welds with zinc-rich paint in compliance with ASTM A 780.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







3.2 INSTALLATION - WALLS

A. Install components in accordance with ASTM C 1007 and manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at

maximum 24 inches on center.


C. Place studs on center at spacing indicated on Drawings; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using connection screws per manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door

and window jambs.

E. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs not permitted.

F. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements.

G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after

erection.

H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.

I. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing.

J. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.

K. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to

prevent stud rotation.

L. Touch-up damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

M. Install anchor bolts of size and spacing indicated on Drawings.

N. Install continuous sill plate sealer strip under exterior wall metal sill track.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect metal framing installation, stud type, gage, spacing, fasteners and

connections. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

05 5135 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 FIXED SHIPS LADDER

SECTION 05 5135

FIXED SHIPS LADDER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum ships ladder. 2. Handrails.




1. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel angles and supports for ladder. 2. Section 07 7233 - Roof Hatches: Roof access hatch.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate ladder layout, dimensions, jointing, fasteners and

connection to building structure.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout subittals. 1. Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner’s name and

registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.



B. Receive and inspect ladder on site upon delivery.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Warrant ladder and handrail against failure in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER’S

A. Okeeffe’s Incorporated, Architectural Building Products: 800-227-3305.


B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Precision Ladders, LLC: www.precisionladders.com.

C. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Product: Model 520.

B. Description: Fixed ladder fabricated from 6063-T6 alloy aluminum with serrated rungs, minimum 1-1/4 inch high x 4-1/8 inch deep and 2 feet wide, tread spacing 12 inches on center. Rungs designed to support 500 pound load. Handrails fabricated from 1-1/2 inch diameter aluminum with hemispherical aluminum end caps.

C. Finish: Mill finsh

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and

conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install ships ladder in conformance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Verify that ships ladder is properly aliglned with building construction, at correct angle and free from distortion.

C. Anchor ladder base to floor and top of ladder to building construction by attahcment angles

as indicated in manufacturer’s approved Shop Drawings. 1. Number and location of attachment angles and types of anchorage shall be as

required by sub-base material, applicable safety regulations and manufacturer’s recommendations.


http://www.precisionladders.com/


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect stair installation, attachment to structure, stair angle and alignment. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

06 1000 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0309 ROUGH CARPENTRY - METAL

SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY - METAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Nailers and blocking. 2. Concealed blocking behind wall mounted items. 3. Preservative and fire resistive treatment.




1. Section 05 4000 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Metal wall framing. 2. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal partition framing. 3. Divisions 26 thru 28: Equipment mounted on backboards

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):

1. AWPA - C1 - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. 2. AWPA - C15 - Wood for Commercial-Residential Construction Preservative

Treatment by Pressure Processes. 3. AWPA - C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. 4. AWPA - C27 - Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. 5. AWPA - P5 - Water Borne Preservatives.

B. National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce) (PS):

1. NIST PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. NIST PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

C. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA):

1. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Certificates: 1) Preservative Treated Wood: Certification for water-borne preservative

that moisture content was reduced to 19 percent maximum, after treatment.

2) Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Certification from treating plant stating that fire-retardant treatment materials comply with governing code, ordinances and requirements of local authority having jurisdiction, and treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces.



A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.

1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: WWPA G-5. 2. Lumber of other species or grades, or graded by other agencies, is acceptable

provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

B. Plywood: Comply with PS 1.


A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. 1. Inspect wood materials for conformance to specified grades, species, and treatment

at time of delivery to Project Site. 2. Reject and return unsatisfactory wood materials.

B. Provide facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends

and surfaces.

C. Keep materials dry. Stack materials off ground minimum 12 inches or, if on concrete slab-on-grade, minimum 1-1/2 inches, fully protected from weather. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

D. For materials pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each

bundle to provide air circulation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on Drawings, S4S.

C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

D. Blocking and Nailers: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.

E. Electrical Component Mounting: APA rated sheathing.

F. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for treated wood locations.

2.2 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Wolmanized Pressure-Treated Wood, Wolman CCA Type C, by Hickson Corporation.

b. CCA Pressure Treated Lumber Type C, by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Incorporated.


2. Impregnate lumber with preservative treatment conforming to AWPA Standard C1 and P5. Apply the preservative in a closed cylinder by pressure process in accordance with AWPA Standard C15.

3. Retention of dry salts: a. Moderate service conditions (weather exposure): 0.25 pounds per cubic foot

(oxide basis). b. Severe conditions (constant contact with ground or water): 0.40 pounds per

cubic foot (oxide basis). 4. Remove excess moisture where shrinkage is a serious fault or where treated lumber

will be in contact with plaster, or stucco, and where water-borne treated lumber is to be painted or stained.

5. Lumber shall be dried to 15-19 percent moisture content after treatment, and material to be painted or stained shall have knots and pitch streaks sealed as with untreated wood.

6. Liberally brush freshly cut surfaces, bolt holes and machined areas with the same preservative in accordance with AWPA Standard M4.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment:

1. Manufacturers: a. "Dricon" by Hickson Corporation; Atlanta, GA; (404) 801-6600. b. "Pyro-Guard" by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.; Thomson, GA; (800)

832-9663 2. Lumber and plywood shall be treated as follows:

a. Each piece of treated material shall bear the UL FR-S rating (flamespread and smoke developed less than 25) indicating compliance with an extended 30 minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

b. After treatment, all lumber shall be dried to an average moisture content of 19 percent or less.

c. After treatment, plywood shall be dried to an average moisture content of 15 percent or less.

d. All treated material shall meet interior Type A requirements in AWPA standard C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood.

e. Chemicals used to treat material shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde.

f. Treatment material shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency.

C. Wood Requiring Treatment:

1. Lumber, Preservative Treated: Nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar items in conjunction with roofing, flashing, and other construction. Sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar items in contact with masonry or concrete.

2. Lumber, Fire Retardant Treated: Interior framing, furring, blocking, nailers, and miscellaneous exposed wood. Do not treat furring in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Interior Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated: Plywood backing for electrical and telephone equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.




3.2 INSTALLATION - NAILERS AND BLOCKING

A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.

B. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, equipment, specialty items and trim.

3.3 INSTALLATION - PLYWOOD

A. Secure with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends over firm bearing.

B. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards made of plywood at locations indicated on

Drawings. Size back boards as required for equipment.

3.4 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS

A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials and roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts.

C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect rough carpentry installation, blocking, nailers, backboards, wood treatment

and attachment to substrate. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

06 4102 - 1 MSTR 0914 CUSTOM - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK


CUSTOM ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Fabricated custom casework, wood finish. 2. Fabricated custom countertops, epoxy resin.




1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and backing for cabinet attachment. 2. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Backing plates for cabinet

attachment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR

part 36.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable Buildings

and Facilities; International Code Council. 2. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard.

D. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):

1. AWI AWS – Architectural Woodwork Standards; Edition 1.

E. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware.

F. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) (U.S. Department of Commerce):

1. NIST PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. NIST PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AWI Premium Grade: Refer to AWI AWS Section 10, Paragraph 1.1.4

B. AWI Custom Grade: Refer to AWI AWS Section 10, Paragraph 1.1.3

C. Exposed Parts, Semi-Exposed Parts and Concealed Surfaces: Refer to Refer to AWI AWS Section 10, Paragraph 1.2.10, 1.2.11, and 1.2.12.

D. Flush Overlay: Refer to AWPI AWQS, Section 400, Paragraph 400-G-7.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data for each cabinet hardware item. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate plans and elevations, materials, profiles, assembly

methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessories, hardware and finishes. 3. Samples for Selection:

a. Submit manufacturer's complete set of stain and finish color samples for Architect initial color selection.

4. Samples for Verification: a. Submit wood and stain samples to illustrate color, grain and finish for

comparison with and determination of match with existing wood cabinets. b. Submit plastic laminate samples to illustrate color and texture for comparison

with and determination of match with existing plastic laminate. 5. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Qualification Documentation: Upon request, submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.


1. Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner’s name and registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.



A. Product Quality: Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Custom quality, except where higher quality construction specified. 1. AWI Premium Grade quality for Drawer construction.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified

in this section with minimum five (5) years of documented experience. 1. Member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute preferred, but not

required.


A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Transport, handle, store and protect products.







F. Protect units from moisture damage in conformance with AWI AWQS, Section 01 7300 -

Execution.


G. Store under cover in ventilated space not exposed to extreme temperatures and humidity changes.

H. Do not store or install units in building until concrete, masonry and gypsum board work is

dry, and temperature and humidity are stabilized.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: During and after installation of work of this section, maintain

the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.

B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and

indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying Work.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate dimensions, weights, required utilities and support requirements for equipment, fixtures and appliances installed in and on cabinets.

B. Coordinate with other trades performing installations with cabinets to provide for a complete

concealed installation.

1.9 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Manufacturer one (1) year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI AWS Section 3, Custom Grade; average moisture content of 6-8 percent.

B. Hardwood Lumber and Trim: Graded in accordance with AWI AWS, Custom Grade;

average moisture content of 6-8 percent, plain sliced White Maple veneer to match lab tables, of quality suitable for transparent finish.

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Material shall be selected so that the finished installation provides an attractive and harmonious appearance. 1. Exterior casework surfaces exposed to view after installation, and cabinet interior

surfaces, shall be plain sliced White Maple.

B. Softwood Plywood: NIST PS 1; Graded in accordance with AWI AWS Section 4, veneer

core, for application of plastic laminate.

C. High Performance Wood Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Type M-3, 47 pound density, balanced 3-ply construction with maximum 8 percent moisture content, composed of wood


chips, made with water resistant adhesive; sanded faces, for application of plastic laminate and cabinet liner.

2.3 EPOXY RESIN COUNTERTOPS

A. Material - Epoxy Resin Tops: 1 Epoxy Resin tops shall consist of modified epoxy resin that has been especially

compounded and cured to provide the optimum physical and chemical resistance properties required of a heavy-duty laboratory table top.

2 Tops and curbs shall be a uniform mixture throughout their full thickness, and shall not depend upon a surface coating that is readily removed by chemical and/or physical abuse.

3 Tops and curbs shall be non-glaring. 4 Tops shall be 1" thick, exposed edges beveled top and bottom, and drip grooves

provided on the underside at all exposed edges. 4" high curbs at the backs and ends of tops shall be 1" thick and bonded to the deck to form a square watertight joint.

5 Sink cutouts shall be smooth and uniform without saw marks with the top edge beveled.

6 Bottom edge of the sink opening shall be finished smooth with the edge broken to prevent sharpness. Corners of sink cutouts shall be radiused not less than 3/4".

B. Sinks - Molded Epoxy Resin: 1. Sinks shall be molded of modified epoxy resin, carefully compounded with selected

materials to provide maximum physical and chemical properties. 2. Sinks shall be non-glaring with all inside corners coved and the bottom pitched to the

drain outlet. 3. Sinks shall possess a high resistance to mechanical and thermal shock.

C. Molded Epoxy Resin Cup Drains: Cup drains shall be molded in one-piece of the same resin

as specified for Molded Epoxy Resin sinks. They shall have an integral mounting flange and a 1-1/2" I.P.S. male straight thread outlet.

D. Molded Epoxy Resin Drain Troughs: Drain troughs shall be molded of the same resin as

specified for Molded Epoxy Resin sinks. Troughs shall have not less than 1/8" per foot pitch to the drain or discharge end. For ease of cleaning, the junction between the sides and bottom shall be seamless and have not less than a 3/4" radius.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. D. Grommets: 3 inch diameter molded plastic for equipment cords and cabling to pass

through. 1. Color selected by Architect. More than one color may be selected.

2.5 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9. B. Adjustable Shelf Support Pin: Four (4) metal flat top units per shelf.

1. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company. www.kv.com. 2. Model: 331.

http://www.kv.com/


3. Dimensions: a. Pin Length: 3/8 inches. b. Shelf Rest: 3/8 inch x 1/2 inch.

4. Finish: Anochrome. 5. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions.


C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers, thru-bolted from back side.

D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, disc tumbler cylinder cam type, two keys per lock, master

keyed, with strike plate, steel with finish to match door pull finish. 1. Manufacturer/Model: National Lock No. C8053. 2. Keying: Master keyed; provide two (2) keys per lock. 3. Locations: One at each door and drawer.

E. Catches: Magnetic, heavy duty, bright aluminum finish; 7 pound pull strength complying

with ANSI/ICC A117.1 and ADA requirements. 1. Locations:

a. Base and Wall Cabinets: One, top mounted. b. Tall Cabinet Doors (Over 48 inches): Two, top and bottom mounted.

F. Drawer Slides: Galvanized steel construction, ball bearings separating tracks, full extension

type. 1. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company. www.kv.com. 2. Standard: 1275 side mount; 60 pound class. 3. File Drawers: 8500 side mount; 150 pound class. 4. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

G. Institutional Hinges: Heavy duty, (5) knuckle, 2-3/4 inch steel institutional type, mill ground, hospital radius tips, teflon coated pins, tight pin feature with all edges eased, full wrap around type to accommodate 13/16 inch thick laminated door and allow 270 degree swing. 1. Manufacturer: Terry Hinge and Hardware: www.terryhinge.com. 2. Model: H08-99N60. 3. Fasteners: Minimum 9 screws, #8, 5/8 inch FHMS. 4. Locations:

a. Two (2) hinges per door up to 35-1/2 inch height. b. Three (3) hinges per door up to 63 inch height. c. Four (4) hinges per door up to 78-3/4 inch height. d. Five (5) hinges per door up to 84 inches.

5. Finish: Brushed chrome.

H. Coat Hook: Wall Mount, single hook, stain chrome finish.

I. Hanger Rod: 1-1/16 inch diameter rod, supported by flanges at end, satin chrome finish.

2.6 CONSTRUCTION - WOOD VENEER CABINETS A. Construction Workmanship: Comply with workmanship requirements in AWI AWQS,

Paragraph 400C-S-2.

B. Joinery of Case Body Members: 1. Tops, Ends and Bottoms: Spline or biscuit, glued under pressure, approximately

three (3) per each 12 inches of joint.

http://www.kv.com/

http://www.terryhinge.com/


2. Exposed End Corner and Face Frame Attachment: Butt joint, glued and finish nailed. 3. Cabinet Backs: Full bound captured in grooves on cabinet sides, top and bottom. 3. Cabinet Backs: Inset back flush with cabinet sides, top and bottom.

C. Construction: Flush Overlay.

1. Door and drawer faces cover body members or face frames of cabinets, with spaces left between adjacent surfaces sufficient for operating clearance.

D. Sub-base: Kiln dried solid lumber.

E. Body Members (Ends, Divisions and Bottoms): 3/4 inch particleboard panels.

1. Ends: Provide holes drilled for adjustable shelves spaced 32mm on center.

F. Face Frames and Rails: 3/4 inch hardwood lumber 1. Minimum 5 inch x full width cabinet body rails immediately behind door/drawer and

multiple drawer horizontal joints to maintain exact body dimensions, close-off reveal and locate for lock strikes.

G. Fixed and Adjustable Shelving: Hardwood plywood veneer.

1. Up to 35 Inches Wide: 3/4 inch thick. 2. 36 Inches and Above: 1 inch thick. 3. Tall Cabinets: 1 inch thick.

H. Cabinet Backs: 1/2 inch hardwood plywood veneer, fully housed into sides, top and bottom,

recessed 7/8 inch from back of cabinet. 1. Provide hang rails glued to back of cabinet back and mechanically fastened to cabinet

sides. Provide minimum of one (1) at base, two (2) at wall, and three (3) at tall cabinets.

I. Drawer Sides, Backs and Sub-fronts: AWI AWQS, Premium Grade; 1/2 inch single species

solid lumber with an AWI AWQS Section 100-G-1 hardness rating of “Medium” or better. 1. Fronts applied to separate drawer body component sub-front. 2. Sides doweled and glued under pressure to receive front and back, machine squared

and clamped until glue is set. 3. Paper storage drawers fitted with full width hood at back. 4. Pre-manufactured drawer systems not permitted. 5. Particleboard not permitted.

J. Drawer Bottoms: AWI AWQS, Premium Grade; 1/2 inch non-racking, non-deflecting single

species solid lumber with AWI AWQS Section 100-G-1 hardness rating of “Medium” or better. 1. Secure bottom to drawer sides by gluing under pressure and with screws.

K. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick hardwood plywood veneer.

1. Drawer fronts and hinged doors overlay cabinet body. 2. Maintain maximum 1/8 inch reveal between pairs of doors and between multiple

drawer fronts within cabinet.

L. Storage Shelving or Bookshelves: 1. Sub-base: Kiln dried solid lumber. 2. Body Members (Ends, Divisions, Tops and Bottom): 3/4 inch particleboard panels.

a. Ends: Provide holes drilled for adjustable shelves spaced 32mm on center. 3. Backs: 3/4 inch particleboard. 4. Adjustable Shelves: Particleboard panels.

M. Edging:


1. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid hardwood. 2. Cabinet Body Edge (Includes door/drawer front spacer rail): Solid hardwood. 3. Drawer Body: Solid hardwood. 4. Fixed Shelves: Solid hardwood. 5. Adjustable Shelves (All 4 edges): Solid Hardwood. 6. Interior Body Compartment Edging and Interior Dividers: Solid hardwood.

N. Access: Coordinate requirements of electrical components installed under Divisions 26 –

Electrical. Provide under this Section access to electrical components installed within casework. 1. Provide removable access panel within knee space for access to electrical

components. Secure in place using appropriate wood fasteners. 2. Construct access panel as large as practical for easy of access and manageability to

match adjacent casework construction. 3. Provide perimeter edging on removable panel to prevent edge damage.

O. Finishes: Shop finish wood veneer, wood trim and edging in accordance with AWI AWQS, Section 01500 to the following design. 1. Transparent Finish: TR-6, Catalyzed Polyurethane, custom quality.

2.7 CONSTRUCTION – EPOXY RESIN COUNTERTOPS A. Tops at Wet Areas: In accordance with AWI; Section 4.2.5.3.1, use the following for Wet

Area countertops and their associated splashes including countertops with plumbing fixture and water supply. 1. Use 3/4 inch veneer core plywood with Type II adhesive, industrial-grade

particleboard or fiberboard with a 24-hour thickness swell factor of 5% or less and a 24-hour water-absorption factor of 10% or less for the entire countertop elevation and return elevation.

2. B. Tops at Dry Areas: 3/4 inch particleboard. C. Back and Side Splash: Epoxy Resin.

D. Finish: Epoxy Resin as specified.

2.8 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate and assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to

permit passage through building openings. B. Shop fabricate units square, plumb and true.

C. Accurately machine and bore cabinet parts for specified grade quality joinery construction

utilizing automatic machinery providing consistent sizing of components. End panels doweled to receive bottom and top.

D. Fully house and recess back panel 7/8 inch into back of cabinet sides, top and bottom

forming fully closed and rigid cabinet. Shim cabinet back from back of cabinet creating tight interior fit.

E. Laminate surfaces and liners to core under controlled conditions, by approved and

regulated lamination using natural-setting hybrid P.V.A. Type III water resistant adhesives that cure through chemical reaction, containing no health or environmentally hazardous


ingredients. Methods requiring heat are not permitted, “contact” methods of laminating not permitted.

F. Use one piece edging for full length only. Joints not permitted. G. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. H. Apply wood veneer by grain matching in compliance with AWI AQWQS, Custom Quality.

I. Provide counter tops with edge treatment and profile indicated on Drawings. Provide in

continuous lengths to maximum possible. Provide field joints as required using adhesive and tite-joint fasteners. Joints within 24 inches of sink cut-out not permitted.

J. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center.

K. Provide concealed conduit chases, removable access panels, cutouts for plumbing fixtures,

inserts, outlet boxes, fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions and where directed by Owner’s Representative.

L. Provide openings and required supports for equipment, fixtures and appliances installed in

cabinets. Verify sizes and other requirements before fabrication.

M. Provide cabinet door locks at each door and drawer where indicated on Drawings. Provide concealed vertical cabinet frame member where pairs of cabinet doors meet for lock strike.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and

conditions are as required, and ready to receive work. 1. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing for attachment of cabinets. 2. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting Work of this section and

ready to receive this Work. C. Report in writing to Architect and Owner’s Representative prevailing conditions that will


D. By starting Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting


3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install Work in accordance with specified AWI Quality Standards.

B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.


E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of

species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION – EPOXY RESIN COUNTERTOPS

A. Install components in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Align work plumb and level.

C. Adhesively attach countertops and splash to solid substrate.

D. Seal joints between sills and adjoining surfaces with silicone sealant.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Meet and coordinate with Electrical and Plumbing Contractors to locate required cut-

outs for fixtures, outlets and other items not installed by Cabinet Contractor. 2. Determine exact location of electrical and piping runs within cabinets for a complete

concealed installation.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform

contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect cabinet work construction for specified grade, configuration, finish and color,

specified hardware, anchorage and installation for compliance with specified standards.




3.6 CLEANING A. Clean casework, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

1. Upon completion of installation. 2. Just before Substantial Completion Inspection.

END OF SECTION


CUSTOM CABINETS INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

CUSTOM CABINET INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________


UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION INSTALLER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Installer furnished and installed cabinets constructed with specified materials in conformance with

AWI Custom Grade requirements. 2. Installer furnished and installed drawers in cabinets constructed with specified materials in

conformance with AWI Premium Grade requirements.

3. Installer furnished and installed countertops in accordance with AWI; Section 11, Paragraph 4.2.5.3.1 where countertops receive sinks, lavatories or where countertops are subject to liquids.

4. Installer furnished and installed plastic laminate material of specified grade in conformance with AWI Custom Grade requirements.

EXECUTED AND DELIVERED this _________________ day of ______________, 20___ . ________________________________________ (company name) BY: ____________________________________ (authorized signature) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ____________day of _____________, 20___. ________________________________________________ Notary Public _______________________________________________ Affix Seal My Commission expires:


06 6116 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041

SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

SECTION 06 6116


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid polymer surfacing window sills.



1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, thickness, materials, colors, finishes, adjacent construction anchorage details.

C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer’s complete set of color samples for Architect initial

color selection.



B. Pack in shipping crates.

C. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

D. Deliver Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each material to Project Field



F. Store products under cover, off ground and protected from moisture. Protect surfaces from

staining, scratching, and other damage during handling and installation.


A. Field Measurements: Check actual dimensions of construction affecting solid surfacing window sills by accurate field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Solid Surfacing Fabrications is based on the product named. 1. Dupont Company: www2.dupont.com


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Formica: www.formica.com. 2. Avonite: www.avonitesurfaces.com. 3. Wilsonart: www.wilsonart.com.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Product: Dupont Corian solid surfacing.

B. Description: Homogenous filled acrylic; of composite construction. Color selected by Architect. More than one color may be selected.

C. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard mildew-resistant silicone, color matching surfacing color.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components to achieve shape and configuration.

B. Configuration: Minimum thickness of 1/2 inches; unless indicated otherwise a noted. Shape as indicated on Drawings.

C. Radius corners and edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







3.2 INSTALLATION

http://www.formica.com/

http://www.avonitesurfaces.com/

http://www.wilsonart.com/



A. Install components in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Align work plumb and level.

C. Adhesively attach sills to solid substrate.

D. Seal joints between sills and adjoining surfaces with silicone sealant.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation From True Dimension: 1/8 inch. 2. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/8 inch.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect window sill installation, anchorage to substrate, configuration, finish and color. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions at completion of installation and just before Substantial Completion Inspection.

B. Provide protective cover over window sills. Do not remove until Substantial Completion

Inspection.

END OF SECTION

07 2106 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 09/08 FOUNDATION PERIMETER INSULATION

SECTION 07 2106

FOUNDATION PERIMETER INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Board insulation at foundation perimeter.




1. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement: Footing reinforcing. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for footings. 3. Section 31 2316 – Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings: Footing

excavation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

2. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1999.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for Submittals.

1. Product Data: a. Provide data on insulation characteristics and performance criteria



B. Deliver Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each material to Project Field Superintendent for Contractor Records.





E. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources.

F. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for

handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Foundation Perimeter Insulation is based on the

product named. 1. Dow Chemical Company, Product Styrofoam: www.dow.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Owens Corning Corporation, Product Foamular: www.owenscorning.com. 2. DiversiFoam Products, CertiFoam 25: www.diversifoam.com.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Polystyrene: ASTM C 578, Type IV, with closed cell skin surfaces for low temperature applications, with the following characteristics:

B. Board Size and Thickness: 4 feet x 8 feet x 1 inch thick.

C. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.18.

D. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi.

E. Board Density: 1.6 lb/cu ft.

F. Maximum Water Absorption: 0.3 percent, volume.

G. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 5/165, when

tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that footing excavation is dry, sides of excavation are cut sharp and vertical,

footing reinforcing is in place, insulation materials are dry and that footing excavations are ready to receive insulation.

http://www.dow.com/

http://www.owenscorning.com/

http://www.diversifoam.com/





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install boards at building perimeter footings with horizontal and vertical lengths as follows: 1. Horizontally: 24 inches from backside of footing interior to building. 2. Vertically: To bottom of footing or grade beam or 24 inches below finish grade at

interior of building, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

B. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding.

C. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions.

D. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect perimeter insulation installation at foundation excavations, locations and

joints. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.


A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to placement of footing concrete.

END OF SECTION


MSTR 0810 BOARD INSULATION

SECTION 07 2113

BOARD INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Board insulation at concrete masonry unit cavity wall at brick veneer. 2. Styrofoam All-Purpose Tape.




1. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Substrate for application of insulation. 2. Section 04 2204 - Brick Veneer: Brick ties at insulation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 272 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for

Structural Sandwich Construction. 2. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter. 3. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation 4. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular

Plastics. 5. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics and performance criteria.

a. Polystyrene board. b. Board adhesive.


1. Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the requirements contained in National Evaluation

Report NER-669.









E. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,

soiling, and other sources.

F. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are

detrimental to successful installation.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide (15) year manufacturer’s warranty that actual thermal resistance of extruded polystyrene insulation will not vary by more than 10 percent from its published thermal resistance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Board Insulation is based on the product named. 1. Dow Chemical Company: www.dow.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Foam Control; www.foam-control.com. 2. Owens Corning Corp.: www.owenscorning.com.

2.2 INSULATION AT MASONRY UNIT CAVITY WALLS

A. Product: Dow Styrofoam Cavitymate Plus.

http://www.dow.com/

http://www.foam-control.com/




B. Extruded Polystyrene: ASTM C 578, Type IV, with closed cell skin surfaces for cavity wall applications, with the following characteristics: 1. Board Thickness: 1½” inch; R-7.5. 2. Board Size: 16 inches x 96 inches for installation between masonry wall ties. 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Thermal Resistance per Inch: five (5) year aged R-value of 5.0 at 75 degrees F when

tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 5. Compressive Strength: 25 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1621. 6. Board Density: 1.6 lb/cu ft. 7. Maximum Water Absorption: 0.1 percent by volume when tested in accordance with

ASTM C 272. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread/Smoke developed index of 5/165,

when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 9. Insulation shall not be produced with, or contain, any of the U.S. EPA regulated CFC

compounds listed in the Montreal Protocol of the United Nations Environmental Program.

C. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.

1. Contech Brands PL300 Foam Board Adhesive, by ChemRex, Incorporated. 2. Contech Brands Premium Foam Based Adhesive, by ChemRex, Incorporated. 2. Foamgrab PS, by Dacar Products, Incorporated.

D. Tape: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.

1. Styrofoam All-Purpose Tape 2.875 inch wide. 2. Tape joints between boards both horizontal and vertically.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that

substrates are ready to receive insulation. 2. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials

or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3. Verify that masonry joints are struck flush.





3.2 INSTALLATION - MASONRY CAVITY WALLS

A. Install rigid insulation at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with manufacturers published instructions.



B. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over construction, control and expansion joints with single beads of adhesive each side of joint.

C. Install Styrofoam All-Purpose Tape 2-7/8 inch wide, over vertical and horizontal joints.

D. Apply adhesive to back of boards; three continuous beads per board length.

E. Butter all edges of insulation board with adhesive.

F. Fit insulation between masonry wall ties and other obstructions with joints staggered and

edges butted tightly. 1. Press insulation firmly against concrete masonry wall. 2. Wedge insulation from masonry veneer with small fragments of masonry material

spaced at 24 inches on center each way. 3. Make insulation continuous. Fill all voids.

G. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to wall on one side of joint.

H. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect installation of rigid insulation, locations, type, properties, and attachment to

building structure. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.


A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION

07 2115 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0314 THERMAL AND AIR BARRIER WALL SYSTEM

SECTION 07 2115

THERMAL AND AIR BARRIER WALL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufacturers 2. Rigid Insulation Exterior Sheathing Board 3. Accessories




1. Section 04 2111 - Brick Veneer: Brick anchors, thru-wall flashing, and cavity drainage mat attached to metal studs at exterior insulation sheathing.

2. Section 04 2204 – Masonry Veneer: Masonry anchors, thru-wall flashing, and cavity drainage mat attached to metal studs at exterior insulation sheathing.

3. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Non Load-bearing, Load-bearing, metal exterior wall framing assemblies. Sill sealer installed with metal framing.

4. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry – Metal: Non Load-bearing, Load-bearing, metal exterior wall framing assemblies.

5. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Joint sealants of exterior wall finishes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C203: Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type

Thermal Insulation. 2. ASTM C209: Test Method for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 3. ASTM C518: Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 5. ASTM C1289: Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board. 6. ASTM D1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 7. ASTM D1622: Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 8. ASTM D 2842 Standard Test for Determining Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular

Plastics. 9. ASTM E84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 10. ASTM E96/E96M: Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 11. ASTM E283: Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

12. ASTM E330: Standard test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls.

13. ASTM E331: Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

14. ASTM E2357: Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies.


B. Factory Mutual (FM): 1. FM 4880: Class I Wall and Ceiling Panels Building Corner Fire Test.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. UL 723: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 285: Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability

Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus

2. NFPA 259: Standard Test Method for Potential Heat of Burning Materials.


A. an exterior wall system that effectively controls thermal, air and water performance and provides continuity of the building envelope enclosure. System shall include the following: 1. Rigid insulation exterior sheathing board secured to the exterior of the structural metal

wall framing assembly. 2. Joint, penetration and gap sealing material for sealing component joints, penetrations

through wall system and gaps between building envelope enclosure components and wall opening frames.

B. Performance Characteristics:

1. Thermal Performance: a. Exterior Insulation: ASTM C518, Stabilized R-value of 6.5 at one inch of

thickness with a maximum six (6) month exposure capability to outdoor elements and Fifteen Year Thermal Warranty.

2. Air Barrier Performance: When tested in accordance with ASTM E2357, at a test pressure of not less than 6.24 psf, air infiltration shall not exceed 0.04 cfm per square foot of fixed wall area. a. Testing shall be conducted at positive and negative sustained wind loading of

12.5 psf for one-hour duration in each direction, pressure cycling of wall at 2000 cycles in both positive and negative direction, ending with wind gust loading at 25 psf.

3. Water Penetration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E331, no uncontrolled water penetration shall occur at a minimum differential pressure of 6.24 psf for minimum test duration of two-hours.

4. Mold Resistance: Thermal wall and air barrier system components shall be classified as a non-food source for fungal growth.

C. Code Compliance: Exterior wall system and component materials shall comply with the

following requirements: 1. Exterior Insulation:

a. Class 1 (less than 25 Flame Spread Index and less than 450 Smoke Developed Index) classified at maximum thickness per UL 723 criteria or ASTM E84 criteria.

b. Fire Performance Evaluation as a component of an NFPA 285 approved wall assembly per the requirements of the International Building Code.

3. System complies with ASTM E2357: Test Method for determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies

4. System shall comply with NFPA 285: Standard method of Testing for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load Bearing Wall Assemblies containing Combustible components using the Intermediate Scale, Multi-Story Test Apparatus.


D. Fire Resistance:

1. System complies with NFPA 285: Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus.

2. Fire-stopping measures, per code, shall be included at floor line in stud cavity when wall assembly extends beyond the edge of floor line.

E. Joints, penetrations and gaps of thermal and air barrier wall system shall be made

watertight and air-tight.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics and performance criteria.

a. Rigid exterior sheathing board. b. Joint and sill sealers.

2. Accreditation Data: Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System Manufacturer Contractor Accreditation. a. Acceptable Accreditation Methods: Manufacturer’s Thermal and Air Barrier

Wall System Accreditation Program. 3. Submit Test Reports, summarized by Manufacturer of material(s), verifying qualities

of thermal and air barrier wall system components meet or exceed specified requirements. a. Include results of ASTM E2357 air barrier system testing and ASTM E331

water penetration tests. b. Include mill certificates indicating steel framing sheet complies with the

specified requirements. 4. Submit Field Inspection and Test Reports in accordance with Field Quality Control

requirements 5. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of the following materials..

a. Insulation panel, 12 inch square. b. Insulation fasteners, washers and joint flashing tape..

6. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for thermal and air barrier wall system components.


1. Warranty: Submit written warranties with forms completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturer’s Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System shall be a listed as a tested ‘Air Barrier Assembly’ by Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA). 1. Specimen one (1) of test: 8' x 8' wall with exterior panel-type material. Joints shall be

sealed and air barrier is applied to form a continuous assembly. 2. Second test specimen: 8' x 8' wall with exterior panel-type material, a 24" x 48"

window rough opening, masonry ties, junction boxes, galvanized duct and a PVC pipe. Panel joints and penetration joints shall be sealed and air barrier material then applied.

3. Cumulative results of this test specimen shall include the air permeance of material, accessories, air barrier components (window and services elements) and air leakage that results from joining those three parts together.


a. Specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E2357.










1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Install Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System Work only when weather conditions are in compliance with Manufacturer's specific environmental requirements and conditions will permit Work to be performed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Provide six (6) month exposure and Fifteen (15) year manufacturer’s warranty that

actual thermal resistance of rigid insulation sheathing will not vary by more than 10 percent from its published thermal resistance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer for Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System: 1. Dow Chemical Company: www.dow.com.

a) Thermax Wall System - Continuous Insulation

B. Substitutions: Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. 1. Substitutions permitted subject to compliance with insulated wall system

requirements.

2.2 RIGID INSULATION EXTERIOR SHEATHING BOARD

A. Product: Dow “THERMAX” Exterior Insulation.

http://www.dow.com/


1. Panel Size: 4’-0” wide x 8’-0” or 12’-0” length as selected. 2. Thickness and Stabilized R-Value:

a. Nominal 1.55 inch thickness, R- 10.1

B. Product Description: Glass-fiber-reinforced enhanced polyisocyanurate foam core sheathing faced with nominal 4 mil embossed blue acrylic-coated aluminum on one side and 1.25 mil embossed aluminum on opposite side, complying with ASTM C1289 and meeting the following physical properties: 1. ASTM C1289 Type 1, Class 2 2. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): 25 psi, minimum. 3. Aged Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518, measured at Mean Temp of 75F): R-6.5 at 1

inch of thickness 4. Flexural Strength (ASTM C203): Minimum 55 psi. 5. Water Absorption (ASTM C209): Maximum.0.1 percent by volume. 6. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): <0.03 perms. 7. Maximum Use Temperature: 250 degrees F.

C. Exterior Insulation Sheathing Performance Requirements:

1. ASTM E 331 Standard test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows , Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air pressure Differences.

2. ASTM E 330 Standard test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls.

3. ASTM E 2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies

4. ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

5. NFPA 285 Standard method of Test for Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Foam plastic Rigid Insulation.

6. NFPA 259 Standard test Method for Potential Heat of Building Materials. 7. FM 4880 Factory Mutual Class 1 Wall and ceiling Panels Building Corner Fire test. 8. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of building materials – product must be a

Class 1. 9. Compliance to Continuous Insulation in ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Energy Standard for

Buildings except Low Rise Residential.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design for Accessories shall be as listed below or as approved by System Manufacturer. 1. Fasteners: Provide polymer or coated steel screw fasteners recommended by

sheathing manufacturer for anchoring sheathing to metal wall framing. Fastener length and size based on wall sheathing thickness. a. Rodenhouse, Inc.: www.rodenhouse-inc.com:

1) 2 inch diameter “Thermal-Grip” CI prong washer with “Grip-Deck” ceramic- coated, self-drilling screw.

2. Insulation Flashing: Provide insulation manufacturer’s recommended board treatment for sealing joints, seams, and veneer tie penetrations through the insulation layer. a. Acceptable Products:

1) Dow Chemical Company LIQUIDARMOR commercial liquid flashing. 2) Dow Chemical Company “WEATHERMATE Straight Flashing 4 inch.

3. Window Opening Flashing: Provide insulated sheathing manufacturer’s recommended flashing sealing window and door wall openings. a. Acceptable Products:


1) Dow Chemical Company LIQUIDARMOR commercial liquid flashing 2) Dow Chemical Company “WEATHERMATE Straight Flashing 6 inch and

9 inch”, with butyl rubber adhesive, at straight opening heads, jambs and sills

4. Wide Joint Transition Sheet Membrane Flashing: “HYLOAD” Cloaked Flashing Systems Surface Adhered 40 mil total thickness flashing membrane with rubberized asphalt adhesive. Width as required.

5. Penetration Sealer/Filler: a. Dow’s “GREAT STUFF PRO Gaps & Cracks” single-Component polyurethane

insulating foam sealant. b. Dow’s “GREAT STUFF PRO Window & Door” single-component polyurethane

low-pressure foam sealant. 6. Gap Air Infiltration Filler: Two Component, Quick Cure Polyurethane Foam:

a. Dow’s “FROTH-PAK Foam Insulation” two-component, quick-cure polyurethane foam with NFPA 286 Approval for Exposed use to interior of building without need for a 15-min thermal barrier and compliant with ASTM E-84 Class A requirements.

7. Flexible polyethylene foam gasket strip: Dow’s “STYROFOAM Sill Seal Foam Gasket”.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that metal wall studs, opening framing, bridging, bracing and other framing

support members and anchorage have been installed within thermal wall system alignment tolerances and requirements.

2. Verify that insulation sheathing board material is dry and free of excess water content.

C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION - RIGID INSULATION EXTERIOR SHEATHING BOARD

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Fasten to exterior face of exterior metal stud wall framing using sheathing manufacturer’s recommended type and length screw fasteners with washers. Abut panels tightly together and around openings and penetrations. 1. Install sheathing panels horizontally with blue aluminum facing to exterior. Use

maximum lengths to minimize number of joints. Locate edge joints parallel to and on framing. Center end joints over supports and stagger in each course. Provide additional framing wherever panel joints do not bear against framing, plates or sill members.

2. Fasten panels to each support with fasteners spaced 12 inches on center at perimeter of building and 16 inches on center in panel field. Set back perimeter


fasteners 3/8" from edges and ends of panel units. Drive fasteners to bear tight and flush with surface of insulation. Do not countersink. Perimeter fasteners can be detailed to bridge gap of abutting board joints due to 1.75” diameter of the washer used to fasten the board to the studs. Maximum of two (2) board joints may be bridged per fastener.

3. Install flashing joint tape at end and edge joints with sufficient hand pressure to ensure seal and in accordance with sheathing manufacturer's joint sealing recommendations or spray liquid flashing to make sure a proper seal in accordance with the sheathing manufacture’s recommendations.

4. Install flashing tape behind wall tie and mechanical fastening assemblies for rain screen claddings.

5. Seal sheathing joints and penetrations of sheathing in accordance with sheathing manufacturer's joint and penetration sealing recommendations.

6. After base flashing, which may include a termination bar running horizontally along top edge of flashing, is installed on exterior of insulated sheathing, install membrane flashing 6 inch or 9 inch, with butyl rubber adhesive to exterior sheathing and lapped over the top edge of base flashing or spray liquid flashing to make sure a proper seal in accordance with the sheathing manufacture’s recommendations.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect installation of rigid sheathing insulation, locations, properties, and attachment

to building structure. Inspect joint sealers, opening protective flashing, and sill sealers at exterior insulation board.




3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Cleaning: 1. Remove and dispose of excess insulation, wrappings and other waste materials.

B. Protection: Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION

07 2116 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1114 BLANKET INSULATION

SECTION 07 2116

BLANKET INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Batt insulation in interior wall construction not part of Pre-Engineered Metal Building. 2. Batt insulation in interior wall construction. 3. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction.




1. Section 05 4000 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation.

2. Section 07 2106 - Foundation Perimeter Insulation: Insulation at foundation. 3. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Supporting construction for batt

insulation. 4. Section 13 3421 - Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings: Exterior wall and roof building

insulation.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

2. ASTM C 1104 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor Sorption of Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation.

3. ASTM C 1304 - Standard Test Method for Assessing the Odor Emission of Thermal Insulation Materials.

4. ASTM C 1320 - Standard Practice for Installation of Mineral Fiber Batt and Blanket Thermal Insulation.

5. ASTM C 1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings.

6. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

7. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

8. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C.

9. ASTM E 970 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Exposed Attic Floor Insulation Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Provide data on insulation fire test characteristics and performance criteria.


a. Test data showing compliance with specified requirements.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. 1. Installation Certification: Submit written certification of installation on form located at

end of Section. 2. Insulation Card: Installer shall provide an insulation card indicating coverage area,

thickness and R-value of insulation installed for each part of the building. Card shall be dated and signed by installer.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide all batt insulation from a single source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with fire test response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of

manufacturer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to installation instructions at all times during installation.










PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Blanket Insulation is based on the product named.


1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. B. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the 1. Johns Manville International, Inc: www.johnsmanville.com. 2. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Unfaced Batt Insulation and Sound Insulation: ASTM C 665; Type I, formaldehyde-free,

light-density, preformed glass fiber batt conforming to the following: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84; Flame-spread/Smoke- developed

index of 25/50. 2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136, Passes. 3. Critical Radiant Flux: ASTM E 970; greater than 0.11 btu per square foot. 4. Water Vapor Sorption: ASTM C 1104; 5 percent or less. 5. Odor Emission: ASTM C 1304; Passes. 6. Corrosiveness: ASTM C 665; Passes. 7. Fungi Resistance: ASTM C 1338; Passes.

B. Foil Scrim (FSK) Kraft Faced Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; Type III, Class A, Category 1,

formaldehyde-free, preformed glass fiber batt, faced on one side, conforming to the following: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84; Flame spread/Smoke developed index

of 25/50. 2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136, Passes. 3. Critical Radiant Flux: ASTM E 970; greater than 0.11 btu per square foot. 4. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96; 0.05 perms. 4. Water Vapor Sorption: ASTM C 1104; 5 percent or less. 5. Odor Emission: ASTM C 1304; Passes. 6. Corrosiveness: ASTM C 665; Passes. 7. Fungi Resistance: ASTM C 1338; Passes.

C. Underside roof insulation to be white vinyl faced 8” placed between the roof purlins with all

joints taped with white tape and supported with white metal straps spaced at 30” o/c – as MFG by Thermal Design.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: Self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inches wide. 1. At FSK Faced Insulation: Bright aluminum type. 2. At Foil Faced Insulation: Bright aluminum type.

B. Insulation Fasteners: Steel impale spindle and clip on flat metal base, self adhering

backing, length to suit insulation thickness, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place with self-locking washers.

C. Metal Straps: Galvanized steel straps, 0.20 inch thick x 3/4 inch wide.

D. Wire: Soft annealed galvanized wire, 18 gage.

http://www.certainteed.com/

http://www.johnsmanville.com/



E. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.

F. Fabric Liner: blanket for Simple Saver, or approved equal, retrofit roof insulation system

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that

substrates are ready to receive insulation.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or facings, including removing projections capable of puncturing facings or of interfering with insulation attachment.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions at locations

indicated on Drawings.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelope entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit

tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water Piping Coordination: If water piping is located inside of insulated exterior walls,

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. Apply single layer of insulation to product thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are

indicated or required to make up total thickness. F. Insulation at Wall Framing: Per Insulation Schedule. Install insulation in cavities formed by

framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. If more

than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.


2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. At metal framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced insulation with wire or metal straps. Support faced insulation by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. a. Wire: After placing insulation in cavity, install wire at 16 inches on center

horizontally, 6 inches from each end at top and bottom and securely attach to each metal stud by running thru punches in stud webs or using attachment clip screw attached to each metal stud flange.

b. Metal Straps: After placing insulation in cavity, install metal straps at 16 inches on center horizontally, 6 inches form each end at top and bottom and securely screw attach to each metal stud flange.

G. Seal joints in insulation facing caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items

penetrating insulation facing with tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and insulation facing.

H. Repair any tears or punctures in insulation facing immediately before concealment by other

Work. Cover with tape.


contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect installation of batt insulation, locations, type, properties, and attachment to

building structure. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.


A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to damage by

construction activities and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after insulation.

3.5 INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Furnish and install insulation at locations indicated on Drawings and as follows:

B. Interior Metal Stud Walls: 1. Concealed Installation: Full thickness of wall framing, unfaced, friction fit.

C. Exterior 3-5/8 Inch Metal Stud Walls:

1. Concealed Installation: R11


END OF SECTION


BATT INSULATION INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

BATT INSULATION INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________



specific product being installed. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published instructions with Project Field

Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer has sealed joints in insulation facing and has inspected, repaired and sealed any and all

tears or punctures as per manufacturer's published instructions. 4. Installer installed batt insulation in conformance with batt insulation manufacturer's published

installation instructions.



07 2216 - 1 MSTR 1212 ROOF BOARD INSULATION

SECTION 07 2216

ROOF BOARD INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufacturer 2. Materials


1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 00 7213 - General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.


1. Section 05 3100 - Steel Deck: Steel Deck roof structures. 2. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood roof sheathing. 3. Section 07 6113 – Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 2 ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 3. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate

Insulation Board. 4. ASTM C 1303 / C1303M - Standard Test Method for Predicting Long-Term Thermal

Resistance of Closed-Cell Foam Insulation 5. ASTM D 1621 -Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular

Plastics 7. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings 8. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials

B. LTTR – Long Term Thermal Resistance predicted by CAN/ULC-S770-03.

C. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM): 1. FM - Standard 4450, Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated (UL):

1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 457 – Roof Deck Construction 3. UL 1256 – Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) is defined as using techniques from ASTM C1303

or CAN/ULC-S770, the predicted R-Value that has been shown to be equivalent to the average performance of a permeably faced foam insulation product over 15 years. 1. LTTR applies to foam insulation products with blowing agents other than air, such as

polyiso, extruded polystyrene and polyurethane. The new method is based on consensus standards in the US and Canada.

http://www.astm.org/Standards/D1621.htm


http://www.astm.org/Standards/E119.htm



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data:

a. Provide data identifying insulation material, panel size, and fasteners. Product Data shall indicate coordination of material with related sections.

b. Insulation fastener layouts. Indicate number of insulation fasteners required and spacing of fasteners for field, perimeter, and corners for each pattern.

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting plan for insulation including fastener pattern, layout of roofing seams, and directions of laps. a. Submit installation details specific for project including coordination with

Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing. 3. Samples: Submit three (3), 4” x 6” insulation samples and three (3) fasteners of each

length required. B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Manufacturer Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with

minimum five (5) years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum

five (5) years documented experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products. B. Deliver insulation materials in original unopened packaging with material name, thermal

value and product code. C. Store insulation materials in dry area and protect from water and direct sunlight. Damaged

insulation materials shall not be used and shall be replaced. D. When stored outdoors, stack insulation on pallets above ground or roof deck and cover with

tarpaulin or other suitable waterproof coverings. Slit or remove manufacturer´s packaging before covering with waterproof covering.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Roof deck shall be free of ponded water, ice or snow. 2. Do not expose insulation to surfaces such as vent stacks, pipes or other rooftop

appurtenances whose constant temperature is in excess of 165°F. a. If temperature cycling conditions are anticipated near the maximum

recommended temperature use, consult manufacturer’s representative for recommendations regarding system components.

3. When insulation is exposed to sunlight for prolonged periods due to job site delays, protect the insulation with a light colored opaque covering. Provisions should be made


to prevent wind loss of insulation materials at the job site when partially open units of insulation are on hand.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. B. Warranty: A thermal performance warranty shall be issued upon completion of the Work.

Insulation shall be warranted to retain a minimum of 90% of its published R-value for 20 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Roof Board Insulation is based on the product named. 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com

a. AC Foam – I I: Closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core integrally laminated to heavy non- asphaltic fiber-reinforced felt facers

b. Each insulation package shall be labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, ASTM material specification reference, and identification of the third party inspection agency used for building code qualification.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed: www.certainteed.com 2. Firestone Building Products: www.firestonebpco.com 3. R-Max: www.rmaxinc.com

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Closed-cell HCFC free polyisocyanurate foam core integrally laminated to heavy non-

asphaltic fiber-reinforced felt facers having a compressive strength of not less than 20 psi. 1. ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1 2. FM Standard 4450 Approval

B. Insulation Properities:

1. Insulation Thickness: 1.5 inches 2. LTTR - Insulation "R" Value: 6.0 3. Spanability: Minimum . 4.375 inch 4. Panel Size:

a. 4 foot x 8 foot

C. Insulation Fasteners and Stress Plates: Self tapping screws, minimum #8 x length necessary to pentrate insulation thickness into deck 3/4 inch.

D. Fastener head shall be designed to inhibit damage to metal roof. Minimum 3" diameter or

square insulation stress plates shall provide for countersunk fastener heads.

E. Cover Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick Wood Fiber Insulation Board, regular density complying with ASTM C208, Type II, Grade 1.

http://www.atlasroofing.com/


http://www.firestonebpco.com/

http://www.rmaxinc.com/


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.


conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Deck shall be constructed to drain completely free of water within 48 hours following

rainfall. 2. Dead load carrying capability of deck shall be sufficient to support code mandated live

loads and dead loads incident on the roof including the entire roof covering/insulation system.

3. Roof deck shall be prepared to provide adequate support for roof assembly.




3.2 PREPARATION A. Deteriorated roof decking shall be repaired or replaced. A thorough inspection shall be

required in the case of total tear off.

B. Steel Roof Decking: Install a thermal barrier between insulation and the steel deck in accordance with construction drawings. 1. Insulation may be installed directly over steel roof deck in accordance with the details

of UL Roof Deck Construction #457. Thermal barriers may be loose-laid or secured to the deck by mechanical fastening depending on design or code requirements.

C. Repair deck joints and cracks, and deck to wall junctions, and any other deck to penetration

gaps, which are greater than 1/4".

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Total roof insulation thickness shall be as indicated or scheduled on drawings. Total

thickness shall be achieved in the number of layers as shown. B. Insulation joints shall not exceed 1/4" in width. Joints wider than 1/4" shall be filled with the

same insulation. C. Insulation shall be field trimmed to fit tightly around roof protrusions and terminations. D. Apply only as much insulation as can be covered by roofing material on the same day. E. Apply roof insulation in parallel rows between metal roof clips with end joints staggered.

Install side and end joints closely but do not force together.


F. Mechancially Fastened Insulation: 1. Fastener/stress plate assemblies shall be driven to tightly secure the insulation board

and seat the plate but shall not be overdriven so that the insulation board is crushed beneath plate.

2. Fasteners which are improperly installed shall be removed or corrected. a. Improper installation may include overdriving such that the stress plate is

concave and cuts a significant depression in the insulation: under driving such that the fastener head Is not properly seated in the stress plate: broken or bent shanks: improper location: or insufficient length.

3. Fasteners shall be embedded in the deck per manufacturer's recommendations to insure adequate withdrawal resistance.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Install a vapor retarder in accordance with construction drawings. Place the vapor retarder

to insure adequate end and side joint laps.

3.5 CLEANING / PROTECTION A. Remove trash and construction debris from insulation surface prior to application of roofing

system. B. Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather. Cover and waterproof with completed

roof system immediately after installation. 1. Temporarily seal exposed insulation edges at the end of each day. 2. Remove and replace installed insulation that has become wet or damaged with new

insulation. C. Protect installed insulation and roof cover from traffic by use of protective covering materials

during and after installation.

END OF SECTION

07 3076 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0911 ICE AND WATER SHIELD UNDERLAYMENT

SECTION 07 3076

ICE AND WATER SHIELD UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufacturer 2. Materials




1. Section 05 3100 - Steel Deck: Steel roof deck. 2. Section 07 6113 - Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing: Standing seam metal

roofing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified

Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

2. ASTM E 96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 3. ASTM E 2178 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on membrane and physical properties.






D. Deliver Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each material to Project Field Superintendent for Contractor Records.


Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not


complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.




A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install underlayment when ambient, roof deck and membrane temperature is

lower than 40 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Ice and Water Shield Underlayment is based on the product named. 1. Tamko Building Products: www.tamko.com

a. TW Metal and Tile Underlayment. b. Primer: TWP-1 or TWP-2


Permitted.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Description: Flexible, fiberglass reinforced, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet membrane with a polymer film on surface and removable treated release film on the adhesive side.

B. ASTM D 1970; cold-applied, self-adhering membrane composed of high density, cross

laminated polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive and slip resistant surface on other side.

C. Physical Properties:

1. Membrane Thickness: 75 mils. 2. Adhesion to Plywood at 75°F ASTM D 1970 15 lbf/ft width 3. Moisture Vapor Permeability ASTM E 96 (BW) 0.05 perms 4. Air Permeance ASTM E 2178 <0.0001 CFM/ft2 5. Maximum Load ASTM D 1970 30 lbf/in. 6. Elongation Modified Bitumen Portion ASTM D 1970 40% 7. Low Temp. Flexibility ASTM D 1970 -20°F

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



http://www.tamko.com/


1. Inspect roof deck to verify flutes of deck are clean and dry. 2. Verify deck is dry and free of snow and ice. 3. Verify roof openings, pipes or vents through roof are solidly set.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Follow manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

1. Remove dust, dirt, loose nails and other protrusions from the deck of new roofs. 2. Apply underlayment only in fair weather and when air, substrate, and membrane

temperatures are above 40°F. 3. Where recommended by manufacturer for proper adhesion, prime surface with

recommended primer at the designated coverage rates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Underlayment shall be applied with the long dimension of roll running parallel to roof slope. Side laps shall be a minimum of 4" wide and formed so smooth film selvage along one side of the roll is covered by the adjacent roll of underlayment. Side and end laps shall be rolled with a roofing seam roller in addition to brooming the entire surface.

B. Apply underlayment from low to high point in shingle fashion so that laps will shed water.

Overlap edge seams minimum of 4 inches. End seams shall be overlapped 6" and staggered. Where necessary, membrane shall be unrolled and cut into 10 to 15-foot lengths. Align membrane on the lower edge of the roof. Remove release film from the membrane then press the membrane into place.

C. Roll lower edges firmly with a roofing seam roller; "Broom in" installed membrane using an

industrial flat broom or squeegee. Bear down on the installed membrane with broom or squeegee to make sure total, even adherence to the substrate. Care shall be taken not to damage the surface when brooming.

D. Where indicated, membrane shall be unrolled and cut into 4 to 6-foot lengths. Peel the

release film and center sheet over valley and ridge. Drape and press sheet into place, working from the center of the valley or ridge outward in each direction. 1. Valleys: Apply membrane starting at the lowest point and work upward. Overlap

sheets a minimum of 6 inches. Underlayment shall be used on "closed valley" applications only. Underlayment shall not be left permanently exposed to the weather.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect membrane installation, type, laps and attachment to roof deck substrate. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and




3.5 REPAIR

A. Patch Repair: Minor damaged areas of underlayment that are no larger than 4" by 4" in size

can be repaired by installing a patch of underlayment material extending a minimum of 12" beyond the damaged area on all sides. 1. End Lap Repair: Loose end laps no wider than 4" can be repaired by cutting and

removing loose material and applying a patch that extends 12" beyond the area on all sides.

B. Patch Repair or an End Lap Repair shall begin with removal of dust, dirt and other materials

that may interfere with adhesion from the area receiving the patch. Sweep area to receive the patch with a stiff nylon bristle broom, making sure all loose material is removed from the area to receive the patch.

C. Remove or cut non-adhered, torn, or otherwise damaged membrane as necessary, creating

a fully-adhered surface to receive the patch. Underlying substrate shall not be damaged while performing a repair.

D. In areas where available, prime the entire area receiving the patch with quick dry primer at

recommended application rate to enhance adhesion. Allow primer to cure prior to installation of patch. 1. Apply sufficient pressure using a broom or roofing seam roller to promote adhesion to

underlying material. 2. Seal the edges of the patch by applying a bead of compatible polyurethane sealant;

smooth the bead with a trowel.

END OF SECTION

07 6113 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0215 STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

SECTION 07 6113

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Standing seam metal roofing. 2. Standing seam metal fascia. 3. Metal soffit panels. 4. Gutters and downspouts. 5. Standing seam pre-finished roof curbs. 6. Snow retention system. 7. Roof vent and flue snow and ice protection. 8. Rigid roof board insulation.




1. Section 03 4816 - Precast Concrete Splash Blocks: Splash block at downspouts. 2. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel: Roof framing components. 3. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing: Roof joist framing components. 4. Section 07 2216 - Roof Board Insulation: Rigid roof deck insulation board. 5. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing and trim accessories. 6. Section 07 3076 - Ice and Water Shield Underlayment: Metal roofing underlayment. 7. Section 13 3421 – Pre-Engineered Metal Building – Standing seam roof

weathertightness and panel finish warranties.

1.2 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. AISC – Steel Construction Manual. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):

1. AISI – Cold Form Steel Design Manual.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 792 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-

Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.. 2. ASTM D 2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color

Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 3. ASTM D 2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color

Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates 3. ASTM D 4214 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of

Exterior Paint Films. 4. ASTM D 4821 - Standard Guide for Carbon Black—Validation of Test Method

Precision and Bias 5. ASTM E 408 – Standard Test Method for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using

Inspection-Meter Techniques. 6. ASTM E 903 – Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Using Integrating

Spheres.






7. ASTM E 1514 – Standard Specification for Structural Standing Seam Steel Roof Panel Systems.

8. ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

9. ASTM E 1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems.

10. ASTM E 1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

D. International Council of Building Officials (ICBO) Evaluation Service, INC.

1. ICBO – Evaluation Report #ER-5409 E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA):

1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 580 - Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

a. UL Class 90 Rating. 2. UL 2216 – Class 4 Impact Resistant Rating:


A. Thermal Movement: Completed metal roofing system shall be capable of withstanding expansion and contraction of components caused by changes in temperature without buckling, producing excess stress of structure, anchors or fasteners, or reducing performance ability.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Wind Uplift Resistance Classification For Roof Assembly shall be Class 90, as installed, as defined by UL 580. Certified statements from manufacturer without proper UL Classification will not be acceptable.

2. Allowable uniform uplift capacity determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 1592.

3. Completed metal roof system, including underlayment, shall have maximum static pressure air infiltration of 0.02 cfm/square foot with 6.24 psf air pressure differential when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680.

4. No measurable water penetration (dynamic pressure), other than condensation, when exposed to dynamic rain and at 6.24 PSF air pressure differential for not less than fifteen minutes duration, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1646.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data for roof, fascia and soffit panels, gutters and downspouts,

fasteners, finishes, underlayment and joint sealers. a. Snow Retention system.

2. Roster: Provide project specific roster of installation crew members indicating construction personnel that will be installing Work under this Section.

3. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, interface with gutters and downspouts, downspout protection boots and installation details. a. Indicate and dimension all mechanical, plumbing and electrical penetrations

thru metal roof system. Indicate flashing or sealing method for each penetration.


b. Indicate and dimension all roof curbs for roof top mounted mechanical equipment and for smoke vents (where applicable).

c. Any shop drawings not showing and dimensioning these roof curbs and penetrations will not be reviewed and will be returned to Contractor for revision and submittal.

d. Actual Warranty Certificate: Provide copies of the actual, not “sample,” warranty certificates that will be issued for this Project (except that they will not be executed) for Architect review.

e. Snow Retention system: Roof plan indicating location of System including assembly detailing of components.

4. Samples: a. Selection: Submit complete two (2) sets of manufacturer’s color samples for

Architect initial color selection. b. Verification: Submit three samples of pre-finished metal panels, 12 inch long x

actual panel width illustrating color and texture finish. 5. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of “Approved Installer” indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

b. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Upon request, submit copies of field inspection reports for each field inspection prepared by Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Inspector directly to Architect with copy to Contractor in accordance with Section 01 4500 – Quality Control.

c. Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer Approval of Roof Curbs and Roof Penetrations Certification: Submit notarized and executed documentation that Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing approves all roof curbs (where applicable) and roof penetrations as indicated and specified in Contract Documents. 1) Submit the Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer Approval

of Roof Curbs and Roof Penetrations Certification form located at end of this Section.

2) Submit executed certification form attached to Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Shop Drawings.

d. Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer Approval of Roof Curbs Certification: Mechanical Contractor shall submit Roof Curb Shop Drawings to Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer and receive Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer approval of roof curbs and obtain an executed Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer Approval of Roof Curbs Certification before Mechanical Contractor can submit Roof Curb Shop Drawings to Architect. The procedure for Mechanical Contractor obtaining Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer Approval is a follows: 1) At or just after the Pre-Construction Meeting, the Mechanical Contractor

and General Contractor shall contact the Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer to discuss roof curbs proposed to be installed, Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing requirements for roof curbs, roof curb installations and procedure for obtaining roof curb approval certification.

2) Mechanical Contractor obtains Roof Curb Shop Drawings from roof curb manufacturer and forwards required number of copies to Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer thru and coordinated with the General Contractor. Mechanical Contractor forwards the Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer Approval of Roof Curbs Certification form to Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer signature and notarization.


3) If Roof Curb Shop Drawings are acceptable to Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer applies approval stamp to shop drawings and attaches the Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Approval of Roof Curbs Certification form to Roof Curb Shop Drawings.

4) Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer keeps 1 copy for their records and forwards remaining copies back to Mechanical Contractor thru and coordinated by General Contractor.

5) Upon receipt of Approval of Roof Curb Shop Drawings from Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer, Mechanical Contractor submits Roof Curb Shop Drawings to General Contractor for submittal to Architect as part of the Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Submittal Package.


1. Manufacturer Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner’s name and registered with manufacturer. a. Finish Warranty. b. Weathertightness Warranty.



A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing metal roofing systems and

components with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum

five (5) years documented experience certified by metal roofing system manufacturer as an “Approved Installer.”

3. Prior to changing member(s) of installation crew, notification shall be provided Owner via Architect for the purpose of verifying qualifications of new crew member(s).

4. Roofing Project Foreman is the person certified by the manufacturer as having received specific training in the correct installation of selected Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing system. a. Project Foreman shall attend Mandatory Pre-Installation Meeting. b. Project Foreman shall be present during installation of Metal Roof system to

supervise installation of Metal Roofing thereby qualifying installation as a Single Source Warranty application.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain metal roofing system components, roof panels, fascia

panels, soffit panels, gutters, downspouts and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer. Gutters and downspouts shall be furnished, installed and warranted by sheet metal roofing system supplier as an integrated roofing, guttering and downspout system along with metal roofing system.

C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of sheet metal

roofing manufacturer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to instructions at all times during installation.

D. Pre-Installation Meeting:

1. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Procedures for pre-installation meetings.

2. Convene a pre-installation meeting one (1) week before starting Work of this Section. 3. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section including, but not

limited to, the following:


a. Owner b. Architect c. Contractor d. Project Superintendent e. Roofing Project Foreman f. Roof Manufacturer’s Representative

4. Attendance at Pre-Installation Meeting is mandatory for Certified Roofing Project Foreman. a. Lack of participation by Certified Roofing Project Foreman is subject to delays

or withholdings in payment. 5. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related Work. 6. Agenda:

a. Tour, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, curbs, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

b. Review structural loading limitations of deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness and for required mechanical fastening.

c. Review roofing system requirements (Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents).

d. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. e. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify

availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

f. Review requirements for Manufacturer's Roofing Quality Control Inspector inspections.

g. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing.

h. Review safety precautions relating to roofing installation.



B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.

D. Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they

will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage.

E. Exercise care in unloading, storing and erecting wall and roof panels to prevent bending,

warping, twisting and surface damage.

F. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

G. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project


H. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weather

tight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulation will


drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage.

I. Prolonged on-site storage (storage in excess of 90 days) of Sheet Metal Roofing panel

bundles is not acceptable.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements of each building, building conditions, roof structure, roof, roof conditions and roof openings by field measurements before fabrication. Indicate recorded measurements on shop drawings.

1.8 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Finish Warranty: Include coverage for exterior pre-finished surfaces to cover pre-finished color coat against chipping, cracking or crazing, blistering, peeling, chalking, or fading. 1. Color Change - ASTM D 2244: Color changes less than five (5) NBS Units (Using the

NBS unit of color notation as measured by MEECO Colormaster. 2. Chalking - ASTM D 4214: Chalking less than Number eight (8) Rating. 3. Exclusions not permitted: Certificate of Warranty issued at Contract Closeout shall

contain no exclusions. 4. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from the date of Substantial Completion.

C. Non-prorated Single-Source Manufacturer Weathertightness Warranty: Contractor shall

provide to Owner a Single-Source Warranty executed by roofing manufacturer of Standing Seam Roof System as outlined below: 1. Single Source Warranty shall require a certified installer (Project Foreman) on site at

all times. 2. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from the date of Substantial Completion 3. Warranty Inclusions: Roofing manufacturer warrants to Owner that roof panels,

flashing, and related items used to secure roof panels and flashing including roof jack and curb attachments to roof structure, roof penetrations including mechanical, plumbing and electrical penetrations, will not allow intrusion of water from exterior of roofing manufacturer's Roof System into building envelope when exposed to non-severe weather conditions. a. Exclusions Not Permitted: Certificate of Warranty issued at Contract Closeout

shall contain no exclusions. 4. Manufacturer's Field Service:

a. During installation, manufacturer shall provide two (2) on-site inspections of roof application by qualified technical representative of manufacturer.

b. Upon completion of installation, manufacturer shall provide final inspection by a technical representative of roofing manufacturer to confirm that roofing system has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

5. Roofing manufacturer shall have sole and exclusive obligation for warranty Work commencing on date of Substantial Completion and terminates upon 20th anniversary of Substantial Completion.

6. During period in which Roofing Manufacturer has warranty obligation; Roofing Manufacturer shall take appropriate actions necessary to cause non-performing portions of Roof System to perform proper functions.

7. Roofing Manufacturer's Liability under Single Source warranty is as follows for entire duration of warranty period:


a. No dollar limit of manufacturers Roof System as invoiced to roofing manufacturer's customer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roof as manufactured by one of the following: 1. AEP-Span: www.aepspan.com

a) Span-Lok 2. MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems: www.MBCI.com.

a) BattenLok HS Panel 3. McElroy Metal: www.mcelroymetal.com.

a) Maxima Standing Seam System 4. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum: www.pac-clad.com

a) TITE-LOC HS Roofing Panel System

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Pre-Finished Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Grade 50A, galvalume sheet steel coated with AZ55 aluminum/zinc alloy, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.

B. Underlayment: Specified in Section 07 3076 - Ice and Water Shield Underlayment. C. Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard.

D. Attachment Clip: Manufacturer standard type recommended for substrate.

1. Attachment Clip length shall be of sufficient length to support Metal Roof a minimum of 1/2 inch above Rigid Roof Insulation.

E. Fasteners: Manufacturer standard type, galvanized steel with washers where required.

F. Weatherseal Insert: Manufacturer’s standard vinyl weatherseal insert.

G. Bituminous Paint: Asphaltic type. H. Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane sealant approved by metal roof manufacturer

installed as specified in Section 07 9000 – Joint Sealers.

I. Rigid Roof Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2216 - Roof Board Underlayment.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Roof and Fascia Panels: Minimum 24 gage, 2 inch high x 3/4 inch wide ribs, spaced 16 inches on center. 1. MBCI BattenLok Standing Seam Roof/Fascia system. 2. One piece full length from ridge to eave. Panel joints not permitted. 3. Panels factory-formed in continuous lengths to maximum 40 feet 0 inches. 4. Panel Length: One piece, continuous full length panel from eave to ridge.

http://www.aepspan.com/

http://www.mbci.com/

http://www.mcelroymetal.com/

http://www.pac-clad.com/


a. Mid-panel lap joints not permitted. 5. Sidelaps: Two factory-formed interlocking ribs, with one weather sealed joint,

mechanically field-seamed in place to form a double-fold 360 degree seam. 6. Panel-to-Roof Purlin Structural Attachments: Panel clips, with movable tabs that

interlock with seamed roof panel ribs and provide panel movement in either direction from center of clip to compensate for thermal effects.

7. Eave and ridge detailing by roof panel manufacturer to compensate for anticipated thermal movement of panel.

B. Soffit Panels: Minimum 24 gage, interlocking panel profile, 1 inch deep x 12 inches wide

un-perforated, lapped edges. 1. One piece full length. Panel joints not permitted.

C. Soffit Vents: Manufacturer’s standard factory finished vented panels, size as indicated on

Drawings, spaced at 48 inches on center. Color to match soffit panel color.

D. Ridge Cap: One piece, continuous, factory shaped, minimum 24 gage, same material thickness and finish as roof panels.

E. Internal and External Corners: Same material thickness and finish as adjacent material,

profile brake formed to required angles.

F. Flashings, Closure Pieces, Fascia, Infills and Caps: Same material and finish as adjacent material, profile to suit system.

2.4 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Components: 1. Gutters: Manufacturer’s standard type, 24 gage galvanized sheet metal, with integral

4 inch flashing leg for installation under roof panels and gutter straps installed at every other panel.

2. Downspouts: Manufacturer’s “Square” type, 24 gage galvanized sheet metal. 3. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

a. Anchoring Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer. b. Gutter Supports: Brackets. c. Downspout Supports: Straps.

4. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard with soft neoprene washers. 5. Downspout Protection Boots. 6. Splash Blocks: Specified in Section 03 4816 - Pre-cast Concrete Splash Blocks.

B. Fabrication:

1. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated on Drawings. 2. Fabricate with required connection pieces. 3. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free

of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.

4. Hem exposed edges of metal. 5. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.

C. Downspout Protection Boot Finish: Shop painted as specified in Section 05 5000 - Metal

Fabrications.

2.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS


A. Roof Jacks/Boots: Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing manufacturer approved EPDM seal/flashing system designed to form watertight seal around all mechanical flues, plumbing pipes, electrical conduits, or any other similar roof penetration with base that provides seal on any roof panel configuration and roof pitch. Roof jack/boot shall accommodate pipe movement due to contraction and expansion.

B. Flashing: Sheet Metal Standing Seam Metal Roofing building manufacturer shall provide

sheet metal flashing at penetrations where roof jack/boots cannot be used, finish to match roof panels. Seal watertight.

C. 20 Year Weathertightness Warranty: Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing manufacturer

shall include coverage for all roof penetrations.

D. Installation: Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Installer shall install all roof jacks/boots and flashing at all roof penetrations on pre-engineered metal building roof system.

2.6 SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Snow Retention System is based on the product named. 1. LM Curbs. www.lmcurbs.com; Product: S-5! ColorGard.

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Alpine SnowGuards www.alpinesnowguards.com 2. Sno-Gem, Inc. www.888snogems.com; Sno-Barricade.

D. Description: Manufacture Snow Retention System with Clamping Devices attached to roof

panel seams. Install continuous Cross Member at entire perimeter of roof eave within 8 to 12 inches from roof panel eave edge. 1. Attachment to Roof: Non-corrosive standing seam roof clamps as required for roof

seam profile. 2. Clamping Devices: Device designed to clamp to roof panel seams using not less than

two (2) non-corrosive set screws or bolts. 3. Location: Devices shall be located at each roof seam or maximum every other seam

as necessary not to exceed maximum spacing of 32 inches on center.

E. Cross Member: Cross members shall be designed in continuous manner spanning from clamping devices to clamping devices. Clamping Devices shall be designed to receive Cross Member by securing member within device. Cross Member “splice connectors” shall be provided as necessary to join adjacent sections. Cross members shall be secured to clamping devices using non-corrosive or button-punch fasteners. End Caps shall be provided for each Cross Member to prevent water penetration into Member. 1. Cross Member Color shall match roof color.

2.7 SNOW DIVERTER

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Snow Diverter is based on the product named. 1. LM Curbs. www.lmcurbs.com. (800-284-1412)

B. Product: Snow Diverter:

http://www.lmcurbs.com/

http://www.alpinesnowguards.com/



C. Description: Manufactured snow diverter system shall be fabricated from 0.125” aluminum

designed to span from roof panel seam to roof panel seam and secure to seam clamps attached to roof panel seams. Install diverter system within 8 to 12 inches above roof penetrations such as vents and stacks. 1. Attachment to Roof: Secure aluminum seam clamps S-5-U, S-5-T or S-5-Z on seam

of roof as required for roof seam profile. 2. Attach clamp to standing seams using a minimum of two stainless steel set screws

having rounded point. 3. Locate minimum of four (4) clamps, two (2) each side of penetration as necessary to

support diverter.

D. Description: Fabricate diverter to span between roof panel seams, by minimum 24 inches in length. Fabricate diverter in “V” shape, minimum 8 inches high. 1. Secure diverter with stainless steel bolts to seam clamps, minimum one (1) each

corner of diverter. 2. Diverter color shall match roof color.


Permitted.

2.8 ROOF CURBS

A. Manufacturer: LM Curbs. www.lmcurbs.com. 1. Or other roof curb manufacturer approved by standing seam sheet metal roofing

manufacturer.

B. Roof Curb Product Approval: Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer must approve, accept and incorporate roof curbs into the 20 year Weathertightness Warranty, with no exclusions.

C. Description: Manufactured standing seam pre-finished metal roof curbs specifically made

for installation on standing seam metal roofs of thickness required to support load of equipment, with fully mitered and welded corners, integral base plates and water diverter cricket at upslope side with factory installed 1-1/2 inch thick curb insulation.

D. Roof penetrations associated with roof curbs shall meet Standing Seam Sheet Metal

Roofing Manufacturer requirements for inclusion in the 20 year Weatherthghtness Warranty, with no exclusions.

E. Curb Height: 12 inches minimum above high side on metal roof panel. Construct curb to

match slope of roof and provide level top surface for mounting roof top equipment.

F. Flanges: Curb flange constructed to match configuration of roof panel. Extend side flange to next natural seam in roof panels and conform to seam configurations.

G. Curb Finish: Same finish as metal roof panels.

H. Coordination:

1. Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer and Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Installer shall verify and coordinate with Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Contractors for sizing, locations and installation of roof curbs in metal roof panels.



2. Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Installer shall verify and coordinate sizing and locations for installation of roof curbs in metal roof panels and metal building structure as indicated on Drawings.

I. Installation: Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Installer shall install roof curbs in metal

building roof as indicated on Drawings.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Roof, Fascia and Soffit Panels: Flurocarbon Coating utilizing 70 percent KYNAR 500 applied by manufacturer on continuous coil coating line with top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25. to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mils. 1. KYNAR 500 is a proprietary resin purchased under license form Atochem North

America. 2. Interior Side Fascia and Soffit Panels: Manufacuturer’s modified silicone finish. 3. Underside Roof Panels: Primed with dry film thickness of 0.25 mi.

B. Strippable film shall be applied to top side of finished coil to protect finish during fabrication,

shipping and field handling. Remove strippable film before installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or

projections, properly sloped to valleys and eaves. 2. Verify deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify joints in wood deck are solidly

supported and fastened. Verify flutes in steel deck are clean and dry. 3. Verify roof openings, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Safety Meeting: Contractor’s Safety Officer and Project Field Superintendent shall conduct a safety meeting with Standing Seam Sheet Metal Installer and installer’s personnel before start of metal roof panel installation to review the Installer’s proposed installation methods and procedures, and their compliance with the Contractor’s Site Safety Plan.

3.3 WEATHERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS


A. Contractor or Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Installer shall not install any items in standing seam sheet metal roofing system that would cause metal building manufacturer to make any exclusions to the 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.

B. All materials installed on or in standing seam sheet metal roof panels shall be type

approved by standing seam sheet metal roofing manufacturer. Installation of materials that are not approved by standing seam sheet metal roofing manufacturer not permitted.

C. Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Erector shall install the following items to ensure the

weathertightness of standing seam sheet metal roofing is maintained: 1. All roof penetrations and roof flashing. 2. Snow retention system. 3. Approved roof curbs.

3.4 INSTALLATION - ROOF INSULATION

A. Specified in Section 07 2216 - Roof Board Underlayment.

3.5 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT

A. Specified in Section 07 3076 - Ice and Water Shield Underlayment.

3.6 INSTALLATION - METAL ROOF SYSTEM

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Install panels with horizontal lines true and level; vertical lines plumb.

C. Install starter and edge trim before installing roof panels.

D. Remove protective strippable film before installation of roof panels.

E. Attach panels using manufacturer’s standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. 1. Coordinate installation of panel clips with rigid roof insulation panels. 2. Space clips horizontally on roof deck surface allowing insulation panels to be set and

secured between panel clips. 3. Panel clips shall sufficient length to support Metal Roof a minimum of 1/2 inch above

rigid roof insulation.

F. Use plastic cement for joints between metal and bitumen and for joints between metal and felts.

G. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. Lap joints 6 inches in direction of

drainage.

H. Extend valley sheet minimum 6 inches under roofing sheets.

I. At valley, double fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with manufacturer’s standard fasteners.

3.7 INSTALLATION - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS


A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.

B. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published

instructions. Securely attach to building structure.

C. Slope gutters for positive drainage to downspouts. Seal joints with sealant to create a water tight condition as specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

D. Provide downspouts at locations indicated on Drawings. E. Connect downspouts to downspout protection boots. Seal connection water tight as

specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

F. Seal joints between gutters and roof panels water tight as specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

G. Set splash blocks on ground under downspout protection boots. Direct water away from

building.

3.8 INSTALLATION - PENETRATIONS AND SEALS

A. Seal wall and roof flashings, trim and accessories watertight and weather tight with sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Seal penetrations of roof panels by pipe and conduit water tight with manufacturer’s

standard flashing collars and boots.

3.9 INSTALLATION - SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM and SNOW DIVERTER

A. Installation: Snow Retention and Diverter System shall only be installed by an installer approved by Metal Roofing System Manufacturer.

B. Location: Provide Snow Retention System, continuous at roof eaves.

C. Install Diverter System at each roof penetration item that is not equipped with roof curb:

plumbing vents, flues, and electrical conduit.

D. Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and approved shop Drawings.

3.10 INSTALLATION - ROOF CURBS

A. Install roof curbs in accordance with roof curb manufacturer’s published instructions and Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Installer and Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing

Manufacturer shall verify and coordinate with Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Contractors before ordering roof curbs and before installation of curbs to verify correct size, height, location and required support structure.

C. Provide mounting devices for type of standing seam roof panels being installed as

recommended by Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing Manufacturer.


D. Install curbs compatible with thermal expansion and contraction properties of roof panels curb is installed in.

E. Install back-up panels and roof curb with attached under roof panel over sealant tape.

F. Securely fasten panels and seal each fastener watertight.

G. Install cap strips over roof panel standing seams.

3.11 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Meet and coordinate with Mechanical Roof Equipment Contractor for location, type,

size and configuration of roof curb required for installation and attachment of each roof mounted mechanical equipment item.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect roofing system roof panel, fascia and soffit type, configuration, finish, color,

flashing and attachment to roof attachment substrate. 2. Inspect roof penetrations, penetration roof jacks and seals, joints and joint sealant

installation. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Manufacturer’s Field Services. Perform the following.

1. Provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of standing seam sheet metal roofing system.

2. Inspect installation and certify that standing seam sheet metal roofing system has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, all roof panel joints are watertight and all penetrations of standing seam sheet metal roof system are watertight. a. Perform Preparatory, Initial and Follow-Up Inspections. b. Perform Final Inspection including manufacturer’s Weathertightness Warranty

Inspection. 1) Inspect all roof penetration seals, flashings, jacks/boots, etc 2) Inspect all roof curbs. 3) Inspect any other item installed on standing seam sheet metal roofing

system. c. Prepare and submit inspection reports for each inspection made to Architect.


Documents.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces promptly after completion of installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Immediately remove filings produced by drilling or cutting.


B. Touch-up minor abrasions, scratches and exposed fasteners using paint furnished by roofing panel manufacturer and matching exposed panel surface finish.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of roofing panels, fascia panels, soffit panels and accessories just

before Substantial Completion inspection.

END OF SECTION


STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________


UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION INSTALLER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Installer obtained a current copy of the metal roofing and modified bituminous underlayment

manufacturer's published installation instructions for the specific product being installed. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions with Project Field

Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer applied specified underlayment in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Installer has sealed and flashed around all penetrations of roof panel system including roof curbs,

mechanical, plumbing and electrical items as required for a complete 20 year Weathertightness Warranty for standing seam sheet metal roofing system.

5. Installer furnished and installed specified sheet metal roofing in accordance with Contract Documents.

6. Erector certifies that Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing manufacturer’s approved pre-finished insulated roof curbs were furnished and installed and that curbs meet requirements for manufacturer’s 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.




STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING MANUFACTURER APPROVAL OF ROOF CURBS AND

ROOF PENETRATIONS CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING MANUFACTURER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________


STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING MANUFACTURER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Manufacturer has reviewed each roof penetration indicated and specified in Contract Documents

and certifies that each roof penetration indicated and specified in Contract Documents are standing seam sheet metal roofing manufacturer Approved Roof Penetrations.

2. Manufacturer has reviewed roof curbs indicated and specified in Contract Documents and certifies that the roof curbs indicated and specified in Contract Documents are pre-engineered metal building manufacturer Approved Roof Curbs.

3. Roof penetrations indicated and specified in Contract Documents meet standing seam sheet metal roofing manufacturer requirements for a 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.

4. Roof curbs indicated and specified in Contract Documents meet standing seam sheet metal roofing manufacturer requirements for a 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.




STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING MANUFACTURER

APPROVAL OF ROOF CURBS

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________ Telephone Number: ________________________________________

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING MANUFACTURER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________ Telephone Number: ________________________________________

STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING MANUFACTURER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Manufacturer has received Roof Curb Shop Drawings from Mechanical Contractor. 2. Manufacturer has reviewed roof curbs indicated and detailed on Roof Curb Shop Drawings and

certifies that the roof curbs indicated and detailed on Roof Curb Shop Drawings are standing seam sheet metal roofing manufacturer Approved Roof Curbs.

3. Roof curbs indicated and detailed on Roof Curb Shop Drawings meet standing seam sheet metal roofing requirements for a 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.



07 6200 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0811 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

SECTION 07 6200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pre-finished flashings, counterflashings and fabricated sheet metal items. 2. Reglets and accessories.




1. Section 07 7106 - Gutters and Downspouts: Sheet metal gutters and downspouts. 2. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at flashing joints.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.


1. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

3. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA): 1. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.

2. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer’s complete set of finish color samples for Architect initial color selection.

3. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Roof Edge System and/or Parapet Caps/Coping Certification: Provide

certification that system has been tested and meets performance criteria according to SPRI ES-1.


1. Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner’s name and regisered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.



A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements

and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with minimum five (5) years of documented experience.



B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope

metal sheets to ensure drainage.

C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.

1.6 WARRANTY


B. Flashing and Coping Systems: Material and labor warranty covering all defects in materials and workmanship, combined as part of roofing membrane warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years.

C. Pre-Finished Coating: Warranty covering pre-finished color coat against chipping, cracking

or crazing, blisering, peeling, chalking, or fading. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Sheet: ASTM A 653, with G90/Z275 zinc coating, minimum 24

gage, shop pre-coated with fluoropolymer system utilizing 70 percent Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin. 1. Color: Selected by Architect.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing with soft neoprene washers.

B. Primer: Zinc molybdate type.

C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.

D. Sealant: One part, non-skinning butyl specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I.

2.3 FABRICATION


A. Form sections to profiles and size as indicated on Drawings, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form

drip.

G. Seal metal joints watertight.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly

set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. 2. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film

thickness of 15 mil.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where

permitted.

B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.


D. Seal metal joints watertight.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representataive shall perform

contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect sheet metal flashing installation, material, shapes, finish, joints and

attachment to substrate, finish and color. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

07 9000 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0514 JOINT SEALERS

SECTION 07 9000

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sealants and joint backing. 2. Joint sealant schedule located at end of Section.




1. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Sealant bed at door thresholds. 2. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustical sealant at partitons. 3. Section 13 3421 - Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings: Exterior roof and wall joints.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. 2. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 3. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride

Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam). 6. ASTM D 2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric

Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations and color availability for each type of sealant.

2. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualification Documentation: Upon request, submit documentation of

experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. 1. Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner’s name and



A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five (5) years experience.



A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.



B. Deliver material in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or packages with the manufacturer’s name, product identification, lot number and installation instructions.






F. Store materials in original, unopened containers or packages under conditions

recommended by manufacturer.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide one (1) year manufacturer warranty for installed joint sealants and accessories which fail to achieve watertight seal and exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Silicone Sealants as

manufactured by one of the following: 1. Bostik: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Dow Corning Corp.: www.dowcorning.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc.: www.chemrex.com. 5. Tremco, Inc.: www.tremcosealants.com. 6. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted. B. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Polyurethane Sealants as

manufactured by one of the following: 1. Bostik: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc.: www.chemrex.com.

http://www.bostik-us.com/

http://www.dowcorning.com/

http://www.pecora.com/

http://www.chemrex.com/

http://www.tremcosealants.com/





4. Tremco, Inc.: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted. C. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Acrylic Sealants as manufactured

by one of the following: 1. Tremco, Inc.: www.tremcosealants.com. 2. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted. D. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Butyl Sealants as manufactured

by one of the following: 1. Bostik: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. Tremco, Inc.: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted. E. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants

as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Bostik: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc.: www.chemrex.com. 4. Tremco, Inc.: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 SEALANTS

A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 50,

Uses T, M, A, O, and I (Class 2); single component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

B. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: ASTM D 2628, hollow neoprene (polychloroprene)

compression gasket. 1. Black color. 2. Size and Shape: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, non-skinning,

noncuring.

D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

E. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component,

mildew resistant.

F. Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning.

G. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25,

Uses T, M and A; single component. 1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches. 2. Standard Colors matching finished surfaces.











H. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T,

M and A; single component. 1. Color: Gray.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;

oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 2. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.


C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.

D. Perform food preparation area installation in accordance with NSF requirements in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof sanitary joints.

E. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck

dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.

F. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

H. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer

when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

I. Tool joints concave.

J. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

K. Install joint sealant at EIFS in conformance with requirements of EIFS manufacturer.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect each joint, joint preparation, sealant type, installation and adhesion of joint

sealer and backing. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect sealants until cured.

3.7 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Use for the following joints. 1. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. 2. Joints between concrete and other materials. 3. Joints between metal frames and other materials. 4. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

B. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Use for the following joints.


1. Exterior wall expansion joints.

C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Use for the following joints. 1. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.

D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Use for the following joints.

1. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. 2. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. 3. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. 4. Joint between floor and metal door jamb.

E. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: Use for the following joints.

1. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. 2. Joints between lavatory countertops and wall surfaces.

F. Acoustical Sealant: Use for the following joints in concealed locations only:

1. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor.

G. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Use for the following joints:

1. Expansion joints in floors.

H. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Use for the following joints. 1. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.

END OF SECTION

08 1213 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1014 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

SECTION 08 1213

HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-fire rated steel door frames. 2. Non-fire rated steel window frames.




1. Section 08 1313 - Hollow Metal Doors: Steel doors installed in metal frames. 2. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Wood doors installed in metal frames. 3. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Door hardware groups. 4. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing in metal frames. 5. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing.

2. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

3. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.


1. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM A 1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):

1. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware.

D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, UL labeling, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods and finishes.

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, anchor types and spacing, locations of cut-outs for hardware and finish.


experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. b. Manufacturer Instructions (For Information): Submit manufacturer's published

instructions for installation of hollow metal frames and hardware preparation attached to Product Data.




A. Conform to the requirements of ANSI A250.8 and SDI-100 requirements.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section

with minimum five years documented experience.

C. Manufacturer Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of door frame manufacturer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to instructions at all times during installation.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return


C. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

D. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

E. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.

F. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.


A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, doors and door hardware installation.

1.7 WARRANTY



B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide One (1) year manufacturer warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Hollow Metal Frames as

manufactured by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door Products: www.cecodoor.com. 2. Curries Company: www.curries.com. 3. Republic Builders Products: www.republicdoor.com. 4. Rocky Mountain Metals: www.rockymountainmetals.com. 5. Security Metal Products Corporation: www.secmet.com. 6. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company: www.steelcraft.com.

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions: Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 FRAMES

A. Exterior Frames: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 3

doors; 16 gage, ASTM A 653 A60 galvanized, ready for field painting.

B. Interior Frames: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 2 doors; 16 gage, ASTM A 1008 cold rolled steel, primed ready for field painting.

C. Existing Masonry Opening:

1. Exterior Frames: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 3 doors; 16 gage, ASTM A 653 A60 galvanized, ready for field painting.

2. Interior Frames: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 2 doors; 16 gage, ASTM A 1008 cold rolled steel, primed ready for field painting.

D. Frame Opening Size: As indicated on Door Schedule. Field measure and verify

dimensions of door frame openings.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on Drawings; mitered corners;

prepared for countersunk style screws.

B. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.

C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory or shop-assembled frames.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap for mortise hardware only in

accordance with DHI A115 Series, final approved Hardware Schedule and templates provided by Hardware Supplier. 1. Surface Mounted Hardware: Reinforce, drill and tap in field. 2. Reinforcement Minimum Thickness:

a. Full Mortise Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 inch (7 gage).

http://www.cecodoor.com/

http://www.curries.com/

http://www.republicdoor.com/

http://www.rockymountainmetals.com/

http://www.secmet.com/

http://www.steelcraft.com/


b. Lock Fronts, Concealed Holders, Surface Mounted Closers: 0.093 inch (12 gage).

c. Internal Reinforcing for Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 0.093 inch (12 gage).

E. Silencers: Specified in Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

F. Smoke Seals: Specified in Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware, unless provided by door

manufacturer as part of tested Positive Pressure assembly.

G. Weatherstripping: Specified in Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames as Full Profile Welded units in accordance with referenced Standards. 1. Face Welded or Knockdown frames not permitted.

B. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place.

C. Anchors: Provide frames with minimum of six (6) wall anchors and two (2) adjustable base

anchors; manufacturer’s standard design. 1. Provide additional anchors for every 30 inches of frame height over 90 inches.

D. Provide 26 gage dust/mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to prevent dust,

mortar, grout or other materials that could interfere with hardware operation.

E. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with head member.

H. Mullions for Windows, Sidelights and Transom Bars: Fixed type, of same profiles and jamb and head.

I. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head

flush with top.

J. Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors.

2.5 FINISH

A. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy coated (galvannealed) in

accordance with ASTM A 653, with manufacturers standard coating thickness.

B. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating applied in field where anti-freeze or other solvents are used in grout or mortar.

D. Field paint as specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating; color as selected by

Architect. More than one color may be selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify existing conditions and opening dimensions before starting work. 2. Verify that door opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare frames for hardware installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and

NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.

C. Coordinate installation of hardware.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect door frame installation, fit, type, size and attachment to wall construction. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

08 1313 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0913 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

SECTION 08 1313

HOLLOW METAL DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manufacturers 2. Steel Doors

a. Non-fire rated steel doors. 3. Vision Frame and Glazing

a. Non-fire rated vision frame and glass assembly. 4. Louvers 5. Finish




1. Section 08 1213 – Hollow Metal Frames: Frames for doors. 2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Door hardware groups. 3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors. 4. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing.

2. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

3. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.


1. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):

1. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware.

D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, UL labeling, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, glass lights and frames, and finishes.

2. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glass lights and frame openings.




A. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8 and SDI 100 requirements.


in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

C. Manufacturer Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of door manufacturer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to instructions at all times during installation.



B. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return


C. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

D. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

E. Accept doors on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage.

F. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.


A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frames and door hardware installation.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide one (1) year manufacturer warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Hollow Metal Doors as

manufactured by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Incorporated: www.amweldinternational.com. 2. Ceco Door Products: www.cecodoor.com. 3. Curries Company: www.curries.com. 4. Republic Builders Products: www.republicdoor.com. 5. Rocky Mountain Metals: www.rockymountainmetals.com. 6. Security Metal Products Corporation: www.secmet.com. 7. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company: www.steelcraft.com.

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions: Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 STEEL DOORS

A. Grade: ANSI A250.8, Model 1, full flush, ready for field painting.

1. Exterior Doors: Level 3, extra heavy-duty, physical performance Level A, 16 gage, galvanized.

B. Door Core:

1. Exterior Doors: Steel-stiffened core, 0.026 inch (22 gage) steel vertical stiffeners extending full-door height, spaced maximum 6 inches on center. Fill spaces between stiffeners with foam plastic insulation of minimum 0.6 pounds per cubic foot density or sound deadener applied to inside surfaces of face sheets. a. Performance: ANSI A250.4; physical performance Level A. b. Thermal: Minimum total R-Value 11.35, U-Value 0.088.

C. Door Opening Size: As indicated on Door Schedule. Field measure and verify dimensions

of doorframe openings.

D. Door Top Closures: Minimum 16 gage channel extending full width of door, welded to both faces. Place channels so web of channel is flush with fop of faces and edges. 1. Plastic top caps not permitted.

E. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.

F. Door Texture: Smooth faces.

G. Hardware Preparation: Factory mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for mortise hardware only in

accordance with DHI A115 series, final approved Hardware Schedule and templates provided by Hardware Supplier. 1. Surface Mounted Hardware: Reinforce, drill and tap in field. 2. Reinforcement Minimum Thickness:

a. Full Mortise Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 inch (7 gage). b. Lock Fronts, Concealed Holders, Surface Mounted Closers: 0.093 inch (12

gage). c. Internal Reinforcing for Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 0.093 inch (12

gage).

2.3 VISION FRAME AND GLAZING

http://www.amweldinternational.com/

http://www.cecodoor.com/

http://www.curries.com/

http://www.republicdoor.com/

http://www.rockymountainmetals.com/

http://www.secmet.com/

http://www.steelcraft.com/


A. Non-Fire Rated Doors: 18 gage cold rolled steel, mitered and welded corners with countersunk mounting holes and metal fasteners and clear insulated safety glass specified in Section 08 8800 - Glazing.

2.4 FINISH

A. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy coated (galvannealed) in

accordance with ASTM A 653, with manufacturer’s standard coating thickness.

B. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

C. Field paint as specified in Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating, color selected by Architect. More than one color may be selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: verification of existing conditions before starting work.


conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify existing conditions and door frame opening dimensions before starting work. 2. Verify that door opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for

size or alignment.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in metal door frames in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions

and requirements of specified door grade standard, ANSI A250.8, SDI-100 and NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION - VISION FRAME AND GLAZING

A. Install non-rated vision frame and glazing in accordance with door manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Finish: Factory prime finish frame. Field paint as specified in Section 09900, color to match

hollow metal door color, unless a specific color is selected by Architect.

3.5 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances:


1. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect door installation, fit and clearance. 2. Inspect door hardware installation and operation as specified in Section 08 7100 -

Door Hardware. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

C. Clean doors, frames and hardware immediately after installation.

D. Clean doors and frames and polish door hardware just before Substantial Completion

Inspection.

END OF SECTION

08 1416- 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0315 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 1416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufacturers 2. Door Types 3. Door Quality Standards and Cores 4. Door Facings 5. Fabrication 6. Finish




1. Section 08 1213 - Hollow Metal Frames: Steel door frames. 2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware; Door hardware groups. 4. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings: Field finishing.

1.2 REFERENCES Not Used

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Materials and details of design, door core materials and construction;

label ratings (where required), veneer species, type characteristics. 2. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, label ratings (where required),

elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special blocking for hardware and factory machining criteria.

3. Samples: a. For Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturer’s door stain color samples

for Architect initial color selection. b. For Verification: Submit three samples of door veneer, 12 inch x 12 inch in size

illustrating wood grain, finish and sheen. 4. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Certificates: Manufacturer’s certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1) Compliance with AWI Custom Grade requirements.

b. Qualification Documentation: Upon request, submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.






A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300, Custom Grade.


in this section with minimum five (5) years of documented experience.



B. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1300.

C. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.


E. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return


F. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

G. Protect doors with resilient packaging. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas

where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

H. Do not store doors in damp or wet areas.


A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

B. Environmental Requirements: Heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be

operational and balanced before delivery of doors. Maintain relative humidity at minimum 25 percent and maximum 55 percent.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: 1. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer warranty covering defects in materials and

workmanship for life of installation; include cost of rehanging and refinishing. 2. Include coverage of delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation

tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Flush Wood Doors as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 2. Marshfield Door Systems: www.marshfielddoors.com. 3. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company: www.oshkoshdoor.com. 4. VT Industries: www.vtindustries.com.


Permitted.

2.2 DOOR TYPES

A. Flush Interior Doors: Transparent Finish. 1. Solid core construction, non-fire rated and fire rated as indicated, thickness indicated

in Door Schedule.

B. Door Opening Size: As indicted on Door Schedule. Field measure and verify dimensions of door frame openings.

2.3 DOOR QUALITY STANDARDS AND CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated (AWQSI), Section 1300, Type SLC-5 Custom. 1. Vertical Edges: ME 2. Veneer, cross-banding, stave lumber core bonded to hardwood stiles and rails.

2.4 DOOR FACINGS

A. Veneer: 5-ply veneer, white maple species, veneer grade as specified by door quality standard, plain sliced, for stained transparent finish. 1. Veneer match: Slip matched 2. Veneer Assembly: Balance Matched

B. Cross Banding Behind Veneer: One ply mat-formed one-piece industry standard cross-

band. C. Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.

B. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 1. Provide solid blocking for other through bolted hardware.

C. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles - Veneer Faces: Hardwood.

D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

http://www.eggersindustries.com/

http://www.marshfielddoors.com/

http://www.oshkoshdoor.com/

http://www.vtindustries.com/


E. Bond edge banding to cores.

F. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance

with hardware requirements and dimensions.

G. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions indicated on Shop Drawings.

H. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1600.

2.6 FINISH

A. Factory finish doors in accordance with AWI AWQSI, Section 1500 to the following finish designations: 1. Transparent Finish: TR-6, Catalyzed Polyurethane, custom quality.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 2. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for

size or alignment.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Preparation for Hardware: 1. Mark location for each item of hardware. 2. Make clean properly sized and accurately placed mortise and surface mounted finish

hardware cuts and routs. Use appropriate jigs, templates and power mortising equipment for installation of mortise hardware.

3. Factory pre-machine labeled fire doors for applicable hardware. 4. Improperly mortised or machine cut doors shall be removed from site and replaced

with new doors.

3.3 INSTALLATION - DOORS

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWI P-200 requirements.

B. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.


C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

D. Coordinate installation of non-rated vision frame and glazing.

E. Trimming Positive Pressure doors for width not permitted.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Conform to AWI AWQS requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. 2. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut

string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. 3. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut

string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. 4. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut

string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect door installation, fit, clearance, veneer, finish and sheen. 2. Inspect door hardware installation and operation as specified in Section 08 7100 -

Door Hardware. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.


A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

C. Clean doors, frames and hardware immediately after installation.

D. Clean doors and frames and polish door hardware just before Substantial Completion Inspection.

END OF SECTION


WOOD DOOR INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION PROJECT: ____________________________________________________ LOCATION: ___________________________________________________ ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: ________________

OWNER: ______________________________________________________ CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________ WOOD DOOR INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________


UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION INSTALLER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Installer obtained a current copy of the AWI Section 1300, Section 1600 and applicable NFPA and UL installation instructions for the specific product being installed. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed AWI, applicable NFPA and UL installation instructions and requirements Project Field Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer furnished and installed AWI Custom Grade doors with specified veneer and finish. 4. Installer prepared each door for specified hardware scheduled to be installed. 5. Installer furnished and installed specified wood doors in accordance with Contract Documents. EXECUTED AND DELIVERED this _________________ day of ______________, 20___ . ________________________________________ (Company name) BY: ____________________________________ (Authorized signature) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ____________day of _____________, 20___. ________________________________________________ Notary Public _______________________________________________ Affix Seal My Commission expires:


08 4413 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0211 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL

SECTION 08 4413

GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum tube curtain wall system.




1. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Preparation and submittal of manufacturer field inspection reports.

2. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back up materials. 3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Curtain Wall system glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

B. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. 2. AAMA 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of

Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems. 3. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation

Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. 4. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products. 3. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate. 4. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded

Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 5. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 6. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage

Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

7. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Static Air Pressure Difference.



A. Design Requirements: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads

caused by positive and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with local building code requirements. 1. Basic Wind Speed (Three Second Gust), V3s: 90 miles per hour. 2. Exposure Category: C. 3. Wind Importance Factor: 1.25.


1. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: As specified. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any

direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and

deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall

area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283.

4. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 12 psf.

5. Thermal Transmittance (U Factor): Maximum 0.48 (low-e), when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503

6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. a. Frame: Minimum 73. b. Glass: Minimum 68 (low-e).

7. Seismic: System meets design displacement of 0.010 x story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 x design displacement.

8. Sound Transmission Loss: Minimum STC 34, based on 1 inch insulating glass (1/4 inch, 1/2 inch air space, 1/4 inch), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90.

9. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide component dimensions; describe components within

assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and internal drainage details. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and

tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details.

3. Samples for Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturer’s finish color samples of framing and hardware for Architect initial selection.


experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. b. Manufacturer's Instructions (For Information): Submit manufacturer's published

installation instructions for specific product specified attached to Product Data. c. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect

form Manufacturer's Quality Control Inspector, with copy to Contractor. 1) Initial inspection. 2) Final inspection.


B. Section 01 7800- Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.




A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with

minimum five (5) years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum

five (5) years documented experience.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide storefront system of one manufacturer from a single source.

C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of storefront

manufacturer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to installation instructions at all times during installation.



B. Handle products of this Section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.


D. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project


E. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature


F. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping or strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less

than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.


indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying Work.

1.8 WARRANTY



B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide manufacturer warranty for defects in material and

workmanship for complete system. 1. Correct defective Work within a two (2) year period after Date of Substantial

Completion. 2. Provide two (2) year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating

glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.

3. Provide two (2) year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall is based on the

product named. 1. Kawneer Company, Incorporated: www.kawneer.com.

B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a

comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Arch Aluminum and Glass Company, Incorporated: www.amarlite.com. 2. EFCO Coprporation: www.efcocorp.com. 3. United States Aluminum Corporation: www.usalum.com. 4. Oldcastle Building Envelope: www.oldcastlebe.com.

C. Section 016 200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions; Substitutions

Permitted.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221; 6063-T6 alloy temper.

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209.

C. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A 36; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 at 2.0 oz/sq ft.

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

E. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between

steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.

F. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members.

G. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick galvanized steel.

H. Perimeter Sealant: General purpose exterior joint sealant as specified in Section 07900.

http://www.kawneer.com/

http://www.amarlite.com/

http://www.efcocorp.com/

http://www.usalum.com/


I. Storefront Intersection and Joint Sealant: General purpose exterior sealant as specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

J. Glass: As specified in Section 08 8800 - Glazing; glass types and locations indicated on

Drawings.

K. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded EPDM rubber to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.

2.3 CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM

A. Aluminum-Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. System 1: Outside glazed pressure plate type where indicated on Drawings. 2. System 2: Outside glazed structural silicone glazed (SSG) type where indicated on 3. Finish: High performance organic coating.

B. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections with drainage holes and internal

weep drainage system. 1. Model: Series 1600 Wall System. 2. Cross Section: 2-1/2 inch x 7-1/2 inch nominal dimension. 3. Member Wall Thickness: Thickness required to provide structural strength to meet

Design and Performance Requirements. 4. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of

structural steel member. 5. Sill Receptor (Sill Flashing): Continuous extruded sill with metal end dams of same

material and dimension as sill receptor.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.

D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or

dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.

E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware.

G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.

H. Door corner construction of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and 1-1/8 inch long fillet welds inside and outside all four corners.

I. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.

1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges.

2.5 FINISHES


A. Comply with AA DAF-45 for aluminum finishes required.

B. Anodized Finish: AAMA611, AA-M12C22A44, Anodized Class II.

OR C. High Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured

fluoropolymer system, 50 percent Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin. 1. Color: Selected by Architect.

D. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. 2. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor barrier seal materials are ready

to receive work of this Section. 3. Verify openings are sized to receive curtain wall system and sill is level in accordance

with manufacturer acceptable tolerances.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install curtain wall system in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. Curtain Wall system installer and Project Field Superintendent shall review and discuss manufacturer’s published installation instructions and how they apply to Project conditions before start of installation.

B. Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action

contact points.

C. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

D. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building

structure.

E. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.

F. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.


G. Install sill flashings, sill receptor, end dams and other members in bed or sealant to provide weathertight construction.

H. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring

or migrating within curtain wall system to exterior.

I. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor barrier materials.

J. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 8800 - Glazing, using glazing method required to

achieve performance criteria.

L. Install intersection and joint sealant at framing member joints, intersections and covering sill receptor anchors at locations indicated in manufacturer’s published installation instructions.

M. Install additional flashing under sill receptor in bed of sealant where indicated on Drawings.

N. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation for Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 feet non-cumulative or 1/16

inches per 10 feet, whichever is less. 2. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Place: 1/32 inch. 3. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum

3/4 inc and minimum 1/4 inch.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect curtain wall system installation, flashing, attachment to building structure,

glass installation, sealant and finish. 2. Perform water hose test of curtain wall system in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Manufacturer’s Quality Control Inspector.

1. Perform initial and final inspections. 2. Prepare and submit inspection reports for each inspection made.


Documents.


A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.

B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners.


C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

D. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired.

E. Protect finished work from damage.

F. Clean curtain wall system immediately after installation and just before Substantial Completion Inspeciton.

END OF SECTION


GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

CURTAIN WALL INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________



specific product being installed. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions with Project Field

Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer furnished and installed specified curtain wall system in accordance with the Contract

Documents. 4. Installer has installed metal end dams in conjunction with the metal sub-sill as per manufacturer's

published instructions. 5. Installer installed curtain wall system in conformance with storefront manufacturer's published

installation instructions. 6. Installer inspected and tested curtain wall system as required by the Contract Documents.



08 5108 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0710 FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOWS

SECTION 08 5108

FIXED ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Extruded aluminum fixed windows, thermally broken. 2. Factory glazing.




1. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Building structure. 2. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Building structure. 3. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. 4. Section 13 3421 - Pre-Engineered Metal Building: Building structure.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors.

2. AAMA 902 - Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances. 3. AAMA 1503.1 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation

Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. 4. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test

Procedures for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions. 5. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.


1. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

2. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

3. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

4. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

5. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

6. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.



A. Design Requirements: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads

caused by positive and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with local building code requirements. 1. Basic Wind Speed (Three Second Gust), V3s: 90 miles per hour. 2. Exposure Category: C. 3. Wind Importance Factor: 1.25.


1. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.56 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283.

2. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 8.25 lbf/sq ft.

3. Deflection: Limit member deflection to L/175, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 330 with a test pressure difference of 40 psf, positive and negative pressure.

4. Structural: No glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or actuating mechanisms, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 330 with a test pressure difference of 82.5 psf, positive and negative.

5. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of 48 when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1.

6. Thermal Transmittance: U-Value of 0.60 BTU/hr/sf/F when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1.

7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurring within system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Provide component dimensions; performance data, information on glass and glazing; internal drainage details and accessories.

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations, framed opening tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage locations, sill flashing and installation requirements.

3. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer’s complete set of finish color samples for Architect initial color selection.


experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. 1. Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner’s name and



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of aluminum windows of

types required, with not fewer than five (5) years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.




B. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.




E. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do

not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Warrant Total Window System: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for satisfactory performance of total window

installation including windows, insulating glass, anchorage and setting system, sealing and flashing as it relates to air, water and structural adequacy.

2. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Single Hung Aluminum Windows is based on the

product named. 1. Peerless Products, Incorporated: www.peerlessproducts.com.


comparable product by one of the following manufacturers. 1. EFCO Corporation: www.efcocorp.com. 2. Manko Window Systems, Incorporated: www.mankowindows.com

C. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 WINDOWS

A. Model: Commercial Series 4000 Model 4160 Fixed Thermal.

1. Subfames: 4310 Receptor and 041-422 Subsill. 2. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 Rating: F-HC45.

B. Description: Tubular aluminum sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, thermally

broken, fixed vision glass, anchorage and attachment devices.

http://www.peerlessproducts.com/

http://www.efcocorp.com/


C. Fixed Type: Size and configuration as indicated on Drawings

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing: Insulated dual pane with edge seal. 3. Finish: Superior performance organic coating.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221/ASTM B 221M, 6063 alloy, T5 temper.

B. Frames: 3-1/4 inch deep section; thermally broken with interior portion of frame insulated

from exterior portion; flush glass stops of snap-on type.

C. Thermal Barrier: Rigid structural barrier material consisting of a two part, chemically curing high density polyurethane, mechanically and adhesively bonded to aluminum.

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

E. Glass and Glazing Materials: Safety Glass, clear; fully tempered.

1. Outer pane of 1/4 inch thick tinted safety glass; inner pane of 1/4 inch thick clear safety glass; total unit thickness of 1 inch. Tinted glazing properties as follows: a. Color: Submit samples for Architect initial selection. b. Visible Light Transmittance: 32 percent. c. Solar Energy-Direct:

1) Transmittance: 7 percent 2) Reflectance-Outdoors: ____ percent.

d. U Value: 1) Winter: 0.28. 2) Summer: 0.26.

e. Shading Coefficient: 0.27. 2. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1,

Quality q3 glazing select. 3. Comply with ANSI Z97.1. 4. Comply with ASTM E 773 and E 774.

F. Sealant Materials: Specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around

perimeter of assembly that will enable window installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.

D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.

E. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.

F. Factory glaze window units.

2.5 FINISHES


A. Comply with AA DAF-45 for all aluminum finishes required.

B. Superior Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 2605; multiple coats, thermally cured fluoropolymer system, 50 percent Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin. 1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Apply one (1) coat of bituminous coating to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact

with dissimilar materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 2. Verify that attachment framing has been installed in required locations. 3. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to

receive aluminum windows.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction

tolerances and other irregularities. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement and specified wind loads.

C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and

alignment with adjacent work.

D. Provide pre-finished aluminum sill flashing over exposed concrete slab with ends turned up under window sill frame and down over face of slab. Set in bed of sealant.

E. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with requirements specified in Section 07 9000 -

Joint Sealers.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances:

1. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 feet non-cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 feet, whichever is less.




contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect window installations, type, size, configuration, operation, finish, color and

perimeter sealing. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.


A. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.

B. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to

sealant and window manufacturer.

C. Wash and clean surfaces immediately after installation.

D. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean just before Substantial Completion inspection.

END OF SECTION

08 7100 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0215 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Hardware for hollow steel doors. 2. Hardware for wood doors. 4. Thresholds. 5. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.




1. Section 08 1313 - Hollow Metal Doors: Installation of hardware. 2. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Installation of hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. ADA; Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR

part 36.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings

and Facilities; International Code Council.

C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): 1. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel

Doors and Frames.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each item of hardware. Include information necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finishes.

2. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of Installer and Supplier

experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. 3. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below.

Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function finish of hardware and keying system. a. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated,

organize hardware schedule into "hardware groups" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:


1) Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. 2) Name and manufacturer of each item. 3) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4) Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings

both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 5) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in

schedule. 6) Mounting locations for hardware. 7) Door and frame sizes and materials. 8) Specified keying system.

b. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Requirements for closeout submittals.

1. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code.

2. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.


4. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner at Substantial Completion Inspection.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer specializing in the installation of architectural hardware with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Single Supplier: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.)

from a single hardware supplier, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with

warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware to similar projects for a period of not less than five years, and who employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements.



B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.



D. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not


complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.




A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or

fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. 2. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation. 3. Coordinate Owner’s keying requirements during the course of the Work.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide one (1) year manufacturer warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for each hardware item.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hinges: 1. McKinney: www.mckinneyhinge.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. 3. PBB, Incorporated: www.pbbinc.com. 4. Stanley Hardware: www.stanleyworks.com.

B. Continuous Hinges:

1. McKinney: www.mckinneyhinge.com. 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co.: www.pemko.com. 3. Stanley Hardware: www.stanleyworks.com.

C. Exit Devices:

1. Sargent: www.sargentlock.com. 2. Yale-Corbin U.S.: www.yalesecurity.com. 3. Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com. 4. Dorma: www.dorma-usa.com. 5. Securitech Group: www.securitech.com.

D. Lock Sets:

1. Sargent: www.sargentlock.com. 2. Schlage Lock Co: www.schlage.com. 3. Yale-Corbin U.S.: www.yalesecurity.com.

E. Closers: 1. Sargent: www.sargentlock.com. 2. LCN: www.lcnclosers.com. 3. Yale-Corbin U.S.: www.yalesecurity.com.

http://www.mckinneyhinge.com/

http://www.hagerhinge.com/

http://www.pbbinc.com/

http://www.stanleyworks.com/

http://www.mckinneyhinge.com/

http://www.pemko.com/

http://www.stanleyworks.com/

http://www.sargentlock.com/

http://www.yalesecurity.com/

http://www.vonduprin.com/

http://www.dorma-usa.com/

http://www.securitech.com/


http://www.schlage.com/



http://www.lcnclosers.com/



4. Dorma: www.dorma-usa.com.

F. Protection Plates, Door Stops, Push/Pulls: 1. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. 2. Rockwood Manufacturing Co.: www.rockwoodmfg.com. 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc.: www.trimcobbw.com. 4. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com

G. Gasketing, Thresholds, Weatherstripping:

1. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. 2. National Guard Products, Inc.: www.ngpinc.com. 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. www.pemko.com. 4. Zero International: www.zerointernational.com.

H. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS

A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal ADA Requirements. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1.

2.3 KEYING

A. Provide locks key as determined by Owner at the Keying Meeting specified in this Section.

B. Provide two keys per lockset.

C. Provide construction keying. Re-key to final keying system at Substantial Completion. Deliver keys to Owner at Substantial Completion Inspection. Coordinate construction keying with Owner’s Representative.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Hardware finishes indicated in Door Hardware Schedule at end of Project Manual.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as

indicated on shop drawings or instructed by the manufacturer.


http://www.dorma-usa.com/


http://www.rockwoodmfg.com/

http://www.trimcobbw.com/


http://www.ngpinc.com/

http://www.pemko.com/

http://www.zerointernational.com/


D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and applicable codes. 1. Closers: Unless otherwise scheduled or indicated, closers shall be installed on the

“room-side” of door scheduled for closers. 2. Closers shall be secured to door head rail using sex bolts. Wood or metal screws into

head rail only will not be accepted. B. Use only hardware templates supplied by hardware manufacturer for items provided.

1. Use supplied template for hardware item being installed. 2. Anchors: Do not substitute common anchors including screws and machine bolts for

manufacturer supplied hardware anchors. C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with applicable codes.

D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed

in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 1. For Steel Doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. For Wood Doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

E. Install exterior door sills in full bed of general purpose exterior polyurethane sealant.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect hardware installations and operations, types, functions and finishes. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation immediately after installation.

B. Adjust hardware and door closers to comply with handicapped requirements just before Substantial Completion inspection.


3.6 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.7 HARDWARE GROUPS

A. The following Hardware Groups apply to door openings as scheduled. Refer to Door Schedule located at end of Project Manual.

END OF SECTION

08 8800 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0414 GLAZING

SECTION 08 8800

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manufacturers 2. Glass Materials

3. Glazing Compounds 4. Glazing Accessories 5. Fabrication Of Glazing Units




1. Section 08 1213 – Hollow Metal Frames: Glazed sidelights and windows. 2. Section 08 1313 - Hollow Metal Doors: Door glazed vision panels. 3. Section 08 5108 - Fixed Aluminum Windows: Factory glazed windows.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 162 - Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products. 2. ASTM C 669 - Standard Specification for Glazing Compounds for Back Bending and

Face Glazing of Metal Sash. 3. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal

Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. 4. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 6. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind

FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 7. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass 8. ASTM C 1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolitic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings

on Flat Glass. 7. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating

Glass Units. 8. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed

Insulating Glass Units. 9. ASTM E 1300 – Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in

Buildings. 10. ASTM E 2188 - Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance.




11. ASTM E 2189 - Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in Insulated Glass Units.

12. ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.

C. Insulated Glass Manufacturer’s Alliance (IGMA):

1. IGMA (TB) - IGMA Technical Bulletins.

D. Glass Association of North America (GANA): 1. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual. 2. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thickness: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C

1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or

other specified gas. D. Sealed Insulating Glass Unit Surface Designations:

1. Surface 1 – Exterior surface of the outer glass lite. 2. Surface 2 – Interspace surface of the outer glass lite. 3. Surface 3 – Interspace surface of the inner glass lite. 4. Surface 4 – Interior surface of the inner glass lite.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide glass capable of withstanding thermal movement and wind impact loads (where applicable) as specified in following paragraph.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing

only. Confirm glass thickness by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thickness: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,

according to the following requirements: a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project

according to ASCE 7, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”: Section 6.5, “Method 2-Analytical Procedure,” based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

b. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. c. Important Factor: 1.25. d. Exposure Category: C.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from

ambient and surface temperatures changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.


D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer’s published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch (6.0 mm)

thick. 2. For insulating- glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for

overall unit and for each lite. 3. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program

for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/sq/ ft/ per h per degree F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size

limitations, and special handling and installation requirements for glass.

C. Samples for Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturers tinted glass color samples for Architect initial selection.

D. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in

preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that

manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. F. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products.

1. Tinted float glass. 2. Coated float glass. 3. Insulating glass.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

H. Assurance/Control Submittals:



A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual and IGMA

Technical Bulletins for glazing installation methods.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).


C. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one (1) source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass and insulating glass.

D. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in “Submittals”

Article from a qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.

F. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired

glass, ANSI Z97.1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Lites more than nine (9) square feet (sf) (0.84 sq. m) in area shall be Category II

materials. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified

below, for glazing lites more than nine (9) sf in area, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, and for lites nine (9) sf or less in area, providing glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials.



1. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. 2. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation

of glazing compounds.

B. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.8 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer’s Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer’s standard form, made out to the glass fabricator, in which the coated glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated glass units that deteriorate during normal use within the specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration of the coated glass is defined as peeling or cracking, or discoloration

that is not attributed to glass breakage, seal failure, improper installation, or cleaning and maintenance that is contrary to the manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer’s Warranty of Insulating Glass: Manufacturer’s standard form in which the

insulating glass unit manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate during normal use within the specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration of insulating-glass units is defined as an obstruction of vision by dust,

moisture, or a film on the interior surfaces of the glass caused by a failure of the hermetic seal that is not attributed to glass breakage, improper installation, or cleaning and maintenance that is contrary to the manufacturer’s written instructions.


2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Glazing is based on the product named. 1. PPG Industries, Inc., Glass Group Glass Business Discovery Center, 400 Guys Run Rd., Cheswick, PA 15024. Tel: (800) 377-5267. Fax: (800) 367-2986. Web: www.ppgglazing.com

B. Section 01 6200 – Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated.

B. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites glass

separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Section. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where

needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in this Section.

2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated or required.

3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit’s edge.

4. Sealing System: Comply with requirements in Section 07 9000 – Joint Sealers. a. Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants of polyisobutylene and silicone.

5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer’s standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements. a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. c. Corner Construction: Manufacturer’s standard corner construction.

G. Tinted Safety Glass: Tinted; fully tempered, light reducing.

1. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1, Quality q3 glazing select.

2. Comply with ANSI Z97.1. 3. Comply with ASTM E 773 and E 774. 4. Color: Match PPG SolarGray.

a. Visible Light Transmittance: 40 percent. b. Winter Nighttime U Value: 0.47. c. Shading Coefficient: 0.53.

5. Color: Match PPG Solarbronze. a. Visible Light Transmittance: 47 percent. b. Winter Nightime U Value: 0.47.


c. Shading Coefficient: 0.59.

2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Modified Oil: ASTM C 669, non-hardening, knife grade consistency.

B. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, single component; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining;

2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C 864 Option I, neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness,

length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: ASTM C 864 Option I, neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness,

minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to

15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.

D. Glazing Splines: ASTM C 864, Option 1, resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot.

2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. 2. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions

that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)

A. Cut glazing spline to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with silicone sealant.

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain

full contact.

D. Install removable stop without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact.

E. Trim protruding tape edge.

3.4 INSTALLATION - WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)

A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line.

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or

unit.

D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.

E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.

F. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to

uniform and level line.

G. Knife trim protruding tape.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect glass installations, types, thickness and glazing methods. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and




3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

B. Remove labels after Substantial Completion inspection.

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces immediately after installation.

D. Clean glass just before Substantial Completion inspection.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not

mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

3.8 GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Door Elevations and Window Elevations on Drawings for types and locations of glazing used for each window and door type.

B. Glazing for Exterior Steel Frame Windows: Tinted/clear insulated safety glass units; double

pane with edge seal. 1. Comply with ASTM E 773 and E 774. 2. Outer pane of 3/16 inch thick tinted safety glass; inner pane of 3/16 inch thick clear

safety glass; total unit thickness of 5/8 inch. 3. Wet/Dry glazing method.

END OF SECTION

09 2116 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0315 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 2116

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load bearing metal stud partition wall framing, 20 gage and lighter. 2. Gypsum wallboard. 3. Finishes and accessories.




1. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Load bearing wall framing. 2. Section 07 2116 - Blanket Insulation: Insulation installed at partition framing. 4. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant where gypsum board abuts adjacent

materials. 5. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings: Application of paint finish.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for

Finishing Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 3. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to

Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 4. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 5. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 6. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel

Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases.

7. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases.

8. ASTM C 1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.

B. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association. 2. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association. 3. GA-220 - Gypsum Board Winter Related Installation Recommendations. 4. GA-221 - Repair of Gypsum Board Joint Ridging. 5. GA-222 - Repairing Screw or Nail Pops in Gypsum Board Surfaces. 6. GA-238 - Guidelines for Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum Board.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to GA-216 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


a. Framing: Submit data for materials and finish, product criteria, sizes and lengths, load charts and limitations.

b. Fasteners and Anchorage Devices: Submit data for materials and finish, sizes and load charts.

c. Gypsum Board: Submit data for each type of gypsum board, joint, finish and texture material.


experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. b. System Approvals: Submit an ICC National Evaluation Report indicating

approval of metal framing and gypsum board.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. 1. Crack Warranty: Submit written warranty on Contractor letterhead as specified in this

Section.


A. Perform in accordance with GA-214, GA-216 and GA-238.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

C. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer.

2. Gypsum Board: Obtain each type of gypsum board form a single manufacturer. 3. Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from manufacturer that supplies

gypsum board.



B. Deliver, identify, handle and store gypsum board in accordance with GA-216.

C. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers showing manufacturer’s name and product brand name.



E. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products. Immediately remove plastic shipping covers upon receipt at Project Site.

F. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project



G. Store materials inside, keep dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight exposure and

condensation. Neatly stack gypsum panels on level platform to prevent sagging or damage to ends, edges, and faces of gypsum panels. Protect metal framing and accessories from bending.

H. Store adhesives at application temperature for minimum 24 hours before application.


A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Establish and maintain application and finishing environment in accordance with

ASTM C 840 and GA-216. a. Room Temperature: Maintain minimum 40 degrees F for 48 hours before

application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 degrees F when using temporary heat sources.

b. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.

2. Install gypsum board during cold, damp weather conditions in accordance with GA-220.

1.9 WARRANTY


B. Contractor Crack Warranty: Provide one (1) year crack warranty covering repair of any cracks that occur in gypsum board surfaces. Repair cracks by providing a gypsum board control joint and finishing wall to match existing or as directed by Architect. Coordinate with Architect for repair method at each crack location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Gypsum Board as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Certainteed: www.certainteedgypsum.com. 2. G-P Gypsum Corporation: www.gp.com. 3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 4. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 5. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Metal Framing is based on the product named. 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems: www.clarkdietrich.com/apps/bim.php.

a. ProSTUD Drywall Framing System. b. Bridging: Spazzer 9200 bridging Bar SPZD

2. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a. Dale/Incor: www.daleincor.com. b. Marino/Ware: www.marinoware.com.

http://www.certainteedgypsum.com/

http://www.gp.com/

http://www.nationalgypsum.com/

http://www.usg.com/

http://www.clarkdietrich.com/apps/bim.php

http://www.daleincor.com/

http://www.marinoware.com/


c. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. d. Unimast Inc.: www.unimast.com.

C. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Partition Anchorage Devices as

manufactured by one of the following: 1. Hilti, Inc.: www.us.hilti.com. 2. ITW Ramset/Readhead: www.itw-ramset.com. 3. Powers Fastening, Inc.: www.powers.com. 4. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel (G40 or equivalent per ASTM A1003), C shaped with knurled faces, punched for utility access, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for specified spacing, depth as indicated on Drawings, with maximum deflection of wall framing L/240 at 5 psf. 1. 25-Gage EQ Studs: Maximum height with (1) layer 5/8” gypsum wallboard.

16 inch oc 24 inch oc a. 1-5/8 Inch: 9’-8” 8’-6” b. 2-1/2 Inch: 11’-10” 10’-4” c. 3-5/8 Inch: 15’-4” 13’-2” d. 4 Inch: 16’-8” 14’-4” e. 6 Inch: 21’-8” 19’-0”

2. 20 DW-Gage EQ Studs: Maximum height with (1) layer 5/8” gypsum wallboard. 16 inch oc 24 inch oc a. 1-5/8 Inch: 10’-9” 9’-9” b. 2-1/2 Inch: 13’-8” 12’-6” c. 3-5/8 Inch: 15’-8” 14’-0” d. 4 Inch: 17’-8” 15’-11” e. 6 Inch: 22’-6” 20’-2”

3. 20 STR-Gage EQ Studs: Maximum height with (1) layer 5/8” gypsum wallboard. 16 inch oc 24 inch oc a. 1-5/8 Inch: 10’-4” 9’-4” b. 2-1/2 Inch: 13’-5” 12’-2” c. 3-5/8 Inch: 17’-0” 15’-4” d. 4 Inch: 18’-4” 16’-5” e. 6 Inch: 24’-5” 21’-11”

B. Floor Tracks and Runners: ASTM C 645, galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, same

depth and gage as studs, tight fit, solid web.

C. Deep Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-1/2 inch deep flanges.

D. Wall Furring, Bridging and Bracing: ASTM C 645, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Studs: 25 gage. 2. Hat-Shaped Channels: 7/8 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch wide, 25 gage. 3. Cold-Rolled Channels: 3/4 inch x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 inch x 17/32 inch, 16 gage. 4. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage x 1/4 inch less than stud. 5. U-channels Bridging: 1-1/2 inch 16 gage cold-rolled steel.

E. Resilient Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage, 1/2 inch deep,

2-1/2 inch wide with face connected to single flange by single slotted leg.


http://www.unimast.com/

http://www.us.hilti.com/

http://www.itw-ramset.com/

http://www.powers.com/


F. Partition Framing Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. 1. 25: ASTM C 1002; 3/8 inch Type S pan head. 2. 20 Gage and Heavier: ASTM C 1002; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head.

G. Partition Floor Track Anchorage Device at Concrete Slabs: Low velocity powder-actuated

drive pins; minimum 0.140 inch shank diameter x 1-1/2 inch shank length with steel washer.

H. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to suit application.

I. Flat Straps and Backing Plates: Galvanized sheet steel, gage shape, and configuration as

required or as indicated on Drawings.

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS

A. Standard Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396; ends square cut. Use largest size sheets possible. For ceiling heights exceeding 8 feet up to 10 feet, use 10 foot sheet; 8 foot sheet with gypsum board joint not permitted. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Edges: Tapered.

B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396; Type X; ends square cut. Use largest size

sheets possible. For ceiling heights exceeding 8 feet up to 10 feet, use 10 foot sheet; 8 foot sheet with gypsum board joint not permitted. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Edges: Tapered.

C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396; ends square cut. Use largest size

sheets possible. For ceiling heights exceeding 8 feet up to 10 feet, use 10 foot sheet; 8 foot sheet with gypsum board joint not permitted. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Edges: Tapered.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Corner Beads: GA-216; galvanized steel, Type CB with 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 inch wide flanges.

B. Edge Trim: GA-216; galvanized steel, LC shaped bead.

C. Control Joint: GA-216; galvanized steel, 7/16 deep reveal, 7/8 inch flange, 3/32 inch grounds and 1/4 inch open slot with removable plastic strip.

D. Special Shapes or Reveals:

1. Shape Type 1: F-Reveal FDM-625-100 by Fry Reglet – Clear anodized finish. 2. Shape Type 2: F-Reveal FDM-625-150 by Fry Reglet - Clear anodized finish.

E. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for

project conditions. 1. Ready-mixed all purpose joint compound.

F. Wall and Ceiling Texture: Ready mixed wall texture consisting of white latex type material

for one-coat application.


1. Texture: Fine orange peel Sheetrock Brand TUF-TEX Wall & Ceiling Texture spray 20-40 sq. ft./lb by USG Corporation.

G. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-drilling, self-tapping type; cadmium-plated for wet locations

and at gypsum sheathing.

H. Batt Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2116 - Blanket Insulation.

I. Acoustical Sealant: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining sealant that reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. AC-20 FTR Acoustical Sealant, by Pecora Coprporation. 2. Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant, by US Gypsum. 3. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting.






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical Work installed in or behind metal framing. Allow items to be installed after framing is complete.

3.3 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 754, ASTM C 955 and manufacturer's published instructions. B. Space studs and furring on center as indicated on Drawings, space studs backing ceramic

wall tile, full height or wainscot at 16 inches on center. 1. Place studs vertically, with open side facing in same direction securely fastened to

floor and ceiling tracks. 2. Extend stud framing to heights indicated on Drawings. 3. Where stud framing extends to structure above, maintain clearance under structural

building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg slip-track ceiling runners.

4. Locate studs maximum 2 inches from abutting partitions, partition corners and other construction.

5. Provide triple studs at abutting partitions, double studs at partition corners. 6. Interior non-loading bearing metal stud partitions provide lateral bridging follows:


a. Partitions with gypsum board attached to both stud flanges full height of wall; no bridging is required. 1) Temporary bracing of partition shall be provided while one stud flange is

temporarily unsheathed. b. Partitions with gypsum board attached to both stud flanges for only partial

height of wall, (i.e. where studs extend up to bottom of deck while gypsum board extends only to above the finished ceiling), bridging shall be provided at 5 feet maximum vertically spaced above elevation where gypsum board is terminated.

c. Partitions with gypsum board on one (1) side of partition only, bridging shall be provided at maximum 5 feet maximum on-center vertically.

d. Bridging for studs 6 inches and less in depth shall be Spazzer 9200 as manufactured by Dietrich ProSTUD Metal Framing.

e. Friction fit Spazzer 9200 into Dietrick stud openings without fasteners. 1) When using U-channel bridging, fasten each channel to each stud with 2

inch x 2 inch x 16 gage clip angles. 2) Clip angles shall be anchored to each stud with two (2) #10-16 screws. 3) U-channel shall be fastened to each clip angle with two (2) #10-16

screws 7. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring

members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing and furring members.

C. Fasten partition floor tracks and runners to concrete with drive pins spaced at 24 inches on

center maximum, 2 inches from end maximum.

D. Fasten partition top tracks and slip tracks to metal decking with screws spaced at 24 inches on center maximum, 2 inches from end maximum.

E. Install framing at edges and ends of gypsum board panels to provide firm bearing for

installation of gypsum board attachment screws.

F. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall.

G. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended

ceiling, except where partitions are indicated to terminate above suspended ceiling or at suspended ceiling. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.

H. Frame openings other than hollow metal framed openings to comply with details indicated

or, as required for hollow metal framed openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

I. Hollow Metal Framed Opening: Install double jamb studs at each side of door frame jambs.

At frame head height (between double jamb studs) install horizontal track to receive cripple studs at maximum 16 inch on center. Install cripple studs adjacent to each double jamb stud with 1/2 inch clearance allowing for installation of control joint.

J. Blocking and Backing: Install steel stud blocking or backing plates to studs for support of

plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings and other items requiring blocking or backing for attachment to wall.

3.4 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION


A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216 and manufacturer's published instructions.

1. Installation of non-load-bearing metal framing shall comply with ASTM C754.

B. Gypsum Board Joints: 1. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. 2. Gypsum board joints not permitted within 12 inches of corners of hollow metal frames

unless control joints are installed at corners of frames as indicated on Drawings. 3. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions; joints shall not occur on same stud. 4. All gypsum board joints shall occur over and be supported by a framing member. 5. Provide continuous blocking as backer for horizontal edge of gypsum board. 6. In multi-layer system, end joints parallel to and on same side of framing members

shall be staggered between alternate courses of panels a. Base layer end joints parallel to and on one side of framing shall be staggered

from base layer end joints on opposite site of framing members. 7. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize number of abutting end joints

and to avoid end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stager abutting end joints of adjacent panels minimum 1 framing member.

8. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated or specified, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.

C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp

panels. Butt panels together for light contact at edges and ends with maximum 1/16 inch open space between panels. Do not force in place.

D. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

E. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board to ceilings first and then to walls. Install gypsum board with long dimension parallel to framing members at walls and perpendicular to framing members at ceilings, with ends and edges occurring over framing member. Install fasteners at 12 inches on center field and 8 inches on center at edges.

F. Cover both faces of metal stud framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above

ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

G. Isolate perimeter of partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch

wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board.

I. Fasteners: Install so heads of fasteners are slightly below surface of panel without breaking

face paper or fracturing core; do not install fastener closer than 3/8 inches from panel edges and ends. Do not strip framing member around screw shank.

J. Door Frames: Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal

doors and doors over 2 foot 8 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames.


3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and in consistent pattern, as directed by Architect and as follows. 1. Vertical, at each side of hollow metal frame head on both sides of wall extending from

corners of frame to ceiling for frames 3 foot 6 inches and wider. 2. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. 3. Where a partition, wall or ceiling traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic, or

building control element) in the building structure. 4. Where partition or furring abuts structural element (except floor) or dissimilar wall or

ceiling. 5. Where ceiling abuts structural element, dissimilar wall or partition, or other vertical

penetration. 6. Where construction changes with plane of partition or ceiling. 7. Where ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction with perimeter relief, or

30 feet without perimeter relief. 8. Where wings of "L", "U", "T", "H", or "Star" shaped ceilings are joined.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as

indicated.

D. Insulation: Install batt insulation at partition framing as specified in Section 07 2116 - Blanket Insulation.

3.6 JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISH

A. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in GA-214 and as scheduled in Finish Level Schedule.

B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

C. Finish Level Descriptions:

1. Level 1: Tape in joint compound at joints and interior angles. Tool marks and ridges acceptable.

2. Level 2: Level 1, plus separate coat of compound at joints, angles, fasteners and accessories. Tool marks and ridges acceptable.

3. Level 3: Level 1, plus two separate coats of compound at joints, angles, fasteners and accessories. Compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

4. Level 4: Level 1, plus three separate coats of compound at joints, angles, fasteners and accessories. Compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

5. Level 5: Level 4, plus separate skim coat of compound over entire surface of gypsum board.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION

A. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch

in 10 feet in any direction.



A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect metal framing installation, member types, sizes and spacing, type of

fasteners, number and type of connections and anchorages. 2. Inspect gypsum board installation, board types and thickness, number, type and

spacing of fasteners, joints, control joints and finish levels. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.9 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND REPAIR

A. At completion of installation, remove any residual joint or texture compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Protect gypsum board from damage or deterioration by construction activities.

C. Repair gypsum board joint ridging in accordance with GA-221.

D. Repair screw pops in gypsum board surfaces in accordance with GA-222.

3.11 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE

A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.

B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry.

C. Level 3: Not Used. D. Level 4:

1. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat paint finish. 2. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive texture before final painting. 3. Walls scheduled to receive wall covering.

E. Level 5: Not Used

3.12 GYPSUM BOARD SCHEDULE

A. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Toilet Rooms, Janitor Room, Kitchens, Ware Washing Areas, Laundry, Showers/Shower Rooms, Soiled Utility, Sterilizer and Clean Processing.

B. Standard Gypsum Wallboard: All other locations.

END OF SECTION

09 2226 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 04/08 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

SECTION 09 2226

SUSPENSION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal ceiling framing and suspension system for attachment of interior gypsum board.




1. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum board attached to framing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems. 2. ASTM C 636 - Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Suspension Systems. 3. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to

Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Boards.


A. Pre-engineered drywall suspension system consisting of straight main tees along with straight furring cross channels or cross tees, that joint together to support screw attached gypsum panels and independently supported light fixtures and air diffusers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data for materials, product criteria, sizes and lengths, finishes, load charts and limitations.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.



B. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name, item, description, part number, type and class.





E. Store materials in a manner that will prevent warpage, water damage, or damage.

F. Handle materials to insure against racking, distortion or physical damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. BPB Cellotex: www.bpb.cellotex.com.

B. G-P Gypsum Corporation: www.gp.com .

C. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.

D. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

E. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Main Tees: ASTM C 635, heavy duty classification, 1-1/2 inch high x 144 inches long, integral reversible splice with knurled face.

B. Cross Tees: ASTM C 636, 1-1/2 inch high x 48 inches long with 1-1/2 inch wide face, with

quick release cross tee ends to provide positive locking and removal without tools.

C. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.

D. Wall Moldings: Single web with knurled face.

E. Suspension Wire: No. 12 gage hanger wire.

F. Gypsum Board: Specified in Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


http://www.bpb.cellotex.com/

http://www.gp.com/


http://www.usg.com/


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify work above ceiling suspension system is complete and installed in a manner

that does not affect layout and installation of suspension system components.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install ceiling suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636 and manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Space main tees at maximum 48 inches on center, supported by hanger wires spaced at

maximum 48 inches on center.

C. Space cross tees at maximum 24 inches on center. Provide intermediate cross tees as necessary to maintain visually acceptable drywall planes and drywall corners.

D. Attach hanger wires directly to building structure above. Do not support wires from

mechanical or electrical equipment in ceiling above.

E. Install gypsum panels with ends and edges at framing members. Extend gypsum panel to corners and make firm contact with wall angle. Use panels of maximum practical length. Fit ends and edges closely, not forced together.

F. Cut ends, edges, scribe or make cutouts.

G. Attach gypsum panels to suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 754 to main

runners, cross tees and cross channels with standard gypsum panel fasteners spaced 8 inches on center at edges and 12 inches on center at field.

H. Install trim at internal and external angles formed by intersection of panel with other

materials.

I. Install corner bead at vertical or horizontal external corners.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Meet with and coordinate locations and installation of mechanical diffusers, grilles and

fire protection items specified in Division 15 with respective installers. 2. Meet with and coordinate locations and installation of lighting fixtures and other

electrical items specified in Division 16 with respective installers.

B. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.


2. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect ceiling system installation, attachment to building structure, grid layout and

gypsum panel attachment. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


END OF SECTION

09 3013 - 1 MSTR 0215 CERAMIC TILING

SECTION 09 3013

CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain floor tile. 2. Porcelain wall tile. 3. Pre-finished metal transition trims and thresholds




1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Substrate for tile floor installation. 2. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Masonry Units: Substrate for tile base and wall

installation. 3. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at tile penetrations.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

2. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework.

3. ANSI A118.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy.

4. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex Portland Cement Mortar.

5. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation.

6. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard for Load Bearing Bonded Waterproofing.

7. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of

Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

C. Tile Council of America (TCA):

1. TCA HB - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 2. TCA EJ171 - Expansion Joint Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


a. Tile product information, sizes, and finishes.


b. Grout product information and properties. 2. Samples for Selection: Manufacturers complete set of floor tile, wall tile and grout

color samples for Architect initial color selection. 3. Assurance/Control Submittals:


b. Manufacturer Instructions (For Information): Submit manufacturer's published installation instructions for specific products specified attached to Product Data.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals:

1. Maintenance Data: Provide recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.


3. Extra Products: Submit extra products as specified in this Section.


A. Single Source Responsibility:

1. Obtain each type and color tile material required from single source. 2. Obtain setting and grouting materials from one manufacturer to ensure compatibility.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five years documented experience.

C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of ceramic tile manufacturer published installation instructions, TCA and ANSI documents in Project Field Office and refer to instructions at all times during installation.



B. Labeling: Comply with ANSI A137.1.

C. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers, fully identified with name, brand,

type and grade.


E. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return


F. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

G. Protect materials form contamination, dampness, freezing, or overheating in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions.

H. Remove broken, cracked, chipped, stained or damaged tile from site.

I. Protect mortar and grout materials against moisture, soiling or staining.




1. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of material manufacturers for environmental conditions before, during and after installation.

2. Do not begin installation until building is completely enclosed and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions consistent with “after occupancy” conditions for a minimum of (14) days.

3. Maintain continuous and uniform building temperatures of mot less than 50 degrees F during installation nor more than 100 degrees F.

4. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.

1.7 MAINTENANCE


B. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner at Substantial Completion Inspection.

1. One (1) box of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. 2. Ensure materials are boxed and identified by manufacturer, type and color.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Porcelain Tiling is based on the following products

named. 1. Pantheon: www.pantheontile.com.


Permitted.

2.2 TILE MATERIALS

A. Porcelain Floor Tile: ANSI A 137.1. 1. Series: Pantheon Riviera 2. Size: 5.5 inches x 32 inches x 3/8 inches. 3. Finish: Matte 4. Coefficient of Friction:

a. ASTM C 1028: Minimum Static Coefficient of Friction of 0.60 (SCOF). b. ANSI A137.1: Dynamic Coefficient of Friction value greater than 0.42 (DCOF).

5. Color: Selected by Architect. More than one color may be selected.

B. Porcelain Wall Tile: ANSI A 137.1. 1. a. Field: Pantheon : Hampton b. Accent: Pantheon: Viva 2. Size:

a. Field: 12 inches x 24 inches x 7/16 inches. b. Accent: 4 inches x 12 inches X 5/16 inches

3. Finish: a. Field: To be selected by architect. b. Accent: Glossy 4. Trim: Matching bullnose, cove base and base shapes in sizes coordinated with field

tile. 5. Color: Selected by Architect. More than one color may be selected.

http://www.pantheontile.com/


2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Mortar and Grout Materials is based on the

following products named. 1. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 2. Laticrete International Incorporated: www.laticrete.com. 3. Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.com 4. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

B. Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement Type; ANSI A118.4. 1. Description: Latex additive and site mixed Portland cement mortar. 2. Products:

a. Custom: CustomCrete Latex Mortar Admix with site Mixed Mortar or CreteMix. b. Laticrete: 254 Platinum Latex Thin set Mortar Additive. c. Mapei: Keracrete System consisting of latex additive mixed with 1:1

sand/cement blend.

C. Grout: Latex-Modified Type; ANSI A118.7. 1. Description: Latex-modified, factory blended, mildew resistant, sanded, consisting of

portland cement, graded quartz and additives. 2. Latex Additive: Type as recommended by latex mortar manufacturer. 3. Products:

a. Custom: Polyblend Sanded Tile Grout. (Prism Grout) b. Laticrete: 500 Series Sanded Grout Mixed with 1776 Grout Admix Plus.

(PermaColor Grout) c. Mapei: Keracolor S polymer-modified sanded grout. (Ultracolor Plus Grout)

D. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.

1. Description: Multi-component, factory prepared, 100 percent epoxy resin and hardener with sand or mineral filler material.

2. Products: a. Custom: 100% Solids Epoxy Grout. b. Laticrete: SpectralLOCK PRO Stainless Epoxy Grout. c. Mapei: Kerapoxy Chemical Resistant Grout.

3. Color: Selected by Architect.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Temporary Protective Coating: Product formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout, compatible with tile, mortar and grout products, easily removed after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.

B. Tile Cleaner: Neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

C. Tile Expansion and Control Joints for Thin-Set Applications: Roll-formed stainless steel

profiles joined by a soft CPE movement joint material, with integral perforated anchoring legs for setting joint into setting bed. 1. Height: As required to suit application. 2. Color: Selected by Architect.

D. Transition Joint Strips: Stainless steel with integral perforated anchoring leg for setting strip

into setting bed.

http://www.custombuildingproducts.com/

http://www.laticrete.com/

http://www.mapei.com/


1. Profile: Sloped, narrow profile transition strip.

E. Setting Buttons: Plastic buttons of thickness required for joint size to maintain uniform joint width.

F. Pre-finished Metal Transition Trims and Thresholds:

1. Type: Aluminum. 2. Series: Dilex – AHK; 3/8 inches. 3. Color: Selected by Architect. 4. Finish: Satin Anodized 5. Size: full width of wall or frame opening. 6. Edges: Beveled on side when abutting other floor surfaces, and both sides when

abutting other ceramic/porcelain tile. 7. Manufacturer:

a. Schluter Systems: www.schluter.com b. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com c. Ceramic Tool Company: www.ceramictool.com

7. Submit shop drawing for final approval.

2.5 MIXING MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Add materials, water and additives in accurate portions.

C. Use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time and procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that floor and wall surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances, are dust-free,

and are ready to receive tile. 2. Verify that floor drains are of proper type and are set at proper height to receive

ceramic floor tile flush with drain.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.


C. Remove coatings and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil or silicone, that are incompatible with tile setting materials. Provide surface that is firm, dry and clean from contaminants that cause bonding problems.

D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler.

E. Prepare substrate surfaces for installation in accordance with tile setting material

manufacturer's instructions. Scarify concrete surfaces with blast track equipment if necessary.

F. Acid based cleaners not permitted.

G. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within color ranges selected, verify that tile has

been blended at factory and packaged so tile taken from package show same color ranges as those taken from other packages. If not factory blended, return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project Site before installing.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.5, A108.10,

manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations.

B. Install tile carefully. Lay tile to avoid small cuts. Rub cuts smooth and even. Provide all trim pieces required for complete installation.

C. Layout:

1. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. 2. Layout so that full tile or joint is centered on each wall and not tile less than half width

is used. 3. Minimize cutting and avoid tile less than half width. 4. For heights stated in feet and inches, use courses of full tile to produce nearest

attainable heights without cutting tile. 5. No staggered joints permitted. 6. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Do not

damage visible surfaces. Carefully grind edges of tile abutting built-in items. Fit tile at outlets, piping and other penetrations so that plates, collars and escutcheons overlap tile.

7. Form corners and bases neatly. Align base and wall joints. 8. Extend tile into recesses and under or behind equipment or fixtures, to form complete

covering without interruptions, except as otherwise indicated. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

9. Accurately form intersections and returns. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

D. Joints: Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.

Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 1. Joint Widths:

a. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. b. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. c. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch.

E. Thin-Set Method, Floors and Walls:

1. Apply mortar with notched trowel using scraping motion to work material into good contact with surface to be covered. Maintain 90 percent coverage on back of tile and fully bed all corners.


2. Apply only as much mortar as can be covered within allowable time period as recommended by mortar manufacturer or while surface is tacky.

3. When installing large tiles, ceramics or mosaics, trowel small quantity of mortar onto back of each tile or sheet of tiles.

4. Set tiles in place and rub or beat with small beating block. 5. Beat or rap tile to ensure proper bond and to level surface of tile. 6. Align tile to show uniform joints and allow to set until firm. 7. Clean excess mortar from surface of tile with wet cheese cloth (not a sponge) while

mortar is fresh. 8. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding tiles.

F. Grouting:

1. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 2. If bonding materials are rapid setting, follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Install in accordance with grout manufacturer's recommendations and ANSI A108.10. 4. Pack joints full and free before mortar takes initial set. 5. Clean excess grout from surface with wet cheesecloth as work progresses.

Hydrosponges not permitted. 6. Cure after grouting by covering with kraft or construction paper for 72 hours. 7. Install sealant in vertical wall joints at interior corners.

G. Control Joints and Other Sealant Usage: 1. Install control joints where tile abuts retaining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs,

columns, wall corners and directly over cold joints and control joints in structural surfaces conforming to architectural details.

2. Install control joints in floors at spacings indicated in TCA Installation Handbook, unless noted otherwise.

3. Rake or cut control joints through setting bet to supporting slab or structure. Keep joints free of mortar.

4. Fill joints with self-leveling polyurethane sealant and backing material specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

5. Fill joints around toilet fixtures with white silicone sanitary sealant specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

H. Expansion Joints:

1. Keep expansion joints free of mortar and grout. 2. Provide expansion joints directly over changes in material, over control and expansion

joints in substrate, at juncture of floors and walls, at other restraining surfaces such as curbs, columns, bases and wall corners, and where recommended by TCA EJ171.

3. Install sealant in expansion joints.

I. Floor Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Install finish floor before installation of floor mounted plumbing fixtures.

3.4 INSTALLATION - TOILET ROOM FLOORS

A. Toilet Rooms: Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F-115, latex-Portland cement mortar bond coat and epoxy grout.

B. Floor Drains: Install floor drains flush with floor tile. Neatly and carefully cut tile to fit around

floor drains creating a smooth even transition from drain to tile surface. Provide uniform joints around drain.

3.5 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE AND BASE


A. Over interior concrete and masonry, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W202, latex-Portland cement bond coat.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect ceramic floor tile and base installation, layout, joints, adherence to substrate,

color and style. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean excess mortar from surface with water as work progresses. Perform cleaning while

mortar is fresh and before it hardens on surfaces.

B. Sponge and wash tile diagonally across joints. Polish with clean dry cloth.

C. Remove grout haze following recommendation of mortar additive manufacturer. Do not use acids for cleaning.

D. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

1. Upon completion of installation. 2. Just before Substantial Completion Inspection.


A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

B. Cover tile floors with kraft paper, masked in place. Do not remove until cleaning for

Substantial Completion inspection.

C. Where temporary use of new floors is unavoidable, provide large flat boards or plywood panels for walkways over kraft paper.

END OF SECTION


CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

CERAMIC TILE INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________



specific product being installed, including TCA and ANSI documents. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions, TCA and ANSI

requirements with Project Field Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer furnished and installed specified ceramic tile in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Installer cleaned ceramic tile in accordance with manufacturer's published cleaning instructions just

before Substantial Completion Inspection.



09 5113 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1214 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 2. Acoustical units.




1. Division 23 - Mechanical: Air diffusion devices in ceiling. 2. Division 26 - Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ASTM A 641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.

2. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

3. ASTM C 636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.

4. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other

ceiling finishes, mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling. 3. Samples: Submit three 6 x 6 inch samples for each acoustical unit type specified,

illustrating mateial and finish of unit. 4. Assurance/Control Submittals:


B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for close-out submittals.


2. Extra Products: Submit extra products as specified in this Section. 3. Installation Certification: Submit written certification of installation on form located at

end of Section.


A. Qualifications:


1. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, with minimum five years of experience and certified by fireproofing manufacturer as an Approved Applicator.

B. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain a current copy of

suspended ceiling manufacturer published instructions in Project Field Office and refer to installation instructions at all times during installation.



B. Deliver to site in original unopened cartons or other packaging materials necessary to protect finishes clearly labeled with manufacturer name and product model and description.






F. Store cases in packaging until installation.



1. Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof. Complete installation of damp materials before beginning work.

2. Maintain humidity of 65 - 75 percent in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours before, during, and after installation.

3. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 to 70 degrees F. prior to and during installation of materials.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,

sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.

1.8 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Manufacturer ten (10) year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship for suspensions system and acoustical unit non-sag.

1.9 MAINTENANCE



B. Extra Materials: At date of substantial completion, deliver to Owner.

1. Twenty acoustical units of each type installed. 2. Deliver in unopened cartons, packaged with protective covering for storage, and

identified with appropriate levels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Acoustical Panel Ceilings is based on the product named. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated: www.ceilings.com/


comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Celotex Corporation: www.celotex.com. 2. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

B. Section 016 200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions are permitted.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Type 2 Moisture Resistant Acoustical Unit: ASTM E 1264, Type XX, Pattern CD, washable vinyl faced, for wet and high humidity areas conforming to the following: 1. Style: Fine Fissured Ceramaguard, No. 608. 2. Fire Resistance: Class A. 3. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 4. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 5. Composition: Mineral fiber. 6. Light Reflectance: 0.84. 7. CAC: 40. 8. NRC Range: 0.55. 9. Edge: Square lay-in. 10. Surface Finish: Scrubbable factory applied vinyl plastic paint. 11. Surface Color: White. 12. Suspension System: Type 2.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices and

perimeter moldings.

B. Type 2 Moisture Resistant Suspension System: Exposed extruded aluminum for wet and high humidity areas with painted finish; intermediate duty. 1. Product: AL Prelude Plus XL. 2. Profile: Double flange, for square edge panels; 15/16 inch wide face. 3. Construction: Double web. 4. Finish: White.

http://www.ceilings.com/

http://www.celotex.com/

http://www.usg.com/


2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, and

ceiling system flatness requirement specified.

B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. 2. Bullnose Corner Cover:

a. Bullnose Corner Cover: Armstrong #7866, 1 inch radius for nominal 7/8 inch molding; 2 inch leg.

a. Bullnose Corner Cover: Armstrong #7864 3/4 inch radius for nominal 7/8 inch molding; 2 inch leg.

a. Bullnose Corner Cover: Armstrong #7867, cut to fit irregular corner conditions for nominal 15/16 inch molding; 2 inch leg.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, prestretched,

with minimum yield stress load three times design load, but not less than 12 gauge.

D. Touch-Up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.

E. Hold-Down Clips: 24 gage spring steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.





3.2 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, manufacturer's published

instructions and as indicated on Drawings. 1. Center ceiling on room or area perimeter, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Allow minimum 6 inch acoustical panel width at room or area perimeter. 3. Panel widths less than 6 inches not permitted. 4. Support channel and perimeter molding lengths less than 24 inches not permitted.

B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for

maximum deflection of 1:360.

C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.


D. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the

nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.

G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner,

or support components independently.

H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.

I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths, 24 inch minimum. 2. Miter and rivet corners. 3. Bullnose Corner Cover: Install corner trim at exterior radius corners. Select trim to fit

radius; trim as necessary to fit radius.

3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.

C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.

E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.

F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.

G. Hold Down Clips: Provide clips at areas near entrance doors where ceiling tiles may be

dislocated by air pressure of persons entering and leaving building.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Meet with and coordinate locations and installation of mechanical diffusers, grilles and

fire protection items specified in Division 15 with respective installers. 2. Meet with and coordinate locations and installation of lighting fixtures and other

electrical items specified in Division 16 with respective installers.

B. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.


2. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect ceiling system installation, attachment to building structure, grid layout and

ceiling tile type. 2. Inspect locations and attachment of hold-down clip installation. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION


SUSPENDED CEILING INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

SUSPENDED CEILING INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________



specific product being installed. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions and requirements

of ASTM C 636 with Project Field Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer furnished and installed specified ceiling grid and acoustical units in accordance with

Contract Documents. 4. Installer furnished and installed hold down clips as specified.



09 6506 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0211 RUBBER COVE BASE

SECTION 09 6506

RUBBER COVE BASE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber cove base.




1. Section 09 6519 - Resilient Tile Flooring: Floor finish material for base.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E 684 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Hear Energy Source. 2. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Hear Energy Source.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide data describing rubber base physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available. 2. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer’s complete set of color samples for

Architect initial selection. 3. Assurance/Control Submittals:



1. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance and cleaning materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.


3. Extra Products: Submit extra products at Substantial Completion as specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing resilient flooring and base with minimum five (5) years documented experience.




B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging with identification labels intact.



D. Accept Products on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.





G. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.


A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. 2. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at

a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide one (1) year manufacturer warranty for defects in materials and workmanship.

1.8 MAINTENANCE


B. Extra Products: Deliver to Owner at Substantial Completion. 1. Provide 5 percent of installed base material, exterior corners and end stops of each

type and color specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Rubber Cover Base as manufactured by one of the following: 1. BurkeMercer Flooring Products, Incorporated: www.burkemercer.com.

http://www.burkemercer.com/


2. Flexco Corporation: www.flexcofloors.com. 3. Freudenberg Building Systems, Incorporated, Nora Rubber Base:

www.norarubber.com. 4. Roppe Corporation: www.roppe.com.


Permitted.

2.2 BASE

A. Type: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, solid vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove.

B. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 684 or NFPA 253.

C. Height: 4 inch.

D. Thickness: 0.125 (1/8) inch thick.

E. Finish: Satin.

F. Length: 120 foot continuous rolls.

G. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. More than one color

may be selected.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Filler: Plastic.

C. Corners and End Stops: Premolded external corners and end stops.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that lower wall surfaces are smooth and flat, dust-free, and are ready to receive

resilient base.




http://www.flexcofloors.com/

http://www.norarubber.com/

http://www.roppe.com/


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill joints, holes, and other defects with filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.

B. Clean substrate of oil, wax or other film affecting adhesion.

C. Dry substrate of moisture.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply adhesive to wall surfaces and install base in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between

joints.

C. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use pre-molded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units.

D. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

E. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

F. Where base returns from corridor at bullnose block unit at external corner and immediately

terminates at door frame, provide premolded base unit. Completely fill void created between premolded unit and bullnose block with sealant matching rubber cove base color.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect base installation, seams, adherence to substrate, interior corners exterior

corners, style, type and color. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

END OF SECTION

09 6519 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0513 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING


RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient tile flooring. 2. Installation accessories. 3. Concrete moisture and acidity test requirements. 4. Cleaning and polishing by Contractor.




1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete floor substrate. 2. Section 09 6506 - Rubber Cove Base: Wall base at floor tile.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. ASTM D 2047 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

2. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

3. ASTM E 662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

4. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

5. ASTM F 970 - Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit. 6. ASTM F 1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. 7. ASTM F 1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate

of Concrete Sub-floor using Anhydros Calcium Chloride.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

2. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer’s complete set of color samples for Architect initial selection.

3. Assurance/Control Submittals:


a. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect before installation of flooring material. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control. 1) Concrete floor slab moisture tests. 2) Concrete floor slab pH tests. 3) Diagram of test area showing location and results of each test.

b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of Company’s experience and Installer’s Certification indicating compliance with specified Quality Assurance requirements.


1. Project Record Documents: Diagram of floor slab concrete moisture and pH test locations and results of each test.

2. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance and cleaning materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.


4. Extra Products: Submit extra products as specified in this Section. 5. Installation Certification: Submit written certification of installation on form located at

end of Section.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain flooring and accessories, including leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives from one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing vinyl floor tile with minimum five

(5) years documented experience.

C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Class 1, minimum 0.45 watts per square centimeter,

when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 662.

D. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of resilient

flooring manufacturer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to installation instructions at all times during installation.



B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact.

C. Deliver Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each material to Project Field Superintendent for Contractor Records.

D. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return








1. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. 2. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at

a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.

3. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.

1.7 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty for defects in materials and workmanship.

1.8 MAINTENANCE


B. Extra Products: Deliver to Owner at Substantial Completion Inspection.

1. Furnish quantity of resilient floor tile equal to 5 percent of amount installed of each type and color.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Resilient Tile Flooring is based on the product

named. 1. Vinyl Composition Tile:

a. Armstrong World Industries Incorporated: www.armstrongfloors.com. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Azroc Commercial Flooring: www.azrock.com 2) Mannington Mills Incorporated: www.mannington.com.

B. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Not

permitted.

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE

A. Type 1 - Vinyl Tile: Asbestos free. Striations/ Migrations BBT

http://www.armstrongfloors.com/

http://www.mannington.com/


1. Type: BioBased Tile® bio-flooring with BioStride® Flooring, homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness. Bio-flooring tile shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 2982 Standard Specification for Polyester Composition Floor Tile.

2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1066, Class 2 - Through Pattern. 3. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested

in accordance with ASTM E 648. 4. Size: 12 x 24 inch. 5. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 6. Static Load Resistance: 250 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM F

970. 7. Static Coefficient of Friction: 0.06, dry when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2047. 8. Color: Selected by Architect. More that one color may be selected. Refer to floor tile

plans on Drawings.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Moldings and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.

C. Vinyl Composition Tile:

1. Adhesive: Waterproof, asbestos free; Armstrong S-700 Floor Tile Adhesive. 2. Floor Cleaner: Armstrong S-485 Commercial Floor Cleaner. 3. Floor Stripper: Armstrong S-490 Commercial Floor Stripper. 4. Floor Sealer: Armstrong S-495 Commercial Floor Sealer. 5. Floor Polish: Armstrong S-480 Commercial Floor Polish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat ready to receive resilient flooring. 2. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat, dust-free, and are ready to receive

resilient base. 3. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would

impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. 4. Verify that concrete floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing

for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

5. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.

B. Level floor areas with floor leveling material, where required.

C. Prohibit traffic until filler and floor leveling material is cured.

D. Clean substrate and prepare concrete floor slab in accordance with ASTM F 710.

E. Concrete Moisture Test: ASTM F 1869; perform calcium chloride test on concrete floor slab. 1. Test around perimeter of room, at columns and where moisture may be evident. 2. Perform minimum three (3) tests first 1000 square feet of flooring. Conduct additional

test for each additional 1000 square feet of flooring. 3. Weight of calcium chloride dish shall be measured at Project Site at start and end of

each test. 4. Moisture emission from concrete shall not exceed 5.0 pounds per 1000 square feet in

24 hours. 5. If test results exceed limitations, installation shall not proceed until source of

excessive moisture is identified and removed. 6. Remove source of excessive moisture and remove. 7. When moisture emission is outside manufacturer limitations, it shall be neutralized by

providing a vapor emission and acidity reduction control system to floor area to result in concrete slab ready for installation of floor material. a. See Section 03 3906 - Moisture Emission and Acidity Reduction Control

System

F. Concrete pH Test: ASTM F 1869, perform concrete pH test on concrete floor slab. 1. pH of concrete shall not be less than 5 and not exceed 9. 2. If test result exceed limitations, installation shall not proceed until pH is neutralized. 3. When acidity is outside manufacturer limitations, it shall be neutralized by providing a

vapor emission and acidity reduction control system to floor area to result in concrete slab ready for installation of floor material. a. See Section 03 3906 - Moisture Emission and Acidity Reduction Control

System

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install floor tile until concrete moisture and acidity tests have been successfully

completed indicating concrete floor slab is within flooring manufacturer's required range and Test Reports are submitted to Architect.

B. Install floor tile in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

C. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed.

D. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.

E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.


F. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.

G. Install tile to Running Bond pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area

perimeter unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

H. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under

centerline of door.

I. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.

J. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to

produce tight joints.

K. Floor Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Install finish floor before installation of floor mounted plumbing fixtures.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Observe concrete floor slab moisture emission and acidity tests and ensure they are

conducted and documented in accordance with ASTM F 1869 and instructions included in test kit.

2. Inspect flooring and base installation, joints, adherence to substrate, color and style type.




3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

B. Clean vinyl floor tile immediately after installation.

C. Vinyl Composition Tile:

1. Initial Maintenance at Completion of Installation: Clean and polish vinyl floor tile in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions upon completion of installation. a. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. b. Damp-mop with commercial floor cleaner solution at 3 to 4 ounces per gallon,

while carefully scrubbing black marks and excessive soil. c. Apply two (2) coats of commercial floor polish.

2. Polishing Just Before Substantial Completion Inspection: Clean and polish vinyl floor tile in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions just before Substantial Completion Inspection.


a. Scrub floor with commercial floor cleaner at 4 to 6 ounces per gallon and 3M Blue/Green scrubbing pad or equivalent brushes.

b. If floor is badly soiled and/or scratched, strip floor with commercial floor stripper at 4 to 8 ounces per gallon and 3M Blue/Green scrubbing pad or equivalent brushes.

c. Thoroughly rinse floor and allow to dry. d. Apply two (2) coats of commercial floor sealer. e. Apply three (3) coats of commercial floor polish


A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION


RESILIENT TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING INSTALLER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________


UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION INSTALLER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Installer obtained a current copy of manufacturer's published installation instructions for specific

product being installed. 2. Installer reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions with Project Field

Superintendent before start of installation. 3. Installer conducted concrete moisture and acidity tests with acceptable results and prepared flooring

substrate as required by manufacturer's published installation instructions. 4. Installer furnished and installed specified floor tile in accordance with Contract Documents. 5. Installer cleaned and applied polished in accordance with manufacturer's published cleaning and

polishing instructions just before Substantial Completion Inspection.



09 9000 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0714 PAINTS AND COATINGS

SECTION 09 9000

PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Field application of paint coatings. 3. Field application of sealed concrete finish. 4. Surfaces to be Finished and Paint Systems, at end of Section.




1. Section 03 3500 - Concrete Finishing: Sealed concrete finish. 2. Section 07 7900 – Joint Sealers: Sealant type and field painting. 3. Division 23 - Mechanical General: Painted mechanical items including exposed gas

piping. 4. Division 26 - Electrical General: Painted electrical items.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Coatings, Materials, and Applications. 2. ASTM D 4414 - Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch

Gages. 3. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of

Wood and Wood-Base Materials. 4. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

B. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA): 1. PDCA MP1 - Maintenance Repainting Manual.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

B. Gloss Ranges: Per National Paint and Coatings Association. 1. Flat: Lusterless or matte finish with gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-

degree meter. 2. Eggshell: Low-sheen finish with gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a

60-degree meter. 3. Satin: Low-sheen finish with gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-

degree meter. 4. Semi-Gloss: Medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when

measured at a 60-degree meter.


5. Gloss: High-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of paint specified.

a. Technical data sheets indicating manufacturer's catalog number, paint type description, and VOC content.

b. Painting Schedule listing surfaces to be painted with cross reference to the specific painting and finishing system and application. Identify each paint material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

c. Technical data sheet for concrete sealer, including description and VOC content.

2. Samples: a. Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturer’s color samples for Architect

initial color selection. b. Verification: Submit color brush-out sample for each paint color and sheen

specified. 1) Three samples on 8 1/2 inch x 11 inch card stock for color and sheen

verification. 2) Identify each sample by paint manufacturer, paint type, color, and sheen.

c. Mock-Up: After confirmation of color and sheen and prior to starting application of painting operations, apply selected paint color(s) and sheen to designated wall(s) (minimum 80 square feet per color) within scheduled room for review and acceptance by Architect and Owner. 1) Repeat Mock-Up application as directed for final selection of color and

sheen. 3. Assurance/Control Submittals:


b. Manufacturer Instructions (For Information): Submit manufacturer's published surface preparation and application instructions for specific products specified attached to Product Data, include copy of ASTM D 4414 for wet-film thickness measurement instructions.


1. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.


1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum five years documented experience.

B. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of paint and coating manufacturer published surface preparation and application instructions and wet-film thickness measurement instructions in Project Field Office and refer to application instructions at all times during application.

C. Documentation of Coats and Coat Thickness: Contractor shall document that specified

number of coats were applied to each surface and that wet film thickness was measured


and complied with specified minimum thickness as specified in Field Qualify Control article in this Section. 1. Verification In Architect's Presence: If required by Architect, Contractor shall apply

paint coats and verify specified wet film thickness of coats utilizing a notched-type wet film thickness gage, in conformance with ASTM D 4414, in Architect's presence at locations determined by Architect.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E-84 for Class I or A finish: 1. Flame Spread (Non-Combustible Surfaces): Less than 25. 2. Smoke Density (Non-Combustible Surfaces): Less than 450.

B. Provide paint and coating materials that conform to Federal, State, and Local restrictions for

Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) content.


A. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Deliver, store, protect and handle products.

B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

C. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.



E. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return damaged Products and replace with undamaged Products.

F. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Project


G. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum

of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the

humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

C. Application Temperature Range: Between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F, unless a low temperature product is being used and product specifications state otherwise.

D. Application Relative Humidity: Below 85 percent, unless required otherwise by

manufacturer's instructions.


E. Application Dew Point: 5 degrees F above dew point, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

F. Do not begin exterior painting late in day when dew or condensation is likely to form.

G. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.9 MAINTENANCE


B. Extra Products: Deliver to Owner at Substantial Completion Inspection. 1. Provide one (1) gallon of each color, type and sheen. 2. Label each container with color, type, sheen in addition to manufacturer's label.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Paints and Coatings is based on the product named. 1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 2. Pittsburgh Paints: www.pittsburghpaints.com 3. Pratt & Lambert: www.prattandlambert.com.

2.2 SEALED CONCRETE FINISH

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Sealed Concrete Finish is based on the product named. 1. Dayton Superior: www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com.

a. Acrylic Concrete Sealer: Safe Cure & Seal 1315 (J-22WB); VOC compliant, low odor, acrylic copolymer cure, seal and dustproofing compound in an aromatic solvent containing 25% solids with U.V. stabilizers.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. W. R. Meadows: www.wrmeadows.com

a. TIAH Acrylic Concrete Curing and Sealing Compound; VOC compliant, low odor, acrylic polymer, dustproofing, weather and stain resistance solution that dries to a tough, clear, transparent film that will not after-yellow.

2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS

A. Manufacturer’s “Best Professional Paint” for each type specified.

B. Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments:

http://www.sherwin-williams.com/

http://www.benjaminmoore.com/

http://www.pittsburghpaints.com/

http://www.prattandlambert.com/

http://www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com/

http://www.wrmeadows.com/


1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.

2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

C. Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat materials compatible with each

other and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application.

D. Colors: Selected by Architect. More than one color will be selected. 1. Tint first coats toward the final color; Architect may make changes in tint of final coat

after inspection of appearance of first coat.

E. Examine Specifications for other various trades and become familiar with their provisions for painting. All materials installed throughout the building that require painting and are not painted by requirements of other Sections of Specifications shall be painted or finished as part of the work of this Contract.

F. Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is installed.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product

manufacturer. 2. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report

any condition that may potentially affect proper application. 3. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 4. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not

apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: a. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. b. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. c. Interior and Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D

4442.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove all electrical plates, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, escutcheons, lighting fixtures and fittings already installed that are not to be painted, before preparing surfaces or finishing. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation or finishing. Removal requirement also includes all touch up and trim work. 1. After completion of painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed

using workers skilled in trades involved.

B. Surfaces: Correct defects in surfaces which affect work of this Section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.

C. Cleaning: Before applying paints or other surface treatments, clean substrates of

substances that could impair bond of various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from cleaning

process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

D. Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and as specified herein for each substrate condition.

E. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt

or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. 1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests.

If surfaces are alkaline to cause finish to blister or burn, correct condition before application.

2. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds manufacturer recommendations and specified requirements.

F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime

defects after repair. Remove oil or grease with paint thinner. If surface to be coated is slick or shiny, use medium sandpaper or liquid degreaser. Wipe thoroughly.

G. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter,

dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

H. Galvanized Steel Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils; wash

with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. Test for presence of Passivators. Remove pretreatment (Passivators) from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods such as brush, sanding or chemical etching. 1. Test for Passivators:

a. Prepare solution by dissolving 20 grams copper sulfate in 1 liter water. b. Solvent wash small area per Steel Structures Painting Council SP-1 "Solvent

Cleaning."


c. Sand small washed area using emery cloth. d. Using cotton swab saturated with copper sulfate solution, apply swipe to both

sanded and unsanded washed areas. e. If sanded and unsanded surfaces turn black at same time and time is less than

10 seconds, there is no passivation on surface other than light oil; normal degreasing/cleaning is sufficient before painting. If unsanded surface turns black slower than sanded surface, or not at all, a passivator is present on surface. If neither surface turns black, surface is probably an alloy of zinc or some other metal.

I. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer

and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

J. Interior Wood Items to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit before priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand lightly between coats.

K. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

L. Mixing: Mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's published

instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in clean condition, free of

foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce mixture of uniform density. Stir as required

during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

4. Tint each undercoat a light shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

M. Remove all foreign matter from concrete such as, paint, overspray, grease, oil or dirt using

manufacturer recommended cleaner or pressure washing. Concrete shall be completely cured.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Notify Architect 24 hours before start of any interior or exterior painting operations to allow for Architect or Owner Representative to verify number of coats and wet film thickness of paint as it is applied.

B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using application procedures

approved for application and substrate and as specified in this Section. 1. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formulation of durable paint film. 2. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used. 3. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in

fixtures, grilles, and similar components are in place.


4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next

coat is applied. 1. Apply each coat smoothly, worked out evenly and allowed to dry. 2. Allow exterior paints to dry 72 hours between coats and interior coats to dry twenty-

four hours between coats. 3. Allow enamels and varnishes to dry 48 hours between coats. 4. Omit primer on metal surfaces shop primed and touch-up painted.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than

preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 1. Number of coats specified in Paint Systems schedule will produce first quality

finishes, if properly applied. 2. If number of coats specified does not produce a finish acceptable to Architect,

Contractor shall apply additional coats until an acceptable finish is provided, at Contractor's expense.

3. Finished work shall be uniform and of approved color. Paint coatings shall completely cover, be smooth and free of runs, holidays, sags, clogging or excessive flooding.

4. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean without overlapping.

5. All wood surfaces not exposed to view that require sealers, such as drawers and interior of cabinets, shall be sealed with a sealer with a light red tint.

E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just

prior to applying next coat.

F. Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of

appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as

recommended by manufacturer for material or texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by

manufacturer for material and texture required.

G. Doors to be Painted: Paint or finish each door edge, except factory finished doors.

H. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate. Provide minimum dry film thickness (DFT) of entire coating system as specified.

I. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at rate to ensure complete

coverage with pores filled.

J. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply prime coat material to material that is to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suctions spots or unsealed areas in first coat appear, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.


K. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable or permitted.

L. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of

even luster. Provide finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,

refinish, or repaint Work not complying with specified requirements.

N. Sealed Concrete Finish - Application:

1. Concrete surface shall be dry before application of sealer. 2. Apply sealer to concrete surface in accordance with manufacturer's published

instructions. 3. Apply using low pressure sprayer. Avoid runs, bubbles or puddling. 4. Apply forming a continuous uniform membrane in two applications. Allow first coat to

dry before applying second coat.

3.4 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Sections for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit not defined herein.

B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical

components and paint separately.

C. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in utility areas in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated.

D. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings

removed prior to finishing.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Measure air temperature, surface temperature and relative humidity before start of

painting operations for each area. 2. Inspect cleaning and preparation of surfaces. Inspect paint and finish application for

scheduled material, color and sheen. 3. Verify specified dry film thickness (DFT) and coverage of each wall or coated area

with notched-type wet film thickness gage in accordance with ASTM D 4414. 4. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Coating Thickness Tests:

1. Should Architect or Owner have doubt about dry film thickness of coating applied, Architect may require Contractor to perform dry film thickness tests , utilizing a non-destructive electronic dry film thickness gage at locations determined by Architect, at Contractor's expense.



Documents.


A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.

B. After completing application of paints and coatings, clean glass, and paint-spattered

surfaces. Remove spattered paints and coatings by washing and scraping. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect Work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.7 SURFACES TO BE FINISHED

A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 3. Integral color masonry.

B. Paint the Following Surfaces: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.

1. Steel Doors (including Vision Light Frames), Steel Door Frames and Steel Window Frames: Latex, semi-gloss.

2. Gypsum Board: a. Areas indicted Epoxy in Finish Schedule: Epoxy, semi-gloss. b. Other Areas: Latex, semi-gloss.

3. Exterior Concrete Masonry or Concrete: Not Used 4. Interior Concrete Masonry or Concrete:

a. Areas indicted Epoxy in Finish Schedule: Epoxy, semi-gloss. b. All Other Areas: Latex, semi-gloss.

5. Steel Joists and Steel Decking: Latex dry fog, semi-gloss. 6. Galvanized or Shop-Primed Metal Fabricated Items: Latex, semi-gloss.

a. Miscellaneous angles, channels and plates. b. Ledge and shelf angles. c. Lintels. d. Steel ladders. e. Bollards. f. Supplemental support framing. g. Other items identified on Drawings.

C. Concrete Floors Scheduled for Sealed Concrete Finish: Apply sealed concrete finish where

indicated in Room Finish Schedule as specified in this Section.

D. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.


1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes and supports occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. a. Exposed piping shall include fuel (gas) piping on exterior of building and roof

area. b. Fuel piping shall be painted “yellow” from meter to each piece of equipment.

2. Paint all exposed ductwork and supports occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 4. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that

are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.

5. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

E. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment

before installing equipment.

3.8 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Galvanized Metals - Latex, Three (3) Coats: 1. Primer: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series; WFT 5.0 mils, DFT 2.0 mils per

coat. 2. Semi-Gloss: Two (2) Coats Sher-Cryl Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating; B66-350 Series,

WFT 6.0 mils, DFT 2.5 mils per coat. 3. Gloss: Two (2) Coats Sher-Cry Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-300 Series; WFT 6.0 mils,

DFT 2.5 mils per coat.

B. Ferrous Metals - Latex, Thee (3) Coats: 1. Primer: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer/ B66-310 Series; WFT 5.0 mils, DFT 2.0 mils. 2. Semi-Gloss: Two (2) Coats Sher-Cry Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating; B66-350 Series,

WFT 6.0 mils, DFT 2.5 mils per coat. 3. Gloss: Two (2) Coats Sher-Cry Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-300 Series; WFT 6.0 mils,

DFT 2.5 mils per coat.

3.9 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Galvanized Metal - Latex, Three (3) Coats:

1. Primer: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series; WFT 5.0 mils, DFT 2.0 mils per coat.

2. Semi-Gloss: Two (2) Coats Sher-Cryl Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating; B66-350 Series, WFT 6.0 mils, DFT 2.5 mils per coat.

3. Gloss: Two (2) Coats Sher-Cryl Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-300 Series; WFT 6.0 mils, DFT 2.5 mils per coat.

B. Ferrous Metals - Latex, Three (3) Coats:

1. Primer: Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series; WFT 5.0 mils, DFT 2.0 mils per coat.

2. Semi-Gloss: Two (2) Coats Pro-Cryl Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating; B66-350 Series, WFT 6.0 mils, DFT 2.5 mils per coat.

3. Gloss: Two (2) Coats Pro-Cryl Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-300 Series; WFT 6.0 mils, DFT 2.5 mils per coat.

C. Ferrous Metals - Latex Dry Fall, Three (3) Coats:

1. Primer: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish, B66W1; WFT 5.0 mils, DFT 2.5 mils per coat.


2. Eggshell: Two (2) Coats Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall, B42W2; WFT 7.0 mils, DFT 3.0 mils per coat.

D. Gypsum Board - Latex, Three (3) Coats:

1. Primer: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W8200; WFT 4.0 mils, DFT 1.1 mils. 2. Flat: Two (2) Coats ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30W200; WFT 4.0 mils, DFT

1.3 mils per coat. 3. Eggshell: Two (2) Coats ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20W2200 Series; WFT

4.0 mils, DFT 1.6 mils per coat. 4. Semi-Gloss: Two (2) Coats ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss; B31W2200

Series, WFT 4.0 mils, DFT 1.5 mils.

E. Gypsum Board - Epoxy Three (3) Coats: 1. Primer: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W8200; WFT 4.0 mils, DFT 1.1 mils. 2. Semi-Gloss: Two (2) Coats Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series/B60V25;

WFT 6.5 mils, DFT 2.5 mils per coat.

F. Concrete Masonry - Epoxy, 3 Coat: 1. Primer: PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler, B25W25; WFT 16.0 mils, DFT 8 mils. 2. Semi-Gloss: Two Coats Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series/B60V25; WFT

6.5 mils, DFT 2.5 mils.

G. Concrete Masonry - Latex, 3 Coat: 1. Primer: PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler, B25W25; WFT 16.0 mils, DFT 8 mils. 2. Semi-Gloss: Two Coats ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss; B31W2200 Series,

WFT 4.0 mils, DFT 1.5 mils.

END OF SECTION


PAINTS & COATINGS INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

PAINT & COATINGS APPLICATOR: Name: ___________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________


UPON COMPLETION OF APPLICATION PAINT APPLICATOR CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Applicator obtained a current copy of the manufacturer's published surface preparation and paint

application instructions for the specific surface and product being applied. 2. Applicator reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published surface preparation and paint

application instructions and requirements with Project Field Superintendent before start of application.

3. Applicator checked moisture content of substrates and found them in compliance with specified requirements.

4. Installer applied specified number of each type of paint or coating in accordance with the Contract Documents.

5. Applicator measured the wet film thickness (WFT) for each paint or coating type and found WFT in compliance with specified requirements.



10 1100 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0212 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES


VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufacturers 2. Tackboard.




1. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Masonry Units: Substrate for board installation. 2. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate for board installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procudures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data on markerboards and tackboards.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations and attachment to substrate.



B. Delvier materials in original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.



D. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to Proejct Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Visual Display Surfaces is based on the product

named. 1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Incorporated: www.claridgeproducts.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Bestrite: www.bestrite.com. 2. Newline Products, Inc.: www.newlineproduct.com. 3. Platinum Visual Systems: www.pvsusa.com.

2.4 TACKBOARD

A. Product: Fabricork.

B. Description: 1. Facing: Self-healing, soil resistant and washable vinyl covering laminated to 1/4 inch

thick self-healing cork laminated to Backing. 2. Backing: 1/4 inch thick hardboard. 3. Frame: 5/8 inch extruded aluminum with clear anodized finish.

C. Facing Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Install at locations indicated on Drawings. Secure units level and plumb.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect markerboard and tackboard installation, type, size, color and attachment to

substrate.

http://www.claridgeproducts.com/

http://www.bestrite.com/

http://www.newlineproduct.com/

http://www.pvsusa.com/




B. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract Docuements.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Clean at time of installation and just before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

10 1416 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1113 PLAQUE

SECTION 10 1416

PLAQUE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cast aluminum commemorative building wall plaque. 2. Plaque design drawing located at end of Section.




1. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Masonry Units: Plaque attachment substrate. 2. Section 10 1422 - Interior Signage: Plastic interior signs.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data indicating materials and details.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating layout, text, profiles and product components, including dimensions, anchorage and accessories.



B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original, unopened undamaged container with identification labels intact.




E. Store products protected from weather, temperature, and other harmful conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Plaque is based on the product named. 1. A.R.K. Architectural Signage Systems: www.arkramos.com.

http://www.arkramos.com/



comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. ASI-Modulex: www.asimodulex.com. 2. Best Sign Systems: www.bestsigns.com.

C. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

2.2 CAST PLAQUE

A. Material: Aluminum.

B. Dimensions: 24 inches high x 30 inches wide.

C. Border: Standard 512 design.

D. Letter Style: Selected by Architect.

E. Mounting Type: No. 4, concealed flush mount with threaded studs set in concrete or masonry with adhesive. No rosettes.

F. Artwork and Copy: Architect will provide layout and arrangement upon receipt of submittal

package. Signage companies’ shall be responsible for creating electronic files necessary to produce logos for the Plaque(s). 1. Name and location of Project. 2. Names of Board of Education Members. 3. Name of School District Superintendent. 4. Names of Board of Director Members. 5. Name of Architect and logo. 6. Name of Construction Manager and logo. 7. Date of Project Completion. 8. School logo.

G. Finishes:

1. Background Texture: Pebble. 2. Background Paint Color: Selected by Architect. 3. Borders, Letters and Raised Artwork: Satin.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION





http://www.asimodulex.com/

http://www.bestsigns.com/



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plaque in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. 1. Location: Indicated on Drawings. Verify location with Owner. 2. Mounting Height: Selected by Owner.

B. Install plaque level, plumb and at height indicated free from distortion or warp.

C. Install plaque after all interior work is complete and just before Substantial Completion.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect plaque location, mounting height and secure attachment to wall. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Repair scratches and other damage.

B. Remove temporary coverings and protection.

C. Clean plaque in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions just before Substantial Completion inspection.

3.5 PLAQUE DESIGN DRAWING

A. Plaque design drawing follows this Section.

END OF SECTION

10 1419 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0813 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 1419

DIMENSIONAL LETTERS SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cast aluminum letters.




1. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Mounting substrate for letters. 2. Section 04 7109 - Brick Veneer: Mounting substrate for letters. 3. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealant installed at letter mounting penetrations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete elevation and overall dimensions of letters and text. Indicate letter style and font. Include large-scale sections of typical cast letter. Show anchors, grounds, text layout and installation details.

C. Samples for Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturer’s color samples for Architect

initial color selection. Submit for each finish type and color on 6-inch long sections of extrusions.


A. Qualifications: 1. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating Products specified with minimum five

(5) years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in installing Products specified with minimum five (5)

years documented experience.



B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original, unopened undamaged container with identification labels intact.

C. Store products protected from weather, temperature, and other harmful conditions.



A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements befor preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Indicate recorded measurements on final shop drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Dimensional Letter Signage is based on the product named. 1. A.R.K. Ramos Architectural Signage Systems: www.arkramos.com.


Permitted.

2.2 ALUMINUM LETTERS

A. Aluminum Castings: Provide castings of alloy and temper recommended by fabricator for casting process used and for finish specified.

B. Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters

with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles free from pitts, or other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements specified for finish, style and size. 1. Style: Futura No. 501 2. Height:

a. (South Elevation): 12 inch b. (North Elevation): 10 inch

3. Mounting: provide manufacturers recommended mounting for 1.5 inch projection from wall surface

C. Finish: Type F-3; manufacturer’s standard thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel

primer/topcoat system applied to face and edge, medium gloss. 1. Color: Selected by Architect.

D. Signage Text and Location: Dimensional letter signage text and location indicated on

Drawings.

E. Electrical requirement:

1. Back lit Reverse Channel Fabricated letters. Internally lit with LEDs, poly carbonate back and UL approved. a. Light fixture: Waterproof Dimmable Super Flat LED Rope Light with 5050 LEDs,

60/m, by 20-meter reel (24V DC) (Soft White) b. Daylight white, Brightness-403 lumens per meter, Led spacing - 0.66’’ c. Length: 65.60 ft, Width: 0.43 in, Height: 0.19 in d. Average Lifetime: 50,000 hours

F. Accessories: Provide accessories and materials required for letter mounting.

2.3 ALUMINUM SIGNAGE (COMETS LOGO)

A. Aluminum Castings: Provide castings of alloy and temper recommended by fabricator for casting process used and for finish specified.

http://www.arkramos.com/


B. Signage: Form individual Logo by casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces,

sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles free from pits, or other defects w/ backing ribs support and back lit fixtures ledges. Cast lugs into back designed subject and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements specified for finish, style and size. 1. Signage: Comets logo 2. Size: 1/4” minimum thickness x 5’-6” Height x 12’-8” width x 4” return edges. 3. Mounting: Per manufacture recommendation.

C. Finish: Type F-3; manufacturer’s standard thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel

primer/topcoat system applied to face and edge, medium gloss. 1. Color: Selected by Architect. Multiple colors will be selected.

D. Accessories: Provide accessories and materials required for signage mounting.

E. Electrical requirement:

1. Back lit Reverse Channel Fabricated letters. Internally lit with LEDs, poly carbonate back and UL approved. a. Light fixture: Waterproof Dimmable Super Flat LED Rope Light with 5050 LEDs,

60/m, by 20-meter reel (24V DC) (Soft White) b. Daylight white, Brightness-403 lumens per meter, Led spacing - 0.66’’ c. Length: 65.60 ft, Width: 0.43 in, Height: 0.19 in d. Average Lifetime: 50,000 hours

F. Signage location indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that backing material for mounting letters is in place.





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mount dimensional letters to backing substrate using standard fastening methods recommended by manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting and substrate construction. 1. Projected Mounting: Mount letters at projection distance form wall surface specified.

B. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.


C. Seal penetrations of mounting studs as specified in Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate location of backing material for letter mounting.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect exterior signage mounting, letter style, finish, color, size, spacing and text. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not in compliance with Contract

Documents.


A. Clean letters immediately after installation and protect from damage.

B. Clean letters just before Substantial Completion inspection.

END OF SECTION

10 1422 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 0315 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 1422

INTERIOR SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Door signs identifying designed rooms or spaces. 2. ADA signs. 3. Tactile exit signs.




1. Section 10 1416 - Aluminum Plaque: Plaque signage. 2. Section 10 1419 - Exterior Dimensional Letters: Exterior building signage. 3. Division 23 - Mechanical: Mechanical Identification 4. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical Identification.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR

part 36.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on signage materials, standard sign types and dimensions.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate each sign location referenced from door number, styles, lettering font, sign message text, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.

D. Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer’s complete set of signage color samples for

Architect initial color selection.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Handicapped accessible accessories shall comply with ADA and ANSI/ICC A117.1.




B. Deliver to site in original unopened packaging materials necessary to protect finishes clearly labeled with manufacturer name and product model and description.

C. Package signage items; label and identify with door opening code to match approved

signage schedule.




F. Store in packaging until installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Interior Signage is based on the product named. 1. Mohawk Sign Systems, Incorporated: www.mohawksign.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. ASI Sign Systems: www.asisign.com. 2. Bayuk Graphic Systems, Inc: www.bayukgraphics.com. 3. Best Manufacturing Company: www.bestsigns.com.

2.2 GRAPHIC PROCESS

A. All signs shall be manufactured using Graphic Process Series 200A Sand Carved Process using Format D. 1. Tactile characters shall be raised the required 1/32 inches from sign face.

a. Glue-on letters or etched backgrounds are not acceptable. 2. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Braille shall be separated 1/2 inch

from the corresponding raised characters or symbols. Grade 2 Braille translation provided by signage manufacturer.

3. Letters, numbers and symbols shall contrast with their background, either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. Characters and background shall have a non-glare finish.

B. Plaque material shall be melamine plastic pressure laminate approximately1/8 inch thick

with contracting core color which provides resistance to abrasion, stains, alcohol, solvents, boiling water, and heat. 1. Material shall be NEMA rated and have flammability and smoke values that meet the

standards for flammability of interior materials.

C. Background: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s actual color samples.

http://www.mohawksign.com/

http://www.asisign.com/

http://www.bestsigns.com/


D. Letterform: Helvetica upper case letters and numbers. Room numbers and names will be verified with Owner and will be identified by Architect during submittal review. 1. Refer to Signage column in Door Schedule for door text at each door referenced by

Door Number. 2. All other door message text at other door locations will be determined and verified

with Owner as previously specified.

E. Size: 1. Room Numbers: 1 inch. 2. Lettering for Room ID Signs: 1 inch. 3. Handicapped Symbol Size: 4 inches. 4. Braille: Standard Grade 2, 1/2 inch below copy. 5. Corners: 1/2 inch radius.

F. Copy position: CC (centered/centered).

2.3 SIGN TYPES

A. Type B - Room Identification Sign: Design M-311 with room number and function with Grade 2 Braille. 1. Plaque Size: 6 inches x 6 inches 2. Graphic Design:

a. Room Number b. Room Name c. Grade 2 Braille

B. Type E - Unisex Restroom Room Sign: Design MS-5 with 4 inch accessibility and unisex

gender symbols with text stating "RESTROOM" placed directly below followed by Grade 2 Braille. 1. Plaque Size: 8 inches x 8 inches. 2. Graphic Design:

a. Symbols: Gender / Handicapped / Gender b. “RESTROOM” c. Grade 2 Braille

C. Type F - Tactile Exit Sign (Required by IBC Section 1011.3): Design M-1000-M311 Exit

Sign stating "EXIT," tactile characters complying with ANSI A117.1, with Grade 2 Braille. 1. Plaque Size: 6 inches x 6 inches. 2. Graphic Design:

a. “EXIT” b. Grade 2 Braille

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION







3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions ADA and ANSI/ICC A117.'

B. Install signs after doors are finished, in locations indicated.

C. Provide high pressure laminate backing plate on back side of glass when signs are installed on glass sidelight.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect interior sign types, locations, mounting hieghts, numbers and text, finish and

color. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

10 2813- 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1009 TOILET ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 2813

TOILET ACCESSORIES

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Accessories for toilet rooms. 2. Grab bars.




1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for attachment of accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):

1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR part 36.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council.


1. ASTM A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

2. ASTM B 456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.




A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Handicapped accessible accessories shall comply with ADA and ANSI/ICC A117.1.


A. Section 01 6200 – Product Options: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.








1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling

supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals:

B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide one (1) year manufacturer warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Toilet Accessories is based on the product

named. 1. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. A J Washroom Accessories: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Incorporated: www.americanspecialties.com 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Incorporated: www.bobrick.com. 4. Gamco: www.gamcousa.com

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturer: All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.

B. Accessories: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with

anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

C. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.

D. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for

component and substrate.

http://www.bradleycorp.com/

http://www.ajwashroom.com/

http://www.americanspecialties.com/

http://www.bobrick.com/

http://www.gamcousa.com/


2.3 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B 456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

C. Galvanizing for Items other than Sheet: ASTM A 123 to 1.3 oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous

metal and fastening devices.

D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. TA1 - Paper Towel Dispenser: Owner Furnished Contractor Installed.

B. TA2 - Toilet Paper Dispenser: Owner Furnished Contractor Installed.

D. TA4 - Soap Dispenser: Satin-finish stainless steel, surface mounted, vandal resistant filler hole cover and sight gauge. Push-in-corrosion-resistant liquid soap valve. 1. Capacity: 40 ounces liquid soap. 2. Model: 6562.

F. TA6 - Framed Fixed Tilt Handicapped Mirror: Stainless Steel, 18 gage frame, 20 gage

back, 1/4 inch tempered glass; 18 gage concealed wall mounting hanger, 24 inches wide x 36 inches high. 1. Model: 740-2436.

K. TA11 - Mop and Broom Holder: Stainless steel, 22 gage with 3 spring activated rubber cam holders, 24 inch long, surface mounted. 1. Model: 9953.

Q. TA17 - Napkin Disposal: Stainless steel, 22 gage, cabinet, push flap door and 1-1/2 gallon removable waste container with tumbler lock, 10-3/4 inches wide, 15-1/8 inches high, 4 inches deep. Surface mounted. 1. Model: 4722-15.

2.5 GRAB BARS

A. GB1 - Grab Bar - 36 Inch: Stainless steel, 18 gage, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, 36 inches long, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Model: 8122-001; safety grip with satin finish.

B. GB2 - Grab Bar - 42 Inch: Stainless steel, 18 gage, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, 42

inches long, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Model: 8122-001; safety grip with satin finish.


C. GB9 - Grab Bar-18 Inch: Stainless steel, 18 gage, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, 18 inches

long, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Model: 8122-001; safety grip with satin finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 2. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' published instructions.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

1. Install grab bars to withstand 250 pound pull or load for 15 minutes.

C. Mounting Heights and Locations: Comply with ADA and ANSI/ICC A117.1 requirements.


contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect accessory installations, types, locations, clearances and attachment to

structure. 2. Inspect installations for compliance with ADA and accessibility standard required

mounting heights and locations. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and




END OF SECTION

10 4415 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1113 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

SECTION 10 4415

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets, non-rated and fire-rated.




1. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Cabinet mounting substrate.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):

1. ADA; Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR part 36.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Useable Buildings


C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to NFPA 10.

B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by UL (FPED) for the purpose specified and

indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: Provide extinguisher capacity, rating and operational features. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet materials, finish, configuration, physical dimensions

and installation in wall.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. 1. Maintenance Data: Provide test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification

requirements.



A. Section 01 6200 – Product Options: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.


identification labels intact.







A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of

extinguisher ingredients.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets is based on the

product named. 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Company: www.larsensmfg.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. JL Industries, Incorporated: www.jindustries.com. 2. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage.

1. Model: MP10. 2. UL Class: 4A-60B:C. 3. Size: 10 pounds. 4. Finish: Baked enamel. 5. Inspection Tag: As required by local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet.

B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.

1. Series: Architectural. 2. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Extinguisher Model: 2-1/2 inch projection.

http://www.larsensmfg.com/

http://www.jindustries.com/

http://www.potterroemer.com/


a. Non-Rated: 2409-6R. b. Fire-Rated: Flame-Shield FS-2409-6R.

C. Door: Vertical-duo glazed type. Formed steel sheet, reinforced for flatness and rigidity.

Hinge door for 180 degree opening with continuous hinge. Provide self-adjusting roller catch and door handle.

D. Door Glazing: Plastic, clear, 1/8 inch thick acrylic. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.

E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.

F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.

G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Manufacturer standard white baked enamel.

H. Finish of Cabinet Interior: Manufacturer standard white baked enamel.

I. Cabinet Signage: Factory applied Red die cut Vertical lettering on metal section of door

spelling “FIRE EXTINGUISHER.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions.


conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 2. Verify locations of fire rated walls.





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 10 and at locations indicated

on Drawings. 1. Provide fire-rated cabinets at fire-rated walls.

B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, at dimension from finished floor to top of

cabinet required by ADA, ANSI/ICC A117.1 and local handicapped accessibility requirements.

C. Secure rigidly in place.

D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.


E. Each Fire Extinguisher provided shall be complete with “Inspection Tag” as required and approved by local Authority Have Jurisdiction. In accordance with NFPA 10, unit(s) shall be inspected, charged, dated and initialed by Contractor preparing Extinguisher ready for use.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect fie extinguisher and cabinet installation, attachment to wall construction,

cabinet type and finish, extinguisher type, location and mounting height. 2. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and



Documents.

END OF SECTION

11 6000 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 05/06 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 6000 BWA N14041

LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Connection to utilities. 2. Service fittings and outlets.


1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 00 7213 - General Conditions, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.


1. Division 15 - Plumbing: Connections to equipment. 2. Division 16 - Electrical: Connections to equipment.


A. Work by Laboratory Equipment Supplier: 1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures and fittings specified within Laboratory

Equipment casework complete with all accessories required for a complete operational system.

2. Remove all debris, dirt and rubbish accumulated as a result of installation of this equipment, leaving area broom clean.

B. Work by Division 15:

1. Furnish, install and connect service lines, drain lines and piping within equipment and fume hoods, in service turrets or tunnels, through, under, or along backs of working surfaces as indicated by Manufacturer's published instructions and Drawings.

2. Furnish, install and connect ductwork from fume hood to blowers and blowers to final point of discharge to building exterior.

3. Furnish, install and connect vents and special piping required by local codes, even though not specifically indicated on Drawings.

4. Furnish, install and connect vents and special piping required by local codes, even though not specifically indicated on Drawings.

C. Work by Division 16:

1. Furnish, install and connect rigid or flexible conduit, wire, pull wire, fittings and special electrical equipment and accessories including boxes, receptacles.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide equipment dimensions and construction, equipment

capacities, physical dimensions, utility and service requirements and locations.

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate equipment locations, large scale plans, elevations, cross sections, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, clearances required.

3. Samples for Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturer’s color samples for Architect initial color selection.

4. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience

indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

B. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. 1. Operation Data: Include description of equipment operation, adjusting, and

testing required. 2. Maintenance Data: Identify system maintenance requirements and local

spare part sources. 3. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed utility

connections 4. Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner’s name

and registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.


A. Single Source Responsibility: All laboratory equipment covered by this Specification and accompanying Drawings shall be manufactured or furnished by one manufacturer and supplied under his direction to eliminate any divided responsibility.

B. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

C. Pre-Installation Meetings:

1. Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination: Procedures for pre-installation meetings.

2. Convene a pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.

3. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section. 4. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related

Work. 5. Agenda:

a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of building where equipment will be installed.


b. Review laboratory equipment items, components and their requirements.

c. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. d. Review laboratory equipment installation drawings, instructions and

utility connection requirements. e. Review and finalize construction schedule related to laboratory

equipment and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

f. Review required field coordination, inspections, testing and certifying. g. Review safety precautions relating to laboratory equipment installation

operations.


A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.


identification labels intact after wet operations in building are completed. C. Accept Products on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage. Return



E. Project Field Superintendent shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery to

Project Site, determine Product conformance with specified requirements and reject Products not complying with specifications. Project Field Superintendent shall direct that non-complying Products be removed from Project Site immediately.

F. Store completed Laboratory Equipment and Casework in a ventilated place,

protected from the weather, with relative humidity therein of 50 percent or less at 70 degrees F.

G. Protect sanded and finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling

and installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering.


A. Environmental Requirements: During and after installation of Work of this Section, maintain same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.

B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication

and indicated measurements on shop drawings.


1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate dimensions, weights, required utilities and support requirements for equipment and fixtures installed within laboratory equipment casework.

B. Coordinate with other trades performing installations within casework to provide for

a complete concealed installation.

C. Rough-Ins: Rough-ins have been established based on the specified laboratory equipment . If these must be relocated because of dimensional changes by the successful supplier, supplier will be responsible for charges incurred.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.

B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide 1 year manufacturer warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WATER AND GAS SERVICE FIXTURES

A. Vandal resistant design of solid cast brass without tubing or soldering.

All threaded connections that will not require field service shall be secured with a suitable adhesive so as to be non-removable.

All Goosenecks and spouts shall be constructed of heavy duty pipe or tubing that is sufficient to resist bending and breakage.

Faucet bodies and turret bases shall be provided with locking pins or other means to prevent the fixture from being turned on the work surface.

Outlet fittings (such as aerators or serrated hose ends) shall either be of Vandal-Resistant design or shall be secured in place with an adhesive.

Index buttons shall be tamperproof. Each fitting shall resist turning, bending, breakage, and unintended disassembly through acts of vandalism or physical abuse.

B. Special chemical and corrosion resistant epoxy powder coat finish over sand

blasted surface. Chrome finish Not Permitted. C. ADA compliant fixtures provided with wrist blades and ball valve gas cocks. D. Fixtures provided with aerator unless noted on schedule or elevations. E. Provide proper index buttons.


F. All Service Fittings shall conform to SEFA 7-2010, Recommended Practices

G. Water fittings provided with serrated hose ends shall be furnished with vacuum breakers to prevent contamination of the potable water system through backflow or back-siphonage.

H. Fittings for laboratory gases shall be furnished with ball valves and shall also be provided with internal check valves to prevent backflow through the valve.

I. Water fittings shall have valve packing nuts secured with set screws. Integral Vacuum Breaker covers shall be secured with screws that may be removed only by maintenance personnel.

J. Provide ball valve with chrome plated ball and PTFE seals. Handle shall require no

more than 5 ft-lbf to operate. Valve is factory tested at 125 PSI. Maximum working pressure is 75 PS.

K. Water Faucets and Valves.

1. Provide units that comply with SEFA 7 - 2010, Laboratory Service Fittings

2. Recommended Practices, and also complying with ANSI/ASME A112.18.1 - 2005 and certified by CSA International under CAN/CSA B.125.1 - 05.

3. Provide units fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide fittings complete with threaded mounting shanks, locknuts, and washers. Include necessary flanges, escutcheons, extension rods, etc.

5. Provide units complying with ADA accessible requirements where indicated on Drawings or Equipment List.

6. One Faucet shall be provided with 4" wrist-blade handles at ADA sinks.

7. All Water faucets shall be provided with Aerators unless specifically noted to have Serrated Hose Ends.

8. If Serrated Hose Ends are required on Water Faucets, provide unit with Vacuum Breaker.

9. Water Faucets shall have self-contained renewable compression valve units with stainless steel valve seats. Compression unit valve stem shall be

sealed with molded TFE stem packing to prevent leakage. Provide color coded index buttons.

L. Quality Assurance All water faucets and gas fixtures shall be fully assembled and factory tested prior to shipment.

M. All Water and Gas Service Fixtures shall have Black Powder Coat Epoxy Finish.


N. Multiple Service Water/Gas Fixture Combination Faucets.

Watersaver Faucet Co. No. VR5300WSA

Combination Cold Water/Gas Fixture with Aerator

Black powder coat epoxy finish

Color coded Nylon Handles for cold water

Vandal-Resistant

Watersaver Faucet Co. No. VR5800WSA

Combination Hot Water/Cold Water/Gas Fixture with

Aerator

Black powder coat epoxy finish

Color coded Nylon Handles for hot and cold water

Vandal-Resistant

O. Drain Fittings

1. Sink Fittings

Sinks shall be provided with 1-1/2" Dia. x 3" threaded Polypropylene Sink Outlet with Locknut, Removable Disc Strainer, and Sink Stopper.

2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Fume Hood

1. The following Equipment List is provided to accurately describe specific Technical Products shown on the Drawings and Equipment List

92204-ADA SHELDON 4’ AIR FOIL FUME HOOD

Hood superstructure shall be air foil design incorporating air foils at the entire perimeter of the opening of the hood. This design will provide for efficient removal of all fumes, both heavy and light, with the least amount of turbulence of air entering the hood.

The exterior of the superstructure shall be fabricated of cold roll furniture steel finished in color selected. Exterior finish shall be chemical resistant two part epoxy finish. The interior shall be Polyresin. The inner lining and exterior finished panels are attached to a framework constructed of 16 and 18 gauge steel. This framework is welded and bolted together to form a rigid assembly and is painted with a black rust inhibitive finish. All steel parts are tested with an iron phosphate bath to resist corrosion and insure adhesion to finish materials. The inner lining material is securely fastened to this frame assembly.

Vertical sliding sash is constructed of 18 gauge steel, welded into a rigid frame, and has removable glass retainers for reglazing. A flush, full length


finger lift is located at the bottom of the sash. Nylon glides are located on each side. Sash guides are stainless steel. The sash is glazed with 7/32" clear laminated safety glass set in a “U” shaped neoprene channel. The sash is counter balanced using a single weight at the rear of the hood, and is attached to the sash with 1/16", 7x7 plastic coated aircraft-type cable; total diameter, 105". Cables ride on six 2" diameter nylon ball bearing pulleys.

Base cabinet is wood with a 1" thick, dished, black epoxy resin work surface.

Electrical services include fluorescent vapor proof light fixture (bulbs not included), light switch, blower switch, and (2) duplex electrical outlets.

Plumbing services include (1) 3” x 6” epoxy resin cupsink, (1) remote controlled cold water gooseneck faucet, (1) remote controlled gas

Unit to be in compliance with ADA guidelines

2. Hood Exhaust Ratings:

a. 1250 CFM @ 100 LFM b. .34 Static Pressure at Fume Hood Duct Collar. {(1) 10-inch duct}

B. 25100- Sheldon Acid / Flammable Storage Cabinet

1. 43" L. X 18" D. X 65" H. Cabinets double wall construction throughout with (1-1/2") insulating air-space between inner and outer walls; hinged doors with 3 point latch and lock, two adjustable shelves of reinforced galvanized steel; (2") deep, pan-type bottom; screened flame arrestor vent on each side and threaded to accept (2") standard pipe. Finish is bright, safety yellow and labeled in red "Flammable Liquid--Keep Fire Away". Cabinets meet or exceed National Fire Protection Association's Combustible Liquids Code 30 and L.S.H.A. safety requirements. (45 gallon capacity)

C. Combo EyeWash/ Shower - Guardian

1. Model: GBF1909SSH.

D. Fire Blanket with Case 1. Flinn Scientific, Model: SE3006

a. Case size: 18”W. x 16”H x .4 ½” D.” b. Woolen blanket, size 62” x 70”

E. Spill Control Center 1. Flinn Scientific, Model: AP6448


F. Google Sanitizer 1. Flinn Scientific, Model: SE1000, key lock allows the doors to be locked

during sterilization. Two safety door switches automatically shut off the UV light source should one of the doors be accidentally opened. The light viewing screen mounted on the front of the cabinet confirms UV light is being generatedconstructed of 24-gauge steel with a white baked enamel finish. A heavy-duty 8' (96") neoprene cord is provided. Cabinet dimensions are 28 1/2" H x 261/4" W x 10 1/4" D

G. Rough-In: Provide frames, anchors, supports, accessories and closure trim;

appropriate to scheduled equipment for a complete operational installation.

2.03 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FIXTURES

A. Boxes: Steel B. Receptacles: Brown, 20 amp, 125V, 3 wire, GFCI type, heavy-duty industrial

grade. C. Cover plates: Stainless steel

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate laboratory equipment and casework to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated for specified Equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates

and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that rough-in frames, anchors and supports are accurately placed.

C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect

satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for

correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.


B. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required, using

concealed shims. Where laboratory equipment and casework abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit.

C. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly

without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Anchor equipment securely in place. E. Touch-up minor damaged surfaces caused during installation. Replace damaged

components.


A. Section 01450 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections 1. Inspect laboratory equipment installation, equipment types, function,

dimensions, finishes and colors. 2. Test operation of each equipment item. 3. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor Test and

Inspection Reports and submit to Architect.


3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation.

END OF SECTION

12 3555 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1010 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK


WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Manufacturers 2. Materials 3. Construction

4. Finish 5. Work Surfaces 6. Sinks 7. Fittings 8. Equipment


1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 00 7213 - General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.


1. Section 09 6506 - Rubber Cove Base: Interior finish base. 2. Division 22 – Plumbing: Connection of equipment. 3. Division 26 – Electrical

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. ADA; Americans with Disabilities Act; Federal Register, Volume 56, No. 144 28 CFR

part 36. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI/HPVA HP-1 1994 – Hardwood Plywood 2. ANSI A208.1-1999 – Particleboard Plywood 3. ANSI A208.2-1994 – MDF Plywood


1. ASTM D552 - Bending Test

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 30 – National Fire Protection Association 2. NFPA-45 - National Fire Protection Association

E. Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA):

1. SEFA 3 – Work Surfaces Recommended Practice 2. SEFA 8 – Casework

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed,

including bottoms of cabinets more than 48 inches above floor, and surfaces visible in open cabinets.


B. Semi-exposed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as interiors of

cabinets, shelves, dividers, interiors and sides of drawers, and interior faces of doors. Tops of cabinets 72 inches or more above the floor are defined as semi-exposed.

C. Concealed Portions of Cabinets: Surfaces usually visible after installation, including

sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and ends and backs that are placed directly against walls or other cabinets.


A. Work by Laboratory Equipment Supplier:

1. Furnish, deliver to building, uncrate, set in place, level and anchor casework, fixtures and equipment indicated in Laboratory Equipment Schedule.

2. Provide plumbing fixtures and fittings specified within Laboratory Equipment casework complete with accessories required for a complete operational system.

3. Provide filler panels and scribes required for finished installation. 4. Remove debris, dirt and rubbish accumulated as a result of installation of this

equipment, leaving area broom clean.

B. Work defined under Division 22 - Plumbing: 1. Provide, including final connection to service lines, drain lines and piping within

equipment and fume hoods, in service turrets or tunnels, through, under, or along backs of working surfaces as indicated by Manufacturer's published instructions and Drawings.

2. Provide, including final connection to vents and special piping required by local codes, even though not specifically indicated on Drawings.

3. Provide, including final connection to vents and special piping required by local codes,

C. Work defined under Division 26 - Electrical:

1. Provide, including final connection to rigid or flexible conduit, wire, pull wire, fittings and special electrical equipment and accessories including boxes, receptacles.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


a. Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for each type of casework. Provide data indicating compliance with SEFA 8 Standard.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Submit shop drawings for furniture assemblies showing plans, elevations, ends,

cross-sections, service run spaces, location and type of service fittings. 1) Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-

scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 2) Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips,

including concealed blocking and reinforcement. 3) Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and

other items installed in architectural woodwork. b. Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved. c. Provide roughing-in drawings for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical as

necessary. 3. Samples for Selection: Submit complete set of manufacturer’s color samples for

Architect initial color selection. a. Samples with applied transparent finishes to be provided upon request. b. Solid surface color samples to be provided upon request.



1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following: a. Record actual locations of concealed utility connections.

2. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, procedures for stain removal, reparing surface and suggested schedule for cleaning.

3. Operation Data: Include description of equipment operation, adjusting, and testing required.



A. Single Source Responsibility: Laboratory equipment covered by this Section and accompanying Drawings shall be manufactured or furnished by one manufacturer and supplied under his direction.

B. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum five (5) years documented experience. a. Shop must employ skilled woodworkers who custom fabricate products similar

to those required for this project and whose products have a record of successful performance.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

C. Pre-Installation Meetings:

1. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordiantion: Procedures for pre-installation meetings.

2. Convene a pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.

3. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section. 4. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related Work. 5. Agenda:

a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of building where equipment will be installed.

b. Review laboratory equipment items, components and their requirements. c. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. d. Review laboratory equipment installation drawings, instructions and utility

connection requirements. e. Review and finalize construction schedule related to laboratory equipment and

verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

f. Review required field coordination, inspections, testing and certifying. g. Review safety precautions relating to laboratory equipment installation

operations.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact after wet operations in building are completed.






F. Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, painting and other wet work is

completed, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Store completed Laboratory Equipment and Casework in a ventilated place, protected

from the weather, with relative humidity therein of 50 percent or less at 70 degrees F. G. Protect sanded and finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and

installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: During and after installation of Work of this Section, maintain same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.


indicated measurements on shop drawings. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support woodwork by

field measurements before being enclosed. 2. Where field dimensions cannot be made without delaying the work, project general

contractor will guarantee dimensions in order to proceed with manufacturing of woodwork.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals. B. Warranty: Provide one (1) year manufacturer warranty against defects in material and

workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Wood Laboratory Casework is based on the

product named. 1. Diversified Woodcrafts, Inc.: http://www.diversifiedwoodcrafts.com /

Flinn Scientific, Inc.: https://www.flinnsci.com/lab-furniture-cabinets/ 1.0 Diversified 2946K, Combination Classroom Table/Lab Bench. 1.1 Diversified 2946KF-L, ADA Forward Vision Combination Classroom Table/Lab

Bench. 1.2 Diversified 1116K Instructors Work Station/ Desk.

http://www.diversifiedwoodcrafts.com/

https://www.flinnsci.com/lab-furniture-cabinets/



compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1 Kewaunee Scientific Corporation: www.kewaunee.com 2 ALC/ Collegedale: www.alc-collegedale.com/info_center.html 3 Fisher Hamilton L.L.C.: www.hamiltonlab.com 4 Leonard Peterson & Co., Inc.: www.lpco.com 5 Sheldon Laboratory Systems: www.sheldonlabs.com 6 TMI Systems Design Corporation: www.tmisystems.com

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Material shall be selected so that the finished installation provides an attractive and harmonious appearance. 1. Exterior casework surfaces exposed to view after installation, and cabinet interior

surfaces, shall be White Maple. 2. Solid woods and veneers exposed to view after completion of installation shall be of

color and graining in conformance with the normally accepted standards required of the scientific laboratory equipment industry.

B. Solid Woods: Solid woods shall be carefully and thoroughly air-dried, then kiln dried in

humidity controlled kilns to a moisture content of 4-1/2%. 1. Kiln dried lumber shall then be tempered to a moisture content of 6% before use.

Moisture content shall be maintained throughout production.

C. Plywoods: Plywood shall be hardwood plywood. Softwoods such as Fir or Pine are not permitted. 1. Veneer Core Plywood: Veneer core plywood shall be either 7-ply (3/4”) or 9-ply (1”)

and shall be compliant with ANSI/HPVA HP-1 2004. 2. Composition Core Plywood: Composition core plywood shall be 3-ply and shall be

compliant with ANSI A208.1-1999, and/or ANSI A208.2-1994. 3. Face Veneers: Plywood face veneers shall be Grade A, plain sliced, slip matched,

White Maple on face, and Grade 1, White Maple on back. D. Banding: Plywood panels shall be edge banded as specified with 3 mm hardwood

edgebanding to match the plywood veener.

E. Hardboard: Hardboard shall be a wood fiber/resinous combination formed with heat and pressure into sheets providing a hard, smooth surface.

F. Glass: Glass used for framed sliding and swinging doors shall be 1/8" float glass. Glass

used for unframed sliding doors, shall be 1/4" float glass.

G. Hardware and Trim to 1. Drawer and Door Pulls: Drawer and door pulls shall be mounted on 4" centers,

offering a comfortable hand grip, and be securely fastened to doors and drawers. a. 5/16” diameter chrome plated brass rod with a brushed satin finish. b. Plastic pulls (molded or extruded), or a design not compatible for usage by the

handicapped shall be unacceptable. 2. Flush Pulls: Flush pulls for sliding doors shall be satin finish chrome, providing a

recessed finger grip. Finger holes or slots machined into doors shall be unacceptable. 3. Hinges: Hinges shall be the five (5) knuckle, satin finish stainless steel, institutional,

offset type for all swinging doors. Hinges shall be 2-3/4" long, and secured to cabinet and doors with flathead screws, so applied to withstand a weight load of 150 lbs. minimum.

http://www.kewaunee.com/

http://www.alc-collegedale.com/info_center.html

http://www.hamiltonlab.com/

http://www.lpco.com/


4. Locks: a. Disk Tumbler: Locks when shown or called for shall be a 5-disc tumbler with

heavy duty interchangeable cylinder. b. Exposed lock noses shall be dull nickel (satin) plated and stamped with

identifying numbers. c. Locks shall have capacity for 2000 primary key changes. d. Master key one level with the potential of 10 different, non-interchangeable

master key groups. 5. Roller Catches: Roller Catches shall have a spring-loaded polyethylene roller and a

steel strike plate. 6. Elbow Catches: Elbow catches and strike plates shall be cast aluminum with bronze

finish. 7. Drawer Slides: Drawer slides shall be rated at 100 pounds minimum consisting of two

(2) steel epoxy coated sections providing a quiet, smooth operation on nylon rollers. Case channels shall maintain alignment of drawer. Slides shall wrap under drawer sides for additional support. Drawer shall be removable without the use of tools.

8. Leg Shoes: Leg shoes shall be provided on all table legs. Shoes shall be 2-1/2" high and a pliable, black vinyl material. a. Use of a leg shoe which does not conceal leveling or anchoring device will not

be acceptable. 9. Floor Glides: Floor glides, where specified for movable open-leg tables, shall be a

non-marring material at least 1" diameter and shall have at least a 5/8" height adjustment. a. Use of metal buttons will not be acceptable.

10. Dowels: Dowels used to join frames and panels shall be fluted hardwood not less than 8 mm in diameter.

11. Shelf Support Clips: Shelf support clips shall be twin pin type for mounting on interior of cabinet end panels. Clips shall be corrosion resistant and shall retain shelves from accidental removal and tipping. Shelves shall be adjustable on 32 mm centers. a. Surface mounted metal support strips and clips subject to corrosion are not

acceptable. 12. Sink Supports: Sink Supports, where required, shall be of a cradle type consisting of

two (2) 1-1/4" x 1-3/4" horizontal cleats and adjustable leveling bolts or glides. Horizontal cleats shall be supported by two 3/4" x 2-1/2" hardwood plywood cleats attached to the cabinet end panels, or by four (4) 1/4" steel rods attached to the cabinet top frame.

2.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. General Requirements: Cabinets shall be full overlay construction with 3/4” thick door and

drawer fronts. Door and drawer fronts shall occupy a plane extending 3/4" past the plane of the front of the cabinet body. Edges of door and drawer fronts shall be square. Doors and drawer fronts shall overlay the face of the cabinet leaving minimal reveals between doors and drawers of approximately 1/8”. Cabinet end panels shall be finished for the purpose of future relocation unless cabinet is selected with the “unfinished end” option. Exposed grain for doors and drawer fronts and shall run vertical be matched to door or drawer front above or below.

B. Base Cabinets: 1. End Panels, Bottoms, and Shelves: Cabinet end panels shall be 3/4" thick White

Maple veener core plywood edge banded on exposed edges. End panels shall be multiple doweled, glued, and screwed to top frame members, intermediate rails, and bottoms. Cupboard bottoms shall be 3/4" thick White Maple veneer core plywood edge banded on exposed edge. Cupboard base cabinet shelves shall be full-width


adjustable, 3/4" thick White Maple veneer core plywood edge banded on exposed edge. Integrally joined parts shall result in a totally enclosed cabinet.

2. Backs: Cabinet backs shall be 1/4" thick hardboard, dadoed into end panels and securely fastened to cabinet bottom and top back rail. Backs that are attached to end panels with cleats shall be unacceptable.

3. Full Top Frame: Cabinet top frame shall consist of a front rail, a back rail and two side rails. Front rail shall be 3-1/8" x 1" hardwood with 3mm White Maple facing. Back rail shall be 2-1/2" x 3/4" hardwood plywood. Side rails shall be 1-3/4" x 3/4" hardwood and shall be screwed to end panels and front and back rails.

3. Drawers with Hardboard Bottom: Drawer sides, back, and sub-front shall be 1/2" thick, 9-ply Birch plywood. Drawer heads shall be 3/4" thick, White Maple, composite core plywood. Dovetail joint shall be used to attach the drawer sub-front and drawer back a. Drawer bottoms shall be 1/4" thick hardboard, set and hot-melt glued into 1/4" grooves, four sides. Each drawer shall have one pull mounted horizontally, drawers over 24" long shall have two pulls. Drawer sub-fronts attached to drawer sides with a lock-tenon joint shall be unacceptable.

4. Doors: a. Swinging doors shall be 3/4", White Maple, composite core plywood edge

banded on all four edges, mounted on cabinet with one (1) pair of offset hinges and shall be latched with a roller catch. Double doors without locks shall have a roller catch on each door. Double doors with locks shall have an elbow catch mounted on the left-hand door and the lock and a roller catch mounted on the right-hand door. Each door shall have one pull mounted vertically.

b. Sliding doors shall be 3/4" thick, White Maple, composite core plywood, edge banded on the vertical edges. Doors shall be suspended from adjustable hangers and glide on nylon rollers riding on a double extruded aluminum track attached to the top of the cabinet. Each door shall have one recessed pull.

C. Counter Mounted and Wall Mounted Cabinets:

1. Cabinet end panels shall be 3/4" thick White Maple veneer core plywood edge banded on front and bottom edge. Tops and bottoms shall be 1" thick White Maple veneer core plywood edge banded on exposed edge, multiple doweled into end panels, and secured with glue and countersunk screws. Shelves shall be 1” thick White Maple veneer core plywood edge banded on exposed edge. Shelves shall be adjustable on 32mm centers utilizing shelf support clips. Backs in open and glazed door cases shall be 1/4" White Maple composite or veneer core plywood while the back not exposed to view shall be 1/4" hardboard. Case interior shall be flush.

2. Doors: a. Swinging Doors:

1) Door Construction: Panel doors shall be 3/4", White Maple, composite core plywood edge banded on all four edges. Glazed doors shall have 3/4" x 3-3/16" White Maple framing mortised, tenoned, and glued. Glass shall be set into door frame and secured with a plastic retainer. Each door shall have one pull mounted vertically.

2) Door Mounting: Swinging doors shall be hung on one (1) pair of offset hinges, under 48" in height, and 1-1/2 pair on cabinets 48" high.

D. Open-leg Tables: Legs shall be hardwood core with White Maple veneer, 2-1/2" square, with corners radiused 1/32". Legs shall be secured to the apron frame by a heavy duty corner bolt and a 14-gauge metal corner brace. Corner braces shall be locked into apron rails by accurately located grooves and shall be securely fastened with screws. Construction shall provide equal tension on wood and metal parts. Apron rails exposed to view shall be 3/4" thick, solid White Maple. Leg stretchers, where required, shall be 1-5/16" x 2-1/2",


White Maple, securely joined to the legs without visible fasteners.

2.4 FINISH

A. Cabinet end panels, whether exposed to view in the final installation or not, shall be stained

and finished to match cabinet face to allow the cabinet to be relocated at a later date unless cabinet is selected with the “unfinished end” option. 1. Environmental Standards: Finish must be low VOC and reclaimable with enclosed

spray and/or roll coat application; thus providing an environmentally responsible product..

B. Wood Surface Preparation: Prior to application of wood finish, cabinet component surfaces shall be sanded smooth to remove loose fibers, scratch marks, and abrasions, with all dust thoroughly removed.

C. Wood Finish Application: Cabinet components shall be finished using a state of the art flat-line system. Finish shall be applied under controlled conditions prior to casework assembly and attachment of hardware. This will provide maximum coverage and protection to the assembled product. The finish shall be fully UV cured to ensure proper performance.

D. Interior Wood Casework Finish: Interior surfaces shall receive two applications of chemical-resistant, UV cured, epoxy top coat. First application shall be cured, sanded, and cleaned. Final top coat shall then be applied and fully cured.

E. Exterior Wood Casework Finish: Exposed exterior surfaces, and interiors of glazed cabinets and open cabinets shall be stained and additionally sealed with two applications of chemical-resistant epoxy top coat. First of two (2) low VOC epoxy top coats shall be applied, cured, sanded, and cleaned. Final top coat shall then be applied and UV cured, providing a semi-gloss sheen.

F. Stain color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color selection.

2.5 WORKSURFACES

A. Material - Epoxy Resin Tops:

1 Epoxy Resin tops shall consist of modified epoxy resin that has been especially compounded and cured to provide the optimum physical and chemical resistance properties required of a heavy-duty laboratory table top.

2 Tops and curbs shall be a uniform mixture throughout their full thickness, and shall not depend upon a surface coating that is readily removed by chemical and/or physical abuse.

3 Tops and curbs shall be non-glaring. 4 Tops shall be 1" thick, exposed edges beveled top and bottom, and drip grooves

provided on the underside at all exposed edges. 4" high curbs at the backs and ends of tops shall be 1" thick and bonded to the deck to form a square watertight joint.

5 Sink cutouts shall be smooth and uniform without saw marks with the top edge beveled.

6 Bottom edge of the sink opening shall be finished smooth with the edge broken to prevent sharpness. Corners of sink cutouts shall be radiused not less than 3/4"

2.6 SINKS CUPSINKS, AND DRAINS

A. Sinks - Molded Epoxy Resin: 1. Sinks shall be molded of modified epoxy resin, carefully compounded with selected


materials to provide maximum physical and chemical properties. 2. Sinks shall be non-glaring with all inside corners coved and the bottom pitched to the

drain outlet. 3. Sinks shall possess a high resistance to mechanical and thermal shock.

2.7 FITTINGS AND PERFORMANCE

A. Materials - Chrome-plated red brass or bronze: 1. Laboratory Service Fittings: Service fittings shall be laboratory grade, and water

faucets and valve bodies shall be cast red brass alloy or bronze forgings, with a minimum content of 85%. All fittings shall be chromium plated unless specified otherwise.

B. Construction: 1. Water Fittings: Water fittings shall be provided with a renewable unit containing all

operating parts which are subject to wear. nenewable unit shall contain an integral volume control device and all faucets shall be capable of being readily converted from compression to self-closing, without disturbing the faucet body proper. Four (4) arm forged brass handles shall contain plastic screw-on type colored service index buttons.

2. Gooseneck Type Outlets: Gooseneck outlets shall have a separate brazed coupling to provide a full thread attachment of anti-splash, serrated tip or filter pump fittings.

3. Waste Lines: Waste lines shall be furnished by other trades. 4. Traps: Traps shall be furnished by other trades. 5. Electrical Fittings: Electrical fittings shall contain 20 Amp., 125 Volt AC, 3-wire

polarized grounded receptacles, unless otherwise specified. Pedestal and line-type boxes shall be of aluminum, metallic finish with stainless steel flush plates. Receptacle boxes shall be of plated steel. Electrical or conduit fittings called for or to be furnished under these specifications shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code.

C. Performance:

1. Maximum line pressures: a. Laboratory ball valves 75 psi b. Needle point cocks 65 psi

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.


conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that rough-in frames, anchors and supports are accurately placed. 2. Coordinate dimensions, weights, required utilities and support requirements for

equipment and fixtures installed within laboratory equipment casework. 3. Coordinate with other trades performing installations within casework to provide for a

complete concealed installation. 4. Rough-Ins: Rough-ins have been established based on the specified laboratory

equipment. If these must be relocated because of dimensional changes by the successful supplier, supplier will be responsible for charges incurred.






3.2 PREPARATION A. Preparation: Prior to beginning installation of casework, check and verify that no

irregularities exist that would affect quality of execution of work specified.

B. Coordination: Coordinate the work of the Section with the schedule and other requirements of other work being performed in the area at the same time both with regard to mechanical and electrical connections to and in the fume hoods and the general construction work.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips

for installation of woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

B. Condition woodwork to humidity conditions as specified in Project Conditions. C. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 requirements. D. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with

concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level, with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

E. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged

finish at cuts. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built into substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping

and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required. 1. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent

movement or warping. 2. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing

nails for exposed nailing. G. Install cabinets without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide easy operation.

H. Anchor countertops securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. I. Install standing and running trim, and rails with minimum number of joints possible, using

full-length pieces from maximum length lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope returns and miter corners. 1. Fill gaps between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish

same as wood base.


J. Install miscellaneous accessories per manufacturer’s instructions using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored, in locations indicated on drawings.

K. Touch up finishing work specified in this section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail

holes with matching filler where exposed.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Perform contractor quality control inspections

1. Inspect laboratory equipment installation, equipment types, function, dimensions, finishes and colors.

2. Test operation of each equipment item shall be available to Architect upon request.

3.5 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Adjust doors, drawers and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly.

B. Clean worksurfaces and leave them free of all grease and streaks.

C. Casework to be left broom clean and orderly.

D. Repair damaged case goods and woodwork where possible to eliminate defects. If repair is

not sufficient woodwork must be replaced. Adjust joints for uniform appearance. E. Clean case goods and woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up

factory applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain environmental conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer which insures that without damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.

B. Provide reasonable protective measures to prevent casework and equipment from being

exposed to other construction activity.

C. Advise owner and/or his representative of procedures and precautions for protection of material, installed laboratory casework and fixtures from damage by work of other trades.

3.7 LABORATORY CASEWORK SCHEDULE A. Diversified 2946M Combination Classroom Table/Lab Bench

1. Top shall be 1” black solid epoxy resin. 2. Epoxy sink with strainer and chemical resistant trap.

a. Sink shall measure 12”L x 8”W x 6”D. b. Unit has provide two multi-service fixtures (water/gas combo)

3. Two GFI protected AC duplex electrical receptacles 4. Unit shall be finished natural with chemical resistant finish. 5. Overall size shall be 96”W x 50”D x 36”H.

B. Diversified 2946MF-L, ADA Combination Classroom Table/Lab Bench 1. Top shall be 1” black solid epoxy resin. 2. Epoxy sink with strainer and chemical resistant trap.

a. Sink shall measure 12”L x 8”W x 6”D.


b. Unit has provide two multi-service fixtures (water/gas combo) 3. Two GFI protected AC duplex electrical receptacles 4. Unit shall be finished natural with chemical resistant finish. 5. Overall size shall be 96”W x 50”D x 36”H.

C. Diversified 1116M, Instructors Desk

1. Top shall be 1” black solid epoxy resin. 2. Epoxy sink with strainer, stopper and chemical resistant trap, one mixing water

faucet, a double gas cock, set of support rods and crossbar. a. Sink shall measure 18”W x 15”D x 12”H. b. Unit has provide two multi-service fixtures (water/gas combo)

3. GFI protected AC duplex electrical receptacle 4. Unit shall be finished natural with chemical resistant finish. 5. Overall size shall be 96”L x 30”D x 36”H. 6. Locks on all the drawers and doors

END OF SECTION

13 3421 - 1 Velma-Alma Public Schools Science Building Project No. N14041 MSTR 1114 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS

SECTION 13 3421

PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Materials, components, and accessories necessary for fabrication and

erection of weathertight pre-engineered metal building. Metal Building Manufacturer shall be understood as a single entity under this section responsible for Work as defined herein. 1. Manufacturers 2. Materials - Framing 3. Materials – Wall and Roof Systems 4. Framing Components 5. Metal Building Wall and Roof Insulation 6. Fabrication – Framing 7. Fabrication – Wall and Roof Systems 8. Gutters and Downspouts 9. Roof Penetrations 10. Snow Retention System 11. Snow Diverter 12. Aluminum Entry Canopies 13. Metal Entry Canopies 14. Roof Curbs 15. Finishes




1. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor quality control, tests, inspections and reporting requirements.

2. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Inspection requirements. 3. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete for foundation and floor slab. 4. Section 04 2111 - Brick Veneer: Exterior wall veneer. 5. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel: Structural steel items connected to pre-

engineered metal building metal frame. 6. Section 05 3100 - Steel Deck: Steel decking over steel joists. 7. Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural metal stud framing. 8. Section 07 6113 – Standing Seam Metal Roofing System – Standing seam roof

weathertightness and panel finish warranties. 9. Section 07 9000 - Joint Sealers: Sealants at joints. 10. Section 08 1213 - Metal Door Frames: Metal frames for doors and fixed glass

windows. 11. Section 08 5108 - Fixed Aluminum Windows: Aluminum windows. 12. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Light Gage Framing. 13. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Application of field paint finish. 14. Divisions 22 and 23 - Mechanical: Mechanical rough-in utilities. 15. Divisions 26 - Electrical: Electrical rough-in utilities.


16. Section 31 2316 - Excavation - Spread and Continuous Footings: Building foundation.

D. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: Roof curbs furnished by

Mechanical Contractor to Pre-Engineered Metal Building Erector for installation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Compliance for Metal Buildings.

B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. AISC S335 - Specification for Structural Steel for Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design.

2. AISC 3432L - Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.


1. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 4. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength. 5. ASTM A 325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 6. ASTM A 475 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand. 7. ASTM A 529 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of

Structural Quality. 8. ASTM A 572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

Vanadium Steel. 9. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 10. ASTM A 792 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-

Coated by the Hot Dip Process. 11. ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Sheet Steel,

Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 12. ASTM A 1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

13. ASTM C 1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.

14. ASTM C 1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Spacings.

15. ASTM D 2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

16. ASTM D 4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.

17. ASTM D 4821 - Standard Guide for Carbon Black—Validation of Test Method Precision and Bias

18. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. American Welding society (AWS):

1. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.




E. International Accreditation Service, Inc. (IAS): 1. IAS AC472 – Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Program for Manufacturers of Metal

Building Systems. F. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA):

1. MBMA MBSM - Metal Building Systems Manual.

G. National Insulation Association (NIA): 1. NIA CFIS - Certified Faced Insulation Standard.

H. North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association (NAIMA):

1. NAIMA 202 - Standard for Flexible Fiber Glass Insulation to be Laminated for Use in Metal Buildings.

2. NAIMA MB 316 - Recommendations for Installing Fiber Glass Insulation in Metal Buildings.

I. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):

1. SSPC - Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, “Inorganic,” and Type II “Organic”), Society for Protective Coatings.

J. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL BMD - Building Materials Directory; Roof Deck Construction. 2. UL 580 - Tests for Uplift Resistance or Roof Assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Building Width: Measured from outside to outside of sidewall girts.

B. Building Length: Measured from outside to outside of endwall girts.

C. Building Line: Outside face of horizontal steel girt.

D. Building Eave Height: Measured from intersection of top of roof framing and outside of wall framing to bottom of sidewall column base plate.

E. Bay Spacing: Measured from centerline to centerline of primary frames for interior bays and

from centerline of first interior frame to outside of endwall girts for endbays.

F. Delegated Engineer: Professional Structural Engineer employed by pre-engineered metal building manufacturer experienced in design of engineered metal buildings registered in State where project is located who undertakes final design of pre-engineered metal buildings including anchor bolt design.

G. Fascia: Vertical face of roof at eave or drip line which may support gutter. Fascia shall be of

the same material and profile as the roof panel. H. Roofing System: Weathertight metal roofing system as fabricated by pre-engineered metal

building manufacturer or by metal roofing system manufacturer. I. Roof Pitch: Ratio of vertical rise to horizontal run.


A. Rigid frame with tapered/straight columns and roof beams as indicated on Drawings.


B. Primary Framing: Rigid frame of rafter beams and columns, braced end frames, end wall columns and wind bracing.

C. Secondary Framing: Purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, clips, and other items

detailed.

D. Wall System: Preformed metal panels of vertical profile, with sub-girt framing/anchorage assembly, insulation, and accessory components.

E. Roof System: Preformed metal panels of upslope profile, with sub-girt framing/anchorage

assembly, insulation, and accessory components. 1. Roof Panels shall be continuous in length from eave to ridge. 2. Panel manufacturer shall provide detailing necessary for anticipated thermal

expansion of roofing system. 3. Fascia Panels adjacent to and below roof panels shall be the same material and

profile as roof panel.

F. Anchor Bolt System: Fabricated steel bolts designed for anchorage of primary frame columns to building foundation.

G. Auxiliary Suspended Construction: Components suspended, supported, or hanging from

purlins essential to building operations but not a component of the Pre-Engineered Building structural system.

H. Design Requirements:

1. Architectural Design and Design Details on Contract Documents: a. As indicated in General Conditions, the Architect's decisions on matters relating

to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

b. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Manufacturer shall provide a Pre-Engineered Metal Building and System that is based on the Architectural and Structural design as indicated on Contract Documents.

c. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Manufacturer shall not deviate from the Architectural Design and Structural Requirements for column sizes, depths, locations, spacing and building design load requirements from that indicated on Contract Documents. 1) Do not increase building design loads to building foundation. Design

building to be supported by building foundation as indicated on Contract Documents.

2) Do not increase column depths from those indicated graphically or dimensioned.

3) Columns, beams or framing graphically or dimensionally indicated to fit within a wall or furring shall be designed to fit within that wall or furring. Do not increase size of columns, column taper, beams or framing larger than wall or furring space graphically or dimensionally indicated on Drawings.

4) Do not design or provide column base plates that will extend outside any wall or furring.

5) During design of the pre-engineered metal building structure Delegated Engineer shall make allowance for all wall thicknesses, either metal framed or CMU, in the design of building structure and provide for any


required clearances from walls and pre-engineered metal building structure.

d. Any additional construction and costs, including Architect’s additional services, required due to failure of Pre-Engineered Metal Building Manufacturer to identify building structure item locations or sizes different than those indicated on Contract Drawings and specific items listed above during the bidding phase, will be at Pre-Engineered Metal Building Manufacturer's expense.

e. If additional construction and costs are required as specified above the following will occur: 1. Architect will provide written instructions for additional construction

required. 2. Construction Manager shall perform all required additional construction

per Architect’s written instructions and separately document costs for material and labor to perform additional construction.

3. Construction Manager shall obtain payment of additional construction costs from Pre-Engineered Metal Building Supplier in accordance with provisions of the Agreement Between Construction Manager and Supplier.

f. Architect’s Additional Services: If additional construction is required as specified above the following will occur. 1. Architect will invoice Owner for additional services by the Architect or

Architect’s Consultants. 2. Contractor will pay for Architect’s or Architect’s Consultant additional

services by deductive change order. 3. Change order will be issued deducting the additional service amount from

the Contract Sum. 2. Design pre-engineered metal building in conformance with requirements of the

International Building Code, currently adopted edition applicable to Project location. 3. Design members to withstand dead load, applicable snow load, deflection and design

loads due to pressure and suction of wind calculated in accordance with, MBMA, Building Codes and Design Criteria indicated on Structural Drawings. a. Live Load: Indicated on Drawings. b. Wind Load: Indicated on Drawings. c. Snow Load: Indicated on Drawings. d. Dead Load: Weight of metal building components, framing, insulation,

suspended ceilings, mechanical units, lighting and other equipment contributing to building dead load.

e. Collateral Load: Loads of temporary or removable uniform material loads and concentrated roof loads.

f. Seismic Load: Indicated on Structural Drawings. 4. Design members to withstand UL 580 - Uplift Resistance, Uplift Class 90.

a. Coordinate purlin design and spacing to facilitate roof panel design and load capacity for live and dead loads on roof panel.

b. Purlin spacing shall not exceed roof panel design span as recommended by manufacturer.

5. Exterior wall and roof system shall withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection of span as follows: a. Vertical Deflection: Indicated on Drawings. b. Lateral Deflection: Indicated on Drawings. c. Lateral Deflection at Brick or Masonry Veneer: Building structure that provides

back-up for brick or masonry veneer shall be designed by the manufacturer for a maximum deflection indicated on Drawings, under code prescribed lateral loads as indicated on Drawings.


6. Permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of: a. Insulated: 60 degrees F. b. Not Insulated: 120 degrees F.

7. Design, size, fabricate and furnish anchor bolts for attachment of pre-engineered metal building structure to foundation.

8. Size and fabricate wall and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

9. Design structure for support of ceilings and lighting fixtures hung from and connected to building structure.

10. Design structure for support of mechanical units and ductwork hung from and connected to building structure.

11. Provide frame opening members for wall and roof openings, doors, windows, wall louvers and roof mounted equipment as required by product manufacturers. Metal building supplier shall be thoroughly familiar with the requirements of all items and appurtenances installed in pre-engineered metal building framing.

12. Provide framing members for connection of structural steel members specified in Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel to pre-engineered metal building.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. Submittals shall be an all inclusive Single Submittal Package including all the following items. SUBMITTAL OF PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURER SHOP DRAWINGS WITHOUT ALL OTHER REQUIRED DATA LISTED BELOW NOT PERMITTED. Incomplete submittal packages will be returned to Contractor without review for revisions and re-submittal. 1. Product Data:

a. Roof, fascia wall, soffit and liner panels, gutters and downspouts, fluorocarbon finish, silicone polyester finish and fasteners.

b. Roof and wall insulation materials, physical properties, test results and facing. c. Roof jacks/boots. d. Joint sealant and joint seal gaskets. e. Standing seam pre-finished roof curbs. f. Snow Retention system. g. Aluminum entry canopies. h. Metal entry canopies.

2. Shop Drawings: Minimum 24” x 36” drawings. Half size drawings will not be accepted. a. Anchor Bolts and Anchor Bolt Setting: Indicate locations of column anchor bolt

settings, sizes, and locations from datum, and foundation loads. Provide copy of accepted Anchor Bolt Setting Plan with delivery of anchor bolts to Contractor at Project Site.

b. Pre-Engineered Building: Indicate assembly dimensions, locations and sizes of structural members, location of retrofit type roof framing substructure members, transverse cross-sections, connections, attachments, openings, loads; wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, roof curbs (where applicable), flashing, gutters, downspouts, snow retention system and roof vent/flue snow/ice protection (where applicable), entry canopies (where applicable), smoke vents (where applicable) and details of roof penetrations, roof curbs, general construction details, bracing, anchorages and method of anchorage, method of installation; indicate plate thickness, width and length. Indicate types and locations of wall and roof insulation. Indicate required welds with AWS 2.0 welding symbols. Drawings signed and sealed by Delegated Engineer.


1) Indicate and dimension all mechanical, plumbing and electrical penetrations thru metal roof system. Indicate flashing or sealing method for each penetration.

2) Indicate and dimension all roof curbs for roof top mounted mechanical equipment and for smoke vents (where applicable).

3) Any shop drawings not showing and dimensioning these roof curbs and penetrations will not be reviewed and will be returned to Contractor for revision and submittal.

4) Actual Warranty Certificate: Provide copies of the actual, not “sample,” warranty certificates that will be issued for this Project (except that they will not be executed) for Architect review.

c. Snow Retention system: Roof plan indicating location of System including assembly detailing of components.

d. Auxiliary Suspended Construction: Auxiliary connection details for suspending Work to purlins and secondary roof framing components.

3. Erection Drawings: Submit pre-engineered metal building manufacturer prepared Erection Drawings: Include erection sequences, procedures, diagrams, schedules and compete details.

4. 3-D and or Isometric Drawing(s): Submit pre-engineered metal building in 3-D and or in isometric views showing entire building complete with structural members, columns, rafters, girts, purlins and bracing. Do not show roof or wall panels. This presentation is to indicate the skeletal and structural members only. Identify members and label for reference.

5. Samples: a. Selection: Submit two (2) complete sets of manufacturer's color samples for

Architect initial color selection. b. Verification: Submit three samples of pre-finished metal panels for each color

selected, 12 inch long x actual panel width illustrating color and texture of finish. 6. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Design Data: 1) Engineering calculations for anchor bolts indicating compliance with

specified requirements. 2) Engineering calculations for pre-engineered building structure indicating

compliance with specified requirements and Contract Documents. 3) Calculations signed and sealed by Delegated Engineer.

b. Inspection Reports: Submit the following inspection reports directly to Architect from Independent Testing Laboratory with copy to Contractor in accordance with Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services. 1) High-strength bolted connection inspections.

c. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit copies of field inspection reports for each field inspection prepared by Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Inspector directly to Architect with copy to Contractor in accordance with Section 01 4500 - Quality Control.

d. Qualification Documentation: Submit notarized and executed documentation of metal building erector certification and experience, signed by metal building manufacturer, indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. 1) Submit the Approved Erector Pre-Engineered Metal Building Certification

form located at end of this Section. 2) Submit executed certification form attached to pre-engineered metal

building shop drawings. e. Metal Roofing System Manufacturer Approval of Roof Curbs and Roof

Penetrations Certification: Submit notarized and executed documentation that Metal Roofing System Manufacturer approves all roof curbs (where applicable) and roof penetrations as indicated and specified in Contract Documents.


1) Submit the Metal Roofing System Manufacturer Approval of Roof Curbs and Roof Penetrations Certification form located at end of this Section.

2) Submit executed certification form attached to Metal Roofing System Shop Drawings.

f. Manufacturer Instructions (For Information): Upon request, submit manufacturer's published installation instructions for specific products specified attached to Product Data.


1. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed components and utilities.

2. Manufacturer Warranty: Submit written warranty with forms completed in Owner’s name and registered with manufacturer. a. Manufacturer warranty. b. Finish warranty. c. Weathertightness warranty.


1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AISC S335, AISC 342L and MBMA - Low Rise Building

Systems Manual. B. Design structural components, develop erection drawings, shop drawings, and perform

shop work under direct supervision of Delegated Engineer.

C. Qualifications: 1. Pre-Engineered Metal Building:

a. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1) Company specializing in manufacturing pre-engineered metal buildings

with minimum (15) years documented experience. 2) Company certified by IAS as having met the criteria for AC472 Inspection

Program. 3) Member in good standing of the Metal Building Manufacturer’s

Association. b. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this

section with minimum five years documented experience, certified in writing by pre-engineered metal building manufacturer as an “Approved Erector.” 1) Subcontract Erection: Any subcontractor contracted by approved building

erector to erect pre-engineered metal building shall also be certified in writing by pre-engineered metal building manufacturer as an “Approved Erector.”

2. Metal Roof System: a. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing metal roofing systems

and components with minimum (10) years documented experience. b. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with

minimum five (5) years documented experience certified by metal roofing system manufacturer as an “Approved Installer.”

c. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain metal roofing system components, roof panels, fascia panels, soffit panels, gutters, downspouts and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer. Gutters and downspouts shall be furnished, installed and warranted by sheet metal roofing


system supplier as an integrated roofing, guttering and downspout system along with metal roofing system.

d. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of sheet metal roofing manufacturer published installation instructions in Project Field Office and refer to instructions at all times during installation.

D. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Conform to applicable code for submission of design calculations, reviewed shop and erection drawings, and as required for acquiring permits.

2. Cooperate with regulatory agency or authority and provide data as requested.

E. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of pre-engineered metal building manufacturer published installation instructions, MBMA MBSM, NAIMA and ASHRAE 90.1 documents in Project Field Office and refer to instructions at all times during installation.



B. Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage.




E. Exercise care in unloading, storing and erecting wall and roof panels to prevent bending,

warping, twisting and surface damage.

F. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weather tight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulation will drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage.

G. Mark all fabricated parts, either individually or by lot or group, using an identification marking

corresponding to marking shown on Erection Drawings, using method that remains visible after shop coating.

1.8 WARRANTY


B. Manufacturer Warranty: Manufacturer one (1) year warranty covering materials against defects and workmanship, and structural integrity of pre-engineered metal building.

C. Manufacturer Finish Warranty: Include coverage for exterior wall panel and metal roof

system pre-finished surfaces to cover pre-finished color coat as defined herein against chipping, cracking or crazing, blistering, peeling, chalking, or fading.


1. Color Change - ASTM D 2244: Color changes less than five (5) NBS Units (Using the NBS unit of color notation as measured by MEECO Colormaster.

2. Chalking - ASTM D 4214: Chalking less than Number eight (8) Rating. 3. Exclusions not permitted: Certificate of Warranty issued at Contract Closeout shall

contain no exclusions. 4. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from the date of Substantial Completion.

D. Non-prorated Single-Source Manufacturer Weathertightness Warranty: Contractor shall

provide to Owner a Single-Source Warranty executed by roofing manufacturer of Standing Seam Roof System as outlined below: 1. Single Source Warranty shall require a certified installer (Project Foreman) on site at

all times. 2. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from the date of Substantial Completion 3. Warranty Inclusions: Roofing manufacturer warrants to Owner that roof panels,

flashing, and related items used to secure roof panels and flashing including roof jack and curb attachments to roof structure, roof penetrations including mechanical, plumbing and electrical penetrations, will not allow intrusion of water from exterior of roofing manufacturer's Roof System into building envelope when exposed to non-severe weather conditions. a. Exclusions Not Permitted: Certificate of Warranty issued at Contract Closeout

shall contain no exclusions. 4. Manufacturer's Field Service:

a. During installation, manufacturer shall provide two (2) on-site inspections of roof application by qualified technical representative of manufacturer.

b. Upon completion of installation, manufacturer shall provide final inspection by a technical representative of roofing manufacturer to confirm that roofing system has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

5. Roofing manufacturer shall have sole and exclusive obligation for warranty Work commencing on date of Substantial Completion and terminates upon 20th anniversary of Substantial Completion.

6. During period in which Roofing Manufacturer has warranty obligation; Roofing Manufacturer shall take appropriate actions necessary to cause non-performing portions of Roof System to perform proper functions.

7. Roofing Manufacturer's Liability under Single Source warranty is as follows for entire duration of warranty period: a. No dollar limit of manufacturers Roof System as invoiced to roofing

manufacturer's customer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MAUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings is based on the product named. 1. Alliance Steel Building Systems: www.allianceokc.com.


compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Ceco Building Systems: www.cecobuildings.com. 2. Midwest Steel Building Company: www.midwestbldg.com. 3. Pinnacle Structures, Inc: www.pinnaclemetalbuildings.com 4. Nucor Building Systems: www.nucorbuildingsystems.com.

http://www.allianceokc.com/

http://www.cecobuildings.com/

http://www.midwestbldg.com/

http://www.pinnaclemetalbuildings.com/

http://www.nucorbuildingsystems.com/


5. Rigid Building Systems: www.rigidbuilding.com. 6. United Structures of America, Incorporated: www.usabldg.com

C. Other pre-engineered metal building manufacturers may be considered if they meet

specified qualification requirements and can satisfy Architect that they can provide a satisfactory building package meeting specified requirements within required construction schedule time requirements. 1. Submit the following for review by Architect minimum ten (10) days before bid date, in

conformance with requirements of Section 01 6213 - Product Substitution Procedures. a. Evidence of IAS Certification for having met the criteria for AC472 Inspection

Program. b. Evidence of current MBMA membership. c. Completed and notarized AIA Document A305 “Contractor’s Qualification

Statement” and manufacturer’s product data for pre-engineered metal building system and components.

2. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Manufacturers that do not pre-qualify, do not submit substitution requests during bidding within the specified time requirement, and do not receive approval from Architect will not be permitted to submit bid for this Project.

2.2 MATERIALS - FRAMING

A. Hot Rolled Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36, A 572, A 529 as applicable; W,M and S shapes, angles, rods, channels and other shapes with minimum yield strengths required for design.

B. Structural Steel Plate, Bar, Sheet and Strip (for use in bolted connections): ASTM A 572, A

529, A1008, ASTM A 1011 with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.

C. Structural Steel for Use in Roll Formed or Press Broken Secondary Structural Members: ASTM A 1008 or A 1011 with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.

D. Structural Bolts and Nuts Used with Primary Framing: ASTM A 325 high strength bolts. E. Bolts and Nuts Used with Secondary Framing: ASTM A 325.

F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C.

G. Cable Bracing: ASTM A 475.

H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

I. Primer: SSPC 20, Red Oxide.

2.3 MATERIALS - WALL, FASCIA, AND ROOF SYSTEM

A. Sheet Steel Stock: ASTM A 792, Grade 50A, galvalume steel sheet coated with AZ55 aluminum/zinc alloy, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.

B. Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.

C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, high performance organic coating, finish to match

adjacent surfaces when exterior exposed.

D. Bituminous Paint: Asphaltic type.

http://www.rigidbuilding.com/

http://www.usabldg.com/


E. Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard panel joint sealant.

F. Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, Flashings, Fascia Trims and Infills: Same material, thickness

and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.

2.4 FRAMING COMPONENTS

A. Primary Framing: Rigid Frame solid web framing consisting of rafters rigidly connected to columns as indicated on Drawings. Clear span supporting loads at bay spacings indicated.

B. Endwall Framing: Corner posts, end posts and rake beams.

C. Purlins: Zee- or C-shaped with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi; simple span or

continuous span as required for design.

D. Girts: Zee- or C-shaped with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi; simple span or continuous span as required for design.

E. Wind Bracing: Diagonal bracing in accordance with manufacturer’s standard design;

utilizing rods, cables, angles, and other members, with minimum yield strengths as required for design.

F. Primary Frame Flange Bracing: Attached from purlins or girts to primary framing, minimum

yield strength as required for design.

G. Base Angles: Minimum 4” x 4” x 20 gage continuous steel angles with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi, anchored to floor slab with powder driven fasteners or equivalent at maximum spacing of 24 inches on center and maximum 6 inches from end or any angle member. 1. Sill Extension: Continuous 8 inch x 20 gage galvanized metal with roll-formed or

folded “box” 1” x 1” x 1” hem.

H. Door and Window Headers and Jambs: Zee- or C-shaped, depth as required, with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.

I. Framing Around Wall Openings: Zee- or C-shaped, depth as required, with minimum yield

strength of 55,000 psi.

J. Sag Angels and Bridging: Steel angles, with minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi.

2.5 METAL BUILDING ROOF LINER SYSTEM AND INSULATION

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer for Metal Building Roof Liner System: 1. Thermal Design: www.thermaldesign.com 2. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Metal Building Roof Liner

and Insulation System as manufactured by one of the following: a. Owens Corning: www.owenscorning.com – ‘OptiLiner Banded Liner System’. b. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions.


B. Roof Liner System: ‘Simple Saver System’ by Thermal Design 1. Liner Fabric: ‘Syseal FP’ woven reinforced high-density polyethylene yarns coated on

both sides with a continuous polyethylene film.

http://www.thermaldesign.com/



a. Fabric Color: White. b. Fire Rating - UL 723 or ASTM E84: Class A. c. Flame Spread Index - ASTM E84: 25 or less. d. Perm rating - ASTM E96: less than 0.02 grains per hour per square foot. e. Fabrication: Fabric liner shall be manufactured in large custom pieces by

extrusion welding from roll goods. Pieces shall be fabricated to substantially fit the large defined building areas with minimum practical sealing to be done on job site. Fabric shall be folded to allow for rapid pull-out on the strap support system.

f. Fall Protection: Fabric shall be certified for free fall protection by the manufacturer.

2. Steel Strap: ‘UVMAX’ galvanized steel, primed and then color painted on the exposed side with a clear coat primer on the unexposed side. a. Tensile Strength: 100 KSI minimum a. Strap Size: Minimum 0.02" x 1" x continuous length. b. Strap Color: UVMAX White.

3. Liner System Fasteners: a. #12 x 3/4", plated self-drilling screws with sealing washers painted to match the

specified color for fastening to light gauge steel (up to 12 GA purlins) b. #12 x 1-1⁄4˝ plated self-drilling screws with sealing washers, painted to match

the specified color for heavier gauge steel (up to 3/8˝ purlins/bar joist). c. Special fasteners for wood, concrete and other structure types per

manufacturer’s recommendation.

C. Thermal Break: Specified in Section 07 2216 - Rigid Roof Insulation. Roof insulation above metal deck.

D. Sealants for sealing vapor retarder laps - Contractor’s Option:

1. Simple Saver System G524 High Tack Sealant. 2. Simple Saver System G220 Pressure Sensitive Sealant. 3. Simple Saver System ‘Syseal Sticky Tape’ (double-sided bonding tape) 3/4" wide by

1/32" thick extruded vapor retarder sealant.

E. Unfaced Metal Building Batt Roof Insulation: 1. Acceptable insulation manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Guardian Insulation: www.guardian-insulation.com c. Johns Manville International, Inc: www.johnsmanville.com. d. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

2. Product: ASTM C 665; Type I, formaldehyde-free, light-density, preformed glass fiber batt conforming to the following: a. Surface Burning Characteristics - ASTM E 84:

1) Flame Spread Index: 25. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 50.

b. Combustion Characteristics - ASTM E 136: Passes. c. Critical Radiant Flux- ASTM E 970: greater than 0.11 BTU per square foot. d. Water Vapor Absorption - ASTM C 1104: 5 percent or less. e. Odor Emission - ASTM C 1304: Passes. f. Corrosiveness - ASTM C 665: Passes. g. Fungi Resistance - ASTM C 1338: Passes.

3. Roof Insulation-Single Layer: R-25 unfaced batt. a. Thickness: 8 inches. b. Batt width: Size insulation width to friction fit width between roof purlins.


http://www.guardian-insulation.com/

http://www.johnsmanville.com/



2.6 FABRICATION - FRAMING

A. Fabricate members in accordance with AISC Specification for plate, bar, tube, or rolled structural shapes.

B. Fabricate structural members made of welded plate sections by joining flanges and webs by

continuous automatic submerged arc welding process.

C. All welding operators and processes shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1.

D. Field Connections: Prepare members for bolted field connections by making punched, drilled, or reamed holes in shop.

E. Anchor Bolts: Formed with bent shank, assembled with template for casting into concrete.

F. Provide framing for and around all openings.

G. Provide horizontal girt framing to meet wall design structural requirements at wall areas with

brick veneer. Provide horizontal girt framing at point where brick veneer transitions to metal wall panels (where occurs). Provide steel lintels and bracing where Brick veneer is supported by the building.

G. Provide horizontal girt framing to meet wall design structural requirements at wall areas with

masonry veneer. Provide horizontal girt framing at point where masonry veneer transitions to metal wall panels (where occurs). Provide steel lintels and bracing where masonry veneer is supported by the building.

H. Provide framing for connections of steel joists and structural steel members.

K. Project supplemental framing for support and connections of Entry Canopy steel hanger assembly and framing.

2.7 FABRICATION - WALL, FASCIA, AND ROOF SYSTEMS

A. Exposed Wall Panels: 26 gage, Alliance R-Panel profile, 36 inches wide, 1-1/4 inch high major ribs at 12 inches on center with minor ribs spaced between major ribs, lapped edges fitted with continuous gaskets. 1. Length: One piece continuous sill to eave.

a. Lap joints not permitted for pre-manufactured panels 50 foot or less in length. b. Where panels are cut to provide for lap joints, seal watertight and finish to

match color and finish of panels. Exposed un-finished cuts not permitted. 2. Ends: Factory square cut. 3. Side Laps: Minimum one (1) full major rib, with a supporting member bearing edge

on lower panel and anti-capillary groove on upper panel.

B. Wall Panels Behind Brick or Masonry Veneer: 24 gage, Alliance R-Panel profile, 1-1/4 inch deep, lapped edges fitted with continuous gaskets. 1. Length: One piece continuous at masonry veneer. Panel joint permitted only at

transition point of veneer backing panel to exposed wall panel. 2. Ends: Factory square cut. 3. Side Laps: Minimum 1 full major rib, with a supporting member bearing edge on

lower panel and anti-capillary groove on upper panel.


3. Wall Anchors and Ties: Make attachment provisions for brick veneer wall anchors and ties attached to metal panels as specified in Section 04 2111 - Brick Veneer.

4. Make attachment provisions for masonry veneer wall ties attached to metal panels as specified in Section 04 2111 - Brick Veneer.

D. Roof and Fascia Panels: 24 gage, Standing Seam Roof and Fascia Panel profile, Alliance A-Lok 16 panel with striated pan, 2 inch high standing seam edges spaced at 16 inches on center, field seamed filled with continuous sealant. 1. Length: One piece continuous full length from ridge to eave. Panel joints not

permitted. 2. Sidelaps: Two (2) factory-formed interlocking ribs, with one weather sealed joint,

mechanically field-seamed into place to form a double-fold 360 degree seam. 3. Panel-to-Roof Purlin Structural Attachments: Panel clips, with movable tabs that

interlock with seamed roof panel ribs and provide panel movement in either direction from center of clip to compensate for thermal effects.

E. Liner Panels: 26 gage, Alliance R-Panel profile, 36 inches wide, 1-1/4 inch high major ribs

at 12 inches on center with minor ribs spaced between major ribs, lapped edges. 1. One piece continuous full height. Panel joints not permitted.

F. Soffit Panels: 24 gage, Alliance A-12 Beaded Pan Soffit Panel profile with intermediate

beads, 1 inch thick, unperforated, interlocking edges. 1. One piece full length. Panel joints not permitted.

G. Ridge Cap Flashing: 24 gage, one piece, continuous, factory shaped, same material and

finish as roof panels.

H. Eaves and Rakes: Profile type as indicated on Drawings, minimum 24 gage, of same material and finish as adjacent material.

I. Eave Panels: Extend beyond building structure line, detailed as indicated on Drawings.

J. Girts/Purlins: Rolled formed structural shape indicated on Drawings, to receive wall, roof

and liner panels with sag angles as required.

K. Internal and External Corners: 26 gage, same material thickness and finish as adjacent material, profile brake formed to required angles.

L. Wall Flashings, Closure Pieces and Infills: 26 gage, same material and finish as adjacent

material, profile to suit system. Provide all metal flashings at metal building, building veneer materials, building wall finishes and screen wall sheet metal wall caps.

M. Roof Flashings, Closure Pieces, Fascias and Caps: 24 gage, same material and finish as

adjacent material, profile to suit system.

N. Fasteners: To maintain load requirements and weather tight installation, same finish as cladding, non-corrosive type.

O. Sealants, Mastics and Closures: Manufacturer’s standard type.

1. Provide at roof panel sidelaps, rake, eave, transitions and accessories as required to provide a weathertight roof system; use tape, mastic or gunnable sealant at sidelaps.

2. Provide at wall panel rakes, eaves, transitions and accessories. 3. Closures: Formed to match panel profiles; closed cell elastic material.


4. Tape Mastic: Pre-formed butyl rubber-based, non-hardening, non-corrosive to metal; light gray.

5. Gunnable Sealant: Non-skinning synthetic elastomer based material; gray.

2.8 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Materials: 1. Gutters: Similar to SMACNA Figure 1-2, Rectangular Style A. Minimum 6 inch x 6

inch. 2. Downspouts: Manufacturer’s Square type, 24 gage galvanized sheet metal. Size as

Rectangular; minimum 6 inch x 6 inch. 3. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

a. Anchoring Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer. b. Gutter Supports: Brackets. c. Downspout Supports: Straps.

4. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard with soft neoprene washers. 5. Downspout Protection Boots: Specified in Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications. 6. Splash Blocks: Specified in Section 03 4816 - Pre-cast Concrete Splash Blocks.

B. Fabrication:

1. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles specified. 2. Fabricate with required connection pieces. 3. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free

of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.

4. Hem exposed edges of metal. 5. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.

2.9 ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Roof Jacks/Boots: Metal Roofing System Manufacturer approved EPDM seal/flashing system designed to form watertight seal around all mechanical flues, plumbing pipes, electrical conduits, or any other similar roof penetration with base that provides seal on any roof panel configuration and roof pitch. 1. Roof jack/boot shall accommodate pipe movement due to contraction and expansion.

B. Flashing: Metal Roofing System Manufacturer shall provide sheet metal flashing at

penetrations where roof jack/boots cannot be used, finish to match roof panels. 1. Seal watertight.

C. Weathertightness Warranty: Work under this Section, including Metal Roofing System and

Roof Penetrations, shall be Warranted as defined herein 1. Metal Roofing System Manufacturer shall include coverage for all roof penetrations.

D. Installation: Roof jacks/boots and flashing shall only be installed by an installer approved by

Metal Roof System Manufacturer.

2.10 SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Snow Retention System is based on the product named. 1. LM Curbs. www.lmcurbs.com; Product: S-5! ColorGard.



B. Section 01 6200 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a

comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Alpine SnowGuards www.alpinesnowguards.com 2. Sno-Gem, Inc. www.888snogems.com; Sno-Barricade.

D. Description: Manufacture Snow Retention System with Clamping Devices attached to roof

panel seams. Install continuous Cross Member at entire perimeter of roof eave within 8 to 12 inches from roof panel eave edge. 1. Attachment to Roof: Non-corrosive standing seam roof clamps as required for roof

seam profile. 2. Clamping Devices: Device designed to clamp to roof panel seams using not less than

two (2) non-corrosive set screws or bolts. 3. Location: Devices shall be located at each roof seam or maximum every other seam

as necessary not to exceed maximum spacing of 32 inches on center.

E. Cross Member: Cross members shall be designed in continuous manner spanning from clamping devices to clamping devices. Clamping Devices shall be designed to receive Cross Member by securing member within device. Cross Member “splice connectors” shall be provided as necessary to join adjacent sections. Cross members shall be secured to clamping devices using non-corrosive or button-punch fasteners. End Caps shall be provided for each Cross Member to prevent water penetration into Member. 1. Cross Member Color shall match roof color.

2.11 SNOW DIVERTER

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Snow Diverter is based on the product named. 1. LM Curbs. www.lmcurbs.com. (800-284-1412)

B. Product: Snow Diverter:

C. Description: Manufactured snow diverter system shall be fabricated from 0.125” aluminum

designed to span from roof panel seam to roof panel seam and secure to seam clamps attached to roof panel seams. Install diverter system within 8 to 12 inches above roof penetrations such as vents and stacks. 1. Attachment to Roof: Secure aluminum seam clamps S-5-U, S-5-T or S-5-Z on seam

of roof as required for roof seam profile. 2. Attach clamp to standing seams using a minimum of two stainless steel set screws

having rounded point. 3. Locate minimum of four (4) clamps, two (2) each side of penetration as necessary to

support diverter.

D. Description: Fabricate diverter to span between roof panel seams, by minimum 24 inches in length. Fabricate diverter in “V” shape, minimum 8 inches high. 1. Secure diverter with stainless steel bolts to seam clamps, minimum one (1) each

corner of diverter. 2. Diverter color shall match roof color.


Permitted.

2.12 ALUMINUM ENTRY CANOPIES

http://www.alpinesnowguards.com/



A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Aluminum Entry Canopies is based on the product

named. 1. Mapes Industries, Incorporated: www.mapesind.com. 2. Section 01 6200 - Product Options: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:

Permitted.

B. Type: Lumishade Hanger Rod Canopy.

C. Description: Manufactured aluminum canopy consisting of roll formed interlocking decking attached to steel fascia and intermediate supports with rear gutter and downspouts. Canopy hung from building structure with hanger rod assembly attached to canopy with steel angle clips and thru bolted to building structure. Canopy framing also attached with thru bolts to building structure.

C. Fabrication:

1. Factory fabricate canopy and ship in pre-assembled sections. 2. Provide for concealed drainage. Water drains from covered surfaces into

intermediate trough and is directed to rear gutter for ground level discharge through downspouts.

D. Finish: To be selected by architect.

E. Installation: Metal Building Erector shall install metal entry canopies in metal building walls

as indicated on Drawings.

2.13 METAL ENTRY CANOPIES

A. Configuration: Indicated on Drawings. B. Description: Manufactured steel canopy consisting of roll formed interlocking decking

attached to steel fascia and intermediate supports with rear gutter and downspouts. Canopy hung from building structure with hanger rod assembly attached to canopy with steel angle clips and thru bolted to building structure. Canopy framing also attached with thru bolts to building structure.

C. Fabrication:

1. Factory fabricate canopy and ship in pre-assembled sections. 2. Provide for concealed drainage. Water drains from covered surfaces into

intermediate trough and is directed to rear gutter for ground level discharge through downspouts.

D. Finish: Same finish as metal building panels.

E. Installation: Metal Building Erector shall install metal entry canopies in metal building walls

as indicated on Drawings.

2.15 ROOF CURBS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for Roof Curbs is based on the product named. 1. Manufacturer: LM Curbs. www.lmcurbs.com. 2. Roof curb manufacturer shall be approved by Metal Roof System manufacturer.

http://www.mapesind.com/



B. Roof Curb Product Approval: Metal Roof System manufacturer shall approve, accept and incorporate roof curbs into the 20 year Weathertightness Warranty, with no exclusions.

C. Description: Manufactured standing seam pre-finished metal roof curbs specifically made

for installation on standing seam metal roofs of thickness required to support load of equipment, with fully mitered and welded corners, integral base plates and water diverter cricket at upslope side with factory installed 1-1/2 inch thick curb insulation.

D. Roof penetrations associated with roof curbs shall meet Metal Roofing System

Manufacturer requirements for inclusion in the 20 year Weatherthghtness Warranty, with no exclusions.

E. Curb Height: 12 inches minimum above high side on metal roof panel. Construct curb to

match slope of roof and provide level top surface for mounting roof top equipment.

F. Flanges: Curb flange constructed to match configuration of roof panel. Extend side flange to next natural seam in roof panels and conform to seam configurations.

G. Curb Finish: Same finish as metal roof panels.

H. Coordination:

1. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Manufacturer and Metal Building Erector shall verify and coordinate with Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Contractors the sizing, locations and installation of roof curbs within roof structure as indicated on Drawings.

2. Metal Roof System installer shall verify and coordinate sizing and locations of roof curbs in metal roof panels with metal building structure and as indicated on Drawings.

I. Installation: Install roof curbs in metal building roof structure as indicated on Drawings. Roof

curbs shall only be installed by an installer approved by Metal Roof System Manufacturer.

2.16 FINISHES

A. Framing Members: Clean, prepare, and shop prime. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded.

B. Exterior Surfaces of Wall, Fascia, and Roof Components and Accessories: Precoated

enamel on steel of fluorocarbon finish. 1. Coating utilizes KYNAR 500, a proprietary resin purchased under license from

Atochem North America. 2. Finish shall be 70 percent KYNAR 500 Fluorocarbon coating, applied by the

manufacturer on a continuous coil line with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil.

3. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by the KYNAR 500 finish supplier.

C. Wall Panels Behind Brick Veneer: ASTM A 792, commercial quality Galvalume finish.

D. Interior Exposed Surfaces of Wall, Fascia, and Roof Components and Accessories: Precoated enamel on steel of modified silicone polyester finish.

E. Colors: Selected by Architect. More than one color may be selected.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that foundation, floor slab, mechanical, plumbing and electrical utilities, and

placed anchors are in correct position.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Safety Meeting: Contractor’s Safety Officer and Project Field Superintendent shall conduct a safety meeting with Pre-Engineered Metal Building Erector and erection personnel before start of steel erection to review the Erector’s proposed steel erection methods and procedures, and their compliance with the Contractor’s Site Safety Plan.

3.3 WEATHERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor, Metal Building Erector, or Metal Roofing Manufacturer shall not install any items on or in pre-engineered metal building system that would cause manufacturer of pre-engineered building, metal wall panels, or metal roofing system to make any exclusions to the 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.

B. All materials installed on or in pre-engineered metal building wall or roof panels shall be

type approved by pre-engineered metal building manufacturer. Installation of materials that are not approved by pre-engineered metal building manufacturer not permitted.

C. The following items shall only be installed by an installer approved by the Pre-Engineered

Metal Building Manufacturer, Metal Wall Panel Manufacturer, or Metal Roof System Manufacturer. 1. All roof penetrations and roof flashing. 2. Snow retention system. 3. Approved roof curbs. 4. Entry canopies.

3.4 ERECTION - FRAMING

A. Erect steel in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations contained in U.S. Department of Labor, Standard 29 CFR, Part 1926 “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction” and Contractor’s Site Safety Program. 1. Provide protection from fall hazards at or above 15 feet above a lower level on all

walking work surfaces including connectors and deckers.

B. Erect framing in accordance with AISC Specification.


C. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb

and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Locate braced bays as indicated.

D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval from Architect and Structural

Engineer. Altered members without approval may be rejected and replaced as directed by Architect.

E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed.

F. Portal frames shall be designed and installed so that the frame is concealed above finished

ceiling and columns are of straight design.

3.6 ERECTION - WALL, FASCIA, AND ROOFING SYSTEMS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Exercise care when cutting pre-finished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface. Failure to clean surfaces may be cause for Architect to reject material and require replacement as directed by Architect.

1. Secure Base Angles in place. 2. Attach Sill Extension to Base Angle using appropriate fasteners. 3. Coordinate fastener spacing with Wall Panel profile. Sill Extension shall be secured at

maximum 12 inch on center.

D. Locate end laps over supports. End laps minimum 2 inches. Place side laps over bearing.

E. Provide flashings at locations and configurations indicated on Drawings.

F. Provide expansion joints where indicated.

G. Use concealed fasteners.

H. Install sealant and gaskets to prevent weather penetration.

3.7 INSTALLATION - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.

B. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published

instructions. Provide expansion joints as required. Securely attach to building structure.

C. Slope gutters for positive drainage, or as required by local code.

D. Provide downspouts at locations indicated on Drawings. 1. Coordinate location of building downspout locations with underground drainage

system connection points.

E. Connect downspouts to downspout protection boots. Seal connection watertight as specified in Section 07 9000 – Joint Sealers.


F. Seal joints between gutters and roof panels water tight as specified in Section 07900.

G. Set splash blocks on ground under and in alignment with downspout protection boots to direct water away from building.

3.8 INSTALLATION - PENETRATIONS AND SEALS

A. Seal wall and roof flashings, trim and accessories watertight and weather tight with sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Seal penetrations of roof panels by pipe and conduit water tight with manufacturer’s

standard flashing collars and boots.

3.9 INSTALLATION - SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM and SNOW DIVERTER

A. Installation: Snow Retention and Diverter System shall only be installed by an installer approved by Metal Roofing System Manufacturer.

B. Location: Provide Snow Retention System, continuous at roof eaves.

C. Install Diverter System at each roof penetration item that is not equipped with roof curb:

plumbing vents, flues, and electrical conduit.

D. Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and approved shop Drawings.

3.10 INSTALLATION - ALUMINUM ENTRY CANOPIES

A. Install canopy assembly and supports in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Provide structural steel supplementary support framing for attachment of hanger rod

supports.

C. Thru bolt attach steel hanger assembly and canopy framing to building structure.

D. Apply sealant at wall penetrations and flashing as specified in Section 07 9000 – Joint Sealers.

3.10 INSTALLATION - METAL ENTRY CANOPIES

A. Install canopy assembly and supports in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Provide structural steel supplementary support framing for attachment of hanger rod

supports.

C. Thru bolt attach steel hanger assembly and canopy framing to building structure.

D. Apply sealant at wall penetrations and flashing as specified in Section 07 9000 – Joint Sealers.

3.11 INSTALLATION - ROOF CURBS


A. Install roof curbs in accordance with roof curb manufacturer’s published instructions with the

Pre-Engineered Metal Building Manufacturer’s full and complete knowledge.

B. Coordinate with Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Contractors before ordering roof curbs and before installation of curbs to verify correct size, height, location and required support structure.

C. Provide mounting devices for type of standing seam roof panels being installed as

recommended by Metal Roofing System Manufacturer.

D. Install curbs compatible with thermal expansion and contraction properties of roof panels curb is installed in.

E. Install floating sub-frames between roof purlins.

F. Install back-up panels and roof curb with attached under roof panel over sealant tape.

G. Securely fasten panels and seal each fastener watertight.

H. Install cap strips over roof panel standing seams.

3.16 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Furnish metal building anchor bolts to Contractor for placement of anchor bolts in

foundation in accordance with Contractor's Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Meet and coordinate with Mechanical Roof Equipment Contractor for location, type,

size and configuration of roof curb required for installation and attachment of each roof mounted mechanical equipment item.

3. Meet and coordinate with structural steel and steel joist erector to coordinate connection requirements and scheduling for erection interface.

4. Meet and coordinate with brick or masonry veneer mason to coordinate attachment provisions required for attachment of veneer wall ties to metal wall panels.

B. Auxiliary Suspended Construction:

1. Auxiliary construction shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Suspended ceiling components b. Lighting c. Domestic water piping d. Vent piping e. Electrical conduit f. Fire Suppression Piping g. HVAC Ductwork & Equipment

2. Connection of auxiliary components to roof purlins and secondary framing is only allowed from web member of framing components. a. Connections of any kind to upper or lower flange members of framing

components are not allowed. 3. Installation details (including point loading) for auxiliary construction components shall

be reviewed and approved by Metal Building manufacturer prior to installation. a. Only acceptable installation details, approved by Metal Building manufacturer

may be use for construction. 4. See “AUXILIARY SUSPENDED CONSTRUCTION DETAILS” following this Section.


C. Site Tolerances:

1. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from level; 1/8 inch from plumb. 2. Siding and Roofing: 1/8 inch from true position.


A. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform contractor quality control inspections. 1. Inspect pre-engineered metal building system, erection, framing, wall/fascia, soffit

and roof panel types, configuration, finish, color, flashing and attachment to structure. 2. Inspect installation of insulation, type, attachment and color. 3. Inspect roof penetrations, roof jacks/boots and seals, joints and joint sealant

installation. 4. Inspect gutter and downspout installation, size, type, positive slope, attachment to

structure, finish and color. 5. Inspect downspout protection boot material, size, type, attachment to structure,

connection to downspouts, finish and color. 6. Inspect entire building envelope joints for proper installation of joint seals to provide a

complete weathertight installation. 7. Inspect roof curb installation. 8. Inspect snow retention system. 9. Document preparatory, initial and follow-up inspection in Contractor’s Test and


B. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control: Manufacturer’s Field Services. Perform the following.

1. Provide technical assistance and guidance for erection of pre-engineered metal building system.

2. Inspect erection and certify that pre-engineered metal building system has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, all wall and roof panel joints are watertight and all penetrations of metal building and metal roof system are watertight. a. Perform Preparatory, Initial and Follow-Up Inspections. b. Perform Final Inspection including manufacturer’s Weathertightness Warranty

Inspection. 1) Inspect all roof penetration seals, flashings, jacks/boots, etc 2) Inspect all roof curbs. 3) Inspect any other item installed on pre-engineered metal roof system.

c. Prepare and submit inspection reports for each inspection made to Architect.

C. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Perform the following. 1. High-Strength Bolt Inspection: Inspection of high-strength bolted Construction shall

be in accordance with latest edition of AISC Specification for Structural Joints, and as follows. a. All high-strength bolted connections shall be visually inspected. b. All bolts in every connection in primary exterior framing and braced framing

shall be checked as specified above. c. All bolted connections that fail shall be corrected and all bolts in connection

retested. d. Check calibration of impact wrenches minimum twice per day. e. Prepare and submit inspection reports for each inspection made to Architect.

D. Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services: Special Inspections.


1. Perform Special Inspections as required by the International Building Code Section 1704 - Special Inspections as indicated in Section 01 4523 - Testing and Inspection Services, if required by the Building Official. Verify with the Building Official.

E. Correct deficiencies in products and installation found not to be in compliance with Contract

Documents.

3.18 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces promptly after completion of installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Immediately remove filings produced by drilling or cutting.

B. Touch-up minor abrasions, scratches and exposed fasteners using paint furnished by

roofing panel manufacturer and matching exposed panel surface finish.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of roofing panels, wall panels, soffit panels, canopies and all other exposed areas just before Substantial Completion inspection.

END OF SECTION


PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING ERECTOR: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________


UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION ERECTOR CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Erector obtained a current copy of the manufacturer's published installation instructions for the

specific product being installed. 2. Erector reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions, requirements of

MBMA MBSM, NAIMA 202 and ASHRAE 90.1 with Project Field Superintendent before start of installation.

3. Erector furnished and installed pre-engineered metal building structure assembly in accordance with the Contract Documents.

4. Erector furnished and installed specified wall and roof insulation system in accordance with NAIMA MB 316 and the Contract Documents.

5. Erector has sealed around all penetrations of building roof system including roof curbs, mechanical, plumbing and electrical items as required for a complete 20 year Weathertightness Warranty for wall, fascia, and roof system.

6. Erector certifies that Pre-Engineered Metal Building manufacturer’s approved pre-finished insulated roof curbs were furnished and installed and that curbs meet requirements for manufacturer’s 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.




APPROVED ERECTOR for PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING CERTIFICATION

PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURER: Name: ___________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________


PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING ERECTOR: Name: ___________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________


PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURER AND ERECTOR CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Erector has attended and completed the “AISC Quality Certification Program” by Metal Building

Manufacturer. 2. Erector shall submit Copy of the certificate of completion “Certified Steel Erector CSE” to Architect. 3. Welding Personnel and/or procedures must be properly documented, qualified and/or certified must

conform to American Welding Society (AWS) procedures and workmanship requirements. Architect may request copy of certification.

4. Manufacturer and Erector certified that materials and services shall conform to Contract Documents, Specifications and Design Requirements.

5. Erector certifies that at all times erector will keep the “Certified Steel Erector-Audit Checklist” at Project Site and that list will be kept current at all times. Erector understands that Checklist may be submitted to Architect upon Architect’s request at any time.

EXECUTED AND DELIVERED this _________________ day of ______________, 20___ . ________________________________________ (Metal Building Manufacturer name) ____________________________________________ (Authorized signature) ____________________________________________ (Erector name) ____________________________________________ (Authorized signature) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ____________day of _____________, 20___. ________________________________________________ Notary Public _______________________________________________ Affix Seal My Commission expires:



METAL ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER APPROVAL OF ROOF

CURBS AND ROOF PENETRATIONS CERTIFICATION

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

METAL ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________


METAL ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Manufacturer has reviewed each roof penetration indicated and specified in Contract Documents

and certifies that each roof penetration indicated and specified in Contract Documents are metal roofing system manufacturer Approved Roof Penetrations.

2. Manufacturer has reviewed roof curbs indicated and specified in Contract Documents and certifies that the roof curbs indicated and specified in Contract Documents are metal roofing system manufacturer Approved Roof Curbs.

3. Roof penetrations indicated and specified in Contract Documents meet metal roofing system manufacturer requirements for a 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.

4. Roof curbs indicated and specified in Contract Documents meet metal roofing system manufacturer requirements for a 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.




METAL ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER

APPROVAL OF ROOF CURBS

PROJECT: ____________________________________________________

LOCATION: ___________________________________________________


OWNER: ______________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________

MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________ Telephone Number: ________________________________________

METAL ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER: Name: ___________________________________________________ Address: _________________________________________________ Telephone Number: ________________________________________

METAL ROOFING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER CERTIFIES THAT: 1. Manufacturer has received Roof Curb Shop Drawings from Mechanical Contractor. 2. Manufacturer has reviewed roof curbs indicated and detailed on Roof Curb Shop Drawings and

certifies that the roof curbs indicated and detailed on Roof Curb Shop Drawings are metal roofing system manufacturer Approved Roof Curbs.

3. Roof curbs indicated and detailed on Roof Curb Shop Drawings meet metal roofing system manufacturer requirements for a 20 year Weathertightness Warranty.




AUXILIARY SUSPENDED CONSTRUCTION DETAILS